m ] % „ C *. v* ,0 0. %r$ ^% J ■ X V %$ V % /'^% ** v \ l »w* / % : ->a V * **<& :A

L Fleet-StresC, J TO ROBERT ORME, Efq, SIR, HPHE beft Hiftorians and the greateft Poet my country has produced, have dedi- cated their talents to the fubjedl which at prefent employs yours ; and as no one is more fenfible than yourfelf of the Geo- graphical, Commercial, and Political Know- ledge, which may be derived from an ac- quaintance with their writings on Indian affairs, this work of mine can nowife be addreffed with greater propriety than to yourfelf. I am, Sir, Your moft humble fervant, i ANTHONY VIEYRA, PREFACE, AS the ufefulnefs of the Portuguefe language is Jo well knozvn to all EnglijJi merchants zvho carry on a general trade with the different Parts of the known world, it will be needlefs to life any arguments here to prove it ; and I fhall refer what I have to Jay on the copioufnefs and energy of this language, to the Preface to my Englifh and Portuguefe Diclionary. The reader wilt find in the Firfi Part of this Grammar, what is material as a foundation of the whole. At the end of the Second Part is a full explanation of the Particles, on which I have beftowed more time and labour, becauje this fubjecl has- been hitherto much 7ieglecled y although the principal ornament and elegance not only of the Portuguefe, but of every other language, chiefly confifl in the proper arrangement and judicious, interfperfion of thefe words. In the Third Part is a larger colletlion than hitherto publijhed of the terms of Trade, War, Navigation, &;c. which the prefent inter courfe between the two nations renders particularly ujejul. Having [ vi ] Having found a great difficulty in -procuring Portuguefe books in this Country, I have been commonly obliged to furnijli with -part of my private colleclion thofe Gentle- men whom I have had the honour of aj/ifting in thejludy of this language , during my refidence here ; therefore, in the Fourth Part I have given fome paffages felected from the bejl. Portuguefe Authors, and zvhich will, at the fame time, facilitate the reading of their mojl eminent Hiftorians, fuch as Goes, Barros, Pinto, &c. whofe Orthography differs confiderably from the more modern. CONTENTS. PART I. f\P the Portuguefe Alphabet, and the manner of pro- ^ nouncing eachjeparate Letter ---. Page 1 Of the manner of pronouncing the Portuguefe Letters as combined in Syllables - * Of the Articles _ . . 8 Of the Nouns n Of the Pronouns _. --.- 23 Of Verbs --- - 44 Of theParticiples -._'_ 113 Of the Adverbs --.. 114 Of the Prepofitions -. 117 Of the Conjunctions - - ... 118 Interjective Particles 120 Some Abbreviations ufedin the Portuguefe Language - 121 PART CONTENT S, P A R T II. Of the Divijion of Syntax - 122 Of the Syntax of Articles - --- 126 Of the Syntax of Nouns, and firfl, of the Subjlan- iives - - ---- 131 Of the Syntax of Adjectives 132 Vf the Syntax of the Comparatives and Superlatives - 135 Of the Syntax of Pronouns - 136 Of the Syntax of Verbs - - 139 Vf the Syntax of Participles and Gerunds - - 152 Of Prepofitions - 154 Of the Portuguefe Orthography 191 Of the Quantity of Syllables, and their Sound ■ 209 Etymology of the Portuguefe Tongue from the Latin - - 215 PART III. The most elegant Phrafes of the Portuguefe Lan~ guage .. _ 218 A Vocabulary of Words most ufed in Difcourfe - 1 Of the Portuguefe Coin - ^ A Collection of Portuguefe Proverbs „._,».__ ^g Familiar Dialogues - - Sy Letters on Mercantile Affairs, &c. ---., - 83 PART IV. Several ufeful and entertaining Paff ages, whereof the greatest Part is collected from the best Portuguefe Writers, as Andrade, Barros, &c n§ PORTUGUESE AND SPANISH LANGUAGES. Lately. Published. 1. A Dictionary of the Portuguese and English Languages, in Two Parts : Portuguese and English, and English and Portuguese : by Anthony Vieyra. In two large Volumes, 8vo. a new Edition, carefully revised and im- proved, arid the Portuguese Words properly accented, to facilitate the. Pronunciation to Learners. 2. An Abridgment of the above in a pocket volume. 3. A New Grammar of the Portuguese and English Languages. By Mr. Vieyra. Svo. New Edition, with the Portuguese Words properly accented, 7s. 66. **■ 4. Exercises upon the different Parts of Speech of the Portuguese Lan- guage, refering to Mr. Vieyra's Grammar. 12mo. 3s. 6d. 5. Grammatica Portugueza e Ingleza, a qual serve p3ra Instruir aos Porluguezes na Lingua Ingleza. 4s. 6d. boards. 8vo. 6. Historia de Gil Braz de Santilhana traduzida em Portuguez, 4 torn. 12mo. 7. Historia de Portugal, por Antonio de Moraes Silvo, natural do Rio de Janeiro, e continuada ateos nossos tempos, por Hippolyto Jose da Costa, 3 torn. 12mo. 8. Selections in Portuguese and English, for the Use of Persons learning: those languages, with the Portuguese Words properly accented. 8vo. 9. A hew Dictionary of the Spanish and English Languages, in TWy p art 5 — i. Spanish and English; .2. English and Spanish. ~ A New Edition, corrected and improved. By Joseph Baretti. 2 vols. Svo. 10. The same abridged, in a small size. 1 1 . A New Spanish Grammar : or, the Elements of the Spanish Language, By Mr. Delpino. A new Edition, improved by Delpueyo; 8vo. 7s. 12. Fernandez's New Practical Grammar of the Spanish Language; a New Edition, considerably enlarged by the Author. Svo. 6 s. 13. Exercises upon the Rules of Construction of the Spanish Language, with references to the above Grammar. By Mr. Fernandez. A New- Edition, greatly improved by the Author. 3s. 6d. 14. Las Aventuras de Gil Bias de Santillana ; Nueva Edition revisadas por el Rev. Don Felipe Fernandez. 4 vol. 12mo. 15. Don Quixote de \s Maricha, compuesta por MigUel de Cervantes Sa^vedra. Nueva Edicion por M. Fernandez. 4 torn. l2mo. 15. Novelas Nuevas, por Mr. De Florian, traducidas libremente, e ilustradas con algunas notas curiosas e instructivas, por Don Gaspar Zavala y Zamora. 12 mo. 17. Gonzalvo de Cordova, por Mr. De Florian, trad, per D. Juan Lopez de Penalvor^ 2 torn. 12me< London: Printed for F. Wingrave^ Strand. A New A NEW PORTUGUESE GRAMMAR. PART I. CHAP. I. Of the PORTUGUESE Alphabet, And the manner of pronouncing each feparate Letter. THE Portuguefe alphabet contains twenty-four letters, viz. ^« A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, L, M, N, O, P, Q,R,S,T,U,V ?X X,Y,Z. The A is expressed by a sound like that of a in the English words at, rat, fat, &c. B is expressed by a sound like that of the be, m the first syllable of the English word Betty. C is expressed by a sound like that of the first syllable of the English word celebrated, D is expressed by a sound like that of the first syllable of the English word declare. E is expressed by a sound like that which we give to the English a when we pronounce the word care. B Fis 2 PORTUGUESE F is expressed by the same sound as in English. G is expressed by a sound like that of the first syllable of the English word generation. H is expressed by a sound like that, of the Eng- lish word aghast if you cut off the two last letters st, and keep the accent on the second a. I is expressed by. the sound of our ee. J is called j consoante, i. e. the j consonant, and has the same power as the g before e or /. L, as in English. M, as in English. N, as in English. O has nearly the same sound as in the English word store. P is expressed by a sound like that of pe in the English word penny. Q is expressed by a sound like that of the Eng- lish *. R is expressed by a sound like that of the English participle erred, if you can cut off the last letter d> S, as in English. T is expressed by a sound like that of tha in the English word Thames. U is expressed by a sound like that of oo in the English w r ord poop. V is exprefsed by a sound like that of oo ; they call it also oo consodnte, i. e. the v consonant. X is expressed by a sound like that of our pro- noun personal she, if you add an s to it, or as shees. Y is expressed by a sound like that of i in the English word vifible, and is called ypsilon. Z is expressed by the sound of our English zed, leaving out the d, or zea* GRAMMAR, 3 Of the manner of pronouncing the Portuguese Letters as combined in Syllables; and first Of the Vowels. A in Portuguese is commonly pronounced like a in the following English words, adapted \ castle \ &c. It is sometimes pronounced with less strength, and closely, as in ambos, where the a is pronounced like a in the English word ambition. E. The letter e has two different sounds 5 the one open like ay in daily ; the other close, like that in the English word mellow. Examples of the former,//, faith, pi \ foot, &c. Examples of the latter, rede, a net, parede, a wall, &c. In this consists a great part of the beauty of the Portuguese pronunciation,wnich however, cannot be learnt but by a long use, not- withstanding all the rules that can be given. I. Is pronounced like ee in the English word steel, aco ; or like / in the English words still, ainda ; vi- sible, visivei. O. This vowel has two sounds; one open, as in the word do, pity, where the 6 is pronounced like our in the word store , the other close, a's in the Por- tuguese article do, of, and the word redondo, round, where the is pronounced like our u in turret or stumble. It is likewise -in the different pronuncia- tion of this vowel that consists the greatest part of the beauty of the Portuguese pronunciation ; but it can be learned only by a long use, B % - U. The PORTUGUESE U, The vowel u is pronounced like oo in English. Y. Y has the same sound as the Portuguese vowel /. Of Consonants. B Keeps always the same sound as in English. C Before a, o, u, and the consonants /, r, is pro- perly pronounced as k ; but before e and i it takes the hissing sound of s: it takes also the sound of s before a, o, u, when there is a dash under it thus $. £f I could wish the learned in Portugal would follow the resolution of the Royal Academy of Madrid, by expunging such dash, and placing the s in its stead, since they have in both languages the same hissing sound which frequent- ly occasions great confusien in the proper use of them. C before h is pronouced like ch in the English words charity, cherry, &c. Double c is. sounded only before e and /, the first with the sound of k, and the other with the hissing sound of s; as in accidente, accident, pronounce aksidente. D Is pronounced in Portuguese as in English. F Is pronounced always as in English. G Before the, vowels a, o, », and before consonants, is pronounced as in English : example, gosto, taste 3 gaiola, cage 5 grito, a cry. G before GRAMMAR. 5 G before e and / denotes the sound of j conso- nant. Gua sounds almost like our wa : example, guar da, pronounce gwdrda. Gue,gui, are pronounced as gue in the word guest, and gi in the word gift-, but in the verbs arguir and redarguir, it is to be pronounced as if it were written argueer, &c. H. The letter h is never aspirated nor pronounced at the beginnning of words, as hbra, an hour ; homem, a man : but, according to the modern orthography, all those words are written without an k. H when preceded by a c, makes a sound with it like our ch. See the letter C, and also the letters L and N. Is pronounced like our j consonant, K. The Portuguese have no such letter as k. L Is pronounced in Portuguese as in English. Lh is pronounced like g before an I'm the Italian words figlioyfoglio, &c. M Is pronounced as in English, when placed before a vowel with which it forms a syllable -, but, when it is at the end of words, and preceded by the letter e, it forms in Portuguese a nasal sound like that of the French words vin, wine ; pain, bread ; except seem, tbem, from the verbs soar, toar, and some others. M at the end of words, preceded by an a, », or i, has such a nasal obtuse sound that can only be learned from a master's mouth. B 3 N being 6 PORTUGUESE N. N being before a vowel with which it forms a syl- lable, is pronounced as in English ; otherwise, it only gives a nasal sound to the vowel that precedes it. N before h has the same sound as gn in Italian, or in the French words Espagne, Allemagne. P. P and ph are pronounced as in English. Q Is pronounced like k : example, quero, I am will- ing, pronounce kero. ^" The vowel u after q in the word qual, which, must be uttered so smoothly as to render it almost imperceptible to the ear, is pronounced as in the English word quantity, in order to distinguish it from the substantive cat, lime. R. R and double r are pronounced as in English. S. S and ss are pronounced as in English. S between two vowels is pronounced like a z ; particularly in the words ending in oso, and esa, as amor 6 so y cuidado$o > mesa> defesa, &c, T Is pronounced as in English. V Is pronounced as in English. X Is pronounced as sh in English > except in tfie word axioma, in which, according to Feyjo, the x is to be pronounced like c, X after GRAMMAR. 7 X after the vowel e is pronounced like cs, in the words extengam, extenuado, expuho, excellent e, and some other words. X between two vowels is pronounced like gz in the words exactamente, exornar ; except Alexandre, Paixam, Puxo, baxo, and some other words, that may be learnt by use. You must take care to pronounce the^so smoothly as to render it almost imperceptible to the ear. Z Is pronounced as in English, but at the end of words it is pronounced like s, as rapaz, boy ; Fran-. cez, French; perdiz, partridge; vox, voice; lux, light, &c. The tittle, or little dash, which the Portuguese call til> is set by them over some letters instead of m > as be instead of hem ; emve instead of convem ; hua instead of huma ; and as it is then to be consi- dered as an m, see what we have said about the pronunciation of that letter. They also set their til over the vowels, ao, aa, in the end of words, thus ao, aa. See what we have said above of m at the end of words preceded by an a. Of Diphthongs. The meeting of many vowels in one and the same syllable constitute what is called Diphthongs, and they are the following in the Portuguese language. Aa, as in magaa, an apple. Ae, as in caes, dog. Ay, as in pay, father. At, as in mais, more. Ao, as in pao, wood. Au, as in causa, a cause. Eo, as in ceo, heaven. Ey, as in rey, king. B a El, 8 PORTUGUESE El, as in amei, I loved. Eu, z$eu,\. lo, as v'to, he saw. Oe, as in po%M% they put; compoem, they compose; meloes, rtielons, &c. Oy, as in boy, an ox ; fby, he was. Ou, as */ as in lamprea, a lamprey, pronounce, lampre-a. la, as dementia, clemency, pronounce, clemenci-a+ Jo, as in navio, a ship, pronounce, navi-o. Iu, as viuva, a widow, pronounce, vi-uva. Oa, as Lisboa, Lisbon, proa, a poop, pronounce, hi$bb-a, &c. Oe, as /#m, j^w, from the verbs toar, and soar, pronounce to-em, &c. 0/, as rtf/w, bad, pronounce ro~im. Oo, as cooper agam, co-operation, pronounce, co- cperagao. Ui, as rw, a ruin, pronounce ru-ina. CHAP. II. Of the Articles. THOSE particles called Articles, are properly prepositions, commonly put before nouns, to shew their gender, number, and case. These articles are definite or indefinite. Of the Definite Article, The definite article marks the gender, number, and case, of the nouns which it precedes. The GRAMMAR. 9 The English tongue has but one definite article, namely the, which serves for both numbers. The Portuguese has two, viz. o for the masculine and a for the feminine. The definite article has five cases, the nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative ; because the vocative in the nouns is designed and preceded merely by the particle o. The Declension of the Masculine Article o. Singular. Plural. Nominative, o, the. Nominative, os, the. Genitive, do, of the. Genitive, dos, of the. Dative, ao, or o, to the. Dative, aos, or os, to the. Accusative, ao, or o, the. Accusative, aos, or os, the. Ablative, do, from or by the. Ablative, dos, from or by the. The Declension of the Feminine Article a. Singular. Plural. Nominative, a, the. Nominative, as, the. Genitive, da, of the. Genitive, das, of the. Dative, a, to the. Dative, as, to the. Accusative, a, the. Accusative, as, the. Ablative, da, from the. Ablative, das, from or by the. £f° Observe, that the Portuguese have an article for each gender, both in the singular and the plural. Of the Indefinite Article. The indefinite article may be put before the mas- culine as well as the feminine gender, before the plural as well as the singular number. The indefinite article has but four cases, the geni- tive, dative, accusative, and ablative. One may put de before a noun masculine as well as a feminine, as hkma corba de rey, a king's crown ; the word rey is masculine ; hum chapeo de pdiha, a hat of straw; the word palha' is of the feminine gender. The indefinite article de is also put before the plu- ral as well as the singular number: example, kuma corba 10 PORTUGUESE coroa de fibres ', a crown of .flowers; hum prdto de arroz, a plate of rice. Declension of the Indefinite Article. Genitive, de of. Accusative, a. Dative, a, to. Ablative, de, from. ($•$- The accusative of this article is not expressed in English : example, En conheci a sen pay, I knew* his father, eu conheci a sua may, I knew his mother. The indefinite article may also be put before infi- nitives, and then it signifies to ; as, he tempo defallar, de dormir, de ler, &c. it is time to speak, to sleep, to read, &c. eu von a ver, afallar, I am going to see, to speak. N. B. Whenever we meet with of and to in Eng- lish, followed by the, remember they are the indefi- nite articles, and then we must make use of the in- definite article de, or a, in Portuguese. When the verb is in the infinitive mood, and serves as nominative to the following verb, they put the article o before it ; as o come?' e o dormir sao as cousas mats necessdrias nesta vida, eating and sleeping are the greatest necessaries of life. W 7 hen the preposition in is followed by the article the or by a pronoun possessive, as in the, in my, in thy, in his, we must render it in Portuguese by em o or no, em os or nos, for the masculine ; and by em a or na, em as or nds, for the feminine : example, in the garden, em ojardim, or no jardim ; in the street, em a rua or na rua ; in thy book, em o teu, or no ten livro\ in his bed, em a iua, or na sua cam-a, &c. When after the preposition with, which in Portu- guese is expressed by com, we find the articles the, or a pronoun possessive, as with the, with my, Sec. we may say, com o or co, com a or coa, com gs or cos, comas or coas : example, with the prince, com o or co prin- cipe -, with the sword, com a or coa espdda ; with the eyes, com os or cos olhos ; with my books, com os or eos me us livros, &c. When I GRAMMAR. 11 When the preposition* with is followed by a pro- noun possessive, and this by a noun of quality or kindred, as with your majesty, with your highness, with your excellency, with his brother, &c. with must then be rendered by the Portuguese word com, as com vbssa majestade, com vbssa alteza, com seu irmao, with- out using the article.- Observe, that sometimes the dative and accusative of the indefinite article are not expressed in English, particularly before pronouns personal and proper names > example, convem a nos, it behoves us ; An- tonio matou a Pedro, Anthony killed Peter. C H A P. III. Of the Nouns. THE Portuguese nouns have various termina- tions, as will appear hereafter. They have but two genders, the masculine and feminine. The Portuguese nouns have no variation of cases, like the Latin, and the article only distinguishes the case. Of nouns ending in a ; and of their declension. Singular. Plural. Nom. a rainha, the queen. Nom. as rainkas, the queens. Gen. da rainka, of the queen, Gen. das rainkas, of the queens. Dat. a rainha, to the queen. Dat. as rainkas, to the queens. Ace. a rain/ia, the queen. Ace. as rainkas, the queens. Voc. o rainka, O queen. Voc. o rainkas. O queens. . Abl. daonpella rainka,irom Abl. da on pellas rainkas from or by the queen. or by the queens. We have already observed that the Portuguese Nouns have no variation of cases $ therefore there is no 12 PORTUGUESE no occasion to display more examples of their de- clensions, because you need but change the article according to their gender. Of the Gender of Nouns ending in a. Nouns ending in a are generally of the feminine gender ; as rosa, a. rose ; janella, a window, &c. You must except dia, a day, planeta, a planet ; and other nouns ending in a, belonging to a man ; as mariola, a porter; jesttUa^p. Jesuit : those derived from the Greek are likewise masculine ; as dogma, epigramma, clirna 5 except scientific names as mathe- matical theologia, &c. Except also from this general rule some nouns that have the accent upon the last syllable 5 at aha- ra, a charter, or a prince's letters patent ; Para, one of the captainships of the Portuguese America, &c. Observe, that the plural of nouns ending in a is formed by adding the letter s to the singular ; as likewise the plural of all nouns that terminate in vowels. Observe also, that nouns ending in aa are of the feminine gender, and form their plural as those ending in a. Of the Gender of Nouns ending in e. Nouns ending in e are generally of the masculine gender ; as dente, a tooth -, valle, a valley -, ventre, the womb, &x. The exceptions axtfe, faith ; fonte, a fountain ; chcive, a key ; tone, a tower ; dve, a fowl ; came, flesh or meat ; genie, people ; mbrte, death ; neve, snow ; noite, night ; pbnte, a bridge ; peste, plague ; parte, part ; serpente, a serpent -, lebre, a hare. Except also all names of virtues, vices, faculties, and those expressive of the passions of the mind ; as virtude, virtue ; santidade, holiness ; bondade, good- ness -, vaidade, vanity 5 ociosidade, idleness, &c. Thirdlv, GRAMMAR. IS Thirdly, iddde, age ; velhke, old age ; rusticiddde, rusticity; capacidade, capacity ; feliciddde, happi- ness ; sorte, fortune ; arte, art ; drvore, a tree ; fertilidade, fertility ; sede, thirst ; ' sebe, a hedge ; cbuve, cabbage; herddde, a farm or manor ; diamine, a chimney ; parede, a wall ; sdude> health ; rede, a net ; mare, the tide ; fibre, fever ; gale, a gallery, &c. Of the Gender of the Nouns ending in i. Nouns ending in / are masculine; as extdsi, a rapture ; nebri, a hawk, &c. Of Nouns ending in o. Nouns ending in o are of the masculine gender ; as livro, a book ; filho, a son ; brdgo, an arm ; vest 1 'do , a garment ; espelho, a looking glass, &c. Except mo-, a ship ; filho, a. fritter or pancake ; eiro, an eel. Of Nouns ending in u. All nouns ending in u are masculine ; asperu, a turkey ; grou, a crane. Of Nouns ending in y. \ Nouns ending in y are of the masculine gender ; as rey. king ; pay, father ; boy, ox, &c. except ley, a law ; may, a mother. 1 Of the other Terminations of Nouns, or of those terminating in consonants. 1. All nouns ending in al, are masculine; as sinal, a sign or token ; sal, salt. You must except cal, lime, which is feminine, and has no plural. The plural of these nouns is formed by changing the letter / of the singular into es ; as ^sindes from si- nal ; anhxdes from animal. 2. Nouns ending in ar are of the masculine gen- der ; as ar, air. The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es to the singular, as ares from ar. Some U PORTUGUESE Some nouns ending in as in the plural are femi- nine, arid have no singular ; as rnigas, exequias, &c. 3. Nouns ending in az are of the masculine gen- der ; as rapdz, a boy ; except paz, peace. The plural is formed by the addition of ez to the singular. 4. Nouns ending in el are masculine ; as annel ; a ring ; papel, paper, &c. The plural of these nouns is formed by changing the / of the singular into is; as anneis, from annel \ pap e is, from pap el. 5. Nouns ending in em are of the masculine gender 5 as hbmem, a man 5 pent em > a comb, &c. Except brdem, order ; viagem, a voyage ; virgem, ii virgin, &c. but salvagem, a sort of beast, is com- mon. The plural of these nouns is formed by changing the mof the singular into ns ; as hbmens from hbmem, &c. 6. Nouns ending in er are of the masculine genders as poder, powder $ prazer, pleasure, &C; Except cottier, a spoon; mulher, a woman. The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es to the singular, as cottier es, from cottier. 7. Nouns ending in ez are of the masculine gender \ as freguez, a parishioner or a customer ; mez, month ; arnez, levez, revez, &c. Except surdez, deafness ; torquez, vez, &c. The plural'of these nouns is formed by adding es to thq singular, asfregue'zes, from freguez ; but tez - has no plural. 8. Nouns ending in //are of the masculine gen- der ; asfuml, a funnel ; barr'tl, a barrel. The plural of these nouns is formed by changing the / of the singular into s, as funis, from funil, &c. Except aquatil, facil, penstl, &c. which change the il into els in the plural, as faceis, from facil. 9. Nouns ending in /w-are of the masculine gen- der, as espadhn, a little sword. The GRAMMAR. 15 The plural of these nouns is formed by changing the m of the singular into ns, as espadms from es- padim. 10. Nouns ending in ir or yr are of the mas- culine gender^ but martir or martyr, a martyr, is common. The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es to the singular. 1 1. All nouns, ending in iz are of the mascu- line gender ; as apprendiz an apprentice ; nariz, nose ; verniz, varnish ; matiz, a shadowing in paint- ing ; chafariz, chamar'iz, &c. Except aboiz, perdiz, raiz, cordomz, matriz t Sec. The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es to the singular, as perd/zes from perdiz. 12. Nouns ending in o/are of the masculine gen- der ; as anzbl, a hook ; sol, the sun, &c. The plural of these nouns is formed by changing the / of the singular into es, as anzoes from anzbl, &c. 13. Nouns ending in om'are of the masculine gen- der ; as som, sound ; dom, gift, &c. The plural of these nouns is formed by changing the m of the singular into ns, as sons from som, &c. 14. Nouns ending in or are of the masculine gen- der - 3 as amor, love, iembr, fear, &c. Except dor, pain ; cor, colour, &c. The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es to the singular, as ambres from amor. Nouns ending in os are of the masculine gender; as Deos,God. The plural of these nouns is formed by changing, the s into zes, as Deozes from Deos. 15. Nouns ending in oz are of the masculine gen- der ; as albernbz, a Moorish coat ; qrroz, rice ; a/goz 9 hangman, Sic. Except nbz, a walnut, vbz, voice y foz, the mouth of a river. The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es to the singular. 16. Nouns 16 PORTUGUESE 16. Nouns ending in ul or um are of the mascu- line gender ; as sul, the south ; Saul, Saul, a proper name of a man ; atum, tunny-fish. The plural of those ending in ul, according to the learned Bluteau, is formed by changing the /of the singular into es, as sues from sul, azues from azul blue, &c. Except consules from consul, a consul. The plural of those ending in um, is formed by- changing the m of the singular into ns, as atuns from atum, 17. Nouns ending in uz are of the masculine gender ; as arcabuz, an arquebuss. The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es to the singular. 18. Nouns ending in do are of the feminine gen- der ; as mdo, hand ; composicdo, composition, ora~ gdo, oration, &c. Except pdo, bread 3 anao, a dwarf; ougdo, a hand-worm; trovdo, thunder^ es- quadrdo, a squadron; pido, a child's top; borrdo, a blot with ink ; papeldo, brown paper ; c/ido, the ground, quinhao, a share. There is no certain rule for the formation of the plural of the nouns ending in a ; because' some change the do of the singular into des, as Alemdes, from Alemdo, a German ; capitaes, from eapitdo, a captain ; cads, from cad, a dog, paes, from pad, a loaf; &c. : Some change the do of the singular in- to dos ; as cidaddos, from cidaddo, a citizen ; chri- stdos, from chrisido, a christian ; cortezdos from cor- tezao, a courtier ; villdes, from villdo,z. villain, &c. Some change the do of the singular into des; as es- quadroes, from esquadrdo, a squadron ; trovdes,. from trovdo, thunder; conclusdes, from conclusdo, a con- clusion of these sheets ; oragezs, from oragdo, an ora- tion : and generally all the Portuguese nouns that may be easily made English, by changing their ter- mination gdo into the English termination Hon, as de- clinacao, declension or declination, consideragdo, con- sideration, &c. and these are of the feminine gender. 19. All GRAMMAR. n 19. All nouns signifying a male, must be of the masculine gender^ as duque, duke ; marquez, a mar- quis ; conde, count, and those denoting a female are always feminine. '' You may form two general rules from what has been said concerning the formation of the plural of nouns, viz. I. That all nouns ending in any of the vowels have their plural formed by adding the letter s to the 1 singular. If. That the plural of nouns ending in az, ez, iz, oz 3 uz> is formed by adding es to the singular. Of Augment atives. The Portuguese have their augmentatives formed by the increase of one or two syllables, which they add to the end of their nouns, and se ve either to augment the signification of nouns, or to declare a thing contemptible ; and so, from homem, a man, they form, homemzarrao, a great strong man ; tolo, a fool, toleirao, a great fool, &c. and some others that may be learnt by use. They have also their augmentatives for the femi- nine 5 2^,molher6na > a great stout woman j toleirona, &c. There are a great many nouns that appear, by their termination, to be augmentatives, though they are not ; as,forao, a ferret , atafona, an ass or a horse- mill, &c. Of Diminutives. The diminutives lessen the signification of their primitives. The diminutives in the Portuguese language are always formed by changing the last vowel of the pri- mitives into inho ; but they denote either smallness of things, or kindness and flattery $ as bichmko, a little worm, from b'icho>a. worm; coitad'mkoy hom coitado. a poor little man ; bonithiho i a little pretty C person 18 PORTUGUESE person or thing, from jfawto, pretty. Sometimes they are formed by adding zhi/io to the primitives ; as caozinho, a little dog, from cao, a dog, irmaozmhoy dear little brother, from irmao, 8rc. The diminutives that serve for the feminine have their termination in Ma, or zinka ; as maozmha, a little hand, from moo, a hand 3 cabecmha, a little head, from cabeca, a head. You may see in the last example, that the diminutives serving for the femi- nine and ending in inha, are formed by changing the last syllable a of the primitive into hiha. Observe that many nouns appear to be diminu- tives without being so , as mohiho, a. mill ; espmha, a fish-bone. Note, the diminutives in Portuguese convey some- times a bad meaning, and denote contempt. Of Nouns Adjective. All adjectives ending in make their feminine by changing into a -, as dbuta, from douto, learned ± but mao, bad, makes ma in the feminine. Those that end in ao have their feminine in aa > as, saa, from sao, healthy ; loucaa, from loucao, brisk, gay, beautiful 3 meaa, from meaa, middling, ordi- nary. Those ending in e are common to both genders ; as, forte, strong, &c. Those that end in m make their feminine by add- ing an a to the masculine 5 as, huma, from hum^ one ; alguma, from algum, some, &c. and sometimes by changing the m into a ; as, commua, from com- mum, common ; boa, from bom, good. Those that end in u make their feminine by add- ing a to the masculine, as nua, from nu, naked 9 crua, from cru, raw. Those that end in ez are common to both gen- ders -, as cortex, civil, kind ; capaz, capable, &c. ex- cept some which make the feminine, by adding a to the GRAMMAR. 19 the masculine ; as, Franceza, from Franc ez, French; Portugueza, from Portuguez, Portuguese. Espanhol, Spanish, makes Espanhbla m the fe- minine ; but generally those that end in / are com- mon to both genders; as, affavel, affable; cruel, cruel, &c. Of the Comparison of Adjectives^ The comparison of adjectives is the way of in- creasing their signification by certain degrees, which are three, viz. the positive, comparative, and super- lative. The positive lays down the natural signification of the adjective ; as, nbbre, noble ; grande, great. The comparative raises it to a higher degree, by comparing it to the positive, which in Portuguese is performed by the adverbs mais, more ; menos, less ; as, mais nobre, more noble ; menos bella, less hand- some. There are some adjectives which do not admit of mats or menos before them ; as, celeste, nacido, com- prado, desterrado, &c. There are four Portuguese comparatives which end in or : they may -also be expressed by mats, more, before their positive ; as, Mayor, greater, mais grande. Menbr, less, mats pequeno. Pebr, worse, mais rohn. Melhbr, better, mais bom. To which may be added superior, superior ; in~ feribr, inferior ; deteribr , and some others. Observe, that there can be no comparison made without the word than-, and that this word is ex- pressed in Portuguese by que. Ex. Mais claro que o sol, clearer than the sun ; mais brdnco que a neve, more white than the snow. The particle que is sometimes preceded by the word do. Ex. isto he mais do que eu Ihe d'tsse, this is more than I told him y C 2 be 20 PORTUGUESE he mais prudent e do que parece, he is more wise than it appears N. B. The comparatives superior, inferior, and some others, do not require que before the second term but the dative of the articles, viz. a, as, do, aos : Ex am p. O cutro he superior a este, the other is superior to this. When the Portuguese have a mind to heighten their comparisons, they make use of, muito mais, a great deal or much more ; as also of muito menos, a great deal, or much less. Ex. C conceber. The participles in e make ado , aime, amddo ; parle, fallado. The participles in i make ido , dormi, dor mi do ; menti, mentido. The participles in u make do: as, concu, concebido, entenduy entendido, &c. There are a great many Portuguefe words that have no manner of analogy with the French, which prevent thefe rules from being general. GRAM M A R. 25 CHAP. IfL Of Pronouns. THE pronouns are perfonal, conjunctive, mixed, pofitive, demonflrative, interrogative, relative, or improper. Of perfonal Pronouns. The pronouns perfonal are en and nos for the flrft perfon ; they ferve for the mafculine and the femi- nine. Tu and vos for the fecond; thefe ferve alfo for the mafculine and feminine. Elk for the third perfon of the mafculine gender; and elks in the plural. Ella, for the third perfon of the feminine gender, -makes in the plural ellas. The pronouns perfonal are declined with the arti- cle indefinite, d$, a, a, da. The Declension of personal Pronouns. First Person. Singular Number. Plural Number. Norn. En, I. Nom. hoj, we. Gen. de mim, of me. Gen. de nos, of us. Dat. a ?nim, to me. Dat. a nos, or no s, us. Ace. a mini, me. Ace. a nos, us. Abl. de mini, or por mini, Abl. de nos, or por no-s, from or by me. from or by us. With me 'is rendered by comigo ; and fometimes they add the pronoun mefmo to it; me is expreffed by me in the Portuguefe ; as fpeak to mz,fallai-me ; tell me, dizei~me : fend me, mandai-me ; write to me, efcrevei-me ; elk d'ljje-me, he told me, &c. With us is rendered by Portuguefe by com nofco. Us 2jS P O PvT uguese Us is rendered by nos. Examp. tell us, dizeinos ; give us, dai-nosj show us, mofirai-nos ; ?// viz. Eu 28 PORTUGUESE Eu mefmo, mvfelf. nes mefmos, ourfelves. Tu m'efmo, thyfelf. vos mefmos, yourfelves. E'lle mefmo, himfelf. elks mefmos \ i r % Ella mefma, herfelf. ellas mefmas J o komem me/mo, man himfelf; a mefma virtude, virtue itfelf. lft. Obferve, that mefmo with the article is alfo an adjective, fignifying the fame ; thus o mefmo, a mefma, os mefmos, as mefmas, the fame, relating to fome nouns expreffed or underftood. 2dly. Note, That they alfo join the adjective 6u- tro, other, to the plural of the pronouns perfonal, / and thou ; so they fay, nos cutros, we -, vos outros, you. 3dly. Comfigo may be rendered in Englifh (as we have faid above) by with him and with her; but you muft obferve, that it may be rendered alfo by with them in the plural ; and fometimes by about him, about her or about them. Exam. Elle or ella, nunc a traz dinheiro comfgo, he, or fhe, never has money about him, or about her. Of conjunctive Pronouns. The pronouns conjunctive are fo called, becaufe they always come immediately before or after the verb that governs them. The pronouns conjunctive bear a great refem- blance to the pronouns perfonal ; the pronouns per- fonal are, Eu, I; tu, thou; elk, he: nos, we; vos, ye; elks, they. There are feven pronouns conjunctive, viz. me t to me, or me : te, to thee, or thee ; fe, to himfelf, or himfelf, to herfelf, or herfelf ; Ihe to him, or him, to her, or her ; nos, to us, or us ; vos, to you, or you ; Ihes, to them, or them. Example. Ijlo me agrada, this pleafes me ; he-me neceffaric, I want. Deos te ve, God fees thee. E'lla fe leuva, ihe pmifes herfelf. En GRAMMAR. 29 E'u lhe direi, I will tell him, or I will tell her. E'u Ihes pro?netti, I promifed them : as well for the maf- culine as the feminine. The pronoun conjunctive, lhe, is always put after the verb, when it is in the imperative mood -, as dizii-lhe, tell him ; cortai-lhe as azas, cut his wings; but when the verb is in fome other mood, it may be put either before or after it ; as Hie Ihe coribu, or elle cortou-lhe a cabeca, he has cut off his head. The fame obfervation takes place in the other pronouns conjunctive. The pronoun conjunctive, fe, is fometimes fol- lowed by me, Ihe, &c. as offer ece-fe me, it is offered to me; reprefentou-fe Ihe, it w T as reprefented to him, fee. i ft. Note, that the pronouns conjunctive are very often joined to a verb, preceded or followed by the verb haver. Examp. Dar Ihe hiitantapancada, or eu Ihe hii de dar thnta pancada, que, &c. I will cudgel him fo much, that, &c. 2dly, Lhe is fometimes rendered in Englifh by you. Examp. Que lhe par ice aqitillo f What do you think of that ? ajjsnte no que lhe d/go, be perfuaded, or believe what 1 tell you. Of Pronouns mixed. There are fome pronouns in Portuguefe which are compofed of the pronouns perfonal and con- junctive, and which therefore are called mixed. To clear up this matter, you mull exprefs them : as underneath, changing the letter e of the pronoun conjunctive into o for the rnafculine, and a for the feminine ; as to fay, to me of it', inftead of me o, or me a, you muft fay, mo or ma. In the like manner* inftead of lhe o or lhe a you muft fay, Iho or lha, &c. as you may obferve in the following pronouns mixed, or rather contracted. mo r me of it, / thee of it mo, m. 3 or to J or C it or him to me. C it or him to thee. f me of it. e thee of it ?na, f. s or ta < or ' it or her to me. C it #r her to thee. mos,m, ( me of them, c thee of them 1 tnem\ l me ot them, ( ,m, ) Qr tos, m. \ , f . / . : taj, f. / ' v them to me ' t or mas, t. i , taj, t. / - . v them to me ' t them to thee. felo, m. 1 it to himfelf, to herfelf, or to themfelves. fela, f. J it to herfeif, to himfelf, or to themfelves. felo s,m. l them to himfelf, to herfelf, or to themfelves. ftlas % f. j them to herfelf, to himfelf, or to themfelves. r to him, or to her of it Iko, m. < 0r C it to him, or to her. f to him, or to her of it lha, f. < or ' it to him, to them of it, to him of them, or to her of them. Ikas, f. j to them of it, to him of them, or to her of them. nolo, m. 1 us of it, or it to us. nola, i. - / us of it, or it to us. nolos, m. p. \ them to us. nolas, f. p. J them to us. volo. m. \ c . . f , ■ r ^ y° u °* Ifc » ^ r jt °* y 013 * vo s, . p. > y Qu Q £ ^gjjj^ tfr ^gjn to y OU# Here you have fome examples. Para dar-lho, to give it to him or to her. Dai-mo, give it me. Eu to darei, I'll give it you. Entrego to, I deliver it to you. Dize-lho, you tell it him, or her. Entrega Ihos, deliver them to him, or to her. La silo baja, let that to himself. Elk nolo disse, he told us of it. Eu volos mandarei, I'll send them to you. If the verbs are in the infinitive, the pronouns mixed may be put either before or after the verbs ; as, para dizermo^ or para mo dizer, to tell me it ; but if the verbs are in the gerund, the pronouns mixed GRAMMAR. |i mixed rauft be tranfpofed ; as, dizindomo, and not mo dizendo, in telling me it. You rauft make ufe of thefe pronouns, both maf- culine and feminine, according to the gender of the thing named, sent or delivered, and not of the per- fon to whom the thing is faid, fent, given, &c. Of pojfejjive Pronouns. Pronouns pofieffive, fo called, becaufe they denote that the thing fpoken of belongs to the perfon or thing they are connected' with, are of two forts, ab- folute and relative. See the remarks hereafter. The Englifh have no article in the nominative before the pronouns pofieffive ; but the Portuguefe have, 2lS, my, o meu, ammha, fern. Plur. os mens, as ^minhas, fern. The pronouns poiTeflive in Portuguefe are the following : ' Sing, meu, m. minha, f. 1 Plur. metis, m. minhas, f. j ^* Sing, tiu, m. tua, f. ? , Plur. this, m. tuas, f. j ^* Sing;, feu, m. 1 , • -ni & /> r nis or its. Plur. Jeus, m. J in §* J > I h er or j ts Plur. Juas, i. J Sing, nojfo, m. n6Jfa % f. 1 q ^ Plur. nojfos, m. nojfas, f. 3 Sing, vbjfo, m. t/^i, f. 7 Plur. vojfos, m. vojfas, f . 3 - The pronouns pofTeflive are declined with the definite article for the rnafculine, and a for the fe- minine. Example. Singular. Nora. meu livro, my book. Gen. do meu livro, of my book.' Dat. ao meu livro, to my book. Ace, meu livro, my book. Abl. do ou pHlo meu livro, from or by my book. Plural 32 PORTUGUESE Plural. Nom. os meus livres, my books. Gen. dos meus livros, of my books. Dat. aos meus livros, to my books. Abl. dos ou pellos meus livros, from or by'my books. Decline all the other mafculines after the fame manner, and their feminines by the article a\ as my houfe ; a mmlia cafa ; of my houfe, da mtnha chfa\ &c. Note, you muft not ufe the definite article when the pronouns pofTeflive precede nouns of quality, as well as thofe of kindred, but the indefinite article de, a, &c. Example. V'ojfa mage/fade, your majefly. Be vcjfa magefiade, of your majefty, &c. Meu pay, my father. De meu pay, of my father, &c. From the above examples it appears that nouns declined by the indefinite article have no article in the nominative. Though the definite article is fometimes ufed be- fore nouns of kindred, yet we ought not to ufe it, according to the old proverb: tu vivendo bonos, fcri- bendofequare peritos. Sen is. fometimes made ufe of in room of vojjo and vojfa, in the polite way of fpeaking : fo they fay, tenho o feu livro, I have your book : fall'ii ho feu criado, 1 fpoke to your fervant ; os feus 6/lws fao for- mofos, your eyes are handfome. Remarks upon the PoJfeJ/ives. The pronouns pofTeffive abfolute always come be- fore the noun they belong to. We have exprefied them above. Pronouns GRAMMAR. 33 Pronouns pofleflive relative are fo called becaufe they, not being joined to their fubftantive, fuppofe it either exprefled before, or understood, and are related to it. They are the following : Mafc. Fern. Sing. Mete, rriinha, \ . Plur. Mtus, minhas, f mint ' Sincr. Ten, tua, \a* t»i t" ±' > thine. Plur. Tens, tuas, y , Sing. Seu, his, fua, hers. Phir. Seus, juas, theirs. Sing. Nofo, no fa, \ Plur. Nojfos, nbfas, J 0Urs ' Sine. Vb/fo, vo/fa, \ ■di a ir^rr ^rr >your&. Plur. Vofos, vofas, y To exprefs in Portuguefe it is mine, it is thirte> &c. we muft fay kemhi* he ten, &c. The pronouns pofleflive abfolate do not agree, in Portuguefe, in gender with the noun of the pofTef- for, as in Englifh, but with that of the thing pof- fefled -, as, a mat ama a feu filho, the mother loves her fon % o pai hma a fuafilha, the father loves his daughter. So you fee that the pronoun mafculine ffa, in Portuguefe, is fometimes rendered by her in Englifh, and the feminine /## by his. The fame obiervation is to be made upon the pofleflives relative, according to the gender of the noun that is underftood ; therefore they fay of a hat, (for inftance) belonging to a lady, he ofeu, it is hers ; becaufe the noun underftood, viz. chapso, hat, is of the mafculine gender. We have already faid, that feu and fua, are fome- times rendered into Englifh by your, when they are :abfolute : but you muft alfo obferve, that they are ! fometimes rendered into Englifh by yours-, when they are pronouns relative, and that in the polite Way of fpeaking ; and fo they fay, fpeaking of any thing belonging to a gentleman or lady, he o feu, or D he M PORTUGUESE he a fua, it is yours ; but if the gentleman or lady are not prefent, or it they do not fpeak directly to them, though prefent, then the pronouns/, to that, that. from that. No Neut. Norn, aquelles-,- aquella?> thofe. Gen. daquelles y daquelles y of thofe. Plural. ^Dat. a aquetles\a aquellas, to thofe. Ace. aqitelles; aquellas, thofe. L Ab J , daq u illcs^ da q uella s, from thofe You GRAMMAR. 37 You muft obferve, that there is an elifion of the vowel of the indefinite article in the genitive and ablative of the pronouns efle and ' ejfe> both in the lingular and plural ; and that they write and pro- nounce defte, deflas, &c. inflead of de efle, de eflas $ and fo in the neuter they write diffo, d'flo, inflead of de if so, de ijlo. The fame obfervation you muft make upon the pronoun aquelle, wherein you will fee an- other elifion befides, in the dative cafe. Note, That both the Portuguefe and Spaniards have demonftratives of the neuter gender ; though they do not agree with the subftantives as in Latin, becaufe they do not fay tflo homem, but efle hbmem, this man. But the word cbuja, thing, is always un- derftood, though the neuter demonftrative does not agree with it ; so that it is the fame thing to fay f/lo, or eft a cbufa, this thing ; ifso, or efia cbufa, that thing, &c. Example, zfso he or efsa he a cbufa de que nos eftamos fallando, that is the thing we are fpeaking of ; aquUlo he or aquella he a ecu/a que vos deveisfazer, that is the thing you muft do, &c. When the prepofition em 9 in, comes before the pronouns demonftrative, they make an elifion of the vowel of it, and change the confonant m into n - 9 and fo, inflead of writing and pronouncing em efle, em efla, em ijlo, em if so, em aqutllo, they write and pronounce, nefle, nefla, n/Jlo, nlfso, &.e. in this, in that, Sic. The words butro, outra, are often joined to the pronouns demonftrative, taking off the laft e ; as ejlbutro, efscutro, aquellbutro. Example ; Eft butt o hb- mem, this other man; eftbutra wolher, this other woman ; efsbutro hbmem, that other man. They alfo join very often the pronoun mefmo, the fame, to the demonftrative ; as efle mefmo hbmem, this very fame man ; aquille mefmo, that very fame thing. Aqul, alt, and la, are fometimes added to the de- monftrative, or on the noun that comes after it, iji or- p 3 der 58 PORTUGUESE der to fpecify. and particularize it dill more ; as {fit hbmem aqui, this man ; aquella molher la, that wo- man : aqui, denoting a near, or prefent object ; and M, a diftant and abfent one. The pronouns aquelle, aquella, aquelles, aquella^, when they relate to perfons, and are followed by the relative que, are rendered into Englifh by he who or he that Jhe who or that, they who or that ; as aquelle que am a a virtude he fe!iz,ht who loves virtue 'is happy ; aquelles que defprezao a ciencia nao conhecem o valor della, they who defpife learning know not the value of it. You mult obferve, that when aquelle, aquella, &c. are preceded by efte, efta, &c. then efte fignifies the laft thing or perfon fpoken of, and aquelle, &c. the fir ft ; as Carlos fo'i grande, Fredkica amhicibjo, efte valente, aquelle poderofo, Charles was great, Frederic, ambitious, the firft powerful, the laft courageous. The pronoun poflefiive abfolute his, her, their, conftrued in Englifh with a noun followed by the pronoun relative who or that before a verb, is made into Portuguefe by the genitive of the pronouns aquelle, aquella, aquelles, followed by que, and the poflefiive is left out; as, all men blame his manners who often fays that which himfelf does not think, tbdo o mundo cenjura o procedimcnto da que lie que tempor cojtume dizer o que tide tern no penjamet.it o ; Providence does not profper their labours that flight their befl friends, a Providencia nao abencoa o trabalho daquelles que defprezao os/eus melhbres am/gos. The Englilh pronoun Jitch followed by as or that (but not governed of the verb fubflantive to be), is alfo rendered into Portuguefe by aquelles que, or aquelles taes que, or aquelle que \ as, fuch as do not love virtue do not know ir, aquelles or aquelles taes que nao amao a virtude, nao a, conhhem. The pronouns tfso, fjh, aquillo, before que, are Engliihed by what ; as elle diz aqu'dlo qiiejii.be, he fays .what he knows. GRAMMAR. 39 AqueUe is alfo ufed to fhew contempt ; as que quer aquelk hbmem ? what does that man defire? Of the Pronouns interrogative. The pronouns interrogative ferve to afk queflions, and are as follows ; who, what, which, quem, que, qua/. Example. Quern h-e ? Quern vos dijfe ifo ? Que quereis ? Com quefefufienta f Que eftdisfazendo ? De quefejaz ijlo ? Que livro he ejte ? Que negocios tendes ? Que cafa he ? De qual falldis vas ? Qual delles ? Quern or qua/ dos da us? who is it ? who told you fo ? what will you have ? what does he maintain him* felf with ? i what are you doing? from what is this done ? what hook is this ? what affairs have you ? what houfe is it ? which do you fpeak of ? which of them ? which or whether of the two ? Thefe pronouns are thus declined, Singular and Plural. Masculine and Feminine. Singular and Plural. Mafculine and Feminine. Nom. ^«w, who. Gen. de quern, of whom. Dat. a quern, to whom. Ace. quern, whom. Abl. de quern, from whom. Qua/ \s ufed in fpeaking both of perfonsand things, and is declined thus : Nom. que, Gen. de que, Dat. a que, Ace. que, Abl. de que, what. of what, to what what, from what. Singular. Nom. qual, Gen. de qual, d qual, qual, de qua!, Dat. Ace. Abl. Masculine and Feminine, which or what, of which or what, to which or what, which or what, from which or what. *>4 Flwral 40 PORTUGUESE Plural. Mafculine and Feminine, Nom. quaes, which or what. Gen, de quaes, of which or what. Dat. a quaes, to which or what. Ace. qudes, which or what. Abl. de quaes, from which or what. Obferve, that when the word quer is added to quern, or qua/, it quite alters the meaning ; quemquer fignifvrng whoever, or any perfon, and qualquer any one, whether man, woman, or thing; and fonietirn.es they add the participle que to tl^em, as quemquer que, &c. Of the Pronouns relative. Pronouns relative are thofe which fhew the rela- tion, or reference, which a noun has to what follows it. They are the following ; qua/, which ; que, that or which ; cujo, whofe ; quern, who. Qua/, in a fenfe of comparifon, is followed by idh and then qual is Englifhed by as, and tal by of. N. B. When qual is only a relative, it is declined with the definite articles o or a. The pronoun que may be relative both to perfons and things, and is common to all numbers, gen- ders, and cafes ; as o Uvro que, the book which ; os Uvros que, the books which j a carta que, the let- ter which ; as cartas que, the letters which ; o meftrc que enfina, the m after who teacheth ; a mother que ienlio, the wife that I have ; o kbmem que eu amo, the man whom I love ; and it is declined thus : Singular and Plural. Nom. que, which or who, Gen. de que, of which or of whom. Dat. a que, to which or to whom. Ace. que, which or whom. Abl. de que, from which or from whom, Qut GRAMMAR. '41 Que is fometimes a conjunction ; as creyo que birei, I believe that I fhall go. See the Syntax. The relative- -quern, who, is only relative to per- fons ; but; in the nominative cafe of the lingular is rendered into Englifh by be who, or who j as, quern fhlla deve confiderar, &c. he who. f peaks ought to confider, &c. eu naofei quern, I know not who. Obferve, that quern is common to all numbers, genders, and cafes; but it has no nominative in the plural, Quern is declined thus : Singular and Plural. Nom. quem., he who, or me who, or whoever. Gen. de quern, of whom. Dat. a quern, to whom. Ace. quern, whom. Abl. de quern, from whom.. Que m is fometimes a particle disjunctive, and then It {\gmx\esfome ; as, quern canta, e quern ri, fome ling, and fome laugh ; and fometimes it ferves to excla- mation ; as quern me dera ejlar em cafa ! how fain would I be at home ! Cujo, cuja, is declined thus : Mafe. Fern. ■Nom. cujo, cuja, whofe. Gen. de cujo, de cuja, of whofe. ing.JDat. a cujo, M cuja, to whofe. I Ace. cujo, cuja, whofe. Abl. de cujo, de cuja, from whofe. The plural is formed by adding s to the Angular j aj^ cujos, cujas, whofe, &c. Note, that cujo mud be followed by the noun or term which it refers to, and with which it agrees in gender, number and cafe ; as, a pejjoa cuja reputa~ cam vos admirats, the perfon whofe reputation you wonder at ; o ceo cujo joccbrro nunc a falla, heaven, whofe afliftanee never fails ; cfja bella chra, whofe fair vifage; cujas bellezas, whofe beauties,; a cujo 42 PORTUGUESE pdi, to whofe father ; de cujos irmaos tenho reeebido, from whofe brothers I have received. Obferve alfo that cujo is not to be repeated, though the terms which it refers to be of different number; as, cuja v-alia e bbras, whofe value and deeds. Note, that o, a, os, as, lo, la, &c. are alfo pro- nouns relative, when joined to verbs. See the fyn- tax, chap. iv. Of the improper Pronouns. Thefe pronouns are called improper, becaufe indeed they are not properly pronouns, but have a great refemblance with pronouns, as well as with adjec- tives. They are the following : Hum* one. A'lguem, fomebody. Al^um, fome. Ninguem, nobody. Nenhum, pone. Cadahum, every one, each. Cadet, every. Outro, outra, other. Outre?n, another. Qualquer, any one ; whether man, or woman, or thing. Qualquer dos dous, either of the two, or whetherfoever of the two. Quemqucr, whoever, or any perfon, Todo, all, or every. Tat, fuch, &c. Hum has two terminations, viz. bum, buma; and in the plural it makes buns, and bumas. It is declin- able with the indefinite article. A'lguem has only one termination, and it is only de- clinable in the lingular with the indefinite article. A'lgum has two terminations, viz. algum, alguma ; and in the plural, alguns, algumas. It is declinable with the indefinite article. Nmgueni has only one termination, and is only declinable in the lingular with the indefinite article: ninguem o ere, nobody believes it, Nenhum GUAM MAR. 43 Nenbumhas two terminations, viz. nenhum, nenhuma t and in the plural nenhuns, nenhumas ; and is only de- clinable with the indefinite article: nenhum homem, no man ; de nenhum effeiio, of no effect. Cadahum has two terminations, viz. cadahum, ca~ dabuma; but it has no plural, and is only declinable with the indefinite article. Cdda has but one termination. It has no plural, and is only declinable with the indefinite article: cada dia, every day; cada mez, every month. Outro has two terminations, viz. cutro, outran and in the plural, oulros, outras, It is declinable both with the definite and indefinite articles. Outrem has only one termination. It has no plu- ral, and takes the indefinite article. Qualquer has but one termination. >It makes quaefquer in the plural, and is declined with the indefinite article, Qjtalquer is faid both of perfons and things. Quemquer has but one termination. It has no plural, and is declined with the indefinite article, It is rendered in Englifli by any body : quemquer vos dira, any body will tell you. Quemquer is ufed in fpeaking of a perfon. Todo has two terminations, viz. todo, toda; and in the plural, todos, iodas. It is declinable with the indefinite article. It is fometimes taken fubftan-r tively, and then it fignifies the whole ; as, o todo he mayor que a Jua parte, the whole is bigger than its part! Tal has only one termination. It makes iaes in the plural, and it is declined with the indefinite article. .It is common to the mafculine and to the feminine genders ; and fometimes it is joined to qual; as, tal qual elle be, fuch as it is. Tal fupplies fometimes the place of the perfon whofe name is not fpecified ; as, bum tal velhaco dive fer caftigado, fuch a rogue ought to be punifhed, CHAP, 44 PORTUGUESE CHAP. IV. Of Verbs. THE verb is a part of fpeech which ferves to exprefs that which is attributed to the fubjecl: in denoting the being or condition of the things and perfons fpoken of, the aclions which they do, or the imprejjions they receive. The firft and the mod general divilion of Verbs is into perfonal and irnperfonal. A verb perfonal is conjugated by three perfons. Example. (hi c,mo 9 I love. tu amas, thou loveft. he loves. ' nos a?namos, we love. Plur.^ vos amdis, ye love. Ules amao, they love. lur.< v. A verb irnperfonal is conjugated by the third per- son of the lingular number only ; as, chove, it rains, convem> it behoves. A verb, confidered in regard to the fyntax, is of four forts, viz. active, pafiive, neuter, and recipro- cal. Some of the verbs are regular, and others irre- gular. Some are alfo called auxiliary verbs. We fhall give their definitions in their proper places. Before you begin to learn the conjugations, it will be proper to obferve, that all the verbs may be , conju- G R AM M A R. 45 conjugated with the pronouns personal, eu, iu, elle, &c. or without them. Of the auxiliary Verbs. The auxiliary verbs are fo called, becaufe they help to the conjugation of other verbs. They are four in Portuguese, viz. haver, ter, to have;^r, eftar, to be. The auxiliary verb fer, to be, is alfo called the verb fubftantive, becaufe it affirms what the fubjecl is, and is always followed by a noun that particularizes what that fubject is ; as fer rico, prudente, dbulo, &c. to be rich, wife, learned, &c. The Conjugation of the auxiliary Verb ter, or haver, to have. The Indicative Mood. Prefent. ou hey, I have, ou has, thou had. ou ha, he has or hath* Cnos temos, ou havemos, ou hemos, we have. Plur.< vos tendes, ou havcis, ou hits, you have. Relies tern, ou hao. they have. Preterimperfect. 'iu finha, ou havia, ou hia, I had. Sing.^ tu tinkas, ou havids, ou hias, thou hadft. J lie ttnha, ou havia, ou hia, he had. nos tinhamos, ou haviamos,o\\ hiamos, we had, Plur.-^ vos tinhieis, ou havieis, ou hieis, you had. ///e* tinhao, ou havia o, ou /zztfc, they had, Preterperfe£l definite. f/z/ &'*;£, ou h ouve, I had. Sing,** tu tivejte, ou houvejle, thou hadft. V///* //i/^, ou houve, he had. r«(7j tivernos, ou kouvemcs, we had. Plur.*\ vos tivejles, ou kouvejles, you had. I^elles tiverao ou hoverao, they had. Prefer- fV« tenho, !ing.< /« jVtzj, o 46 PORTUGUESE Preterperfe£h 'eu tenko tido, I have had. Sin g^ tu tens tido, thou haft had. feu tenko tido •\ tu tens tido, \Jlle tern tido. he has had. fnos temos tido, we have had. PIur.< vos tendes tido, you have had. \jlles tern tido, they have had. Preterpluperfeft. r eu tinha tido, I had had. Sing. -J tu tinhas tido, thou had had. ( elk tinha tido, he had had. fnos tinhamos tido, we had had. PIur< vos tinhieis tido, you had had. X^illes tinhcTo tido, they had had. This tenfe may alfo be conjugated thus ; tivera, tiveras, ttvera, tiveramos> tivereis, tiveruo. Firft Future. feu terei, ou haverei, t mall or will have* Sing.< tu teras, ou haverds, thou (halt or wilt have< X^elle terd, ou havera, he fhall or will have. fnos teremos, on haver emos, we lhall or will have, PJur.^ vos tereis, ou havereis, ye {hall or will have. \_elles terdo, ou haverao, they fhall or will have. Second Future. Sing, eu Mi de ttr, ou haver, &c. I mufl have, &c. Third Future. Sing, eu haverei de ter, ou haver, &c. I (hall be obliged to have, &c* Fourth Future. Sing, eu havia de ter^ ou haver, &c. I was to have, &c„ Imperative. «. J tern tu, ou hdjas tu, have thou. S* \ tenha elle, ou Afl/a ///*,■ let him have, ftenhamos, ou hajamos nos, let us have. PIur.< tende, ou Aaz/Zz', zwj", have ye. \tirited, ou Atf/tffl eV/fj, let them have* The GRAMMAR. 47 The imperative has no firft perfon, becaufe it is impoflible to command one's felf. Optative and Subjundive. I join them together, becaufe their tenfes arefimihr. Prefcnt. que eu tenha, ou hajas, that I have, or that I may have, que tu tenhas, ou hdjas, thou haft, or mayeft have. que elle tenha, ou haja, he has, or may have. quenos tenhamos pwhajamos , we have, or may have. que vos tenhais, ou hajais, ye have, or may have. que elles tenhao, ou hdjao, they have, or may have, Firft Preterimperfecl. 1 Sin PJur f Sing. Plur. Sine Plui que eu tivira or tlvejfe, houvera or houvejfe, J que tu tiveras or tivejfe, houveras or houvejfes, ' que elle tivera or tivejfe, houvera or houvejfe, fque nos tiveramos or tivejfemos, houveramos or houvejfemos \ que vos tivereis or tivejfeis, I houvereis or houvejfeis, j ^ w* /// >ing Plur, that we had, tfr we mould, would, &c. have, &c. I fhould, would, or could have, &c. we mould, would, or could have,&c. Preterperfect. que eu tenha tido ou havido, que tu tenhas tido ou havido, que elle tenha tido ou havido, que nos tenhdmos tido ou havido, que vos tenhais tido ou havido, que elles tenha 9 tido ou havido, that I have had. thou haft had. he has had. we have had* you have had, they have had, Preter- 48 PORTUGUESE Preterpluperfect. It is compounded of the ftrft preterimperfecl fu&- junctive and the participle. Cfeeu tivera ou tivejfe ~\ f Slng. J f \- y-rr > thou wert. for a or fosse, ^ i i J a ■ , J a • , ■ > he were. I VI ejtivera or ejtives'sti J f que.no s f'oramos or fossemos, 1 , . - .' j ,• x ^ ,- / . >tnat we were estiveramos ox estivessemos, J Pi,,*- J foreis ox fosseis, 1 '• iiur. < J . , J . . y . >vou were, j estivereis or estivesseis, J fordo or fosse m, L estiverao or estix)essem, fordo or fossem, 1 . , . >they were, Second Preterimperfect. {euferia ox-estaria, I mould (97" would be, ferias or estarias^ thou fhouldeft be» j^r2^ or estaria, he mould be. {feriamos or estariamos, we mould be. fcrieis or estarieis, ' you fhould be. feriao or estariao-> they mould be. PreterperFect. It is compounded of the prefent conjunctive of the auxiliary verb /^r, and its own participle #'<&, or eftado. C que eu tenka sido or estddp, that I have been. Sing. < tenhas sido or eft ado, thou hall been. (^ //?z/^ j/rtV, &c. he has been. C tenhdmos sido, &c. that we have been. Plur. < tenkdis sido, &c. you have been. ^ tenhdo sido, &Cj they have been. Preterpluperfect. It is compounded of the firft preterimperfecl fub~ junctive of the verb ter t and its own participle. E 3 Sing. 54 PORTUGUESE ' fe eu tivcra or tiveffe 1 -r T i ' 1 i. sidoovejtado j»H had been. Sing. ^ Plur. «{ tivcras, &c. thou hadft been* tivera, &c. be had been. tiveramos, &c. we had been. tivereis, &c. you had been. tiverao, &c. they had been. Second Preterpluperfect. It is compounded of the second preterimperfect subjunctive of the verb ter % and its own participle s'ido or eftado. {e'u terin sido or eftado I fhould or would have been- terias, &c. thou fhouldft have been. teria, &c. he fhould have been. teriamos, &c. we fhould have been. Plur. < terieis, &c. you fhould have been. t teriao, &c. they fhould have been. { { Firft Future. 'ouando hi for or eftiver, when I. (hall be. Sing. < feres or eftiveres, thou fhalt be^-< for or eflivJr, he fhall be. formos or ejhvermos, we fhall be. Plur. \ fordes or efliverdes, you fhall be. Jbrem or ejiiverem, they fhall be. Second Future. It is compounded of the future fubjunctive of the verb ter y and its own participle* C 'quando eutiver sido or .ejiado , when I fhall have been. Sing. \ tiveres sido, &c. thou fhalt have been. ^ fiver sido, &c. he fhall have been. f ; thermos sido, &c. we fhall have been. Flur. < tiverdes sido, &c. you fhall have been. tiverem sido, &c. they fhall have been* Infinitive. PrefeRt. fir or ejli'ir ; to be. Preterperfecl:. ier sido or eftddo, to have been. Parti- Grammar, $ s Participles, fret. sidy or eft ado > bksri; Future. future-, or que ha de ser, or eftdr, future, or that is to be. Gerurids. fen do or eftdndo, beirig. tendo szdo or eftddo, having beem Supine. par d fer or eft dr t to be. Remarks upon the vetbfer and efidr. There is a corifiderable difference between these verbs, fer and eftdr > both in Portuguese and Spanifh. In Engliih there is no word to diftinguifh them, lince they are both rendered into Englifh by to be. Ser iignifies the proper and infeparabie effehce of a thing, its quality or quantity ; fer hbmem> to be a man ; fer bom> to be good ; fer alto, to be tall; fer Idrgo^ to be wide ; fer branco, to be white, &c. But eftdr denotes a place, or any adventitious quality ; as, esldr em Londres^ to be in London ; efidr defdude, to be in health ; eftdr f no, to be cold ; eftdr quente, to be warm ; eftdr dothtte, to be lick ; eftdr enfadddo t to be angry ,• eftdr allegre, to be merry, &c. Take notice, that you may use eftdr before the gerunds, but not fer; therefore you may fay, eftfa falldndo, lendo y &c. lam fpeaking, reading, foe* but not fou falldtido, &c. The three Conjugations of regular Active Verbs- A regular verb is fuch as is confined to general rules in its conjugation. E 4 A verb 56 PORTUGUESE A verb active denotes the action or impression of the subject, and governs a noun which is the object of that action or impression ; as, amdr a virtude t to love virtue ; receber cartas, to receive letters. The regular Portuguese verbs have three diffe- rent terminations in the infinitive; to wit, in ar t er> ir ; as, amar, to love ; temer, to fear ; admit tir, to admit. An eafy Method of learning to conjugate the Portuguefe Verbs, I have reduced all the tenses of the Portuguefe verbs to eight; four of which are general, and have the same terminations in all the verbs ; and the other four may be likewise made general by changing fome letters, and all the conjugations re- duced to one. The general tenfes are, the future indicative, the firft and fecond preter imperfect fubjunctive, and the firft future fubjunctive. The future indicative is terminated in all the verbs, in reiy fas, ra ; remos, rets, rod. The imperfect fubjunctive, in ra or sse, ras or sses, ra or sse ; rdmos or ssemos, reis or sse is, rad or ssem. The fecond imperfect, in ria, r/as, ria ,♦ riamos, rieis, riao. The firft future fubjunctive,. in es, mos, des, em. Note, that I have only put the termination of the fecond perfon fingular of the future fubjunctive, becaufe the firft and third of the fame number ate like their respective infinitives of the three conjuga- tions, which however keep both their lail consonant and GRAMMAR. S7 and vowel before the terminations I have marked for the fecond perfon lingular, aad for the whole » plural. As to'the future indicative, you have no- thing to do but add el to the refpective prefent infi- nitive of the three conjugations, in order to form the firft perfon lingular; and if you add to the fame infinitive prefent as y you will form the fecond perfon lingular of it, and so of all the reft, by adding to the infinitive prefent, a % emos, eis y do. The imperfect fubjunctive has two terminations for every perfon, both in the lingular and plural ; but if you cut off the laft confonant r of the infini- tive, and then add to it the terminations above- mentioned, you fhall form the .imperfect fubjunc- tive, according to its two different terminations. Laftly, if you cut off the laft confonant of the infi- nitive, and add to it the terminations above men- tioned, you will form the fecond imperfecl: iubjunc- tive. The prefent indicative of the three conjugations* is formed by changing the laft letters of the infini- tive, viz. ar y er y ir, into o ; as, 'amo y entendo, admitto % from amar, entender y admit t/r. The preterimperfect indicative is formed in the firft conjugation, by changing the laft confonant of the infinitive, viz. r, into va y vas y va, vamos, vets, vao ; but in the fecond conjugation it is formed by changing the termination er of the infinitive into ia % ias y ia y tamos , zeis y iao ; and in the third by changing the laft confonant r of the infinitive into, a y as y a.; amos y eis y do. The' perfect definite in the firft conjugation is formed by changing the terminaion ar of the infini- tive into ei y afte y 6n y dmos, aftes y ardo ; and in. the second conjugation, it is formed by changing the termination er of the infinitive into /', efte, eo y emu, eftes y erdo. In the third conjugation, the fame tenfe is 5& PORTUGUESE is formed by changing the termination ir of the in- finitive into /, ijle, h y imos, ifles, irao. The prefent fubjunctive in the firft conjugation is formed by changing the termination ar of the infinitive into e, es, e, emos, eis y em ; and in the second conjugation, it is formed by changing the termination er of the infinitive into a, as, a, amos % his, ao. In the third conjugation, the same tenfe is formed by changing the termination ir of the infU nitive into the fame terminations, a, as, a, &c. As to the imperative mood, you may only ob- serve, that the second person lingular is always the fame as the third person lingular of the present indi- cative, in all the conjugations. The participles of the preterperfect tense in the firfl conjugation are formed by changing the laft consonant r of the infinitive into do for the mascu- line, and da for the feminine ; and into dos, das, for the plural; but when you come to verbs of the second conjugation, you change the termination r of the infinitive into ido, ida s &c. In the third conjugation, you mud change the laft consonant r of the infinitive into do for the mascu- line, da for the feminiae, &c. The firfl Conjugation of the verbs in ar. The Indicative Mood. I fhali put the pronouns personal, eu, tu, elle, Sec no more. Prefent. dmo, I love. amas. thou love ft ama, he loves. dmamos, we love. amais. ye love amao, they love. Ureter- GRAMMAR. 59 Preterimperfect. dmdva, I did love. amdvas t thou didft love amdva. he did love. amavamos, we did love. amaveis, you did love. amavae, they did love- Preterperfe£l definite. amti, I loved. amdlie, thou lovedfL amozi, he loved. amamos, we loved. amdfles, you loved. amarac* they loved. Preterperfect. This tense is compofed of the participle amado, and the present indicative auxiliary verb ter a tenho amado, I have loved. tens amado, thou haft loved. tern amado, he has loved. temos amado, we have loved. tendes amado, you have loved. • tern amado, they have loved. Preterpluperfect. This tense is composed of the particle amado * and the imperfect of the auxiliary verb ter. N. B. This tenfe may be conjugated thus, amara^ amdras, amdra, amaramos> amdreis y amdrdo ; or, tinha amado, I had loved. tinhas amado, thou hadft loved. tinha atria do, he had loved. tinhamos amado, we had loved. tinheis amado, you had loved. tinha amado, they had loved. Future. amarei, I (hall or will love. ,a?naras, thou fhalt love. amard, he (hall love. ama* me eu ame, dmes, ameis, a mem, 60 PORTUGUESE amaremoSy we fhall love. amareis, you (hall love. amarao, they (hall love. Imperative, dma tu, love thou, dme Me, let him love. amemos no's, let us love. amai vos, love you. ^flzm elles, let them love. Optative and Subjunctive. that I may love. thou mayeft love. ame, he may love. amemos, we may love. you may love. they may .love. Firft Preterimperfect. que eu amara or amasse, that I might or could love. amdras, or amasses, they mighteft. love. amdra, or amasse, he, might love. amaramos, or amdssernos, we might love. amdreis or amasseis, you might love. amarao or amassem, they might love. When we find the conjunction j^ before the in- dicative imperfect, we muft use the imperfect of the subjunctive or optative, when we speak by way of wi(h or defire ; as, If I did love, Je eu amaffe t or amara y and not Je eu amdva i if I had loved ; if I had, Je eu tivera i tiveffe, and not fe eu tinha ; and so in all the verbs. Second Preterimperfect. amaria, I mould love. amarias, thou fhouldft love, amaria, he mould love. amariamost we mould love. amarieis, you fhould love. amariao, they fhould love. Preter- G R AM MAR. 61 Preterperfect. It is compofed of the participle amado arid the prefent fubjunctive of the auxiliary verb ter. , que eu ienha amado, that I have loved, tenhas amado, thou haft loved. \iehha amado, he has loved. tenhamos amado, we have ioved. tenkdis aniado, you have loved. tenhUodmddo , they have loved. Preterpluperfect. It is compofed of the participle amado and the firfi preterimperfecl: fubjundtive of the auxiliary verb ter. • Jeeu tivera of tivsfse. amado, , if I had, loved. liver as or tivefses amado, thou hadft loved. tivera or tivefse amado, . he had loved. tiverdmds or tivefsemos amado, we had loved. -tiyereis or tivefseis amado, ' you had loved. tiverao or tivefsem amado, they had loved. Second Preterpluperfecl:. It is compofed of the participle amado and the second preterimperfecl: fubjunclive of the auxiliary verb ter. teria amado, I fhould have loved. terias amado, thou fhouldft have loved. teria amado, he fhould have loved. teriamos amado, we fhould have loved. ierieis amado, ye fhould have loved. teriao amado, they fhould have loved. Future. quando euamar, when I fhall love. amdres, thou {halt love. amdr, he fhall love. amdrmos, we fhall love. amdrdes, you fhall love. amdrem they fhall love. Second 62 PORTUGUESE Second Future. It is compofed df the participle amado, and the future fubjunctiveof the auxiliary verb ter. quando eu liver amado, when I {hall have loved. tiveres amado, thou (halt have loved. tiver amado, he lhall have loved. tivermos amado, we fhall have loved. tiverdes amado, you (hall have loved. tiverem amado, they fhall have loved. Infinitive. .Prefent. am'ar, to love. Preterperfect. ter amado, to have loved. Participle. Prefent. que ama, or am'ante, that loves. Pret. amado, masc. amado, fem. loved. Future. que ha de amar, that is to love. Gerunds. amkndo, loving. i'endo amado, having loved. Supine. para amar ', to love. Note, the verbs terminating in the infinitive in tar take qu in those tenses, where the c would other- wise meet with the vowel e } and those terminating in the infinitive in gar take an // in those tenses, -where the£ would otherwise meet with the same voweL e ; that is to say, in the.firft person lingular of the preterperfect definite, in the third person Angular. G R A MM A R. 63 lingular, in the firft and third plural of the impera- tive, and in the whole prefent lubjundtive, which are the tenfes I fhali give you by way of example in the verbs pecchr and pagdr. Pec car, to fin. Preterperfe£l definite. eu pequei, I sinned — instead of peccti. Imperative. ptque elle, let him sin : pequemos nos, let us sin ; pequem elks, let them sin — and not pecce tile, &c- Prefent fubjun&ive. que eu peque, tu peques, that I may sin— - and not que eu pecce, pecces, 8cc. Pagdr, to pay. Preterperfect definite. paguei, I paid. Imperative. pague tile, paguemos nos, pdguem elles, let him pay, &c. Prefent fubju'netive. qut eu pdgue, pagues, pague, paguemos, pagueis, paguem, that I may pay, &c. — and not page, pages, &c. The other tenfes are conjugated like amar* ■ Regular verbs in ar. Abajar, to claoke, vendido, J if I had fold, &c. Second Preterpluperfect. eu teria terias teria teriamos terieis teriao vendido , mould have fold, &c. Future. GRAMMAR. 67 Future. quando eu vender, when I fhall fell, &c. vender es, vender, vendermos, venderdes, vcnderem, Second Future. quando eu tiver tiveres tiver I ,,, \ when I fhall have foldj tiver mo s f ' ' \ &c, tiverdes tiverem , Infinitive Mood. Prefent. vender, to fell. Preterperfect. ter vendido, to have fold. Participle. Prefent. que vende, that fell, that fells. Preterit. vendt-do, mafc. vendidd, fem. Plur. vendidos, vendidas, fold. Future. que ha de vender, that is to fell. Gerund. vendendo, felling. tendo vendido, having fold. Supine. para vender^ to fell. After the fame manner as the verb vender •, are I conjugated all the other regular verbs of the fecond ! conjugation ending in er ; as the following ; F 2 . Acometer, 68 P O RT U G U E S E Acomtter, to attack. Efconder, to hide. Beber, to drink. Emp render, to undertake. Comer, to eat. Meter, to put in. Comprehender, to perceive, to do or make. Indicative. Prefent. fago, I do. fazemos, we do. fazes, thou doft. faziis, you do. faz\ he does. fazem, they do. Imperfect. fazia, I did or did make, &c. fazz'amos. fazias, fazieis. fazia, faziao. Preterperfect definite. ' fiz, I made, &c. fzemos. fzefle, fz'efhs. fez, fzerao. Preterperfect. tenho feiio, I have done, &c, tensfeito, &c. Preterpluperfect. tinkafeito, I had done, &c. tmhasftito, &c. Future. farei, I (hall do, &c. (according to the regular verb.) faras, &c. Imperative. fagamos nos, let us do. faze tu, do thou. fazei vos, do you. faga (lie, let him do. fdgaoelles, let them do. Optative, - ■> — rs« 74 PORTUGUESE Optative. Prefent. qut/eu faqa, that I may do, &c. (according to the re- fagas, gular verbs. jag a, &c. Preterimperfect. que eujizera or jizefse, that I might do, &e. Jizeras or fizefses, Jizera or fizijfe^ jizerames or Jizejf ernes > Jizereis ovfizeJfeis i jizerao or fizz/sera. Second Imperfect. farm, I mould do, &c. fariamos* f arias. farieis. Jaria i Jariao. Future. quando eufizer,- when I (hall do, &c. jizeres, jfizer, fizermos, Jizerdes t Jizerem, Second Future. quando eu iivcrfeito, when I (hall have done. tiveresfeito, &c. - Infinitive. fazer, to do. Gerunds. jazendo, doing or in doing, Participle. feito, made or done. After the fame manner are conjugated desfazer, to undo / contrafazer> to counterfeit ; refazev, to make again. , Poder, GRAMMAR. 75 Poder, to be able. Indicative. Preterit. p'ofso, I can or am able. podetnos, we can. podes, thou canft. podeis, you can. pode, he can. podem, they can. Imperfect. podia, I could or was able, &c. podias, &c. Preterperfecl definite. j^<&, I could. pude?nos, we could. pudefte, thou couldft. pudejtes, you could. />«dfe, he could,, puderao, they could. Preterpcrfeft. ^?ft^0 podido, &c. I have been able, &c. Future. poderh', I (hall be able, &c. poderas, &c. There is no Imperative. Optative and Subjunctive. Prefent. que iu pofsa, that I may be able. pofsas, thou mayeft be able, &c* pofsa, pofsamos, po/sdis, p'ofsao, Imperfect. que eu pudera, or pudefse, that I might be able. puderas or pudejses, thou mightft be able, &c. pudera or *pudefse, puderamos or pudefsemos, pudereis or pudefsds, puderao or pudefsem, Second 76 PORTUGUESE poderia, poderias, &c. Second Imperfect. I fhould be able, &c. Future, quando eu puder; ' when I fhall be able, &c, puder es, puder, puder mos, puderdes, ■puder em, Infinitive. Prefent. poder, to be able. Gerunds. podendo, being able. Participle. pudido, been able. fabes, Jabe, Saber> to know. Indicative. Prefent. I know. Jabe mos, thou knoweft. Jabeis, he knows. Jab em, Imperfect. we know, you know, they know. Jabia, I did know. fabias, thou didft know, &c. Jabia, Sec. Preterperfect definite. Jcube, I knew, &c. Joubemos, Joubijie, Joubejies. Joube, Jouberao, Preterperfect. tenhojabido, I have known, Sec. Future, GRAMMA R. 77 Future. fakerei, I fhall or will know, &c. (according to the Jaberas y &c. regular verbs.) Imperative. faibamos nos, let us know. y^tf tu> know thou. Jabei vos t know you. J'aiba elle, let him know. J'aibao elies, let them know. Optative and Subjunctive. Prefent. que eu faiba, I may -know. faibas, thou mayft know, &c. faiba^ Jaibamos, Jaibais, Jaibao, Imperfect. que eu foubera or foubefse, that I might know, Sec. foubcras or foubefses, foubera orfoubefse, fouberamos or foubefsemos, foubereis or foubefseis, fouberao oxjoube/sem. Second Imperfect. faberia, I mould know, &c. faberiamos. faberias, Jaberieis. faberia, faberiao. Future. qudndo eufouber, when I (hall know, &c, JbubereS) fouber, foubermos, fouberdes, fouberem, Infinitive. Prefent. fiber, to know. Gerund. fabendo, knowing. Participle, 78 PORTUGUESE Participle. fabido (for the mafc.) fabida (for the feminine,) known. Of the irregular Verb trazer, to bring. Indicative. Prefent. trago, I bring. trazemos, we bring, Sec. trazeSy thou bringeft. trazeis, trdz, he brings, trazem, Imperfect. trazia, I did bring. trazias, &c. thou didft bring, &c. (according to the regulars.) Preterperfect definite. trouxe, I brought. trouxemos. trouxeje, thou broughteft, &c, trouxeftes, toouxci trouxcrao. Preterperfect. tenho trazido, I have brought, &c. tens traztdo, &c. Future. travel, I fliall or will bring, &c. traremos. traras, trareis, trard, irarah Imperative. tragcimos- n'os, let us bring. trazetu, bring thou. . trazavbs, - bring you. trdga elle, let him bring. trdgao elles, let them bring. Optative and Subjunctive. t Prefent. que eu trdga,/ that I may bring, &c. tragqs, trafa tragd?nos, tra'gais, tragao, P Imperfect, GRAMMAR. 79 Imperfect. que eu trouxera or trouxejfe, that I might bring, &c. trouxeras or trouxeffes, trouxera or trouxejfe , trouxeramos or trouxejfemos, , trouxereis or trouxejfeis, trouxerao or troux£jfem> Second Imperfect. eu traria, I mould bring, &c. ■ trariamos. tr arias > trarieis. traria % trariao. Future. qiiuiido eu trouxer, when I mall bring, &c. trouxeres, trouxer, trouxe'rmoSy trouxer des ', trouxerem, Infinitive. Prefent. trazer, to bring. Gerund. trazendo, bringing. Participle. trazido, mafc. trazida, fern, brought. The conjugation of the Irregular Verb ver, to fee* Indicative. Prefent. vejo, I fee, vemos. Ves, thou feeft, vedes. tu eleges, &c. I ele&, &c. Imperfect. Preter-def. elegia, &c. chgi, elegefte, &c. I elected, £3c. The verbs ending in eyo in the prefent indica- tive, change that termination into ia in the imper- fect, and into i in the preter-definite, and are fo con- jugated. Indicative. Prefent. eu leyo, I read, &c. lemos* les t ledes. l g i km. Imperfect. eu lia, I did read, &c. lias, &c. Prefer- GRAMMAR. 87 Preter definite. iu li, I read, &c. lejle, &c. Imperative. leamos nos 9 let us read. le tu, read thou. ledeves, read you. lea elle, let him read, leaoelks, * let them read. Subjunctive. que tu lea, that I may read, &c. leas, lea, &c. You may obferve that they lofe the y through all the other moods and tenfes. The verb crer, to be- lieve, is conjugated in the fame manner. Oj the irregular Verbs in ir. Ir, to go. Indicative Mood. Prefent tenfe. vou, I go. vamos, we go. vas, thou goeft. ides, you go. vai 9 he goes. vao, they go. Preterimperfefh Ma, I did go, &c. hiamos, Mas, hieis. Ma, hiao, Preterperfec"l definite, Jui, I went, fomos, we went. fojte, thou wentcft. fojtes, you went. Joi, he went, jorao, they went, I Preterperfeft. G 4 Preter- 88 PORTUGUESE ; Preterpluperfeft, thha, f u \ Ihadgonej &c. Future. irei, I {hall or will go, &c. iras, &c. Imperative. vamos nos, let us go. vai tu, go thou idt vos, go ye. vd elle, let him go, vdo files, let them go. Optative and Subjunctive. que eu va, that I may go, &c. vds, va, vamos, vades, vao, Firft Pretenmperfe£t. que eufora oxfojfe, that I might go, &c. foras oi'Jofses, Jora ovfo/se, Joramos or fofsemos, foreis or fofseis, fordo or Jofsem, - 1 Second Preterimperfe£t. iria, I fliould go, &c. irias, &c. Preterperfecl. It is compofed of the participle ido and the pre- fent fubjunciive of the auxiliary verb ter. Preterpluperfe£t. It is compofed of the participle ido and the firft preterimperfecl: fubjunciive of the auxiliary verb ter. Second GRAMMAR. 89 Second Preterpluperfe£t. It is compofed of the participle ido and the fecond preterimperfect fubjuhciive of the auxiliary verb ter. Future. qudndo eufor, when I fnall go, &c. fores, form os 9 Jordes, fortm, Second Future. quandoiu tiv'er f " "> when t ft allhave tiveras,8tc. \f. &c. " Infinitive. Prefent. - . * ir, to go. Gerunds. 2W0, . going, Part. ido, done. r*r, to come. Indicative. Prefent. xi'enho, I come, &c. vimos, vtns, i . vindes, Imperfect; i/wzAa, I did come, &c. vinkamos. vinhas, vinheis. vinha, vmhao. Preter definite. vim, I came, &c. viemos. ™jte,> viefles. v* 9 * visrao. Preter- go PORTUGUESE Preterper feci:. tenho vrndo, I have come, Sec. tens vindo, &c. Future. virei, I (hall come, Sec. virds, Sec. Imperative. venhamos nos, let us come. vem tu, come thou. vinde vos, come you. vinha elk) let him come. venhao elles t let them come. Optative. Prefent. que eu venha. Imperfe£l. que eu viera, or viefse. Second Imperfect. viria, virias, Sec. Infinitive. Prefent. vir, to come. Gerund. vindo, coming. Part. vindo, come. The compounds of vir; as convir y to be conve- nient; fobrevir % to come unlooked for, are con- jugated in the fame manner. Of the irregular Verhs> mentir, to lie> sentir, to feel; servir, toferve; ferir, to wound. Thefe verbs change the i of the firft person lin- gular of the present tense, indicative, into e in the . other GRAMMAR. 9 1 other perfons of the same tense, as well as in the other tenses and moods, except in the imperative and the prefent conjunctive, in which they are conju- gated thus ; Indicative. Prefent. eu minto, tu mentes, elk inente, &c. eujinto , tufentes, elle fente, &c. eufirvo, tuferves, ellejcrve, &c. Imperative. mente tu,minta elle, mintamos nos, menti vos, mintao elks, fente tu, Jinta elle, fintamos ncs, fenti vos, fintao tiles, fervc tu, firva elle, firvamos nos, fervi vos, firvao elks.. Subjunctive. minta, mzntas, &c. Jinta, fintas, &c. firva, firvas, &c. The compounds, desmentir y ajfentir, confentfr, dif- fentir, prefent ir y are conjugated like mentir and fen- tir ; and also the verbs afferlr, refer'/r, conferir\ de- fer/^ dijferir, inferir. Of the irregular Verbs affligir, to afflift ; corrigir, to correcl, flngir, to' feign \ ungir, to^ ahoint; com- pungir, frigir, dirigir, tingir, cingir, &c. These verbs change the g of the infinitive mood into j in thofe tenfes where the g would otherwife meet with the vowels o, as in the firft perfon lingu- lar of the present indicative ajjlijo ; or a y as in the third perfon of the imperative in both numbers, in the firft plural of the same tenfe, and in the prefent Siibjunclive. Of the irregular Verb feguir, to follow. This verb changes the e of the infinitive mood into / in the firft person lingular of the present indi- cative. 92 PORTUGUESE cative, eu figv y I follow : in the present subjunctive* que eufiga, that I may follow : and in the imperative, where it is conjugated thus : fegue tu, figa elle, figa- mos nos,fegui vos/f/gcio elles. Take notice that the u is lost in those tenses where it would otherwife meet with the vowels o and a, as you fee in the examples; and this obfervation alfo takes place in the verbs difiitiguir, to diftinguifn; extinguir, to extinguifh, &c. The compounds are perfeguir, to persecute; con- feguir, to obtain ; profegu/r, to pursue. Of the irregular Verb ouvir, to hear. " This verb changes the v of the infinitive mood into c in the firff person lingular of the present in- dicative, eu ouco, 1 hear, tit buves, &c. in the pre- sent subjunctive, and in the imperative mood, where it is conjugated thus: buve tu, ouca elle, oucames nos, ouvivos, bucao elles, hear thou, &c. Of the irregular Verb dor mi r, icfieep. This verb changes the o of the infinitive mood into u in the firft person lingular of the present indicative, thus : eu durmo, tu dormes, elle dorme, &c. I fleep, &c. In the present subjunctive, que eu dlirma, &c. that I may fleep ; and in the impe- rative mood, where it is conjugated thus; dbrme tu, durma elle, durmamos nbs, dormi vos, dkrmao elles, fleep thou, &c. Of the irregular Verb fugir, to fly away. This verb is irregular in the present indicative, and is thus conjugated : fujo, foges, fbge, fugimos, fugis,fbgem, I run away, &V. It is also irregular in the imperative mood, where it is conjugated thus : foge tu, fuja elle, fujamos nos, fugi vos, f'tjao elles. Finally, it is irregular in the present subjunc- tive; que eufujayfujas, &c. It G R A M M A R. 93 It keeps the u in all other tenfes and moods, as also the g. The verb furglr, to arrive, or to come to an an- chor, has the fame irregularity, and makes fufto, in the participle paflive. The verbs fubir t cubrir, encubrir, defcubrir, acu- d/r, bullir i futriir i . confumir y cu/pir, con/iru/r, tuff'iv\ &c. have the same irregularity in regard to the let- ter //. Of the irregular Verb pedir, to afk. This verb is irregular in the firft perfon fingular of the prefent indicative and fubjunclive, as well as in the imperative, in which it changes the d into c. Indicative. tupdfo,. I afk, &c. nos pedimos. tu pedes, vos pedis, elle pede, elles pedem. Imperative. pegdmos nos, let us afk. pede tu, afk thou. pedi vos, afk you. ' pefa elle, let him .afk. peg ao elles, let them afk. Subjunctive. que eupega, that I may afk, &c. pegamos. pegas, pegdis. pega, pegao. • In likemanner is conjugated the verb medir, to meafure : eu meco, tu ittedes % &c. Of the irregular Verb veftir, to drefs. Indicative. Prefent. - hi vijlo, I drefs, &c. vejlimos. ve/tes, . veftis. vejie, • vejlem. 4 Imperative. U PORTUGUESE Imperative. vijiamos nos t let us drefs. vejletu, drefs thou. ve]livos\ drefs you. vi/ta elk, let him drefs. viftao elles, let them drefs. Subjunctive. Prefent. que hi vifla, that I may drefs, &c. vifiamos. vijias % vijisis. vijiuy v/tao. In all other tenses and moods it keeps the let- ter e\ and in like manner is conjugated the verb defpir. Of the irregular Verb sortir, to furnijb, ox flock. Feyjo says, that the oof this verb is to be changed into a, in those tenses where the / is followed by e or a, and that it is to be kept, when the / is followed by i ; but in the Fdbula dos planetas we read, Jurt'io eff'jyio, it took effect : and in Andrade 2 part. Apohget. we read, nao foritrao effeyio, where the verb forurtio is in the same tense, viz. in the preterperfect defi- nite; therefore nothing can be determined about the irregularity of this verb. Of the irregular Verb carpir, to weep. This verb is defective, and is only used in those tenses and persons where the/) is followed by i ; as carpimos, carp's, we weep, you weep. Preterimper- fect, carpia, carpias, &c. I did weep, &c. Of {he irregular Verb parir, to bring forth young as any female doth. Indicative Mood. Prefent. eu pairo, I bring forth, &c. parimos. pares, parts, pare, par em. Imperfect. ; paria, &c. Imperative, GRAMMAR, 95 Imoerative Mood. i pairamos. pare tu, bring thou forth, &c. pari, paira tila, pairao. Subjunctive. Prefenh que eu pair a, that I may fay, &c. pairamos. pair as i pairdis. pair a, pairao. Of the irregular Verh repetir, to repeat. Indicative. Prefent. repito, I repeat, Sec. repetimos. repetes, repetis. repete, repetem. Imperfeft. repetia^repetias, &c, Preterperfeft definite. repeti, repetife, &c. Imperative. repete tu, repeat thou, &c. repitamos, &c. repita elk, Subjunctive. Prefent. jue eu repita, that I may repeat, Sec. repitas, &c. Imperfecl. repetira, or repetifse, that I might repeat. Of the irregular Verbs sahir, to go out, and cahir, to fall. Indicative. Prefent. fayo, I go out, 8cc fahimos. Jakes, fahis. fake, fa hem. Preterimperfecl. , fakia,fahias, &c. Preter- 96 PORTUGUESE Preterperfeft definite. JahUjahiJte* &c. Imperative. fahdmos nos. faht iu, fahivos. fdya et/e, fayao elks. Subjunctive. que tufty a, fay as, Sec. This is the common way of writing the irregular tenses of the verb fahir as well as those of the verb cahir, viz. eu cciyo, tn cahes, &c. I fall, &r. according to Feyjo. Of the irregular Verb, ordir, to warp in a loom. Feyft say? that this verb changes the o into //, in those persons where it would otherwise meet with the syllables da, de, do. Of the irregular Verb advertir, to warn. Advertir is irregular in the following tenses, only by changing vir into ver. Indicative. Prefent, advirto, I warn, See. adverthnos. advertes, advertis. advirte, advertem. Imperative. advirtchnos nos. adverte tu, warn thou, &c* advertz vos. advirta elle, advirtao dies, . Subjunctive. . Prefent. que eu advirta, that I may warn, &c. advirtdmos. advirtas, advirtais. advirta, advirtao. The GRAMMAR. 97 The Conjugation vf the irregular Kerb por, to place* Indicative* Prefent. ponko, I put, &c. pernios* poens, pondes. poem, poem. Preterimperfe£h punka, 1 did put. punhamos* punkas, punkas, punka, punhao. Preterperfeft definite* puz, I put, &c. puzemos. puzejic, puzejies. poz, puzerao* Preteroerfeft. It is compofed of the prefent indicative of the auxiliary verb ter, and the participle pojto. Preterpluperfeft. |; It is compofed of the participle pofto, and the Imperfe6t of the auxiliary Verb ter. i Future. porei, I lhall or will put, &e. poremosk poras, poreis. pora, pordo. Imperative. ponhamos nos. poem, put thou, &c. ponde vos. ponha elle, ponkao elles. Optative and Subjun&ive, Prefent. que eu ponha, that I may put, &c. ponhas, &c. Firft Preterimperfect. que eupuzera or puzejje, that I might put, &c. puzeras or puzejfes, &c. H Second 98 P*G RTUGUESE Second Preterimperfect. tu porta, I fliould put, &c. porias, &c. Preterperfect. It is compofed of the participle pofto, and the prefent fubjunStive of the auxiliary verb ter. Preterpluperfect. It is eompofed of the participle pofio, and the flrft preterimperfeft fubjunclive of the auxiliary verb ter. Secon* Preterpluperfect. It is compofed of the participle pofio, and the fecond preterimperfeft fubjUiiQive of the auxiliary verb ter. futuie- qu'ando eu pufer, when I fhall put, £c. pujeres, &c. Second Future. It is compofed of the participle posto, and the fu- ture fubjunclive of the auxiliary verb ter. Infinitive. Prefent. per, to put. Gerund. pondoj puttings Participle paflive. pofto, put. After the lame manner are conjugated the verba derived from por ; as cbmpor, to cbmpofe y dispdr y to difpofe ; propor, to propofe, &c. Some verbs are irregular only in the participle paflive 3 as aberto, from abr'ir $ esmto, from ejere- ver, &c. Of Verbs . Neuter '. Verbs neuter are thofe which make a complete fenfe.of themfelves, and do not govern any cafe af- ' - - tetf GRAMMA fo * 99 ter them, like the verbs active ; as dormtr, to fleep ; andhr', to go ; iremer, to tremble, &c. But you muft take notice that we meet with ibme verbs neu- ter which may govern an accufative ; as dormir hum Jbno prof undo, to fleep foundly ; eu ful andando meiu cammho, e nao d'fse huma palavra, I went my -way, and faid not a word. We may alfo fay, that the verbs neuter are rhose which, in their compound tenfes, are feldom or never conjugated with the verb sir, to be ; as, I fleep, I tremble, I fpeak, &c. We may indeed fay, eu tenho dormido, I have flept ; M tenho tremido, I have trembled ; but not, I am flept, &c. I faid feldom, becaufe fometimes the verbs neuter' may be conjugated with the verb ser ; as, fer bem fal/ddo, to have a good name. It is neceflary to be acquainted with the nature of a verb neuter, to avoid miflakes in the partici- ple, as may be feen in the Syntax of Participles. Of Reciprocal Verbs. The name of Reciprocal Verbs is given to fuch as return the action upon the agent, and are conju- gated through all their tenfes with the pronouns tonjunftive me, te, se, &c. Example. Indicative. Prefent. cu me arrepindo, I repent, &c tu te arrtpendesy ellefe arrepende, &c. Imperfe£h eu me arrepehdia, I did repent, &c» and fo of the reft. Yet we are to take notice that the pronouns con= junctive me, te, &c. may be placed either before or after the Verb, in the indicative, and confequent- Jy we may fay, eu me lembro, or en lembro me, I re- H 2 member $ 100 PORTUGUESE member ; me lembrei, or lembrei-me, I remembered* Sec. But in the imperative they ought to be placed after the verb, as in the following t> Example. kmhremo-nos noS. lemhra-it iu, remember thou, 8cc. lembrauvos vos. Umbre-fe elle x I embroil fe elks. In which example you muft obferve alfo, that the firft perfon plural, which in the other verbs is like the firft perfon plural of the prefent subjunctive, has the laft confonant, s, cut off -, and so from lembremo's we cut off the s to make lembremo-nos ; and from arrependamos w r e make arrependdmo-nos, &c. In re- gard to the infinitive, we may fay, he necefsario ar- repender-fe dos pecchdos, it is neceflary to repent fins; he necefsario lembrkr-fe, it is neceflary to remember; and not fe arrepender, or se lembrar. In like man- ner w r e may fav lembrando-mejemembeYmg, and not ?ne lembrando. Yet you mull: take notice that the prefent infinitive may be preceded by the particle para, (which forms the Portuguefe fupine) and then the pronoun conjunctive may be placed either before or after it 3 and fo we fay, para lembrar* fe, or para fe lembrar, to remember, or in order to remember. As for the fubjuncfive mood, you, muft put the pronoun conjunctive before the prefent ; but yoti muft carefully observe, that the pronouns conjunc- tive muft be placed before it when preceded by the particles se, if, que, that ; and fo you may fay, que eu me lembrafse, se eu me lembrafse, that I might re- member, &c. but not que eu lembrafse me, &c. But when the firft preterimperfect is not preceded by any particle, then you muft place the pronoun conjunc- tive after it ; as, arrependerame eu d'tfso, I wifh I repented it. In the fecond preterm! perfect we may place the pronouns conjunctive either before or after it, there- fore GRAM M A R. ' ioi fore you may fay arrependeria me se, &c, or eu me arrependeria se, &c. I mould repent if, &c. In the future you mud always place the pronouns conjunctive before it ; and fo we may fay, quando eu me lembrdr, when I fhali remember ; but not quando eu lembrhr-me. Note 3 all the verbs active may become recipro- cals. Example. eu me amo y I love myfelf. tu te amas, thou loveft thyfelf. ellefe ama y he loves himfelf. nos nos amamos, we love ourfelves, &c. The Conjugation of the reciprocal Verb ir-fe, to go away. Indicative, Prefer*. eu me vou, I go away. tu te vas, &c. thou goeft away, &c. Preterimperfect. eu me hia, I did go away. tu te hias, &c. thou didft go away, &<* Preterperfeft definite. eu me fat, I went away. tu te fofte, &c. thou wenteft away, &c. Preterperfeft. eu me tenho ida, I am gone away, or I have gone away, tu te tens ido % &c. thou haft gone away, &c. Preterpluperfeft. eu me tinka ido. I was gone away, or I had gone away. tu te tinhas \do t &c. thou haft gone away, &c. Future. eu me irei, &c. I (hall or will go away, tu te iraj, &c. thou {halt go away. Imperative. vai-te, go thou away. vdfe t let him go away. vamo-nos t lei us go away. ide-VQS y go away, get away, or get you gone. vfo-fe^ let them go away. H 3 Sub- m PORTUGUES E Subjun&ive. Prefent. due eu me va, that I may go away. que tu te vas, Sec. that thou mayeft go away, &c«. Firft Preterimperfea. iu me faro, ox me Me, I went away. teforas, or tejojjes, *&c. thou wenteft away, &c Second Preterimperfeft. eu me iria, I would, &c. go away. tu te irias, thou wouldft, &c. Preterperfeft. que eu me tenha ido, that I have gone away, &c, PreterpluperfecT:. que eu r* tivfra, or me tivefe ido, that I had gone away. Second Pre-terplupetfe&. eu me teria ido, I mould have gone away, &c, Future. quando eu me for, when I mail go away, &c. Second Future. pidndo eu me tivfr. ido,, when I mail have gone away, &c, Infinitive. Prefent. ir.fe, to go away. Preterperfeft. Urfe ido, to have gone away. Participles. Prefent. ; quejeva, that is gone away. Preterit, GRAMMAR. 103 Preterit. ido, gone away. Future. .que ha de ir-fe, , that is to go away, I Gerunds. indo-fe, going away. tendo fe ido, having gone away* Supine. . parair-fe, to go, or in order to go away/ You muft obferve, that in the compound tenfes f be pronouns me, te, Szc. f are placed before the aux- iliary verb. 2dly. This verb is alio faid of vefTels to fignify their being leaky ; as vai se a cuba, the tub leaks. It is alfo ufed before the gerunds; as, o inverno vai-fe ' acabando, the winter is drawing 1 towards an end; ellesvao-fepreparhido, they are preparing them- selves : in which examples and in the like, the verb is io be rendered into Englifh by r the verb to be itfelf, and without addition orthe adverb away, and some- times it is placed before the prefent infinitive 5 '-as, irfe deitar, to go to bed. Of the reciprocal Verb vir-fe, to rome away. This verb is to be conjugated like the verb vir % but you muft place the pronouns conjunctive, me, te, &c. according to the obfervations we have made above. Of the reciprocal Verb avir-fe, to-Ugree. This is a compound verb, which'; is tobe conju- gated by putting the particle a before the verb vir "m all its tenfes and moods • but you mull always II 4 make 104 PORTUGUESE make life of the obfervations already made about the pronouns conjunctive ; and the fame care muft be had with the reciprocal verb haver-fe, to behave ; in the conjugation of which, you have nothing to dobut to add the pronouns conjunctive to the verb haver. Imperfonal Verbs. There are three forts of verbs Irrrperfonal, which have only the third perfon fingular, The firft are properly imperfonals of themfelves ^ as* Juccede, it happens. bafla, it is enough, or it fuffices. cko've, it rains. troveja t it thunders. The fecond are derived from verbs active, fol- lowed by the particle se, which renders them im- perfonal y as, ama-fe, they love ; diz-fe, they fay y nota-fe, it is noted. They are alfo called paffive imperfonals. The third, which have a great affinity with re- ciprocal verbs, are conjugated with the pronouns conjunctive, me, te, lhe> nos 3 vos, Ihes \ as, doe-mc* doe-ie, doe- 1 he, 8^c. The imperfonal verbs, of themfelves are^ convem, it is convenient. Juccede^ it happens, or it falls out. ejlame be?n, it becomes me. bajla, it is enough. ha-fe, it is neceflary. ckovifca, it mifles. ckove^ov cdhepedra i it hails.., gea, it freezes. neva, it fnows. fuzzla, or relampaguea, it lightens, importa* it matters, it concerns. parece, it feems. and GRAMMAR. 105 and the like, which are conjugated with the third perfons lingular of each tenfe 5 as, Indicative. Prefent. ckove, it rains. Imperfect. chovia, it did rain. Preterperfecl: definite. chovco, it rained, Preterperfect. tern ckovzdo, it has rained, Preterpluperfeft. tinha chovido, it had rained. Future. choverd, it fliall or will rain. Imperative, chova, let it rain. Optative and Subjunctive. Prefent. que chova, that it may rain, Imperfecl. que chovera, or choveffe, that it might rain. Second Imperfect. : choverfa, it mould rain. Future. quando ckove'r, when it {hall rain. Second Future. qudndg tiver chovido, when it fhall have rained. Infinitive, ckover, to rain. The 106 PORTUGUESE The particle se, which compofes the fecond fort of imperfonal verbs, may be placed either before or after them ; as, diz-fe, they fay ; "sabe-se, it is known ; s.ab'ia-se, it was known , logo fe Jbube> it was imme- diately known \^e diz , it is faid, feV. but fometimes they make no ule of the particle se, and only put the v verb in the third perfon plural; as, dlzem, in- ftead of se diz, they fay. In like manner all the verbs active may become imperfonal. In regard to thefe verbs, take notice, that when the noun that follows them is in the fingular num- ber, you muft put the verb in the fingular ; if the noun be in the plural, you put the verb in the plu- ral. Example. Louva-fe o capjtdp, they praife the captain. Louvdo-fe os capitals^ they .praife the captains. Ve-fe hum Id mem, they fee a man. Vem-fe homens, they fee men. When Ike is ufed after the word/*, then the is to be rendered into Engiifh by his or her : as lbuva-se-lhe o valor, they praife his or her courage. The third fort of imperfonal verbs are fuch as are conjugated with the pronouns perfonal, me, le, lhe % &c. with the third perfon fingular. Example. Indicative. k Prefent. . defagrada'-me, * I am difpleafed, sefo/Je precfo, I would go, if it mould be ne- eeifary i 108 PORTUGUESE ceflary ; he precifo que eu va, I muft go ; he precifo que eu ley a, I muft read ; he precifo que elle coma, he muft eat; seria precifo que eu fbjfe, I fhould go f You fee by the laft examples, that when the verb fer and the adje&ive are before the conjunctive mood, with the participle que, the conjunctive is ren- dered in Englifh by the infinitive ; but if the verb fer is followed by the relative or particle que, it muft then be rendered in Englifh in the following manner; as eu he que tenhofeito aquillo, 'tis I who have done that ; tu he que tens, &c. 'tis thou who haft, &c. elle he que tern, &c. 'tis he who, &c. nos he que temos, &c. 'tis we who have, &c. vos he que t hides, &c. 'tis you who have, &c. elles\ he que tern, &c. 'tis they have, &;c. a ley he que o manda, 'tis the law that prefcribes it ; ilia he que o ere, 'tis fhe who believes it f elles he que o fixer ao ? is it they have done it ? eu/ie que ofiz, 'twas I who did it ; en- tao he que eu tomo as minhas medidas, 'tis then I take my meafures ; entao he que eu vi, 'twas then I faw, or only then 1 faw. You may obferve that que is not relative in the laft examples, and that it is left out in Englifh. Of the Verb haver, when it is imperfunal. It is to be fo conjugated. Indicative. Prefent. ha, or nuo ha, there is, or there is not, or there are a ox there are not, Imperfeft. . havia, there was, or there were. Preterperfeft definite. heuve, there was, or there were. Preterm . GRAMMAR. l0S» Preterperfecl:. ttni havido, there has been or there have been,; Preterp!uperfe£h iinha havido, there had been; Future. haver a > there mall be; Imperative. kajd, let there be; Optative and Subjun&ive; que kajd, that there may bei ; Imp^rfecT:. que houvera or houvejfe, that there were; Second Imperfect. haveria, there would be. Preterperfect. que tinha havido, if there had been, Preterpluperfecl. Je tivejfe havido, if there had been. Future. quando houvef, when there will or mall be; Second Future. fuafido tive'r havido, when there fhall have been. Infinitive. haver, there to be. Pret. ter havido, there to have been. Gerunds. ■ havendo, there being. Undo havido, in there having been. TThofe who learn Portuguefe are greatly at a lots how to render, the following expreffions, there is not\ ■ 110 PORTUGUESE is there t and though there is nothing fo eafy j bow- ing is there f ana inougu mcic i& uuumig *v ^«* 7 , «« ever, I have explained them at large in the follovfri conjugation. Conjugation of the Verb inrperfonal there is, ha, when it marks the place, through all its ienfes. There is of it, There is not of it, Is there of it ? Is there not of it ? There was of ir, There was not of it, Was there of it? - ■ Was there not of it ? There was of it, There was not of it, Was there of it ? Was there not of it ? There (hall be of it, There (hall not be of it, Shall there be of it? Shall there not be of it? That there may be'of it, - That there may not be of it, That there were of it, That there were not of it, There would be of it, There would not be of it, Would there not be of it ? Jf there had been of it, If there had not been of it, Had there been of it ? Had there not been of it ? There would have been of it, There would not have been of it, Would there have been of it, Would there not have been of it? When there will be of it, When there will not be of it, ha la dp. nao ha la di/fo. ha la diffo ? nao ha id dip ? havia la diffo. nao havia la dijfo, havia Id dijfo ? nao havia la dip ? ho uve la dijfo. nao houve la dijfo. huuve'ld dijfo? nao houve la dijfo? haver a Id dijfo. nao haver a la dip. haver a la dijfo ? nao haverd la diffo ? que hdja la diffo. nao haja la dijfo. / , [dj/fo^ que houvera ox' houve jfe la nao houvSra or houve ffe Id. haveria la dip.y &&'' nao haveria la diffo. nao haveria Id dijfo ? fe tiveffe havido Id diffo. ' fe new tiveffe havido Id dijfo* teria havido Id diffo f ^ nao teria havido Id diffo ? teria havido Id diffo. nuo teria havido la diffo* teria havido Id diffo ? nao teria havido 'Id diffo f qudndo houver la dip. intdndo n#o kouiir la dp, 1 When GRAMMAR. ; III When there will have been qudndotivir havido Id difso, of it, When there will not have qud.ndo nao tivcr havido la been of it, ' difso. Will there have been of it ? terd havido Id difso f Will there not have been of nao Ufa havido Id difso ? it? For there havinf .been too por ter havido Id demafida- much of it, ' minte difso, In there having been too little tenho havido Idmuito pouca of it. - difso. Moft ways of fpeaking beginning with fome, and the Verb to be, are expreffed in Portuguefe by the imperfonal ha -, as, fome friends are falfe, ha ami". gos fdlfos ; some Chriflians are unworthy of that name, ha Christ iaos que nao sad dignos de tat nbme. Obferve, that ha comes before a fubftantive even of the plural number. The imperfonal ha± is befides ufed to denote a quantity of time, fpace, and number; as, ha de% annos que morreo, be has been dead thefe ten years ; or, he died ten years ago ; ha trinta milhoens d' almas em Franca, there are thirty millions of fouls in France; de Paris a Londres ha 120 legoas y Paris is 120 leagues from London. The queilion of fpace is afked thus, qua tit o ha de Paris a Londres f how far is Paris from London ? Of the imperfonal Verb ha- fe, it is necefjary, or tnujl. This verb anfwers to the Italian bifogna, and to the French ilfaut, and always requires after it the particle de, and the infinitive. It denotes the ne* ceffity of doing fomethingj and is Engl-ifhed by>muf, and fometimes by the verb to ^through all its tenfes, with fome of thefe words, necefjary, recufiie, needful: and as it denotes the necejlity of doing something in general, without fpeeifying who mttjk therefore the fubjecl coming before mufi may be ei- ther / or we, he, or she, or any bod\\ according. to the fenfe of the fpeech ; as, Hah m PORTUGUESE Ha-fe de fazer aquillo, one, or we, or you, or he* or fomebody muft do that. Ha-fe de hir 3 I or you, or we, or fomebody muft go. Sometimes the verb coming after this imperfonal, is Englifhed by the paffive voice ; as, ka-fe de fazer tfto, this muft be done* It is very often joined with mister ; as, hafe di mlier dinheiro para demandas, one muft have money to go to law ; ha-fe de mifier hum bom amlgo para fa- zer fortuna no mhido, to pufh one's fortune in the world, one muft have a good friend. As for the conjugation of this verb, you mud make ufe of the verb to be with necefary, as I have already faid. Example. Prefent, hafe, it is: necefTary. Imperfect, havia- fe, it was necefTary ; and fo through all the tenfes and moods. You muft take notice, that fometimes the infmi-* tive that follows the particle de is placed between this imperfonal and its particle fe ; as, ha de achdr-se, it will be found, and fometimes the infinitive pre- cedes the imperfonal, and this follows the particle fe; as, acharfe ha, it will be found; and in this cafe you muft not join the particle de to it. Obferve, that the infinitive may be alfo placed between, the imperfect tenfe of this imperfonal verb and its particle se ; as, hav/a de ackar-se y it was to be found ; buf when the infinitive precedes both the imperfonal and its particle se, then you muft put the particle se before the imperfonal, and make ufe of the imperfect Ma, and not havta ; so you may fay, achhr~fe hia, and not achcir-se-havia. Of GRAMMAR. lis Of the defective Verbs carpir, to weep 9 dndio£v 9 to be wont. The verb carpir is ufed only in thofe tenfes and perfons where the p is followed by an ij as, carpi* mos> carphy we weep, you weep. Preterimp. carpia, carp/as, &c. I did weep, &c. The werbfoer is only ufed in the third perfons of the prefent indicative of the preterimperfedr, of the same mood, and in the gerund : as, elk J6e> he is wont; ellesfbem y they are wont. Imperf. ellefoia t hc was wont; elles foiao t they were wont. Gerund^ foendo, being wont. CHAP. V Of the Participles. HPHE participle is a tenfe of the infinitive, which ferves to form the preterperfecls and preter- pluperfects of all the verbs ; as, tenho amado, 1 have loved ; iinha amado, I had loved. Amado is a participle, and all the verbs in tfrforrn the participle in ado ; as, amado, cantado, &c. Amado is likewife a noun adjective. Example. Homem amado, molher amdda j Hvros amados, letras amddas. - Some participles are frequently abridged; as, en- vbltOy or envolvido, corruplo or corrompido y enxuto or exugado ; and feveral others, which the life of au- thors will point out to you. The regular verbs ending in er or in tr form the participle in ido >- as, vendido, recebidoy fazido, nutndo^ &c. I There 114 PORTUGUESE There are three forts of participles ; namely, ac- tive, paflive, and abfolute. The active participles are compofe having faid fo. Acabada a cea> after he or they have fupped. The auxiliary and participle are not always im- mediately joined together in compound tenfes; as, Nos temoSy com a graca de Deos, vencido os nbjfos ini- migos^ we have, by the grace of God, overcome our enemies. CHAP. VI. Of the Adverbs. THE adverb is that which gives more or lefs force to the verb. The adverb has the fame effect with the verb as the adjective with the fubftantive : it explains the accidents and circumftances of the action of the verb. There are a great many forts s as, adverbs of time, place, quantity, &c, Adverbs of time; as, at prefenr, prefentemente, now, agora : yefterday, intern ; to day, hbje •> never, nunca ; GRAMMAR. 115 nunca; always, fempre ; in the mean time; entre- tanto. Adverbs of place; as, where, 6nde\ here, aqui ; from whence, donde-, there, alt-, from hence, da- qui% above, em cima •> below, em baxo; far, longe-, near, perto. Adverbs of quantity ; as, how much, qudnto ; Jiow many, amnios ; or qudnias ; fo much, tdnto ; much, muito ; little, pbuco. A great many ajiverbs are formed from adjec- tives, changing into amente ; fdnto, fani 'amfoil ' learned- From adjectives in e or / we likewife form adverbs, by adding mente to them ; as, Conjidnte, conftantemente, conftantly. Diligente, diligent emente, diligently. Prudente, prudentemente, prudenty. Fiei,fielmente, faithfully. In order to affift the memory of thofe who are learning the Portuguefe language, I have here col- lected a large number of adverbs, which, by fre- quent repetition, may be eafily retained, efpecially thofe terminated in mente. A Collection of Adverbs. Abundantemente, abundantly Adeos, farewell. Com razd'o,ju/ia?nente,ju{i\y ibfolut amente, absolutely. 4 Ecachapernas, or a caval- leiro, a-ftraddle. AJlutdmente, cunningly. Agora, or por kira, now at Atreicoadamente, treacher- this time. oufly. jfapardja,novt, immediately De maravilha, very seldom. Com con die do ^on condition A miuao, often. De parte, afide. Ajfhn, so. J)e travez, afkew, asquint ; Tad, so. as, olhar detravez, to look Aprejfa, in hafte. afkew, or asquint. Facilmente, easily. Aclualmente, actually. A'o avejfo, or as avejfas, the De propofito, purposely. wrong side outward. I 2 De 116 Deimprovifo, or iinprovifa- mente, at unawares. Antigamente y anciently. " Quafi, pretty near, almoft. Entao, then. Defde entao, fince that time. Defde quando ? fince when ? De quando dca ? from what time ? how long? De quando em quando, now and then, ever and anon. Quando hem, or ain da quando, albert, although it fhould be. Quando muito, at the moll. Quando menos, at lead. Cd, here, or hither. La, there. AH, there, in that place. ("there, expreffes the | place where ftands the AtiiyA, perfon fpoken to ; as, j a hi onde ejtas, there l^where you are. A col a, there. Trdz, or detraz, behind. Para trdz, backward. I'jlo he, to wit. Em vez, inftead. Tambcm, alfo. Tanto que, \ „„ r T , * . > as loon as* Logo que, J De pen/ado, wilfully. Acdfo, by chance. Fix a men te, ftedfaftly. Finahnente, finally. Livremcnte, freely. Muito, much. DeprcJJa, quickly. Aqm, here. Ate aqui, as far as here, or tillnow* or hitherto. D"aqui em diante, hencefor- ward, or hereafter. Bern, welL PORTUGUESE A'manhaa, to-morrow. A'manhaa pela manhaa, to- morrow morning. Defpois a" a manhaa, after to- morrow. Vltimamcnte, laftly. Como, as. Co mo ? how ? Cedo, soon. Tarde, late. Primeiro que, before that. • Primei.ro quctudo, before all. or in the firfl place. For a, abroad, out. Ja, already. Defdlto, at one jump. De quando em quando, from time to time. Antes, before. Defpois, afterwards. Juntamente, together. Enteiramente, entirely. A ' oredor, or emtorno, about, De balde, in vain. Loucamente, madly. Muito, very. Atrevidamente, boldly. Felicemente, happily. Vergonhofamente, (hameiuliy Nunc a, never. Nunca mais, never fince. Logo, immediately. Ainda, yet ; as* ainda nixo veto, he is not come yet. Ainda, even ; as Jeria ver- g'onha ainda ofalldr nijfo, it were a Ihame even to fpeak of it. Nemfe quer, even. Vilmen'e, bafely. Mai, ill, Muis, more. M'enos, less. Ate, until or even. Mm, yes. Nae>. GR A MM AR. II Nad, no, not. Oudndo, when. O'nde, where. Nxda, nothing. Dc cor, by heart. Per dadeiramemte, truly.. A's vexes, sometimes, from DJntro, within, time to time. Devagar, softly. CHAP. VII. Of the Prepofitiom. PRepofitions are a part of, fpeech indeclinable, ..moft commonly fet before a noun, a pronoun,, or verb. Every prepofition requires some -case after it 3 as you will see in the following collection : Genitive* Antes do dia, before day-break. Didnte de Deos, before God. Dentro da igreja, within the church. De traz do palacio : , behind the palace. Debaxo da ?nefa, under the table. Km cima da me/a, upon the table. Alan, besides. Ahm dos mares, on that side of the seas. Alem dijfo, besides that, moreover. Alem de que, idem. Aquem, or ddquem dos mares, on this side of the seas- Ao redor, or em cpntirno da cidade, round about the city. Per to de Lcndres, near London. Accrca daqucllo neg-ocio, concerning that affair. F'ora da cd/a, out of the houfe. Fora de pcrigo, out of danger. For a deji, out of one's wiis. This prepofition governs a 1/6 a nominative ; as, fora feu irmao, except his brother, or, his brother excepted, De/ronte deminha cdfa, over-againft my house. De/ronte da igreja, facing the church. De/pois de cea, after supper. - Dative. Oudnto aqaillo, with respecl to that. Pegddo a muralha, close to the wall. I 3 Deft* 118 PORTUGUESE Defde o Vico do pe ate a cabe$a, from top to toe. Accusative. Per ante o juiz, before the judge. E'ntre, between, among, or amongft. E'ntre os homens, among men. Sobre a mefa, upon the table. Conjorme, or fegundo a ley, according to the law. For amor de Dtos, for God's sake. Pelo mundo, through the world. Pela rua, through the Greets. p^hj terras, through the lands. Por grdnde quefeja, let it be never fo great. . Contra clles, againft them. Traz o templo, behind the temple. Durante, during ; as, durante o inverno, during the winter. We fhall be more particular about prepofitions when we examine their conftruction. CHAP. VIII. Of the Conjundiions. A Conjunction is an indeclinable part of fpeech, which ferves to join the members and parts of fpeech together, in (hewing the dependency of re- lation and coherency between the words and fen- tences. Some conjunctions are copulative, which join, and, as it were, couple two terms together ; as, e, and : Poxiuguefes e Ing/efes, Portuguefe and Englifh. Some are disjunctive, which fhew feparation or divifion ; as, nem, nor, neither; ou, either, or. Example ; nem efte, nem aquelle, neither this, nor that; on efte.ou aquelle, either this or that; nem mats, nem menos 9 neither more nor lefs ; quer o Jaga, quer nao, iudo para mim he o me/mo, it is all one to me whether he does it, or no; quer feja verdade, quer nao 9 whether it be true, or no ; nem fe quer hum> never a one. . The G R AMMAR. 119 The adverfative denote reftri£iion, or contrariety ; as, mas, or porem, but ; comtudo, yet, however ; mas antes, or pello contrario, nay. The conjunctions conditional foppofe a condi- tion, and ferve to reftrain and limit what has juft been faid ; cL$,fe, if; com condicam que, com if to que, dado cdfo que, provided that, or upon condition that, or in cafe that, &c. The conceflive, which (hew the affent we give to a thing; as, embbra, ox feja embbra, well and good ; efta feko, done, agreed. The caufal mew the reafon of fomething ; as, pbrque, for, or becaufe, or why. The concluding denote a confequence drawn' from what is before ; as, logo or por confequhuia, therefore, then, or confequently. The tranfitive, which ferve to pafs from one fen- tence to another; as, diem dijfo, moreover, or be- fides that ; fibre tudo, or em fiumma, after all, upon the whole, in the main ; a propbfito, now I think on't, or now we are fpeaking of that. There are others of a different fort ; as, fe quer, or ao mhos, at leaf! ; aindaque, although ; de forte que,{o that; antes quero pedir que fur tar, I'll rather afk than Ileal ; antes morrerei que dizer volo, I'll ra- ther die than tell you ; ja que, fince, &c. To the above-mentioned parts of fpeech gramma- rians have added Interjeclions, which are particles ferving to denote fome paffion or emotion of the mind ; but there is another fort, which may be called demonftrative ; as, aqui and la ; Ex. efte hbmem aqtu, this man ; aquella. molher la, that woman, &;c. and fome others continuative, becaufe they denote con- tinuation in the fpeech ; as, com effeito, in effect ; alem d'iffo, befides > bra vejamos, now let us fee ; final- mente fbmonos embbra, and fo, fir, we went away. To which we may add thofe invented to imitate the founds of dumb creatures, and the noife which is occafioned by the claming of bodies againft one another ; as, zaz, tra% y thwick-thwack, &c. I 4 Inter- *3Q PORTUGUESE Interjeclive Particles. Of Joy. Ha,ka, ha ! Ha, ha, ha! a Ok que go/to ! Qh joy ! Of Grief. Ay I Alas ! ah X Ay de mlm ! Woe is me ! lack ! Meu Deos ! My God ! Of Pain. Ay ! Ay ! Oh ! Oh ! To encourage. ~ f , f > Come, come on ! O ra vamos / $ To call. O, o/a, Ho, hey, hip ! Of admiration or furprife. O, O Ia,ahi\ Lack-a-day. Apre ! Heyday 1 Of averfipn. Irra I "\ Ndda ! >Awav, away with, fye! Fora ! J For making people go out of the way, or Hand away. Guardem-Je, or arredem fe ! Have a care, plear the way, or (land away i For fhouting. Viva ! Huzza ! Of filence. Calaivos ! Hufh ! Peace ! Of curfing and threatening. Al, 'gutti / Woe ! For derifion. Ah! Ah! oh! oh! oh! Ofwifhing. O provera a Deos ! Would to God! v . ' .*.< Oxa/a ! GRAM M A R. 121 Oxald ! or hah ! O that ! OJe! Would! The interjecYion O ferves for different emotions of the mind, as admiration, grief, wifh, &c. and fometimes is ufed ironically, but differently uttered, according to the emotion which it expresses. Some Abbreviations ufed in the Portuguefe Language. An t0 Antonio Anthony Seb am Sebajtidm Sebaftian Boo pe BeatiJJimo Padre ThemoftblerledFath Cap m Capital Captain Comp* Companhia Companv Corr° Carreo Poft D. Dom Don v D r , D"- Doutsr Doaor D s D'cos God D°, D a Ditto, ditto. Said Ex mo , Ex ma ExcellentiJJimo, ma Mod excellent V. E. Voffa excellencia Vbjsafenhoria Your Excellence V. S. Your LordGiip V. A. Vofsa altefa Your Highness V. M. or V mce Vofsa merce You V. P. Vofsa paternidade Your Paternity Vmag de Vofsa magejidde Your Majefty S. Santo Saint Fran co Francifco Francis G d3 Gudrde Save J. H. S. Jfcfus Jesus M s a s Muitos annos Many Years M c Meftre Matter S or , S Ta Senhor, or a Sir, Lady R mo Reverendijfimo Moll Reverend F a Para For Q! gut' That Q de Qudndo When O m Quern Who G t3 Quanto How much Supp te Supp He ante Petitioner Gen al General General Tent e Tenente Lieutenant V. G. Verbi gratia For Example And many others, that mud be learned by ufe, A NEW PORTUGUESE GRAMMAR- part il CHAP I. Of the Divifion of Syntax. SYNTAX is a Greek word, by the Latins called conftmftion ; and it signifies the right placing and connecting of words in a sentence. It is divided into three sorts ; the firft, of Order or Arrangement ; the second, of Concordance; the third, of Govern- ment. The Syntax of Order or Arrangement, is the fit disposition of words in a sentence. The Syntax of Concordance, is when the parts of speech agree with one another, as the subftancive with the adjec- tive, or the nominative with the verb. The Syntax of Government, is when one part of speech governs another. For GRAMMAR. 123 For the fake of thofe who, perhaps, have not a grammatical knowledge of their own language, I mail lay down fome general rules of Pdrtuguefe conftrudrion. I. Of the Order of Words. i. The nominative is that to which we attribute the action of the verb, and is generally ranged in the firft place ; it may be either a noun or pronoun, as, Franctfco efcreve> Francis writes; eufallo, I'fpeak. 2. When the action of the verb is attributed to many perfonsor things, thefe all belong to the no- minative, and are ranged in the firft place, together with their conjunction ; as, Pedro e Paulo lem t Peter and Paul read. 3. The adjectives belonging to the nominative fubftantive, to which the action of the verb is attri- buted, are put after the fubftantive, and before the verb ; as, os efludanies morigerados e diligentes eftudao, the obedient and diligent fcholars do ftudy- 4. If the nominative has an article, this article always takes the firft place. 5. Sometimes an infinitive is put for a noun, and flands for a nominative ; as dormir faz hem fleeping does one good : and fometimes a verb with its cafe ; as, be atto de bumamdade ter compaixao dos^af- fliftos, to have companion on the afflicted is an act of humanity. 6. The nominative is fometimes underftood ; as, amo, where you underftand eu; and fo of the other perfons of the verb. 7. After the nominative you put the verb ; and if there is an adverb, it is to be placed immediately after the verb, whofe accidents and circumftances it explains ; as> Pedro ama por extremo a gloria, Peter is extremely fond of glory. 8. The cafes governed by the verb are put after it / they may be one, or many, according to the na- ture of the action; as, eu amo a Pedro, I love Peter. Pago 124 PORTUGUESE Fa go prefente de hum Irvro a Paulo , I make a prcfcnt of a book to Paul. 9. The prepofition is always put before the cafe it governs; zs,perto de cafa> near the houfe. j q. The relative is always placed after the ante- cedent, as, Pedro qual eftuda ) Peter who ftudies. II. Of Concordance. i. The adjeclives agree with their fubftantives in gender, number, and cafe ; as, hbmem virtubfo> a virtuous man \ bella mother, a handfome woman ; fumptuSfos pa!acios y &c. fumptuous palaces, &c. 2. When two or more fubftantives fingular come together, the adjeclive belonging to them mull: be put in the plural ; as, tanto el rey como a rainha monthdos a cavdllo parecem bem> both the king and the queen look well when they ride. 3. If the fubftantives happen to be on^ in the fingular and the other in the plural, or to be of different genders, the adjeclive common to both, agrees in number and gender with the laft ; as, elle i'mha os clhos e a boca aberta, or elle tinha a boca e os olhos abertos y his eyes and mouth were opened. jfs lagcas e rios eftavao congelados > the ponds and rivers were frozen. 4. But when there is one or many words between the laft noun and the adjeclive, that adjeclive (com- mon to all) agrees with the noun mafculine, though the laft noun be feminine ; and if the nouns are in the fingular, then the adjeclive common fhall be put in the plural number and mafculine gender; as, r'10 e a lagoa eftavao congelddos ; the pond and river were frozen. trabhlho, a induftria y e a for tuna unidos; pains, induftry, and fortune joined together. 5. Every verb perional agrees with its nomina- tive,, exprefted or underftood, both in number and perfon. 6. The relative oual with the article agrees en- tirely with the antecedent ; but without the article and GRAMMA R. 125 and denoting an abfolute quality, it agrees with what follows ; as, aquelle coracao o qual> &c. that heart which, fcff. Confiderando quaes Jer'iao as condigoens t &c. conlidering which would be the conditions, tffc. 7. The queftion and anfwer always agree in every thing ; as, a que Jenhbra pertence vm €e f ellerefpondeo, pertenco a rainha : To what lady do you belong, fir ? and he anfwered, I belong to the queen. III. Of the Dependence of the Parts of Speech on one another. 1. The nominative being the bafis of the sentence, the verb depends on it, as the other cafes depend on the verb. The adjective depends on the fubftantive that fupports it; and the adverb on the verb whofe accidents it explains. 2. The genitive depends on a fubflantive, ex- prefTed or underftood, by which it is governed. 3. The accufative depends either on a verb ac- tive, or on a prepofition. 4. The ablative depends on a prepofition by which it is governed ; as, parto de Roma, I go from Rome. 5. The dative and vocative have, ftriclly fpeak- ing, no dependence on the other parts : the dative is common, as it were, to all nouns and verbs ; the vocative only points out the perfon to whom you fpeak. I now come to the Conftrudlion of the feveral parts of fpeech. 126 PORTUGUESE CHAP. II. Of the Syntax of Articles. BEFORE we come to the fyntax of the articles, remember that o, a, os, as, are articles only when they precede the nouns or pronouns, but not when joined to the verbs. Thofe who underftand Latin will quickly per- ceive the difference, if they take notice that every time they render o, a, by ilium, Mam, Mud; or by eum, earn, id ; and os, as, by illos, Mas, ilia ; or by eos, eas, ea ; they are relative pronouns. 1. The article is ufed before the names of the spe- cies or things which can be fpoken -of; therefore nouns of fubftances, arts, fciences, plays, metals, virtues, and vices, having no article before them in Englifh, require the article in Portuguefe ; as, O buro e a prata nab podem fazer feliz ao homem, gold and filver cannot make the happinefs of man. A virtude nod he compalhel com o vicio, virtue cannot agree with vice. A pkilofophia he huma fuencia mu'ito nobre, philo- fophy is a very noble fcience. Joguemos as cartas, let us play at cards. 2. The article is not placed before a fubftantive which is followed by the adjective of number that Hands for a furname, or meets with a proper or Chriftian name; as, Jofeph Primeiro, Jofeph the Firft. 3. When a book or fome part of it, as chapter, page, &c. is quoted, the adjective of number may come either before or after the fubftantive ; but if it comes after, the two words are conftrued without article ; as, livro primeiro, capitulo fegundo, &c. book i. chapter ii. If the adjective of number conies GRAMMAR. 127 comes before the fubftantive, it takes the article ; as, o primeiro livro, the firft book. 4. O placed before que fignifies what or which ; 2LS,faga o que quifer, let him do what he likes 5 que eufiz % which 1 did. 5. The article is never made ufe of before proper names of men, women, gods, goddeffes, faints. 6. The article is not ufed in Portuguefe before the pronouns poffeffive relative ; as, de quern he efia cafa f he minha, he tua, &c. whofe houfe is this ? it is mine, it is thine, &c. 7. When a mount's, mountain's or hill's name, is preceded by the word monte, it takes neither ar- ticle or prepofition; as, Monte At/ante, Mount Atlas -, os Monies Ptreneos, the Pirenean Moun- tains; but after the word Jena, a ridge of hills, it takes the article -> as, a Sena da Eflrella, Mount Strella 5 Serra do Potoji, Mount Potoii ; however^ they fay, alfo, Serra L'toa. 8. The noun of the meafure, w r eight, and the number of the things that have been bought, re- quires the articles $ as, trigo vende-fe tanto al- quiere> wheat is fold fo much a peck, three quarts and one pint. A manteiga vende-Je tanto arrate/, butter cofl fo much a pound. Os ovos vendem-fe tanto a dlizia, eggs are fold fo much a dozen. 9. No article is ufed with proper names of per- fons and planets, except a terra, the earth ; fo/, the fun ; aj.ua> the moon. 10. When proper names are ufed in a determi- nate fenfe, that is, when they are applied to parti- cular objecls, then they take the article ; Deos dos Chrijidos, the God of Chriftians ; Archimedes de Inglaterra, the Archimedes of England. The proper names of renowned poets and painters keep alfo the article \ as, Camoens^ Pope, TafJo. x Ticiano, &c, 11. The 128 PORTUGUESE 11. The indefinite article de is ufed before nouns following one of this, forte, fpecie, genero, and any other noun of which they exprefs the kind, charac- ter, quality, and nature : which fort of nouns are ufually Englifhed by an adjective, or even by the fubflantive itfelf placed adjeclivelv, and making to- gether, as it were, but a word compound ; as, Dor de cabega, the head ach ; huma forte de fruto y a fort of fruit ; f altar de tblo, a foolifh fpeech. Sometimes the Englifh adjective may be made by an adjective too in Portuguese, as in the laft example hum fallar tblo, a foolifh fpeech ; but fometimes too the Portuguefe exprefs the Englifh adjective by a fubflantive of the fame fignification with de before the other noun, though they have an adjective of the fame nature as the Englifh adjeclive ; as, o diabo de minha mother, my devilifh wife; and fometimes the adjective is ufed by them fubftantively, or the fubflantive is underflood ; as, o velhaco de men filho, mv ra fc ally fon ; a velhaca de fuel may, his or her rafcally mother. Finally they alfo make ufe of the definite article ; as, o diabo do hbmem, or da molhir, the devilifh man or woman ; a pbbre da mother, the poor woman, &c. J 2. Nouns are ufed without article in the follow- ing cafes : lft. At the title of a performance, and in the middle of fentences, where they characterise in a particular manner the perfon or thing fpoken of, in which cafe the Englifh ufe efpecially the particles; as. Difcurfo fibre as obrigacbens da reiigiao natural, a difcourfe concerning the obligations of natural reli- gion. Primeka parte, the flrft part. O conde de Clermont, principe do Sangue, morreo, &c. the count of Qlermont, a prince of the blood, died, O S. An- GRAMMAR. 129 S. Antonio, nab de noventa pecas^ the St. Antho- ny; a ninety gun fhip. ■ 2dly. Jn fentences of exclamation; as, As mais bttlas fibres fab as que mems durao ; qualquer chuva as defrnaia, o vsnto as mure ha, o fol as queima, e acaba de fecar ; [em fallar numa infinidade de infec- ios que as perfeguem e deitao a perder ; natural e verda- deira imagem da belle za das jenhoras ! the hand* forneft flowers laft but a very fhort time; the leaft ram tarniihes them, the wind withers them, the fun fcorehes them, and completes the drying of them ; without mentioning an infinite number of infects that fpoil and hurt them : a natural and true image of the ladies beauty ! 3dly. When they meet with a noun of number in an indefinite fenfe ; as, mil foldados de cavallo contra cem infantes, a thoufand hoae againfl an hun* dred toot. Tenho lido dcus poet as, I have read two poets 3 that is, any pair out of all that ever exilled. But before a noun of number, in a definite fenfe, it would take the article ; as, Tenho lido os dbtis poetas, I have read both poets ; because this plainly indicates a definite pair, of whom fome mention has been made aiready. Os cem infantes que combaterao contra os mil de ca-* vallo, que, &c. the hundred foot that fought with the thoufand horfe, that, &c. 4thly. Aftsr the verb fer, when it fignifies to be^ come, and after fer tornado por, to be accounted ; paffar por, to pafs for ; as, elle fer a doutbr com o tempo \ he will become a doctor in time ; elle pajfa por ma* rinheiro, he pafles for a failor. When the adjective is ufed fubftantively, then it mud have the neuter Portuguefe article o before it; as, .X- ■. O verde offende menos a vifta que o vermMo, green hurts the eye lefs than red. K There m PORTUGUESE There are alio fome adverbs preceded by the neu- tral article o ; as the following, o melkor que eu puder,- the bell I will be able 3 menos que for poffhel, the lefs it will be polTible. Article's are repeated in Portuguefe before as many nouns (requiring the article) as there are in the fentence ; as, O otiro, a prai fa , a f chide, as hour as, e os dele'ites na& pbdem faz'er fel/z ac homem que nao tem ciencia nem virtude, gold, fiiver, health, honours, and pleafures, cannot make a man happy without wisdom and virtue. The article is put before the word fenhr, fir, or my lord ; as, O ferJior duqv.e, my lord duke; feuhor pre/idente, my lord the president ; os fenhores, the gentlemen y dos fenhores, of the gentlemen. You mull obferve the fame rule for the feminine article a, which is to be prefixed to fenhor a , my lady, Or madam ; as, a fenhor a duqueza, or condejfa de, &c. my lady duchefs, or countefs of, &c. The article is never ufed in Portuguefe as it is in English, before mais more, or menos lefs r in the fol- lowing fentences, quanta mais vivemos; tanto mais aprendemos, the longer we live, the more we learn ; quant mais hum hydropic be be, mais fedt tern, the' more an hydropick drinks, the more thirfty he is^ quanio mats hum homem he pobre, quanta menos cuida- dos tern, the poorer people are, the *efs care they !iave,&;c. Sometimes the EnglHh particle to, before infini- tives, is rendered in Portuguefe by the article 0; as, he facil o- di'zer, ver, &c. it is eafy to fay, to fee, fej*. In a" word 5 tke natural ajbciatars with articles are thofe common appellatives, which denote the feveral genera and fpecies of beings, or thofe words which, though indefinite, sre yet capable, through the ar- , of becoming/ definite, - Therefore Apollonias make? GRAMMAR. m makes it part of the pronoun's definition, to refufe coalefcence with the article ; and it would be ab- furd to fay o eu, the I ; or o tu, the thou ; becaufe nothing can make' thofe pronouns more definite than they are. N. Bv When the adjective hum, Mma, is' ufed as an article in Portuguefe, it refpecls our primary- perception, and denotes individuals as unknown j but the articles o, a, refpeft our fecondary percep- tion, and denote individuals as known. To explain, by an example: I fee an obje£t pafs by which I never faw till then y what do Ifay ? Alt vai hum pobre com huma barba comprida, there goes a beggar with a long beard. The man departs and returns a week after; What do I fay then? Alt vai o pobre da barba compridM, there goes the beggar with the long beard. CHAP. III. Of the Syntax of Nouns \ and firfi, of the Siibftantives. WHEN two or more fubftantives come toge- ther without a comma between them, they all govern each the next in the genitive, the firrY governing the fecond, the fecond the third in the fame cafe, and fo on ; (that is, the fir ft is always followed by the prepofition de,'or by the article be- fore the next noun) but that genitive can never come in Portuguefe before the noun that governs It, as in Engliih : A philofophta de Newton, Newton's philofophy. As guardas doprtncipe, the prince's guards. A porta da cafa, the houfe-gate. K2 Eis 132 PORTUGUESE Eis aqiit a cafa do companhe'iro do irmab de m'inha molher> here is my wife's brother's partner's houfe. When two fubftantives lingular are the nomina- tive of a verb, this mud be put in the plural ; as, men trmao e meu pal eflao no campo, my brother and my father are in the country. If the nominative is a collective name, the verb is always put in the lingular y as, tbda a cidade af- fiftio, all the city was prefent. Of the Syntax of Adje Stives. Of adjectives, fome are put before the noun, and fome after; and others may be put indifferently, either before or after. The pronouns adjective poffeffive, meu, teu, feu, &c. and adjectives of number, come before the fubftantive as in Englifh. Ex. Meu pai, my father; o fua cafa, his houfe ; duas pegoas, two people ; o primeiro hbmem, the fir ft man. But when the adjeclive of number ftands for a furname, or meets with a proper or Chriftian name, it comes after the fubftantive, without the article ; as, Jo'ao V. John the fifth. Thefe following Adje Stives come after the Sab- ftantive. 1ft. Verbal adjectives and participles* as, hum hbmem divert! do, a comical or merry man ; huma mot- her ejlimada, a woman efteemed. 2dly. Adjectives of names of nations ; as, hum mathematico Ing/e'z, an Englifh mathematician ; hum alfaiate Francez, a French taylor; mufica ltaliana, Italian mufick. 3dly. Adjectives of colour ; as, hum veji'ido negro, a black fuit of cloaths > hum capote vermelho, a red cloak, {fee. 4thlv, GRAMMAR. 133 4thly. Adjectives of figure ; as, huma me fa redon- €$;a, a round table^ hum campo triangular, a triangular field, &c. 5thly. AdjeCtives exprefting fome phyfical or na- tural quality ; fuch are quente, hot ; frto> cold ; hu- mido, wet; corcovdde, hunch backed, Sic. Moil other adjectives are placed before or after the fubftantive ; as,fanto> holy ; verdade/ro, true, &c. If the fubftantive has three or more adjeCtives be- longing to it, they muft abfoluteiy be put after it with the enclitic e before the laft, which muft like- wife be obferved, even when there be but two ad- jeCtives ; for the Portuguefe don't fay, huma def- agradavel enfadonha obra, &c. but huma bbra defagra- davel e enfandonha, &x. a difagreeable, tedious work* Of adjeCtives, fome always require after them either a noun or a verb, which they govern; as, digno de louvor, praife- worthy ; d'igno de fer amado* worthy to be loved; capaz de enjinar> capable to teach; and thefe have always the particle de after them. Some will be ufed abfoluteiy without being ever attended by any noun or verb ; as, prudent e y wife; ' incur av el, incurable, &c. Others may be conftrued both with and without a noun, which they govern. ; as, ella he huma molher infenfively fhe is a woman without any fenfibility ; ella he infenpvel ao amor, fhe is infenfible and a ftran- ger to the paffion of love. The following adjeCtives, which require the pre- pofition de before the next infinitive, govern the genitive cafe. Obferve, that fome of them require in Englifh the prepofition at or with before the next noun. Digne, worthy: as, elle he d'igno de lwvor\ he is worthy of praife. This adjeCtive is fometimes fol- lowed by que-, as, dlgna que feu nbme fojje, &c; her name deferred to be, &:c. K 3. Ind/gna s 134 PORTUGUESE Ind/gno, unworthy ; as, indigno da ejlimacao quefaca del/e, unworthy of tbe efteem which I have for him. Capaz, capable ; incapaz, incapable ; as, capaz, ou incapdz defervlr a propria patria, capable or inca- pable to ferve one's country. Not ado, charged ; as, no/ ado de avareza, charged with avarice. Content e-, glad 5 as, efiou^ content e do fuccejjo que elle teve, I am glad or overjoyed at his fuccefs. Cancado, tired; as,, cancado deejludar, tired of ftu- dying. Dezejofo, greedy; as, dezejofo de gloria, greedy of glory, &c. as likewife adjectives fignifying fullnefs, emptinefs, plenty, want, defire, knowledge, remem- brance, ignorance, or forgetting. All adjectives fignifying inclination, advantage and difadvantage, profit or difprofit, pleafure or displeafure, due, fubmiffion, refiftance, likenefs, govern the dative cafe ; as, infenj'ivel as affront as, infentible of affronts ; fer inc/inado a alguma coufa, to be inclined to fomething; nocivo a j'aude, hurtful to health. Thefe adjectives fignifying dimenfions, as, a/la, high, tall ; large, wide, broad ; and compr'ido, long, come after the words of the meafure of magnitude, "both in Englifh and Portuguefe; but they are pre- ceded by de in Portuguefe ; as, des pes de largo, ten feet broad ; Jets pes de compr'ido, fix feet long, ..&c. they alfo turn the adjective of the dimenfion into its fubftantive, with the word of the meafure before: hut the word of the dimenfion is always preceded by de ; a$fe/s pes de a/iura, fix feet high ; dez pes de largura, ten feet broad. The adjectives fignifying experience, knowledge, or fcience,, require em, or m, na, uos,nas, after them ; as v erf ado nos /ivros, verfed in books ; expert na me* dichia, expert in medicine.. The cardinal nouns require the genitive cafe aftes them 5 as, hum dos dons, one of the two. . The GRAMMAR. 135 The ordinal nouns, as well as the collective and proportional, like wife require the genitive after them ; as, primeiro dos reys, the firft of the kings, Mma du%ia de 6vos> a dozen of eggs, &c. Of the Syntax of the Comparatives and Super- latives. The comparative :is not made, of the: poiitive in Portuguefe, as in Latin and Englifh, but by adding mdis more, or menos lefs, which govern -que, fignify- ing than ; as, to do he mayor que a parte, the whole is greater than the part ; feu amante he mdis -bello, mats mbco, emdis rico que ella, her lover is handfomer, younger, and richer than me is; eu acho-o agora s mencs hello do que qudndo comprei, I now find it lefs handfomethan when I brought it. The fimple comparatives mdis, and menos, meet- ing with a noun of number, are attended by de ; as, alnda que elle tivejje mdis de cem hbmens, though he had above an hundred men , elle tern mais de vinte mmos, he is above twenty. When the comparifon is made by fo as, as much tfj"/ they mud: be rendered by coma. Example. O men ttvro he -tad -hello cbmo vbjjb, my book is .as handfome as yours ; hum principe nao he tad pode- rbjb cbmo hum rey, a prince is not fo powerful as a king. . They put fometimes mu'ito and pouco before the fimple comparatives mais and maws ; as, elle he mmto mah grdnde, he is taller by much 5 elle he poucQ mais grande, he is taller by little, &c. 14 136 PORTUGUESE CHAP. IV. Of the Syntax of Pmiouns. WE have fufficiently explained the pronouns in the firft part ; and to avoid any further repetition, I fhall only obferre, that, lit. The Englifh make ufe of the verb to be, put imperfonally through all its tenfes in the third per- fon, before the pronouns perfonal, I, thou, he,JJie, we, you, thy ; it is I; it is. he, &c. In Portuguefe the- verb to be, on this occafion, is not imperfonal ; and they exprefs, it is I; bv feu e[u; it is thou, es tu\ it is he, he elle\ it is we,Jumo no* ; it is ye,fojszos , it is (he, he ella ; it is they, mkfe* Jao elles ; it is they, fern. Jab el las ; and in like manner through all the tenfes; as, it was I, era eu \ it was we^eramos nos, &c. 2dly. The Portuguefe feldom .make ufe of the fecond perfon fingular or plural, hut when through 2. great familiarity among friends, or fpeaking to God, or a father and mother to their children, or to fervants ; thus, you are in the right of it, is ex- preffed bv vm ct tern razao, inftead of tendes razao ; cbmo ejta vm ce ? how do you do ? In the plural they fay vm ce . Obfervehere, that when an adjeftive comes after vm ce y m $ t y £^ gr C j t does not agree j n gender with r, ve-ias, to fee her, or them, &c. and when xhey are joined to the preterperfefcl indicative of the xerbfazer, and fome others that have that tenfe end- ing in iz, they change the kfi z of them into lo, la y &c. 7\s,fi-Io, I did it; elle fe-lo he did, or made it, &c but when they are joined to the future indica- tive of any ve r b with the auxiliary verb haver, then they change the terminations ret, ras, &c. of the futures into lo, la, &e. as fd4o-hei> I'll do it ; ama- lo-hei, I'll Jove him, &c. Remarks on the Pronouns. Iff. Him, or it, which follow the verb in Englilh, mutt beexprefsed in Portuguefe, as in. the following examples: When Mm or it in Englifh follow the verb in the fir ft perfon of the fingular number, it mud: be ex- prefsed in Portuguefe by o before or after the verb. Exam. I call him or it, cu o chamo, or eu chamo-o. When him ox it in Englilh follow the verb in the flrfr. perfon of the lingular number, it may be ex- ■prefled in Portuguefe either by o before the verb, or lo after it a making an elifion of the laft confonant of 1SS PORTUGUESE of the verb. Exam. Thou called him or it, tu o chdmas, or iu chama fa. When him or it is joined with the third perfon fmgular of a verb, it may be expreffed by o before or after the verb. Ex. He calls him or it, elle o chama, or elle chama-o. When him or it is with a verb in the fir (1 perfon plural, it may be expreffed in Portuguefe either by o before the verb, or lo after it, making an elifion as in the fecond cafe. Ex. We call him or it, nos o chamamos, or nos chamdmo-lo. When him or it is after a verb in the fecond per- fon plural, it is expreffed in Portuguefe either byo before the verb, or lo after it, making an elifion, &c. Ex. You- call him or it, vos o chamais, or vos ' chamai-lo. When Mm or it follows the verb in the third per- fon plural, it may be expreffed in Portuguefe either by o before the verb, or no after it. Examp. They call him or it, elles o chamao, or elles chamao-no. 2dly. Her ox it after a verb in Englifh is express- ed in Portuguefe by a, according to the rules juft now propofed. 3dly. Them after a verb is expreffed in Portu- guefe by os for the mafculine, and by as for the fe- minine, according to the gender and the rules pro- pofed. 4th!y. The words 6, a, os, as, muff always be put after the gerunds, but not before the infinitives. Examp. Seeing him, we muff not fay, o vendo, but vendo-o, becaufe vendo is a gerund. To fee him, in- ffead of faying para ver-o, you muff fay para p ver, Is in the infinitive. 5thly. The words lo, la, les, las, muff always be -put after the verbs. Examp. To fee him, you muff fay, para ve-lo, or para o ver, and not para lo ver. The fame words muff follow alfo 'the adverb eis ; and fo you muff fay, e'>4o aojii, here he is; ei-lo ali % there he is , ei-los aoui, here thev are ; ei la ali, there Die GR AM MAR. fj» flie h; ei-las all, there they are. They follow like- wife the perfons of the verbs; as, iu fi-lo ; tufizef- ie-lo ; ellefe-lo ; nosfizem-lo, &c. I made it, Sec. Note, that I have been fpeaking of the words o, a, os, as, lo, la, Us, las, and not of the articles o, a, 05, as ; becaufe when thofe words precede, and fometimes when they folio wjhe verbs, they are not articles, but pronouns relative. They are articles only when they precede the nouns or pronouns. CHAP. V. Of the Syntax of Verbs. THE verbs through every tenfe and mood ( except the infinitive) ought to be preceded by a nominative cafe, either expreffed or under- flood, with which they rauii agree in number and perfon. The nominative is expreffed when, we fay, eu dmo, tu cant as i underftood when we h^;canlo^ digo, Sec. The Portuguefe, as .well as Englim, ufe the fe- cond perfon piural, though they addrefs themfelves but to, a fingle. perfon. * Example. Meu ar,i'go,vos nao tendes razJidj my friend, you are in the wrong. And if we would fpeak in the third perfon, we muft fay, pm ce {em razdo, fir, you are in the right. The verb active governs the accusative 5 as, dmc M virtiide 5 1 love virtue. The 140 PORTUGUESE • The verb paflive requires an ablative after it ; as os doutos fad envejddos pellos ignorant es, the learned are envied by the ignorant. You mull obferve, that there is in Portuguefe another way of making the passive, by adding the relative fe to the third perfon fmgular or plural ; as hma fe a Decs, God is loved. When there are two nominatives lingular before a verb, it must be put in the plural number. When a noun is collective, the verb requires the lingular, not the plural ; as, a gente eft a olhando, the people are looking. Syntax of the auxiliary Verbs. The verb ter is made ufe of to conjugate all the compound tenfes of verbs ; as, tenho amado, tinha amado, i have loved, I had loved. Ter fignifies alfo to poffefs, to obtain ; v&tenko dinheiro, I have money ; tern mult a capacidade, he has a great deal of capacity. Haver, in account books and trade, expreffes credit or difcharge. Haver is aJfo taken imperfonally in Portuguefe, and it fignifies in Englifh there be ; as ha muho euro no Mexico, there is a great quantity of gold in Mex- ico. Haver fe, made reciprocal, is the fame as to be- Jiave, to acl ; as houve fe o governador com tal pru- dencia, que, &c. the governor behaved with fuch wifdom, that, &c. We have already obferved the difference betwixt fer and eflar. The verb eftdr is alfo ufed to conjugate the other verbs, chiefly exprefling action ; as efibu lendo, eftpit ejerevendo, I am reading, 1 am writing. hftlv', with the prepofition em, in, or with no, na, nos, nas, fignifies to be prefent in a place $ as, ejlou no tempo, I am in the country. Efldr, GRAMMAR. 141 Ejlar, with the prepofition para, denotes the in- clination of doing what the following verb expref- fes, but without a fall determination ; as, eftou para ir-me em Lbndres, I have a mind to go and live in London. Efiar, with the prepofition por, and the infinitive of the verb following, means, that the thing expref- fed by the verb is not yet done ; as /JIo efta por efcrever, this is not yet written; ifte efta por alimpar, this is not yet cleaned; cjlar 'por alguem fignifies to agree with one, or to be of his opinion. N. B. See in the Third Part the different fignifi- cations of the verbs efiar and haver. When fer fignifies the poffeffive of one thing, it governs the genitive ; as, a rua lie a el-rey, the ftreet belongs to the king; efla cdja he de men pay, this houfe belongs to my father. Em fer is taken for a thing to be whole or entire, without any alteration or mutilation ; as, as fazai- das ejldo em fer, the goods are not fold. Of the Syntax of Verbs adtive, pajjive, &c. When two verbs come together, with or without any nominative cafe, then the latter muft be in the infinitive mood ; as, quer vm CG aprender a fallar hi- glex f will you learn to fpeak Engliih i All verbs aclive govern the accusative ; but if they are followed by a proper name of God, man, or woman, or any noun expreffing their qualities or title, then it governs the dative cafe ; as, conhcco a jeu pay, I know his father ; AchdruO a Jqaq no cn~ m'inho, they found John in the road. All verbs of gefture, moving, going, reding, or doing, as alfo all the verb's that have the word that goes before, and the word that comes after, both be- longing to one thing, require the nominative after them ; as, Pedro vai err a do > Peter goes on wrong ; o poire M2 PORTUGUESE opobre dbrme defcancado, the poor deep without care* Alfo the verb of the infinitive mood has the fame cafe, when verbs of wifning and the like come after them ; as, tbdos dezejao fer rices, every body wifhes to be rich ; antes quifera fer douto que parecelo, I had rather be learned than be accounted fo. After verbs the Portuguefe exprefs yes and no by que Jim and que ndo, Example, creyo" que Jim, I be- lieve yes ; creyo que new, I believe not ; d/go que Jim, I fay yes ; cu'ido que nao, I think not ; apefio que Jim 9 I 'lay yes ; qUereis apojidr qice ndo f have you a mind to lay not ? Verbs fignifying^ grief, conipajfion, zvant, remem- brance, forgetting, &c. will have the genitive ; as, pfame' mu/to da mirte cle feuirmao, I am very forry for the death of your brother ; elle mbrre de fame, he perifhes by hunger ; Umbre-fe do que me diffe, remem- ber what you faid to me 5 compadeci-me das fuas dif grocas, I pitied him for his misfortunes; efqiteci-me de tudo /Jio, z\\ this I forgot. The reciprocals of jeering, boafting, and diftruft- ing, govern alfo the genitive ; as, jacldr-fe, gloriar- J'e, picarfe, envergonhar-fe, &c. All the verbs active govern the dative only when the fubftantive reprefents a perfon ; as, eu conheco a vm ce , &c. L know you, eke. The following verbs belong to this rule of the dative : Jogar, to play ; as, jogdr as cartas, to play at cards ; jogdr acs centos, to play- at picquet 5 jogdr do xadrez, to play at chefs, &c. Obedece'r, defobedecer; agradar, empraz'h", as, eu obedeco a Deos e el rey, I obey God and the king ; comprazh era tudo-'cjps foldadcs, in all he pleafed tile foldiers. Manddr, when it fignifies to command an army, company, &c. requires the accufative, but when other things, the dative ;■ as tile manddva a caval/a- rt&i he commanded ft^ 'htirfe | J goveriiador man- doik GRAMMAR. - 14^ dou a tbdos os mor adores que fe retirdjfem para fuas cd- fas, the governor ordered all the inhabitants to re- tire into their houfes. It, to go ; as, vou a Paris, I go to Paris. Affiftir, ajudar, focorrer, to help 5 -as, affiftir do of- ficio divino, to affifVat divine ferviee. Satiddr, to falute, or greet ; as, elle fduda a todos, he falutes every body. Falldr, to fpeab ; fatizfazsr, to fatisfy ; ftrvir, to ferve -, favor ecef, to favour y ameacdr, to threaten. • The verbs of pleaiing, difpleaiing, granting, de- nying, pardoning, will have the perfon in the da- tive cafe. The imperfonals acmiiecer.Jticceder, hnportar, per-- fencer, and the like to thefe, will have often two datives, of perfon ; as, a mhnme juccedeo, it happen- ed to me ; a elk' Ihe* convent, it fuits him', or it is convenient for him 5 a elk mo Hie importa, it does not concern him, &c. All the active verbs reauire an^accufatlve ; and the Latin verbs which govern the accufative'of the things, and the dative' of the perfon, govern gene rally the fame in Portuguefe y as, efcrevei que d/go u vojjb irmab, write to yoar brother what I do fay. Verbs of afking, teaching arraving, will have an O 7 <-> JO accufative of the doer or fufterer, and fometimes verbs neuter will have an accufative of the thing ; as, gozdrfdude, to enjoy health ; peco ejle favor, I aik this favour ; elk tica muito hem fthuta, he plays very well on the flute ; curar hmd doenr.a^ to cure a ficknefs. Verbs pafTive, and the greateft part of the reci- procals, require the ablative, with de, do, da, dos, das, p'or, or pello, pella, pellos, pel/as ; as, fui cha- madopor el rey, I was called by the king ; retirei me. da cidade, I retired from the" city ; elk foi am a do do p6vc,hz was loved by the people. But you mult except acoflar fe, which requires a dative preceded bf a; encofidr fcl which 1 fometimes will have a da- live.. 144 PORTUGUESE tive, and fometimes an ablative preceded by em, no, no, nos, or nas ; meter fe, which requires an ablative ; fentarfe, introduzirfe, &c. which mnfr have the ablative with the prepofition em; no, na, now nas. The verbs joined with a noun which they govern, jnuft have the infinitive with de ; as, tenho vontade derh, I am near laughing. The price of any thing bought or fold, or bar- tered, will have the accufative with por. The verb por fe, when it iignifies to begin, mull have the infinitive, with the particle a ; as, por fe a chorar, to begin to cry. Verbs of plenty, filling, emptying, loading, un- loading, will have the ablative ; as, efia terra ab un- do, de tr'igo ; this countrv abounds with corn ; elle efta carregddo de mifcrias, he is loaded with calami- ties. Verbs denoting c'uftom, help, beginning, exhorta- tion, invitation, require the infinitive with the par- ticle a ; as, ajudar a [em ear, to help (owing ; convidou me a cear, he invited me to fuuper. Verbs that figni'ry diftance, receiving, or taking away, will have the ablative ; as, a Madeira d'tfta de Marrbcos 320 mi I has, Madera lies 320 miles from Morocco. Note, that the verbs fignifying receiving, or taking away, generally require the ablative of the perfon ; but they fometimes require an accufative : particu- larly the verb receber, when it fignifies to welcome, or to entertain ; as, elle recebe tcdos com mu'iio agrado, he gives his company a hearty reception, he makes them very welcome. Verbs denoting obligation, govern the following infinitive vyith the prepofition a ; as, en o obrigareia fazcr iflo, I will oblige him to do it. Verbs of arguing, quarrelling, fighting, &.c. will have the ablative w r ith com ; as pelejcu mat's de huma hira com feu irmdc, he quarrelled more than one hour with his brother* After GRAMMAR. 145 After the v«rb fubftantive fer, to be, para is made life of as well as a : the firft is employed to denote the ufe or deftination of any thing ; as, eft a penna he para efcrever, this pen is to write with. But the particle a is ufed to denote only the action ; as, elle fit o primelro a fugir, he was the firft to run away. The verbs of motion to a place always govern the dative ; as, von a comedia, I go to the play. Though the verb voltar, to return, may alfo have an accufative, with the prepofition para. But the verbs of motion from a place govern the ablative with de, do,, da, dos, das ; zi^vehnd do campo, I come from the country. If the motion is through a place, then the verbs govern the accufative, with por ; as, paffarei por Londres, 1 will come by the way of London. Of the Ufe arid Conflruction of the Tenfes. Though we have fpoken at large upon the tenfes in the Firft Part, you rauft, however, take notice, i. That they make ufe of the infinitive and the auxiliary verb haver, together with the pro-jjouns lo, /a, los, las, inftead of the future indicative ; as, ouvir-lo hei,\ will hear him ; and then the r of the infinitive is changed into lo, la, los, las ; and fome- times they make use of the infinitive mood and the auxiliary verb haver, with' the pronouns conjunctive me, te, fe, &c. inftead of the fame future : as, dar-lhe hei, I will give him ; agaftar fe-ha, he will be angry. 2. That when w T e find the particle if, which in Portuguefe isexpreffed by fe, before the imperfect: indicative, we must generally ufe the imperfect fub- jun£tive in Portuguefe ; example, fe eu tlveffe, if I had ;fe eu pudeffe, if I coiild. But fometimes they ufe the imperfect, indicative ; as, dijje-lhe que fe mwla, Sec. ; he told him that if he was willing, &c. L 3, That 146 PORTUGUESE 3. That the firft imperfect fubjunctive in Portu- guefe is alfo ufed in a fenfe that denotes the prefent, efpecially in fentences of wifhing ; as, quizera que Domingo fizeffe bom tempo, I wifh it would be fine weather on Sunday. But if the fame tenfe is pre- ceded by alnda que, although, then it mud be ren- dered into Englifli by the fecond imperfect fubjunc- tive, or by the im perfect indicative ; as, eu nab a quizera, a'mda que tivefe milhoens de feu, though (he was worth feveral millions, I w T ould not have her; a'mda que Hie confent/J]e n'/Jfo, nab fe podia fazer, al- though he would confent to it, that could not be done- Laftly, when the firft imperfect fubjunctive is preceded by fe, it is fometimes rendered into Englifh by the fecond imperfect fubjunctive ; as,^ elle I'ieffe, if he fliould come. The Englifh are apt to put the firft imperfect of the fubjunctive where the Portuguefe make ufe of the fecond -, as, I had been in the wrong, nab teria, tido razab-, and though they may fay nab tivera tido razab, they may not fay nab tivefse tido razab, to exprefs the Englifh of, / fhould have been in the wrong, or / had been in the wrong. Note, that to exprefs in Portuguefe, though that Jhould be, we muft fay, quando ijjo foffe, and not feria. The Portuguefe ufe the future tenfe fubjunctive after the conjunction if, when they fpeak of a future action, but the Englifh, the prefent indicative : ex- ample, to morrow, if 1 have time, amanhaa fe tivir tempo, and no\.fe tenho ; if he comes, we mall fee him, ms o veremos,fe elle vier. A conj unci ion between two verbs obliges the laff. to be of the fame number, perfon, and tenfe as the firft : example, the king w r ills and commands, el rci quer e ordena ; I fee and I know, eu vejo e conhe'$o. Sometimes the prefent is made use of, inftead of the preter definite in narrations, as, no mefmo tempo wit hia andando, o encontra, o defpe, e o ata a huma urvore > GRAMMAR. 147 drvort y as he was going, he meets him, ftrips him, and ties him to a tree. When the Portuguefe ufe the infinitive with a third perfon in the plural, they add em to it, and it is generally preceded by por, for, and parti, in order to, that, or to the end that ; as elks for ad enforcados por furtarem, they were hanged for robbing ; pard ferem enformados, that, to the end that they may be informed ; para poderem dizer, that they may be able to fay. . Obferve, that when the Portuguefe put por before the firft future fubjun&ive, they fpeak of a time pad ; as, por fallardes, becaufe you have fpoken. But when they put para before it, then they fpeak of a time to come; as para fallarmos, that, or to the end that we may fpeak, in order to fpeak. Of Moods. All the tenfes of the indicative mood may be em- ployed without any conjunction before them > but they admit alfo of fome. Befides the conjunction que, thofe that may be made ufe of are fe, como, and quando ; with fome diftin£tion in refpecl: toy*, be- caufe this conjunction is feldom ufed before the fu- ture tenfe, and then it is governed by a verb iigni- fying ignorance, doubt, or interrogation ; as, nab fei Je hob de v/r, I do not know if they fhall come; ejlou em duvidafe os inimigos pafsarao o rw, I doubt if the enemies will pafs the river ; nab pergunto Je partira, I do not alk if he will fet out. The optative or fubjunctive in Portuguefe has al- ways fome fign annexed ; as, oxala, prouvera a De* os, bfe ! would to God, I pray God, God grant ! &c. ; que, para, que, &c. that, &c. The particle que is not expreffed in the prefent of this mood ; but it is underflood in fentences of wifliing or praying ; as, Deos o fdca bom, let God amend him. L 2 When 146. PORTUGUESE When que is between two verbs, the laft is not always put in the: fubjunciive, becaufe, though fome fay creyo que venha, I believe he comes ; I think it is better to fay creyo que vem ; but when there is a ne- gation, the verb following que muft be put in the fubjunctive ; as, nao creyo que venha, I do not believe he will come, nao creyo que venha tab cedo, I do not believe he will come fo foon. When the verbs crer, to believe, faber^ to know, are ufed interrogatively, and followed by the par- ticle que, the next verb is put in the indicative, when the perfon that afked the queftion makes no doubt of the thing which is the object in queftion ; as, if knowing that peace is made, I want to know if the people whom I converfe with know it too, I will exprefs myfelf thus, fabeis vos que ejld feita a paz f do you know that peace is made ? But if I have it only by a report, and doubt of it, and want to be informed of it, I mutt afk the queftion thus, fabeis vos que a pas ejieja feita f and by no means fabeis vos que efaje'ta a paz ? You muft obferve alfo, that the prefent fubjunc- tive of fabsr is elegantly ufed when it is attended by a negative, and the particle que in this phrafe, nao que eufa'ha, not that I know of. All the verbs ufed imperfonally with the particle que require the fubjunclive j as, he prec'fo que elle venha, he muft come ; convem que ifio fe faca, it is convenient that this be done. You muft only ex- cept fuch fentences as exprefs any pofitive affurance, or certainty ; as, he ccrto que vem. it is certain that he comes ; ft que ejla em chfa, 1 know he is at home. From thefe -obfervations it follows, that all the verbs not expreffing a pofitive affurance, or believ- ing, but only denoting ignorance, doubt, fear, afto- nifkment, admiration, wifiing, praying, pretenfion, or defire, govern the fubjunclive mood after que ; as, duv'ido que poffa, I doubt it is in his power y temo que morra, 1 am afraid he will die ; admiro me que GRAMMAR. 149 pie conj/nta, niffb, I wonder he agrees to it, &:c. ; to all which they add oxala, an Arabic word, fignify- ing God grants which is ufed in Portuguefe before all the tenfes of the. optative or conjunctive, as well as prdza a Deos, may it pleafe God ; or, prouvera a Deos, might it pleafe God. When que is relative, and there is a verb in the imperative or in the indicative, with a negative or interrogation before it, it governs likewife the fub- junctive ; as nab ha cbufa que man me inquiete, there is nothing that difturbs me more ; ha coufa no mundo que me poffa dar tdnto go/to ? is there any thing in the world that may give me more pleafure ? allegal-lhe t ant as razoens que pojfao perfuadir, give him To many reafons that he may be perfuaded. The prefent fubjanftive is fometimes rendered in- to Englim by the fecond preterimperfeft fubjunctive, when it is followed by a verb in the future tenfe ; as, arnda que eu trabalhe, nunc a. hei de cancar, though I iliould work, I never would be tired. The Portuguefe ufe fpecially the fame prefent fubjunctive for the future ; as in thefe fentences,, and others like : Nad duvido que venha, I do not doubt but he will come. Duvido que faca, I doubt that, or whether he will do it. Therefore avoid carefully thofe faults which fo- reigners are fo apt to make, in confidering rather the tenfe which they' want to turn into Portuguefe, than the mood which the genius of the language requires. The prefent indicative is alfo ufed for the future, as well as in Englifh : example, jantazs hcje em cafa { do you dine at home to-day ? L 3 Of 150 PORTUGUESE Of the Particks governing the Optative or Sub- jundlive. The conjunction que, that, generally requires the fubjunctive after it ; but antes que, primeiro que, be- fore that, always requires it. Take notice, that que makes all the words to which it is joined become conjunctives, as, para que, to the end that ; bem que, a'.nda que, &c. Pbjlo que, although ; ate que, till ; quando, cbmo querque, which commonly govern the fubjunctive. But com que ajjim governs the indicative ; as, com que, or com que affzmvira amanhaa, fo he will come to-morrow. In Portuguefe you muft take care how you exprefs though, or although-, if it is by ainda que, you may put either the fubjunctive or indicative after it : ex- ample ; ainda quejeja hbmem honrado, though he is an honeft man ; ainda que elle faz aqui/lo, though he does that. But if you render a/though or though by nab obftante, then you muft ufe the infinitive : example, though he is an honeft man ; nab obftante Jer elle homem honrado-, though he does this, nab ob- ftante fazer elle ifto. The imperfonal verbs generally govern the fub- junctive with que ; but with this diftinction, when the imperfonal is in the prefent renfe or future, of the indicative mood, then it requires the prefent fubjunctive mood ; but when the imperfonal, or any other verb taken imperfonally, is in any of the pre- terites indicative, then it governs the imperfect, per- fect, or pluperfect of the fubjunctive, according to the meaning of fpeech ; as, tmporta muito que el rey veja tbdo, it is of great moment that the king may fee all ; Jot conveniente que o principe fbj'je com elle, it was convenient thaj the prince fhould go with him. The prefent fubjunctive is likewife conftrued, when the particle por is separated from que, by an adjective ; as, por grande, por admiravel, por dbuta que ftja, though he be great, admirable, learned. An GRAMMAR. 151 An imperative oft$$l Hquires the future of the fubjun£tive ; as, fucceda o que fucceder, or feja o que for, happen what (hall happen, at all events. The imperfect fubjun£tive is repeated in this phrafe, and others like, fuccedeje, o que fuccedejfe, let happen what would. The future of the fubjundtive mood follow gene- rally thefe, logo que, quando, fe, cbmo, &c. ; as, logo que chegar iremos a pajfear, as foon as he comes, we will go and take a walk; quando vier, efiaremos promptos, when he comes we will be ready. Obferve, that quando and logo que may alfo be conftrued with the indicative mood ; as, quando el , rey ve tudo, nao o enganao, when the king fees every thing, he is not deceived ; logo que chegbu,fallei com Me, as foon as he came, I fpoke with him. Of the Infinitive Mood. In Portuguefe there is not a general flgn before the infinitive, as in Englifh the particle to; but there are feveral particles ufed before the infinitive, denoting the fame as to does in Englifh, and they are governed by the preceding verbs or nouns. Thefe particles are the following: a, para, de,com, em, por, ate, dejpois de ; and the article o, when the infinitive ferves as a nominative to another verb ; as, o dizer e o faz'er Jad duas coufas, faying and doing are two different things. A coming between two verbs, notes the fecond as the object of the firft ; as, a tardanca das noffas efperangas nos enfina a mortificar os nbjjos dezejos, the delay of our hopes teaches us to mortify our de- fires ; ille comeca a difcorrer, he begins to reafon. Para notes the intention or ufefulnefs ; as, a ad- verfiddde ferve para experiment ar a paciencia, adver- fity ferves to try one's patience. Para after an ad- jective denotes its object ; as, ejla prompt o para obe- decer, he is ready to obey. L 4 De 132 PORTUGUESE De is put between two verbs, if the in ft go- verns the genitive or ablative ; and when the fub- ilantive or adjective governs either of thefe two cafes, de mud go before the following verbs, or in- flr.itive ; as, venho de ver a men pay, I have juft feen my father ; he tempo de hir-fe, it is time to go away $ el rey foi ferv/do de mandar, the king has been pleaf- ed to order. The infinitive is on feveral occafions governed by prepofitions or conjunctions; SiS,fem dizer palavra, without fpeaking a word : where you may obferve it is exprefTed in Englifli by the participle prefent ; as nunca fe canca de jugar, he is never weary of playing ; divertefe em cacar, he delights in hunting; tile ejla dohite por trabalhdr demafiadamente, by work- ing too much he is lick ; perde ofeu tempo em pajjedr y he lofes his time in walking ; hei-de ir-me fern me def ■pedir f {hall I go away without taking my leave ? The infinitive is alfo ufed pafiively ;* as, nao ha que dizer, que ver, &c. ; there is nothing to be faid, feen, &c. The gerund of any verb active may be conjugated with the verb ejlar, to be, after the fame manner as in Englifh ; as, eji ; Ai efcrevendo, I am writing; elle ejlava dormindo 3 he was afleep, &c. CHAP. vr. Of the Syntax of Participles and Gerunds. THE participle in the Portuguefe language generally ends in do, or to; as, amado, vlfio y dito, &c. The active participles that follow the verb ter y to have, muft end in o ; as, Tenho vtfto el rey, I have feen the king. Tenhe GRAMMAR. 153 Tt-nho v'ifto a rainha, I have feen the queen, Eu tinha am a do os livros,! had loved books. Eu t'tnha levado as cartas, I had carried the letters. We meet with authors who fometimes make the participles agree with the thing of which they are fpeaking; as, in Camoens, Canto 1, Stanza xxix. E per que cbmo viftes, tern pa dados, Na viagem tad dfperos per/gps, Taut os climas, e ceos exprimentados, l$c. And Canto 2, Stan, lxxvi. Sad offer ecimentos verdadeiros, E palter -as fine 'eras , nab dobrddas, As que o rey manda a os nbbres cavaleiros, Que idnto mar e 'terras tern paffadas. If it be a verb neuter, the participle ought always to terminate in o: example, El rey tern jantddo, the king has dined ; a rainha tern ceddo, the queen has flipped ; os vojfos am'tgos tern ridoy your friends have-laughed ; minhas irmdas tern dormido, my fitters have flept. When the aclive participle happens to precede an infinitive, it muft be terminated in o ; as o juez Ihe tinha feito cortdr a cabJca, the judge has caufed his head to be cut oft. The paffive participles which are joined with the tenfes of the verb fer, to be, agree with the fubftan* tive that precedes the verb fer ; o capitdb foi lou- vado, the captain was praifed ; a virtude he eftimada, virtue is efteemed; os preguicofos Jab cenfurados, the lazy are blamed ; as wjjas joyas fordo vendidas, your jewels were fold. The Portuguefe generally fupprefs the gerunds having and being before the participles ; as, d'lto ifto, having faid fo ; acahado o i fexmap, the fermon. being ended. This manner of fpeaking is called by gram- marians ablatives abfolute. The participle of the prefent tenfe in Portuguefe has Angular and plural, but one termination ferves for both genders ; as hum homem (entente a Deos, a man 154 PORTUGUESE man fearing God ; huma mblher temente a Deos, a woman fearing God \ homens tementes a Deos, peo- ple fearing God. There are in Portuguese a great many participles which are ufed fubftantively; as, ignorante, amante, ouvinte, eftudante, &.c. ; an ignorant, a lover, an au- ditor or nearer, a fcholar, &c. It is better to place the nominative after the ge- rund than before ; as, eftando el rey na comedia, the king being at the play. CHAP. VII. Of Prepositions. A Prepofition is a part of fpeech which is put fore nouns, and fometimes before verbs, to explain fome particular circumftance. Prepofitions may be divided into feparable and infeparable. An infeparable prepofition is never found but in compound words, and fignifies nothing of itfelf. A feparable prepofition is generally fepa- rated from other words, and fignifies fomething of itfelf. The infeparable prepofitions are, Ab and abs ; as abrogar, to abrogate ; abfter-fe, to abftain. Arce, or arc hi ; as, arceb'ifpo, an arch bi (hop ; #r- chiduque, an archduke. Ad-, as, adventicio, adventitious. Am j as, ambiguo, ambiguous ; amparo, protection, fhelter. Circum -, a s circumfia ncia, circumftance. Co, as, cohabit ar, to live together, to cohabit. Des, ferves to exprefs the contrary of the word it is joined to; as, defacerto, miitake; des/aze^, to un- do ; GRAMMAR. 355 do ; defenganar, to undeceive ; are the contrary of acerto,fazer, and enganar. Dis; as, difpor, to difpofe; diflinguir, to diftin- guifh ; dijiribwr, to diftribute. Ex; as, extrahir, to extract. In, has commonly a negative or privative fenfe, denoting the contrary of the meaning of the word it precedes; as, incapaz, unable; infeliz, unhappy; inac^ao, inaction, &c. ; but fometimes it is affirma- tive, as in Latin. Obferve, that in before r is changed into ir ; as, irregular, irregular; irrational, irrational: before /, into //; as illegitimo, illegitimate; before m, in is changed into im \ as immaterial, immaterial. Ob, as,Qfrviar; to obviate. Pos ; as, pofpor, to poftpofe, or to poftpone. Pre; as, preceder, to go before; predecejjor, an an-, ceftor. Pro; as, propor, to propofe ; prometer, to pro- mife. Re, is a borrowed particle from the Latins, which generally denotes iteration, or backward aclion; as, reedificar, to rebuild ; repercutir, to repercute, or ftrike back. So; a$,focorrer, to help, to fuccour. Ser; as,forrir, to fmile. Sos ; as, fofter, to fupport. Soto ; as, foiopor, to put or lay under. Sttb, or fob; as, fubalterno, fubaltern ; fubfcrever, to fubfcribe ; fobpena, fob color > &e. \ The Arabic article V, which is common to all genders and both numbers, is found in the begin- ning of almoft all the words that remain in the For- tuguefe language from the Arabic, and it is the fureft way to diftinguifh them. But the Portu- guefe articles are added to the Arabic nouns, with- out taking off their article, al, as a almofada, the cuihion ; o Alcarab, the Coran, &c. The 156 PORTUGUESE The Greek prepofition hnli enters into the com- pofition of a great many Portuguefe words, which cannot be fet down here. It is enough to obferve, that it fignifies generally oppoiite ; as in Antipbdas, Antipodes; amipapa> ant i pope; and fometimes it fignifies before; as in antilvaiiio, a preface, a fpeak- ing firft; bat in this latt fenfe it is derived from the Latin prepofition ante. Of fep arable Prepofitions. It is abfolutely impoflible ever to attain to the knowledge of any language whatever, without tho- roughly underftanding the divers relations denoted by the prepofitions, and the feveral cafes of nouns which they govern ; both which relations and cafes being arbitrary, vary and differ much in all lan- guages. This only inftance will evince it : the Englifh fay, to think of a thing ; the French, to think to a things the Germans and Dutch, to think on, or upon a thing; the Spaniards and Portuguefe, to think tn a thing, &c. Now it will avaii an E; >glifh- man but little to know that of\s expreffed in Portu^ guefe by de, if he does not know whichrelations em and de denote in that language ; fince the Portu- guefe fay, to think in a thing, and not of a thing ; therefore we will treat here of each of them., and of their confiru&ion feparateiy. lft. A, or rather ao, as, aos, (at, in, on, &c.) de- note the place whither one is going; as, Euvcua Londres, I go to London. Voltar a Portuga/, to return, or go back to Portu- S al ' J y in this fenfe, is a prepofition, but in the next obfervations, it is a particle. 2dly. ^denotes time; as, chegdr a tempo, to ar- rive in time ; a tbdo o tJmpo, at all times. Sdly. A denotes the way of being, or of doing of people ; as alfo their poflure, geflure, or aclion ; as Ejiar GRA M M AR. 157 Efiar a fua vontade, to be at one's eafe. A direka> on the right hand ; a efquerda, on the left hand. Fiver a fua vontade, to live to one's mind, as one likes. Andar a pi ou a cavallo, to go on foot, or a horfe- back. Montlir a cavallo, to ride a horfeback. CorrerJ reds a foil a t to ride full fpeed. Trajar a Francefa, to drefs after the French way. Fiver a Ingleza, to live after the Englifh fafhion. Andar a grandes paffos, to walk at a great rate. Andar a paffos Isntos, to walk very flowly. 4thly. ^denotes the price of things; as, a oito xelins, at eight millings. It denotes alfo the weight: but as the nouns fignif\ ing weight are generally ufed in the plural number, hence it is that they add s to a, when it is placed before nouns of the feminine gender, and os when it precedes nouns of the mas- culine gender : fo they fay, as cncas, by the ounce ; aos arrateiS) by the pound, &c. A denotes alfo the meafure .; as, med'r a palmos, to'fpan or meafure by the hand extended. When a is preceded by daqui^ and followed by a noun of time, it denotes the fpace of time after which fome thing is to be done: as, el rey partira daqui a tres d/as, the king, will fet out three days hence. 5thly. A denotes the tools ufed in working, as likewise the games one plays at ; as, abr'rr aobitril, to grave; ..wherein you fee they add o to a ; trabal- heir d candea, to do any thing by candle-light; a gulha, with the needle. Andar a vela, to fail, or to be under fail.- Jogjr a pe'a, to play at tennis. Jogar as cartas, to play at cards ; wherein you fee they add J to a when the noun is of the feminine gender, and placed in the plural number. Jogar 158 PORTUGUESE Jogar ads centos, to play at piquet ; wherein yoii fee they add os to a when it precedes nouns fignify- ing games, when they are of the mafculine gend er and put in the plural number. 6lh\v. A fignifies fometimes as. Examp. EJld tjio a flu go/to ? is this as you like it ? And fome- times it fignifies after ; as, a feu mbdo, after his or her way. It fignifies alfo in; as, ho prinapio, in the beginning ; but then they add o to it. 7thly. A is alfo put before the infinitives, pre- ceded by another verb ; as, enfinar a canthr, to teach to fing. It is alfo placed between two equal num- bers, to denote order ; as, dbus a dcus, two by two ; qtilitro a qudtro, four by four : and fometimes it is preceded by a participle or adjective, and followed by an infinitive mood. 8th!y. A is a particle of compofition, ferving to many nouns, verbs, and adverbs, of which it often increafes the meaning ; as, adinheirado, very rich, that has a great deal ot money ; but it generally ex- preffes in verbs the action of the nouns they are compofed of; as, ajoelhar^ to kneel down, which is formed from a and joe/ho, knee ; abrandhr, to ap- peafe ; alargdr, to enlarge ; from brhndo, foft ; largo, wide, 6?r. 9thly. A, when it is preceded by the verb fer, and followed by the pronouns perfonal, fignifies in the ft e ad of ; as,yj? eufbfse a vos,faria aauUo, if I was you (in your place) 1 would do that. lOthly. When a is placed before cafa, and thefenfe implies going to, it is Englifhed by to, but the word cafa is left out ; as, elle fo'i h cafa do governador, he went to the governor's. You muft obferve, that a in this fenfe is a prepofition. 11. A'o pe fignifies near; as, pbnde hum ho pi do butro, place, put, or fet them near one another. Sometimes mefmo comes before ho pe, to exprefs ftill more the nearnefs of a thing, and mefmo ho pe is GRAMMAR. 159 is Englifhed by hard by, just by, &c. ; as, a fua cafa efta me/mo do pe da minha, his houfe is juft by mine. 12th. When the noun refpeito is preceded by a, it is ufed in the fame fenfe as em comparand, but re- quires one of thefe particles, do, da, dos, das, after it, and fignifles in comparifon of, in regard to, in re/pecl of; as, ijlo he nhda a refpeito do que pbffo dizer, this is nothing to other things that I can fay. 13th. When a comes before a verb neuter, it marks a dative; and after a verb active, an accufa- tive cafe. A before the verb propbfi 'to is ufed in familiar dif- courfes ; as, a propbfto, efquecime de dizer vos o butro dia ; now I think on't, 1 forgot to tell you t'other day. 14th. Ab revez, or as avefsas, are alfo ufed as prepofitions, attended by, de,do, da, &c. ; and it fig- nifles quite the reverfe, or, contrary; as elle faz tudo . do revez , or as avefsas do que houvera defer, ou do que Ihe dizem, he does every thing quite the reverfe of right, or contrary to what he is bid. 15th. A before irbco fignifies provided that. It is alfo ufed before the word tiro, as, a tiro de pica, within cannon (hot. i 6th. Car a a car a, cbrpo a cbrpo, fignify face to face, body to body. Tomar 'huma cbufa a boa ou a ma parte, fignifies to take a thing well or ill. Such are the chief relations denoted by the parti* cle a. The others muft be learned in conftruing and reading good Portuguefe books. lft. De, or rather do, da, dos, das, /of, from, &c.) denote, firft, the place one comes from; as, fahir de Lbndres, to go out of London ; vir de Fran- ca, dos l'ndias, &c. j to come from France, from the indies, &c. 2d. De between two nouns denotes the quality of the perfon expreffed by the firft noun ; as, hum ho- mem de hbnra, a man of honour : or the matter which the thing of the firft noun is made of; as, Huma 160 PORTUGUESE Huma eftatua de mar more, a ftatue of marble. Huma pome de madeira on de pedra, a wood or (lone bridge. Note, that two nouns fo joined with de are com- monly Englilhed by two nouns like wife, bat with- out a prepofition, or rather by a compound word, whofe fird noun (whether fubftartfive or adjective) exprefles the matter and quality, manner, form, and life of the other , as a (tone-bridge, huma pbnte de pedra ; a dancing-mafter, hum meftre de danca. 3d. De, do, da, dos, das, are ufed in Portuguefe after the participles of the preterite, wither ; as,fer, amado, ou hem vifio do povo, dos fabios, £sV. ; to be be- loved by the people, by the learned, &c. Note, that do ferves for the mafculine, da for the feminine, and de for both. 4th. De fometimes iignifies by; as, de noite, by night ; de dia, by day. 5th. Be before em, and many nouns of time de- notes the regular interval of the time after which fbmething begins again ; as, eu vou velo de dous em dous d'/as, I go to fee him every other day ; and be- fore nouns of place and adverbs repeated with em or para between, fife denotes the paffmgfrom one place or condition to another ; as, corfer derua em rua, to run from flreet to ftreet; de mal para peor, worfe and worfe. 6th. De after fome verbs, iignifies after or in ; as, elk port kt-fe d'eftaferte^he behaved in or after this manner. 7th. De is ufed before an infinitive, and is then governed by fome preceding noun or verb ; as, ca- paz de enjinar, capable to teach ; digno defer amado, worthy to be loved, &c. ; procurer defazer, to endea- vour to do ; authoridade de pregar, the power or au- thority of preaching, &c:, 8th. De is fometimes Englifhed by on'\ as, por-fe dejoWios, to kheel down tone's knees. 9. De GRAMMAR. 16i 9. De between two nouns denotes the ufe which & thing is defigned for ; as, aze'ite de candSa y la.mp-oi]^ iirma de fogo } a fire-arm ; "moinko de vento, a wind- mill. Note, that this relation is expreffed in Englifn by two nouns, making a compound word : the firft of which fignifles the manner, form, and ufe, denoted by the Portuguefe prepofition ; as, cadetra de bracos, an arm-chair, or elbow-chair ; vela de cera, a wax- candle, &c. 10. De denotes fometimes the quality of things ; as, meyas de ir-es f/os, (lockings w 7 ith three threads. Sometimes it denotes alfo the price ; as, panno de dezoito xeltys, eighteen (hillings cloth. 1 1. De is fometimes Engiimed by upon ; as, viver oufuftentarfe de pe/'xe, to live upon rim. Sometimes it is Engiimed by zmth ; as, morrer de frio, to ftarve with cold. 12. De fometimes fignifies/br or out of-, zs,fa!tar de alegria, to leap for joy , de mode/Io, out of mo- deity. . 13. De (ignifies fometimes at; as, zombdr de al- guem, laugh at one. 14. De is fometimes left out in Englifli ; as, go-, zar de huma eoufa, to enjoy a thing. 15. De followed by two riouns of number and the prepofition ate between them, is Englifhed by be- tween -, as, hum homem de quarinta ate cincoenta-annos % a man between forty and fifty. _ 16. De, preceded by the prepofition didnte, is left out in Englifh.; as, dihnte de mim, before me 3 di- ante de Deos, before God. 17. De when it is placed before cafa, and the fenfe implies coming from, is Englifhed by from ; but the word cafa fometimes is left out in Englifh, and fometimes not; as, venho' de cafa (meaning my houfe) 1 come from home, from my houfe : but when they fay,, venho da cafa de Senkora C, we mud M rendef 163 PORTUGUESE render it in Englifh thus, I am returning from Mrs- Cs. Finally, de is ufed before feveral words ; as, de brucos, lying aM along on the ground ; de madruga- da, foon in the morning ; de veras, in earneft, feri- ously ; de verao, in fummer ; hbmem de palavra, a man as good as his word ; de cbftas, backwards, or on one's back ; andar de pe> to be fickly without being bed-rid : and many others which muft be learnt by ufe. Antes. III. Antes, before, fhews a relation of time, of which it denotes priority ; and is always oppofite to depois, after ; as, antes da criagad do mundo, before the creation of the world. Primeiro is alfo a prepofition ; as, elle chegbu pri- metro que eu, he arrived before me. Diante. IV. Diante, before, fhews a relation of place, and it is always oppofite to detraz, behind. It fig- nifies alfo fometimes em y or na prefenga ; as, ha ar- vores diante de fica cafa, there are trees before his houfe ; pbnde aouillo diante do fbgo, set or put that before the fire ; pregar diante del rei, to preach be- fore the king. Diante is alfo fometimes an adverb, and may be ufed inftead of adiante ; as, ir diante or adiante, to go before : but in the following phrafe you muft fay, nab vades tanto adiante, and not diante, don't go fo far ; por diante is to be Englifhed by on in the fol- lowing phrafe, ide por diante, go on. Depots. V. Depots, after, denotes pofteriority of time, and it is ufed in oppofition to antes -, as, depots do diluvio, after the deluge : depots do meio dia, after noon. Depois alfo is ufed with an infinitive ; as, feito aquilh, or iendofetto aauillo, or depois defazer aquillo, after GRAMMAR. 163 after having done that ; and it is alfo made a con- junction with que, governing the indicative ; as, de- pots que tevejeito aquillo, after he had done that. Detraz. VI. Detraz, behind, denotes pofteriority both ol place and order, and it is faid in oppofition to diante ; as, a fua caja eft a detraz de vojja, his houfe is behind yours ; ilk vinha detraz de mim ; he walked after me. Em. VII. Em, or no, na, nos, nas, (in, into, within, &c.) denote a relation both of time and place. The many various fignifications in which thefe prepofi- tions are ufed, muft be accurately obferved,.and much regard had to them in the practice. No and na are fometimes rendered into Englifh by a ; as, duas vezes no dia> nafemana, &c. twice a day, a week, &c. No, na, Sic. are always ufed before nouns de- noting the place wherein fomething is kept ; as, ejla no gabinete, it is in the clofet ; na papeleha, in the bureau ; nas gavetas, in the drawers ; na rua, in the ftreet, &c. but fometimes they are Englifhed by upon ; as, cahir no chad, to fall upon the grbund. Em, no, na, &c. fignifies commonly in ; as, em Londres, in London ; ejla na graga del rey, he is in favour with the king; but in feme cafes it has a very particular meaning 3 as, ejlar em cbrpo, which fignifies literally to be in body ; but the .true fenfe of it is to be without a cloak ; fo that the body is more expofed to view without an upper garment. Eft at em pernas, literally, to be in legs, fignifies to be bare- legged; that is, the legs expofed without ftockings. Eftar em camija is faid of one that has only the fliirt on his back. When this prepofkion em is before an infinitive in Portuguefe, then it is an Englifh gerund ; as, conffte em fallat bem y it confifts in fpeaking well ; M 2 but 164 PORTUGUESE but when it is found before a gerund, it fignifies as foon ds\ as, em acabando irei, as foon as I have done, I will go. Nos nqjpjs tempos is Englifhed by now a-days. Em is ufed in fentences that imply a general fenfe ; as, Elle ejla em miferavel eft ado, he is in a wretched condition; and not no miferavel: but if the fentences imply a particular fenfe, you muft make ufe of no, nas, &c. as, no miferavel eft ado em que elle efta, in the wretched condition wherein he is ; and not em mife- ravel. You rnuft obferve in this laft example and the like, that you ought to make ufe of em before que, and not of no, na, &;c. which are to be placed only before qual; therefore you muft not fay, no miferavel eflado no que elle ejld ; but you may fay, no miferavel eflado no qual elle eft a. Note, that em conftrued with pronouns without an article, makes a sort of adverb, rendered into Engliib by a prepofition and a noun; thus in this fentence, nos ire mo s em coche, we fhall go in a coach, em cbche is an adverb of manner, which fliews how we fhall go: but #0^0^ denotes fomething befides - as if a company were confidering how they fhall ride to a place, fomebody would fay, vos ircis na cadei- rinha, e nos no cbche, you fhall go in the chair, and we in the coach ; no coche would be faid in oppofi-- tion to na cadeirinha, and both refpeclively to fome fpecified chair and coach ; or elfe they fliould fay, vos ircis em cadeirinha, enos em coche. But in this other fentence, eu deixei men chapeo no cache, I left ray hat in the coach, it would be improper to fay em ecekei becaufe fome particular coach is meant, to wit, that which has drove me here or there, or which has been fpoken of. We fay de verab, no verab or em verab ; de inver- no, no inverno, &c. in fummer, in winter, &c. Em is alfo rendered into ' Englifh by at; as, em to do tempo, at all times. Mm GRAMMAR. I6S Em is ufed, and never no, na, &c. before proper names of cities and authors ; as, elle ejla em L6ndres y lie is in London; nbs lemos em Cicero, we read in Tully. But they fay no Porto, in Oporto. Em, and no, na, &e. are conftrued with the names of kingdoms; as, em or na, Inglaterra, in England : bat no, na, is moil commonly conftrued with names of provinces ; as, no Alentejo, na Beira, &c. in Alen- tejo, in Beira, &c. Em is fome times rendered into Englifh by into : as, Narc/fo foi transformado em Jlor, Narcifsus was rhetamorphofed into a flower : and fometimes by to ; as de rua em rua, from flreet to flreet. No, na, are fometimes rendered into Englifh by againfti as, dar cb a cabega na pdrede, to dafli one's head againft the wall. No, na, &c. are alfo rendered into Englifh by in, and fometimes by into-, as, ter hum menino nos brdgos> to hold a child in one's arms ; entregar alguma coufa nas mlm, de alguem, to deliver a thing into fome- body's hands. Em is ufed before the word travez, as in this phrafe, por-fe de mar em travez com alguem, to fall out together. Em before a noun of time, denotes the fpace of time that Hides away in doing fomething ; as, el rey foi a Hanover, em tres dias, the king went to Hanover in three days ; that is, he was no longer than three days in going. 'Em is fometimes ufed after the verb Mr, to go ; as, vai em quatro mefes que eu aqui cheguei, it is now go- ing on four months since I came hither. Em before quanto, and fometimes without it, is rendered into Englifh by zvliile or whilfl ; .as, em quanto vos fazeis aquillo, eu farei tjto, while you do that, I fhall do this : but if they are followed by a noun of time with an interrogation, then they mud be rendered into Englifh by in how much, or many, as, em quanto temp $ in how much .time P You muft M 3 obferve 166 PORTUGUESE obferve, that em quant o a mim, a ti, a elle, &c. arc rendered into Englifh by for what concerns me, thee, him, &c. You mud: obferve that no ferves for the mafcu- line, na for the feminine, and em for both. Em Signifies as ; as, em final da fua amizade, as a token of his friendfhip; ewpremio, as a reward. The prepofiticns em, no, na, &c. and dentro, have very often the fame fignification, therefore they may fometimes be ufed one inftead of the other ; as ef- id na gave/a, or dentro da gaveta, it is in the drawer; eft a na cidade, or dentro da ciddde, he is in town. Em before the words favor, iitiliddde y confidera- ■ cam, razcw, and the like, fignifies in behalf of, for the fake of, on account of, &c. as, em razdo das bellas accbens que die temfeUo, in confideration of the great things he has performed. Obferve, that they very often make an elifion of the laft vowels, o, a, of the prepofition no, na> -when there is a vowel in the beginning of the next word ; n'agoa, inftead of na agoa; they alfo cut off the e of the prepofition em, and change the m into n, as you may fee in Camoens, Canto 2. Stanza xxxii. n'algum porto, inftead of em algumporto, where- in you muft obferve that n' is to be Englifhed by to, or into. Com. VII. This prepofition fignifies with, and it denotes conjunction, union, mixing, afTembling, keeping company ; as, cafdr huma donzella com hum hbmem honrddo, to marry a maid with an honeft man ; hir €om dlguem, to go with one ; com a ajuda de JDeos, by God's help, &c. , Obferve that moft of the adverbs formed of the adjectives are turned in Portugucfe by the pre- pofition com and the fubftantive ; as, atrevidamente, boldly, com atrevimento, with boldnefs ; elegante- mente % GRAMMAR. 167 mhite, elegantly ; com elegdncia, with elegance ; cor- tezmente, politely, com cortez'ta, with pohtenefs, &c. You rauft obferve, that the laft confon-ant m is very often cut off, even before the noun of number hum, one ; and fo they fay cum> inftead of com hum, as you may fee in Camoens, Cant. i. Stanza xxxvu. Note, that with me, with thee, with himfclf, &c. are rendered into Portuguefe by commigo, comtigo, or comvqfco, comf/go, comnofco, comvofco, comfigo. When com is preceded by para, it fignifies to- wards, and fometimes over, in Englifh ; as, fcjdmos piedofos para com os pbhres, let us be merciful towards the poor. Ter grdnde podir para com dlguem, to have a great influence over fome. body's mind. Com before the word capa is ufed metaphorically, and then it fignifies under colour, or pretext. Para. VIII. Para is rendered into Englifh by fori but it fignifies alfo to, when it is found before the infinitive, and denotes the intention, or purpofe in doing fomething ; as, efte livro he para meu irmdo, this book is for my brother ; ifia pinna he para efcrcvir, this pen is to write ; Deos nos fez para amdlo, God made us for to love him ; o comer he necejjdrio parti confervdr a vida, eating is neceflary for preferving life. Para que is rendered into Englifh by for what \ as, para que he iflo? for what is this ? and fometimes by that, or in order that ; as, par a que venha verme, that he may come and fee me. But porque fignifies why, for what, upon what account, as, porque ndo vmdes? why don't you come? but when it is not followed by an interrogation, it fignifies becaufe. Para ferves likewife before the verbs, to denote what one is able to do in confequence of his prefent dispofition; as, elle he baf ant emente forte parii anddr a cavdllo, he is ftrong enough to ride ; elle tern ba- M 4 flante 468 PORTUGUESE fidnte cabedal para fujlentdr fe y he has means enough to maintain him felt"; a occafad he mu/to favordve! far a nos ndo fervfr-mos della, the occafion is too fa- vourable.to let it (lip. Para expreffes alfo the capacity or incapacity of doing any thing ; as, elle he hbmem para ifio y he is the proper man wanted for this • hehdmem para pbu- co y he is good for little ; he hbmem para Jidda, he is good for nothing. This prepcliiion is alfo ufed to denote the end or motive of. company thing; as, trabdlho para o hem r dblicO) I work for the public good ; hum hofpitdl para os pbbres y an hospital for the poor. Pardk a prepoiinon of time ; as if to me baft a para iodo o dnno-y this is iufficient to me for all the year; .eft do unidos para Jem pre, they are united for ever; far a dcus mefes era muilo pouco y for two months it was too little. Para is fometimes preceded by the adverb la, and followed by a noun of time, and then it is Enghfh- ed by again ft or towards; as, la para o Jim dafema- na, againft the end of the week, or towards the end of the week. Para is fometimes Englifhed by confidering y or with refpeel %0; as, efte menino eft a mm to adianiddo -para a idade que tern, or para o pbuco tempo que aprende, this child is very forward for his age, or confidering the little time he has learned ; para Inglez fdlla demajiadamente, he talks too much confidering that he is an Engliihman. 'Para ifigniiks fometimes juft or ready to ; as, elle cfid para part/r, he is juft going away, he is ready to go. Para is alfo ufed before the word grdcas ; as, elle nab he paid grdcas, he takes no jeft; elle ndo eft a para grdcas, he is out of humour, or he is in an ill humour. Para onde f fignifies whither f to what place f Para G RAIMA R. 169 Para que? or -para que fim f fignifies /^ what end or purpofe ?■ Para c'rma iignifies upward. - Para hhna e oitira parte, iignifies to both fides, places, or parts. Para is alfo Englifhed by tozvards, and Is laid of places ; 2LS,para o oriente, towards, or to the Call. Para ,6nde quer que, iignifies whether, or to what place thou wilt, any whither. Para outra parte, {ignifies towards another place. Para comigo, towards me. Para o dUinte, fignifies/or the time to coivL De fnjm\ para mim, fignlfies for what concerns me. Para is ufed by Cainoens. Cant. 2, Stanza xxiv. before the p reposition detraz, and iignifies back- wards. . Para between two nouns of number is Englifhed by or, and fometimes by and -,as, hum homem de quarenta para cincoenta annos, a man between forty and fifty ; difla quatro para cinco legoas, it is about four or five leagues difta'nt. Por. IX. Por,pello,pella, p silos, or peU as, fignify for ; as por amor de vos, for your fake ; por feh fern anas, for iix weeks; palavra por paliivra, word for word. Polo and pola in Head of pello and pel/a, are out of ufe. Por fometimes denotes that the thing is not 'yet done ; as, eft a Sbra eft a por acahar, this work is not yet finiihed. Par, by, for, over, or through ; as, a J cance?-o por empenho, I obtained it by protection ; eu vou por dinheko, I am going for money ; pafeo pellos carnpos, I walk through the fields ; pot iodo o re/no, ail over the kingdom. When por is before an infinitive, and followed by a negative, in the latter part of the fentence, it is Englifhed by although or though ; as, por fer devota^ or por devota que fejafnao de'xa de fer mother, though jhe 170 PORTUGUESE fhe is a religious woman, yet me is a woman ; por fer pbbre, or por poire que feja, nab deixa de fer foberba, though fhe has no fortune, fhe is neverthelefs, or for all that, proud. Wherein you fee, that the negative with the verb deixdr, are rendered into Englifh by the verb to be, and the particles never thelefs, yel % &c. You muft obferve that they fometimes put the words item por iffo before the verb deixdr, but the fenfe is the fame, and you may as well fay, por fer pbbre y item por (/Jo de'ixa, &c. Por followed by an adjective and the particle que with a verb in the fubjunctive mood, is rendered into Englifh by never fo ; as, por grande que elle feja, let him be never fo great; por pouco que feja, ne- ver fo little. Por, before menos y fignifies far lefs than, or under ; as vm ce nab o terd pormenos de v'mte libras, you lhall not have it under twenty pounds. Por before qudnto, with an interrogation, fignifies for bow mueby at what rate? But if there is no in- terrogation, as in the following and the like fen- tences, then it is to be Englifhed by for never fo much-, as, nab o faria por qudnto me dJJJem, I would not do it for never fo much. Por before cima fignifies upwards, and before bdxo is Englifhed by downwards; as, o remedio bbra por cima e por bdxo, the medicine operates, or works, up- wards and downwards. Por before pouco, muito, bem, &c. and followed by que, makes a fort of conjunction governing the fub- junctive, and is Englifhed by if, followed by ever or never fo little, much, well, &c. as, por pouco que erreis, if you do amifs never fo little ; por bem que eu faca, if I do never fo well, &c. Por before mim fignifies fometimes as for, or for all; as, por mim eftou prbmpto, as for me, or, for my part 1 am ready ; por mim podeis dormirfe quizerdes, you may fleep for all me. Por GRAMMAR. 171 Por, pello, pella, &c. denote the efficient caufe of a thing, as alio the motive and means, or ways of do- ing ; in all which fignifications they are Englifhed by by, through y out of, at, &c. as, • A Afia fol conquftiada por Alexandre, Afia was con- quered by Alexander. Fos fallals nijjo Jo por enveja, it is out of envy only you fpeak of it. Elk entrbu pella porta, mas Jahio pella janella, he got in at the door, but he got out at the window., &c. Por denotes place, after the verbs ir and pajfar ; as, por onde ireis vos ? which way mall you go ? En pajfarei por Franca, I'll go through France ; por onde pajfou elk ? which way did he go? Por conftrued with nouns without an article, de- notes moil times diftribution of people, time, and placet and it is Englifhed by a, or every, before the noun; as, Elk deu tanto por cabe$a,he gave so much a head. Tanto por foldddo % por anno, por mes, por femdna, &c. fo much a foldier, a year, a month, a week ; a razad de vint e por cento, at the rate of twenty per cent. s Elk pede tanto porlegoa, he afks fo much a league, or every league. Por, between two nouns without an article, or between two infinitives without a prepolition, de- notes the choice which one makes between two things, alike in their nature, but different/in their circumftances ; as, Cdfa por cdfa, antes quero eft a que aquella, fince I mud have one of thefe two houses, I like this better than that; morrerpor mbrrer, melhor,he morrer comba- tendo quefugindo y when a man mufl die, it is better to die in fighting than in running away. Pello meyo is rendered into Englifh by through ; as, pello meyo dos cdmpos, through the fields. Por meyo is rendered into Englifh by by ; as, elk alcangou ofeu intento por meyo de aftucias t he has com- pafled his ends by devices. For 173 PORTUGUESE 'P&Hififnd fig nifties in one s s turn. Per bcfoie the infinitives is ufed inftead of \ pard by -the beiV Portuguese writers j and porque ihftead of para que ; as you may fee particularly in Camcens, Canto 2: Stanza vn. and viir. and in the following example, por ncid, or para Had repctir que ja tenios dito,- not to repeat -what we have already faid. Por is fometimes Englifhed by for, upon the ac- cmni of y for fake \ &c. as, Idle far a if 10 por amor de vos, he will do this upon your account, cr for your fake ; deixaraoo por morto\ he was. left for dead ; eu thiho-o for vi;H an' go, I take him to be my friend; tcdos os homers de hem fab, or ejlao por elle, all honefl: people are for him, -or are on his fide; por quern me tomdis in time paft y hereto* fore. Por fienhum cafo, by no means. Por mar e por terra, by fea and land. Hum por hum fignifies one by one. Por is fometimes Englifhed by in ; as, e lies fad vinte,por t6dos,&\ty are twenty in all When the verb paffdr is followed by dor, then the word alto signifies to forget ; as, pajjou I be apdllo por alio % GRAMMAR in alto, he forgot that; but fpeaking of goods itiignU ties to fmuggle. ... Por joined with the verb ir flgnifies to fetch, and feek after ; as, vai for vinho, go /etch fome wine ; vat fello medico, go fee for the phyfician. Por is commonly ufed before th-efubftamives; as, for exemplo, for example; por commodiddde, for con- venient y ; por co ft urne, for cud cm fake ; and many- others, that may be learned by ufe. You mud obferve, t\ia.t fello ferves for the mafcu'- line, fella for the feminine, and por for both.' Contra. \ X. Contra, (againft, contrary to), denotes dp por- tion ; as que d/z vm ce contra ffto f what do you fay againft this? It Signifies aifo over againft, oppcfite tol Pro e contra flgnifies in EiiglKh pro and con. Befde. . XI. Befde, denotes both time and place, and enu- meration of things, and is commonly followed in the fentence by the prepofition ate (to) ; then defde de- notes the term from whence, and ate that of hitherto - as, Befde o pnncipio ate o Jim, from thQ beginning to the end. • Elle for a pe defde Windfor ate Londres, he walked from Windfor to London. Eu ienho vifto tedos defde o ' primeiro ate o 'ultifrio, I have feen them -all from firft to 'laft ; fordo iodos ?nbr- tos defde \o primeiro ate o ultima, they were all flain to a man. Befde a criacao do. m undo y from or finc'e the crea- tion. Befde o bh-Qo % ou infancia, from the cradle, from a child. 174 PORTUGUESE Defde ja, even now ; as, defde ja prevejo,' I even now forefee. Defde agora, from this time forward. Defde entdo, from that time ever fince. Defde que, as foon as, when. Defde quando ? how long fince, or ago ? Rio navegavel defde o feu nacimento • a river naviga- ble at its very rife. Ate. XII. Ate fignifies till, even, to, &c. as you may fee in the following examples. Ate bnde ? how far ? Ate Roma, as far as Rome. • Ate quando ? till when, or how long ? Ate que eu viva, as long as I live. He hum hbmem de tanta bondade, que ate os feus ini- migos fad obrigados a eftimalo, he is fo good a man that even his enemies have a value for him. Ate os mats vis hcmens tomavdo a liberdade de, &c. the very worft of men took fuch a liberty as to &e. Ate que, until, till. Ate as orelhas, up to the ears. Elle vendeo ate a camifa, he has fold the very fhirt off his back. Ate agora, or ate aqui, till now, or hitherto. Ateaqui, (fpeaking of a place) to this place, hither, fo far. Ate Id, to that place, fo far. Ate tanto que ifiofe faga, till it be done. Ate entdo, till then, till that time. Ate is alfo ufed before an infinitive ; as, gritar ate enrouquecer, to bawl one's felf hoarfe. Rir ate arrebentar pellas ilhargas, to fplit one's fides with laughing. Dar de comer a alguem ate arrebentar', to fill, or cram one with victuals till he burfts. Ate GRAMMAR. 175 Ate a primeira, till our next meeting, till we meet again. Por cima. XIII. Por cima (above, over), denotes fuperiority of place ; as, Mordr por cima da alguem, to live or lodge above fomebody. A balla /he pajjou por cima da cabeca, the ball went over his head. Por cima de tudo, upon the whole. Para cima. XV. Para cima (above) denotes fuperiority of age, and is fometimes put at the end of the fentence; as, Elles aliftarao tbdos que tinhao de dez annos para cima, they enlifted every body above ten. A cima. XV. A cima, (above) denotes rank, and fome moral fubjecls \ as, A cima delle, above him, or fuperior to him. Eftar a cima de tudo, to be above the world. Huma molh'er que ejla a cima de tudo, nem fe the da do que o mundo diz della, a woman who is above the public's cenfure, who don't care what people fay of her. Em cima. XVI. Em cima (upon) ; as em cima de mefa, upon the table. Em cima de tudo ijlo, or only em cima, fignifies and bejides all that, over and above all that. De cima. XVII. De cima, when it is an adverb, fignifies from above ; but when a prepofition, it is Englifhed by from, off, ox from off -, as, Tirai 176 PORTUGUESE fired aquillo de ctma da me/a, take that from off the table. Elle nunca- tirbu osfeus ollios de ctma delha, he never turned his eyes from her. Cahtr de ctma das arv'ores, to fall off the trees. Debaxo. XVII I. The prepofition debaxo, (under, below, or from under) denotes the time and place; I fay the time of a denomination of a reign, or government ; as, debaxo do imphio de Augufio, under the empire of Auguftus. Debaxo, as a prepofition of place, marks out in- feriority of pofition ; as, Tudo o que ha debaxo dos ceos, all there is under heaven. Ter huma almofada debaxo dos joelhos, to have a -cufhion under the knees. Eftar debaxo da chkve, to be under lock and key. Debaxo is fometimes rendered into Englifh by up- on ; as, affirmar huma cLufa debaxo de juramenio, to fwear a thing, to- declare upon oath. Abaxo. XIX. This prepofition is rendered into Englifh by under, inferior, or next ; as, affentou fe abaxo delles, he fat inferior, or under them; as, affentou-fe logo de mini; he fat next, inferior to me, or he was next man to me : abaxo del ret elle he o primelro, he is the next man to the king. This prepofition is fometimes put at the end of the next' prafes, de telhas abaxo, herebelow,- in this lower worlds de cabeca abaxo, headlong. For a, XX. Fbra, (out, without, except, but,) denotes ex- cluiion, and exception. It requires generally a ge- nitive before a noun of time, or place; but it go- verns alfo the nominative ; as, Fbra ' GRAMMAR. 177 Fora do reyno, out of the kingdom. Fora da cidade, out of town. For a de tempo, out of feafon. Procurdi-o fora de cdfa, look for him without doors. Files fahirao todos, fora dous on /res, they all went out except, or but two or three. Elle Ihe permete tudo, fora o ir as ajfembleas, he indulges her in every thing, but in going to alTem- blies. Elle tem todos os poderes, fora o de conclulr, he has full powers, except of concluding; Fora is fometimes preceded by tad, and then it is to be rendered into Englifh by fo far% as, elle efia i do fora de focorrer os feus aUlddos, que fe declara con- tra elles, he is fo far from aflifting his allies, that he declares himfelf againft them. Fora is fometimes rendered into Englifh by be- fides .; as, fora daquelles que, &c. befides thofe that, &c. and fometimes by beyond ' ; as, fora de medida, beyond meafure. Fora de boras 'fignines beyond the hour, or very late.. For Mguem fora da porta, or mandar dlguem pella porta fora, to turn one out o( doors. / De f route, or front e. This prepofition governs the genitive, and figni- fies over-againjl. It is followed by de, do^ da, &c, De frbnie da fua cafa ejla hum outeiro, over againft his hotife is a hill. Eu eftdva de front e dell e, I was over againft him ? Sem. Sem Signifies without ; as, Sem dinheiro, without money. Sem duv'ida, without doubt. Sem fim, without end. Sem dar a entender, or fern fazer conhecer, with* t>ut giving to understand. • N Sem 17S r PORTUGUESE Sem mais, nem menos, without any reafon or pro- vocation. E liar fern amo, to be out of place. Sem que a/gum aclo precedente poffa derrogar o pre- fente, any former act to the contrary of the prefent notwithftanding. Sem governs alfo the infinitive, which is render- ed into Englifh with the participle ; as, fallar fern faber, to fpeak without knowing. It is alfo a conjunction with que, governing the fubjunctive; as, Enfada-fefem que Ihe digao nada, he is angry with- out any body faying any thing to him. Nad era euja bajtantamente infeliz,femque procuraf- feis de acrecentar a minha infelicidade? was I not miferable enough before, but you mull ftill labour to make me more fo? Lembro-me fern que mo digais, I remember with- out your telling. E'lle vird fern que mdndem por elle, he will come without fending for. Confbrme, or fegundo. XXIII. Confbrme or fegundo (according to, con- formable to), govern the nominative, and never the dative as in Englifh } as, Elle Jot trathdo confbrme ofe'u merecimento, he was treated according to his deferts. Conforme o men parecer, in my judgment, in my opinion. In common converfation conforme is ufed adver- bially, and Englifhed as follows: Tffo he confbrme, or only confbrme, it is as it hap- pens ; may be yes ; may be not ; that is according. Confbrme a occafiao o pedir, according as there fhall be need. Sbhfe. XXIV. Sbbre fignifies upon; 2.%, fibre a mefa, upon the table ; fibre o rio % upon the riven Sbbre G R A M M A ft, i79 Sbbre tudo, or fibre ibdas as cbufas, over all* above all, above all things, above any thing, efpecially; as, fibre tudo tende cuidado na faude, but howfoever the matter be, mind your health. P6r alguem fibre fi, or dar Ihe o primeho lugdr> td place one above himfelf. Ir fibre kutna cidade, to befiege a town. Ir fibre alguem, to fall, or to rufh upon one* Ir fbbre feguro, to go upon fure grounds. Sbbre a no'ite, about or towards the evening. Sbbre o verde, fomewhat green. Sabre a minha palavra, upon my word. Sbbre palavra, upon parole. Mandar carta fbbre carta, to fend letter upon letter* E'lle recebeo a carta fibre jantar, he had juft dined when he received the letter. Elle dbrme fibre jantar, he fleeps prefently after dinner; Sobre ifto, or fibre J/tas coufas, is fometimes Eng- lilhed by more than that, or be fides that j as, Elle roubbu-o, e fbbre ifto matbu-o, he robbed him, and more than that, he killed him. Sobre que, is rendered into Englim by though or although; as, Efte negbcio fibre que he difficultbfo, nao he impoffivei, altho' this is a hard affair, yet it is not impoflible* Sbbre is Englifhed fometimes by befides : as, Sbbre as miferias da guerra, elle t eve a dif grata, &c« befides the miferies of the war> he had the misfor- tune of, &V. Eftar fibre fi, or andar fibre ft, fignifies to Hand Upon one's guard. Eu vos efcreverei fbbre efta materia, I will write to you about this matter. 4 Acerca. XXV. Acerca fignifies about; as, acerca dtfto Ihe dzffe, about this I told him; acerca de la ir Ihe re-> fpondi, about going there I anfwered him, N 2 . Perto, 180 PORTUGUESE Per to, junto, do pe, pegado. XXVI. Perto (near by, about) denotes proximity of place and time, and governs the genitive cafe; as aqnillo efia muito perto do lume, that is too near the fire; per to das oho hbras, about eight o'clock. Perto do rio, near the river. F/tdmos perto do Natal, we are near Chriftmas. Ao pe requires alfo the genitive cafe; as, Afjentaivos ao pe de mini, fit down by me, or near me ; to pe do rio, near the river, &c. Note, that junto (near or by) and pegado (hard by) require the dative cafe; as, Junto a ridhde, near the town. Pegado do paldcio, hard by the palace. •Longe. Longe, far, a great way off, governs the genitive, and the particle, de, or do, da, ckc. as, Longe de cafa, far from home. . Longe daqui, far from hence. De longo, or do longo. This prepofition requires the genitive cafe; as, Ab longo da pray a, along the fhore. Ao longo da cbfta, do prddo, &c. along the coaft, the meadow, &c. Of further Particles. Ainda, ainda que, pbf toque or quando hem, ainda ajjim or com iudo. Ainda fignifies yet; as, Hie ainda ndo veyo, he is not come yet. It fignifies alfo even ; as, feria vergbnha ainda o foliar niffo, it were a fhame even to fpeak of it ; nem ainda por cem Ytbras, no not for a hundred pounds. Ainda que fignifies, though, or although ; as, ainda que vos fbis mais velho do -que elle, though you be older than he ; ainda que ajjim fbffe, though it were io. At fid* GRAMMAR. til Ainda que, is very often followed by com tudo, yet foralJ that; as, ainda que elle nadtivejjenecejfidade d/ffo com tudo, &c. though he had no need of it, yet, Ainda affrm, or com tudo, is fometimes Englifhed by neverihelefs, or for all that \ as, ainda ajjim fempre elle foi louvavely.hz was praife- worthy for ail that. J a defde, j a que zndja por que. Ja defde is rendered into Engiifh by even from ; as, ja defde o principle, even from the beginning. Ja que, fignifiesyf//^ ; as, Ja que iffo ajjim he, fince it is fo. The particle que fometimes is not placed imme- diately after ja-, as, ja ha dous annos que morreo,\\o. died' two years fince or ago. Ja ha muitb tempo que fahijles de cdfa, it is a long time fince you went from home. Ja por que, is repeated in the fame fentence, and then the firft is rendered into Engiifh by firft, be- caufe ; and the fecond by fecondly, becaufe-, 3.s,japor que era cego, ja por que era coxo, firft becaufe he was blind, and fecondly becaufe he was lame. Depois que. Depots que is rendered into Engiifh by after -^ as, Depois que eu tlnha entrado, after I was gone in. Com que. Com que is only a note either of introduction, or connexion ; as, Com que havia hum hbmera enfermo, &c. now a cer- tain man was fick; fometimes they add to it the particle aff'im, and then it is to be rendered into Eng- iifh by and fo. Ou. Ou fignifies or, or either ; as, ou bom^ ou mao, either good or bad > mais ou menos, more or lefs j ou elle queha > ou nao, whether he will, or no, N 3 Qner, 182 PORTUGUESE Quer. Quer, when a .partible, rn uft be repeated, and the firft is ren^er^d^inio; J&gjiftl by either or whether, and the \fe& J fi'd : By^';^as, ^*r ?//? 2#*/ra quer nho 9 whether he will or no -, quer vos o tenhciisfeito, quer nao, whether you have done that, or no. Se quer, or ho menos. Se quer or ho menos, &c. fignifies at leafl, how- ever; as,fe vos nao quer Sis fer por elle nao fejhisfe quer contra elle, if you don't chufe to be for him, at lead don't opppfe him ; dai-lhe fe quer com que fufle?ithr-fe, give him at leaft a fubfiftence -, o noffo prime'irofim he de livrhrnqs de todos os males, ho menos dos mayores, our chief end is to be freed from all, however the greateft evils. Nem fe quer hum, is rendered into Englifh by never a one, Jo much, or in the following manner ; as, fordo todos mbrtos, e nem fe quer hum efcapou, they were all (lain to a man. Qtihndo muito. Qudndo muito, (at mod, at farther!, at long run), is generally ufed before the nouns of time and price; as, elle eflarh aqui dentro em hum mez quando muito, he will be here in a month at farther!: ; dez libras quando muito, ten pounds at moil. . Tanto, Tanio, fo much, is fometimes followed by como,, and then it is rendered into Englifh by as well as 9 as much as, &c. A' mo te tanto como a mim mefmo, I love thee as well as myfelf. Elle teme tanto como qualquer de vos, que Ihe refulte- $lguvi dam, he is afraid ot a harm as much as, any of you, Cuidei GRAMMAR. 183 Cuidti que a eflimaffe tanto cbmo afimefmo, I thought he made as high account of her, as of himfelf. Elles vem tanto de dm cbmo de noite, they can fee as well by day as by night. Eu the tanto cbmo vos, I had as much as you. O'utro tanto is rendered into English by the double, twice as much, or as much ; as, Eualcancei buiro tanto maispor iffo , I had as much more for it ; eu pbffo fazer butro tanto, I can do as , much. Tanto followed by affim, is a particle merely ex- pletive; as, Tanto affim que Ihe -pbffo eu fazer ■? how can I help it; v hite, tanto affm nab ha nada parq, ti, go away, here is nothing for you. Tanto affim followed by que without an interro- gation, is fometimes rendered by fo that, in fo much that ; as, tanto a/Jim que elle nab quer ouvir maisfallar niffo, fo that he will hear no more of it. Tanto mafs is followed by que, and Englifhed by and the more fo as, as, Eu eftbu prbmpto para ir com vm ce hum dia defies a comedia,fe vm ce quizer. Tanto mats que fe deve repre- sent ar huma nova, I am at your fervice to wait on you fome day or other to the play, if you'll give me leave ; and the more fo, as a new one is to be acted. Tanto que, or logo que, is rendered into Englifh by asfoon as; as, tanto que eu o vi, as foon as I faw him. Tanto melhbr is rendered into Engliih by fo much the better. Tanto is fometimes preceded by com, and followed by que, and is Englifhed by fo, provided that h ; as com tanto que ofacais, provided that you do it ; com tanto que me nabfdga mal> fo he do me no hurt. Tanto quanto is Englifhed by as much as-, as, Tanto quanto pbffo> as much as I can, Tad. Tad, to, is generally followed by cbmo; as, n i Ejn 184 PORTUGUESE - Efle nab lie tab bom cbmo o butro, this is not fo good as the other ; eujei 'ijjo tabbem cbmo vos, I know it as well as you. Td*b is fometimes followed by que, and Englifhed hyfo,fuch, to that degree ; as, Elle he t ho prudent e que nao I em igulil, he is fo wife that he has not his match ; nab fbu tab louco que o creya, I am not fo fimple, or I am not fuch a fool as to believe it ; fax tab grande vento que, &c. the wind is fo high that, &c. or the wind blows to that de- gree, &c. Como. Cbmo, is Englifhed by as, like, how, &c. as you may fee in the following expreffions. Como f how ? Dizeime cbmo Ihe hei de fallar ? tell me how I may fpeak to him. Comb affm P how fo ? Cbmo! what ! Como quer que, whereas. Cbmo quer que feja, howfoever, in what manner, or fafhion foever. Seja como for, be it as it will. Como if to aJJ/m he, fince it is fo. Cbmo, as it were, or almoft. Cbmo fe, as if, or even as if; as, cbmo fe elles ti- vejfem ja vencido, as if they had already over-. come. Cbmo tambem, as w T ell as. Rico cbmo elle he, as rich as he is. Cbmofbis men amigo, quero, &c. as (erbecaufejyou are my friend, I'll, &c. Dizeime o cbmo, tell me how. E'u fei cbmo fazer para que elle venha, I know the way I fhall take to make him come. Cbmo elle la nab efieja^ eu irh'> provided he is not there, I will come. GRAMMAR. $M Affim. Affim, io, thus, is rendered into Englifh as you may fee in the following expreffions, Pols he a] Jim de veras .1 de veras que affim he, is it even fo .? it is even fo. Affmfeja, or feja affim, fo be it, or be it fo. Affki he, it is fo. Para affim dizer, as it were. Affim fbu eu louco, que, &c. I am not fo foolifli as to, &c. Affim Deos me falve, as I hope to be faved. Tamo affim, fo ,that. Affim he que vos, &c. is this your way, &c. Affim cbmo affim, after all, neverthelefs, or for all that ; as, em vad dilatdis a vbffa Jornada, affim cbmo affim he pre c if o que vades, it is in vain for you to put off your journey, you muft go thither neverthelefs, or for all that, you mufl go after all. Affim cbmo, as well as, or as foon as. Bafia affim por agora, thus much for this time. Affim na paz, cbmo na guerra, both in time of peace and war. Affim affm, fo Ho, indifferent. Affim queira elle cbmopbde, he can if he will. Affim is fometimes preceded by e ; as, e affm que. quer ifto dizer ? how now? what do you mean by this ? And fometimes affim is followed by cono-, as, affim cbmo ofol eclipfa os but r as planet as, da mefma forte, &c. as the fun eclipfes the other planets, fo, &c. . Se. Se, if; zsfe Hie vier, if he comes; fe me amafses, mould you love ine ; fe elle fiffe hbmem de Lnra, were he but an honeft man; fe foubffem quern iu fu % tbdos diriao, &c. were it told who I am, every one would fay, &c. fe he verddde que, &c. if fo be that, &c. The 186 PORTUGUESE The reciprocal verbs, as well as thofe that arc ufed imperfonally, may have two fe y s joined toge- ther ; asyfefe for, if he goes away ; fe fe falla n/ffo, if they fpeak of it. Se is fometimes rendered into Englifh by whether; and when it is repeated, the fecond is Englifhed by or-, as, Quifera faber fe a culpa he nqffa, fe voffa, I would know whether it is your fault, or ours. Alias. Alias, is fometimes rendered into Englifh by elfe \ as, entrai, porque alias fecharei a porta, come in, or eife I'll (hut the door; porque alilts feriao os voffos filhos immundos, elfe were your children unclean. And fometimes it is rendered into Englifh by other- wife, in other things, or* ref peels, Embora. Embora is fometimes rendered into Englifh by prof per oujly, aufpicioufly ; but fometimes it is a par- ticle merely expletive, and anfwers to the Italian pure ; as, dizei muito embora que quizerdes, fay what you pleafe : the Italian fays, dite pur quel chevi place. Muito embora, /eja affini, well, let it be fo. Embora is fometimes Englifhed by away - 3 as, vkite embora, go away. Senao. Sen/id fignifies if not, did not, were it not that, buf that ; as, Senao tiveffe me do de meu pay, but that I fear my father. Se elle nao tiveffe vergbnha de confeffar, but that he was afhamed to eonfefs. Note, that the following expreffions, in which they make ufe of this particle, may be Englifhed by but, for, and fome other variations. Se naafoffepor elle, but for him, or had it not been for him, or had he not been. Senao GRAMMAR. 187 Senad foffe por vos, had you not been, or had it not been for you, without you, without your help, hindrance, &c. Senad foffe por mim, elk morreria defame, were it not for me, he would ftarve. Senad is fometimes Englifhed by but , as, nem elks tern outro inthito, fenao, &c. nor do they aim at any thing elfe but, &c. Ninguem djfse afsim fenao Cicero, nobody faid fo but Cicero. Senad may be alfo exprefled in Portuguefe by man que in the following fentence, and the like. Elk nao faz fenao, jogar, or elk nddfaz mats que jogar, he does nothing but play. Nao, nab por que. Nad, not, or no, when followed by porque, is Englifhed by not that, not but that ; as, nao porque Ihefaltaffe engenho, not but that he had wit ; nao par- que nao foffe juflo, mas porque, &c. not but that it was right, but becaufe, &c. nao porque a cdufa feja impofshel, mas porque, &c. not that the thing is poi- f;ble, bi^t becaufe, &V, Tamhem, or outroji. Tamhem, or. butrof, fjgnifies alfo, too, likewife ; as* vos afsim 6 quereis e eu t limb em, you'll have it fo, and I too. Para que, porque. See the prepofitions para and por.. Pots. This particle is very much ufed by the Portu- guefe, and it is rendered into Engli(h feveral ways P as you may fee in the following examples : % Pots ide, e vmde logo, go then and come back pre^ fentiy. Pop nao fou Hi capliz de fazella ? what, am I not capable to dp it ? fois t IS8 PORTUG UES'E Pols, or pots cntad que quer dizer ijlo ? Well-, and what of all this. Pols, or pots entab que hei de fazer f What (ball I do then ? Pels eu dlgo que elle eft a dentro, why, he is here within, I fay. Pols purque me vigiliis I Why then do you watch me ? Elle tern cabeca ; pots tambem hum alfinete a tern, he has got a head, and fo has a pin. Pols before nab, and preceded by an interroga- tion, denotes a ftrong affertion, and is Engliilied by without doubt, yes,furely, to be [we, &c. as, vira elle ? pols nab I will he come ? yes to be fure. Antes, or mats deprefsa. Thefe particles are fometimes rendered into Eng- lifli by rather or fooner ; as, antes or mals deprefsa quizera morrer, I would rather die ; antes quizera viverfb que na vofsa companhla, I would fooner live alone than be in your company. Sometimes antes is Engliihed by before ; as, Yde r Jos antes que elle venha, go away before he comes ; antes que eu morra, before I die. Mas antes, pelo contrario, mas pelo contrario. Thefe particles are "rendered into Englifh by on the contrary, on the other hand, nay ; as, mas antes, mas pelo contrario, or pelo contrario iflo he multo dif- ferente, nay it is quite another thing, mas antes, pelo contrario, &x. elle he avarento, nay, or on the contrary, he is a covetous man. Para melhor dizer. This phrafe is rendered into Englifh by nay ; as, elle tern ja bafiante, ou para melhor dizer, mals do necefsario, he has already enough, nay too much ; A Iflo he que nos chamamos dire'ito das gentes, ou para melhor dizer, da razao, this is what we call the law of nations, GRAMMAR. 189 nations, which may be called more properly the law of reafon. Que. We have already obferved that que is a particle which mod conjunctions are compofed of; as, a'mda que, although ; de forte que, fo that, &c. The particle que fometinles is the fign of the third perfons of the imperative, as let in Englifh ;• as, que fulle, let him fpeak ; que riao, let them laugh. Que is ufed between two verbs, to determine and fpecify the fenfe of the firft, as eu vos afseguro que afiim he, I a flu re you that it is fo ; duvido que affim feja, I doubt whether it is fo or no. Que is ufed alfo after hbra in the beginning of a fentence, and followed by a verb in the fubjun&ive, to denote by exclamation one's furprize, averiion, and reluctance -of fomething ; in which cafe there is a verb grammatically nnderfiood before que \ as, hbra que fe efquecefse elle de ft mejmo ! I wonder, or is it poifrble for him to have forgot himfelf ! The exclamation, or admiration, is foraetimes expreffed without any verb; as, que gbfio ; e no me/mo tempo, que pena ! how much pleafure and trouble at once ! Que is fometimes repeated ; as, , Que bellos l/vros que tendes ; what fine books you have got ! que bella que he a virtude ! how beautiful is virtue ! Que is fometimes followed by de ; as, que de Ibucos ha no mundo ! how many fools there are in the world 1 Que is ufed after nouns denoting time, and is fometimes Englifhed by when or fince y &c. and fometimes left out ; as O dia que elle partio, the day when he fat out. Quanto tempo ha que eflais em Londres f how long have you lived in London ? How long is it fince you lived in London ? Ha dez annos que faz a m^fma coufa, he has done the fame thing thefe ten years. m 190 PORTUGUESE Ha dez annos que morreo, he died ten years ago. Que is fometimes rendered into Englifh by becaufe, as you may fee in Camoens, canto 2. ftanza xvL que hvemenie hum animo, and fometimes by thai, to the end that, in order to ; as you may fee ibid, ftanza xvn. que cbmo vifsem, que no r'10, &c. Que before fe in the beginning of a fentence, is a redundancy not exprelfed in Englifli ; as que fe vos dizeis que, if you fay that, &c. Que is ufed after the conjunction a penas (fcarce or hardly), and is Englifhed by but ; as, a penas aca- bbu de fall ar que logo morreo , he had hardly done fpeaking but he expired. Que fometimes is preceded by define, de maneird, de geito, and then it is Englifhed by fo that , in fuck a manner, infomuch that ; as eu o farei de forte que fi- queis contente, I will do it fo that, or in that manner that, you (hall be contented. De veras. De veras fignifies in earneft ; but fometimes it is Englifhed by no fure -, de veras ! ndo o pbfso crer % no fure ! Hora. Hora, or 6ra, is an interjection that ferves to en- courage, as we have feen above ; but when it is re- peated, it is Englifhed by fometimes, one while, another while ; as, ora efta bem, 6ra eft a mal, fometimes he is well, fometimes ill, elk bra efta de hum parecer, e ora de outro, he is now of one opinion, and next moment of another. Por bra, fignifies now, for the present. GRAMMAR/ ' 192 CHAP. VIII. Of the Portuguefe Orthography ; and first of Capitals and Stops. I. t I ^HE proper names, as well as the furnames, JL always begin with a capital. II. The names of nations, kingdoms, and pro- vinces, alfo begin with, a capital; as, Frauce'z, French ; Ing/ez, Englifh, &c. III. All names of dignities, degrees, and ho- nours, require a capital ; as Rey, B/spo, &c. King, Bifhop, &c. IV. At the beginning of a period, as well as of a verfe, the fir(r. letter is always a capital. V. The names of arts and Jfciences, as well as thofe of kindred, begin with a capital. Of Stops. The ufe of flops, or points, is to diftinguifh words and fentences. The Portuguefe have fix flops, or paufes, viz. 1. The ponto finals the fame as our period or full ftop (.), and is ufed at the end of a period, to fhew that the fentence is completely finifhed. 2. The dons pantos^ which is our colon (:), and is the paufe made between two members of a pe- riod -, that is, when the fenfe is complete, but the fentence not ended. 3. The potilo e virgula, our femicolon (;), and denotes that fhort paufe which is made in the fub~ divifion of the members or parts of a fentence. 4. The pbnto e interroga$am, the point of interroga tion thus (?). 5. Ponto e admirachm> the point of admiration thus(!). 6. The virgula, the fame with our comma (,; and is the fhorteft paufe or refting, in fpeech, be- ing ufed chiefly to diftinguifh nouns, verbs, and adverbs, as alfo the parts ^f a fhorter fentence. The 192 PORTUGUESE The conjunction e> the, relative qual, and the dis- junctions ou and nem> require a comma before them. The Portuguefe make ufe alfo of a parentbefis, thus ( ) ; but they do not make ufe of the diasrefis, called by the printers crema {") ; they make ufe alfo of the angu/o, thus a, called by the printers caret. The apoflrophe, or, as they call it, viracento, like- wife takes place in this as in other languages, being defigned only for the more pleafant and eafy pro- nunciation of words, by cutting off an antecedent vowel ; as, d y armas, d y elvas, and not ddrmas, de/vas, &c. But this is fomewhat excufable in cafes where- in, by ufe, they feem to be one word ; as nefta, neste> desta, deste, nalgum y daquelle, nello, nella, daqu't, dali, ateqw, ategcra ; and not em elle y de elle, &c. Of the Accents. The accent, which is the very foul of articulated words, is a found of the voice by which we pro- nounce fome fyllables fhorter, others longer. I intend to fpeak here only of the accents the Portuguefe ought to make ufe of, according to Ma- dureira, in his Portuguese Orthography. The Portuguefe indeed are acquainted with three accents, but they ought to make ufe of two only, namely, the acute, which defcends from the right to the left ('), and the circumflex, thus (*). 1. The acute ferves to prolong the pronuncia,- tion, and is put, according to Madure/'ra, on the third perfon lingular of the future tenfe y as amara, I era, &c. 2. On the penultima of the preterpluperfe£r. tenfe of the indicative mood ; as, amdra, enjinara, &c. 3. The acute accent ought to-be put alfo on the penultima of the third perfons of the prefent tenfe of the verb renunciar, pronuncidr, duvidar, &c, thus renuncia, profunda, duvida, &c. that they may ba GRAMMAR. i 93 he distinguished from the nouns renuncia> pronuncia> duvida, &c. The same accent is also put on esta, no, to distinguish them from esta, this, and 7\o y in the* The vowel o has two sounds, according to the two accents that may be put on it ; one open, when it is marked with the acute accent, and is pronounced like o in store ; the other close, when it is marked with the circumflex accent, and then is pronounced like u in stumble. There are many nouns> both substantive and ad^ jective, which are accented in the singular with the circumflex, and in the plural with the acute; and the adjectives that have two terminations, particu- larly those ending in ofo, o/a 9 must be accented (in the singular) with the circumflex in the masculine, and with the acute in the feminine; a% Fogo] fire ; plural, fogos. Fornoy oven ; plural, fomos^ olhoy eye; plural, olhos. ovoy egg ; plural, ovos. vsso y bone ; plural, 6ssos> Poco t well ; plural, p6c.os. PorcOy hog ; plural, porcos. RogOy prayer ; plural, rogos. And so fojo y tSrno t formSfby fequiofo, JuppdstOy povo t tdrto % torta, copiqfo, cop i 6 fa y &c. The following keep the circumflex accent in both, numbers: bolo> bolos ; bdjo, bSjos ; bdto, botos ; coco, okos ; chorOy cboros ; colo, cotos; forrOy firros ; gordo % gordos ; gostOy go st os f gozo, goZos ; loboy lobos'y mdfo, 'mCgos i nojoy nojos ; potro, potros ; i6lo> tolos >• ferrolho, ferrdlhos ; raposv, raposos ; arrdZy arrozes / algoz, al- gozesy &c. On the contrary, the following keep the acute ac- cent in both numbers : c6po y to'pos ; nwdo, modes ; noffo, vbjjQS ; VqffOy VoffoSy &C. When the accent circumflex is put on the e, then the e is pronounced , like the French mafculine iz> oz t uz, muft have the acute a'ccent on the vowel before rhe z ; as, rapdz, a boy; ndz % a walnut; ahacuz, liquorish: but you must except am-z, rice ; algoz, a hang- man. Nouns ending in ez generally have the circumflex accent ; as mez, a month; marquiz, a marquis ; &c. except the surnames ; as, Alvarez, Antunez, Lopez, Henriquez, Goncalvez, Rodriguez, Perez, Nunez, TelUz, &c. Some Obfervations upon the Portuguefe Orthography . Both the Portuguese orthographers and best au- thors vary so much in their rules and ways of writ- ing, that it is a hard matter, and quite out of any grammarian's way, to clear up thi: part of the Por- tuguese grammar : since it requires no less authority than that of the Royal Portuguese Academy. How- ever, not to omit such a material part of the Gram- mar, I shall present the learners with the following observations. I. When the Latin words from which the Portu- guese are derived, begin with a b, the Portuguese likewise must begin with it ; therefore you must write and pronounce the b, in the following words, bom, bondade, hem, bento, &c. because they are derived from bonus, bonitas, &c. But you must except bainha, bex'iga, bairro, which begin with a b, though they are derived from vagina, vefica, vicus. II. Likewise if the Latin words begin with a v, the Portuguese words derived from them must also begin with it ; as vida, viver, varrer, ver, vinho, &c. from vita, vivere, verrere, videre, vinum, &c. Though b ought to be pronounced only by closing the lips, and v by touching the superior teeth with the inferior lips ; yet, by a certain affinity between these I GRAMMAR. 195 these two letters, in speaking there is a great confu- sion in the pronunciation of them in the province of E'ntre Dburo e Minho: and this confusion has not been peculiar to the Portuguese language, because Nebrixa says, in his Casiilian Orthography, that in his time some Spaniards could hardly make any distinc- tion between these two letters. III. The/> found in some words originally Latin, is changed in Portuguese into a b ; as, cdbra, cabello, cabega, &c. from capra, capillus, caput, &c. IV. The Portuguese generally make use of thejyin the following words : ay, rey,.frey,Iey % may, pay, mayo, meyo, and some others. Bluteau says, than we must make use of the y in words having a Greek origin ; z<$,,fy'llaba, Chryfopeia, pyr amide, polygbno, hydrographia, hydropico, phy'fica, hyperbole, hypbcrita, Apocrypha, &c. V. The ph are used by the Portuguese in some words taken from the Greek ; as, phiiofophia, philo- logia, Philadelphia, epitdphio, &c. VI. The r in Portuguese has two pronunciations, one soft, expressed by a single r, as in arddo, a plough ; and after the consonants b, c, d, f, g, p, t ; and another hard, in which two rr are used 5 as in bdrro,cdrro, &c. But you must observe, 1. That in the beginning of a word two rr must never be used, because then the r is always pro- nounced hard in Portuguese ; as in the words remo, rko, rbda, &c. 2. When the consonants /, n, s, are before the r, either in a single word, or a compound one, this letter must never be doubled, because then its sound is always strong ; as in abalrodr, enriquecer, hbnra, defregrddo, Henrique, Ifraeliia, &c. 3. The r after a b, is also pronounced hard in compounds with the prepositions ab, ob, fub, and yet is not doubled ; as in abrogdr, obrepcao, fub- repcao. VII. The s is never doubled in the beginning of words, nor after the consonants ; therefore you O 2 must 196 PORTUGUESE must y;?he fardr, faber, fa!famente y falfo, manfo, &c* The $ is pronounced like 2 between two vowels, in words derived from the Latin, as well as in those that end in osa, and oso ; as mufa, cafo, rifo, amoroso, cuidadbfo, cafa, &c. You must also observe, that cofcr signifies to fezv, but cozer signifies to boil or bake. VTIL Tb are generally used in words derived from the Greek ; as, ampbitbedtro, atbeifta, tbeblogo, letbdr- go, melbodo, &c. * Tb is also used in the Fortuguese preposition atbe ; though some write it thus.^'. IX. When pt is found in Latin words, it must be kept in the Portuguese derived from them ; as, ap- to y inepto, optimo, &c. from apt us, inept us, optimus,fkc. You must make the same observation about ct. X. Cb is sounded like k\ in words derived from the Greek; as, orcbanjo, arcbiduqiie y Chrysosiomo, cbryfol, cbrifologo, Cbriftovab, monarcbia, &c. These words must be written with cb t in order to preserve to the eye the etymology of words. Note, that cb in words that are not derived from the Greek is pronounced like cb in the English words cburcb, chin, rnucb, &c. but as fome confound the cb with the x, and begin with x thofe words that should begin with cb, 1 thought it necefTary to make a collection of them. Words beginning with CM A Chamalete Chanconeta Chamar Chanqueta Chi Chamariz Chantagem Chaa Chambao Chantmdo Chaca Chacina Chamejar Chami^a Chant re Chao Cha^o. Chacota Chaminc Chamufcar Ghapa Chapado Chafariz Chaga Chalupa Chanca Chancela Chancelaria Chapeado Chalpeleta Chapeo Cbaraa Chanceler Chapim GRAMMAR. 197 Chapim Chibarro Chofrao.o Chapinhar Chibo Chofre Chapuz Chicharos Choldabolda Charamela Chicharro Choque Charameleiro Chichelos Chorar Charco Chicoria Chorrilho Charneca Chic6te Chorro Charneira Chifra Cbovor Charola Chifrar Choupa Charpa Chi he Choupana Charro Chilindrao Choupo, or Chop© Charrua Chilrar Chounco Chafco Chimbeo Choutar. Chafona Chinear Chatim Chincheiro CHU. Chato Chinchorro Chuea Chavao Chinela Chupamel Chavafcal Chiqueiro Chupar Chave Chifpa Chuchurriar Chavalha Chifpar Chuco Chaveta Chifte Chufa Chavinha. Chita. Chumaco Chumbar CHE. CHO. Chumbo Chea, or Cheya Ch6ca Churriao Chefe Choca Churiime Chegar Chocalhar Chiifma Cheriar, and its ox Jhut up ; but forrdr fignifies to faw, to cut timber or other matter with a faw. The following words muft have ei, and not fi > in their beginning. CIA. Cigano Cintura Ciarfe Cigarra Cinza Ciatica. Cigude Cinzerito CIB. Cigurelha. Cinzeiro. Ciba CIL. CIO. Cibalho Cilada Cio Ciborio. Cilhas Ciofo Cilhar Cio fa. cic. Cilicia Cicatrix Cilicio ClP. Cicero Cilladas. Cipo Ciciofo. CID. CIM. Cima Ciprefte Cipriano. Cidadao Cimalha cm. Cidadabs Cimbalo Ciranda Cidade Cimeyra Cirandagem Cidadoa Cimento Cirandar Cidra Cimitarra Circo Cidrada Cimo. Circula^ao Cidrao Circular Cidreira. CIN. Circulo Cinca Circuito CIE. Cincar Circumcidar Ciencia. Cincho Circumcifao Cinco Circumferencia CIF. i Cincoenta Circumfpec"to Cifar Cingidouro Circumfpeccjiio Cifra Cingir Circumftancia Cifrar. Cingulo Circumftantes CIG. Cinnarnorno Cinta Cirio Cirurgia Cigana Cintillar . , Cirurgiao o 4 Cirzir 200 PORTUGUESE Cirzir. Citacao Cit^o CIU " CIS. Citar Ciume Cifcar Citerior Ciumes. Cffco Cithara Cifma Citharedo CIZ ' Gifmatico Citnno Cizania Cifne Civel Cizhao. Ciftercianfe Civil Ciiterna Civiiidade. XI. No Portuguefe word begins with go ; but ac- cording to MadureJra, there are fome that begin with ga 9 and g u ; as gapate s gapeteiro y gargdgo, gitja, gugiddde y gumo y gurra, gurrdr, and fome others. The g is ufed after p in thofe Portuguefe words that have in their Latin root pt ; as dcscripgao y ac- cepcao y &c. from defcriptio, accept io, &c. Of Double Letters. It is to be generally obferved, that the confonants are doubled in thofe Portuguefe words, whofe Latin roots have likewife the Tame double confonants ; as accelerar y hccenio y occidente> &c. from accttero y accentus, Occident^ &c. affligir y affiuencia, ejjirmacao, &c. from affligo> affluentia, affir?natjo y &c. as you will fee in the following collections. B. B is to be doubled in abbdde y abbacidl y abbddia y ab T hades sa y abbreviature abbreviai\ and fome others. C is to be doubled in the following words, and fome of their derivatives. A. Accento Acceita Abftraccao Accentuar Acceitacao Accao Accep^ao Acceitad6r Accietar GRAMMAR. 201 Acceitar D. Obftrucgao Acceflao Decocgao Occafiao Accefsivel Deduccao Occasionar Accefib Desjeccao Occafo Acceflorio Desoccupacao Occidental Accidental Defoccupado Occidente Accidente Defoccupar Occiduo Accelerada Detracgao Occifao Accelerado Diccao Occqrrer Accelerar Diccionario Occultamente Acclamagao Direccao. Occultado Acclamar Diftracgao. Occultar Accomrnodacao E. Occtilto Accomodado Eccentrico Occupacao Accomrnodar Ecclefiaftico Occupado Accumulacao Erecgao Occupar Accumulado Evicgao Occurrencia Accumular Exaccao Occurrente. Accufac,ao Extracga? P. Accufado F. Peccado Accufador Fa^cao Peccador Accufar Ficgao Peccadora Accufativo Fracgao Peccante Adftnccao I. Peccar Afflicgao Prediccao Attraccao Impeccabilidade Preoccapar B. Impeccavel Produccao Inaccefsivel Projeccao Baccho Indiccao Profecc^o Bocca Induc^ao Putretaccao. > Boccaga Infecgao R. Boccadinho Infracgao Rarefac<;ao Boccado Inspeccao Reconduccao Boccal. Inftruccao Refeccao c. Intellecgao Refraccao Interjecgao Refeccayao Circumfpecgao v Interfecgao Reftnccao. Coaccao Introdiicgao. s. Coccao M. Collecgao Satisfaccao. Conftricc,ao Manuduccao. Seccar Conftruccao O. Secco Contracgao Sec^ao Correccao Objeceao Secun 202 PORTUGUESE Seccura Succcffivo T< Socco SuccefTivel Tianfaccao Soccorrer Succeffor . Tradilccao Soccorro Succintamente V. Subtraccao Succinto Succeder Succo Vacca SuccefFao Succofo Vaccada SucceiFo Succubo. Vac cum. D. This letter is doubled in the following words addicao, addicionado, addicionar, additamento, additar. F. JFis to be doubled in Affabilidade Affayel AfFidigado AfFidigar AfFagado A ffagar Affagos Affamado Affamarfe Affaftado AfFaMr Affazendado AfFazerfe. AFFE. Affeado Affear ■ AfFeamento Affe&adamente Affeaado Affeftar Affefto AfFeftuofo Affeicao AfFeicoado Affeicoar Affeite AfFekar AfFeminado AfFeminarfe Afferradamente AfFerrado Afferrar Afferretoado Afferretoar AfFerrolhado AfFerrolhar Afferventado AfFerventar Affervorado AfFervorar AFFI. Affiado Affiar Affidalgado Affidalgarfe Affigurado Affigurar Affilhada Affilador Affilar Affinado Affinar Affincado Affincar Affirmadamentc Affirmador Affirmar Affiftularfe Affixar. AFFL. Afflamarfe Affliccao Affliao Affligir_ Affluencia AFFO. AfFocinliar Affogado AfFogador AfFogar AfFogamento AfFogueado AfFoguear AfForado Afforador Afforar Afforamento AfFormentar AfFormofeado , Afrormofear AfFouwdo Affoutado Affoutar AfFouteza AfFouto. AFFR. Affracar AfFramengado AfFreguefado Affreguesarfe Affronta Affrontado AfFrontamento AfFrontar AfFrontofamente AfFrontofo Affroxadamente AfFroxado AfFroxar. AFFU. AfFug-entado AfFugentar GRAMMAR, AfFumado Affumar Affundado AfFundarfe. AfFundirFe Affuzillar. DI. DifFamado Diffamar DifFeren9a Differen^ar Diffcren^as DifFerentc DifFerentemente Difficil Difficuldade Difficultar DifficultoFame'nte Difficult6fo Diffusao Diffufamente DifFiifo G. 203, Effe&ivamente Effe&ivo EfFeito Effeituar Efficazmente Efficacia Efficaz Efficiente EfFigie. OfFender OfFerec^r OfFuFcar. Suffocar Suffragio, and fome others* This letter is to be doubled in Aggravante Aggreflor Exaggerar Aggravar Exaggera^ao Suggerir Aggravado Exaggerador Suggeiiao Aggravo Exaggerado L. Suggendo. L is to be doubled in AB. Acafelladura AL. Aballado Acafellar Allega^ao Aballador Acallentado Allegado AballaV ( Acallentar Allegar Aballo Acapellado. Allegoria AballiFado Allegorico Abilifador AF. Allegorifar AballiFar. Affillado Alleluia AC. Affillador Alliviar Acafellad6r AffiUar. Allucinayao Allucinar 204 J \T U K X UIj U r-Mi Allucinar BA. Cavallem* Alludir Bacellada Cavalla. AHumiar Bacello CE» Allufao. Barbella Barrella. Cebolla AM. Cebolial Amentellado BE. Cebollinho Amarello Bella Charfceller Amarellecerfe Beilamente Chancellaria Amerellidao Bello Cella Amoliado Belleza Ceileiro. Amollar Belleguira CL. Amollecer Bellico Amollecido Bellicofo Clavellina Amollentar Belligero CO, Ampoila. Belluino. Codicillo AN. BU. Colla Annullacao Bulla Collado Annurlar. Bullario. Collar Colleira AP. CA. Collapao Appellacao Calliope Collateral ' Appellante Camillo Coll£ccao Appellar Cavillacao Collefta Appellidar Cavillofamente Colleftivo Appellido. Caballina Colleaor Cadella Collega AS- Cadellmha Collegiada Aquella Callo Collecrial Aquelle Camartello Collegio Aquelloutro Cambadella Colligar Aqufllo. Cancella Colligir Capella Colly'rio AR. Capellao Collo Armellas Capellada Collocacao Arrepellado Capellania Collocar Arrepeilao Capello Colloquio Arrepellar. Capillar COM. Caftella AT. Caflello Compellir Atropellado Cafullo Coinpoftella Atropellar. Cafulla Conftellacao AV. Cavalla Corroll&rio Avillanado. Cavallaria Covello Courella , gramma: &. 205 Courella Encelleirar. GA. Gabella DE. E$. Gallado Delia Equipollencia Galladura Delias Equipollente. Gallar DeHe Delles ES. Gal lego Gallia Degollado Efcabellado Gallicado Degollacao Efcabello Gal Hear Degollar Efcudella Gallico Degolladouro. Efcudell^o Gallfnlia Eftillacao Gallinha'co DI. Eftillado Gallinheira DilKUacao EOillar . . Qallinheiro Diftillador Eftillicidio Gallinholla Diftillar. Eftrella Galliopoli Eftrellaclo. Galliota Galliza DO. Donzella EX. Gallo Excellencia Gamella 0U. Excellence Gazella. Duello Expellfr. GO, £B, FA, G6IIa. Ebull'^ao Falla Fallacha HE* EIX. Fallacia Hellefponto Ma Fallador Hendecafy'llabo E'llas Fallar Hollanda E'lle Fallecer Hypallage. E'lies Fallecido Elleboro Fallencia JA- Ellipfe Fallido. - Janella Elliptico. Janelleira FE. Janellinha Jarmello. EM. Ferdizello Emolliente J. Emollfr . FL„ EN« Flagellante Illacao FJagello. Illaquear Enallage Illativo Encapellado FO» Illegitimo Encapeflar F6ile Ille'tof Encaftellado Folliculo Illicar Encaftellar Fontello. Illiciador lilknamente 206 Illicitamente lllicito Illocavel Illudido Illudir f Illuminacao Illuminado Illuminar Illuminativo Ilhifao Ilhifo Illuftra9ao Illuftrar Illuftre Illuftriffimo Illy'rio Imbella Impellir Incapillato Infallivel Inintelligivel Intervallo. L. Libello Lordello Lou fella. M. Marcella Marcellina Marcello Martellada Martellar Martello Martellinho Malfallante Mallogrado Mamiliar Medulla Mellifluo Mello Metallico Millenario MilTefiino PORTUGUESE Mitandella Mifcellania M611e Molleira Molleza Mollice *Mollidao Mollificante Mollificar Mollinar Monofy'llabo. N. Nella Nellas Nelle Ne'lles Nigella Novella Noveileiro Nulla Nulliade Niilio Nuzellos. O. Odivellas Ollana Olleiro Ou^uella. p. Palla Palladio Pallante Pallas Pailiado Palliar Pallid6z Pallido Pallio ^aradella Parallaxe Parallelo Parallelogramo Pelle Peliefinha Pellica Pellicula Panella Pimpinella Phillis Poll egad a Pollegar Pollez Poll 119a o Polluto PoiyiVllabo Portacollo Portella Poftilla Foufafolles Prunelle Pulmella Pupilla Pupillo Pufillanimidade Pufillanime. Quartella R. Rabadella Rebel lado Rebel lao Rebel larfe Rebtlliao Rella Rodofolle Rodopello RoJclIa Ruella. Sella Sellado ' Sellador Sellagao Sellar Selleira GRAMMA R. 207 Selleiro Sello Sentinella Sibylla Sigillo Sigillado Sobrepclliz Sugillacao Sy'llaba Syllabatic© Syllabico Syllogifar Syllogifmo. T. Tabella Tabelliao Tabellioa- Titillacao Tidilar Tolla Tollice Tollo Torcicollo Tranquillidade Tranquillo Trelia Trify'llabo Tuniceila Tiii Ho V. Vacillaeao Vaciilante Vaallar Valla VailaHo Vallar Valle Vaifaliagem Vaffdllo VE. Velleidade Vellicicao Vetlioar : Velio Vell6fd Velkl [0 Verderelfa • VI. Villa Villoma Vilfeameate Villao Viliaa 'Vit&la Vitelline N. B. Annullar iignifies to annul; but annular 'is an adjective, and lignifies annular, or in the form of a ring. L is doubled by fome in the words pelo, pela, (for) thus pello, pella. M. M is to be doubled in Accommodar Commeraoracao Commenda Commenfurar Commentar Commercial* -Commettar Comminacao Commiferacao CommifTao CommirTario Commocao Commodo Commover Commum Commungar Communicar Communidade Commutar Confummar Defaccommedar Defcommodo Dilemma Emmadeirar Emmadeixar Emmagrecer EmmanqueceY E m mafia r Emmudecer En?6mrnar "EpioTarnraa r I am ma Flammante Flammula. Gemma Gomma . Grammatica Immaculada . Im.manente Immarceflivel Immaterial Immature) Immediata- 208 PORTUGUESE Immediatam£nte Immemoravel Immenfo Immenfuravel Immobilidade Immoderadamente Immodefto Immodico Immolar Immortalifar Immortificado Immovel Immudavel Immundo Immunidade Immutavel Incommodo Incommunicavel Incommutavel Inflammar Mamma Mammar Recommendar Somma Sommar Summa Summario Summidade Symmetria, and fame others. N. B. M, and not n, is always made ufe of before b, m, p. N. Nis likewife doubled in feveral verbs compound, ed with an, en, in, con, as annelar, annexa, annao, anndta, annel, Anna, anno, annular, connexdo, connexo, depenndr, empennar, ennaftrdr, ennegrecer, inndto, innavegavel, innocencia, manna, Maridnna, pan no, pinna, when it fignifies a pen, iyrdnno, and fome others. P. This letter is to be doubled in words beginning with p compounded with the Latin prepofitions ad, eb> fub ; as apparato, apparecer, oppor, opprimir, fnppor, Philippe, poppa, 8zc. N. B. Pdppa fignifies pap, or a fort of fpoon- meat for children; but papa fignifies the Pope. R. The r is doubled in fuch words as are ftrongly pronounced in the middle; as guerra, arrancar, ar- reddr, arrimdr, arruindr, carregar, edrro, &c. S. The s is to be doubled in the Portuguefe fuperla- tives, becaufe it is doubled in the Latin roots ; it is alfu doubled in the following words : AbbadSffa GRAMMAR. 209 AbbatlefTa Baroneifd CondefiTa Priorefla Afllr Affanhar Aflegurar Aflignar AfTolar Acceflb Aggreffor A p pre (far Amaflar ArremefTar Noflo Affaltar Nofla AfTeVo E'ffa Afleffor E'ffe Afsim I'flb Afliftir O'ffo AfTombrar Paffear AfToprar Paflar Aflbbiar Remeffa Affuftar Ingreffo, and many Atraveflar others. Neceflitar NifTo T. Attribuir Permittir Attributo Jrometter Attricio Remetter- Attrito Remettir Commetter Setta Demittir Settenta Ennttar Settee entos Fitta Tranfmittir Intrommetter Omittir T is doubled in the following words and their derivatives : Attemperar Atterjvao Attender Attentar Attenuacao Attenuar Attonito Attracc,ao Attraftivo Attrahk Of the Qiiantity of Syllables and their Sound. Of Words that make their Pennltima in a. N. B. You muft remember what we have faid above about the accents. Ail words ending in abo, aba, aco, aca, acbo, acba, aco, aca, ado, ada, dfo, afa, ago, aga, agem, agre, alho, alba, alo, ala, have the penultimas long ; as diabo, m'angaba, macaco, maciica, cavaca, mingkbo> garnacha* madraco, linbaca, amado, punbcida, (except reldwpago, antropofago, levado, and cagado, which are fhort in the penultima), abafo, abafa, faramago, adaga, (except ftameago or tftbmago,ama'go, amaraco, which are fhort), P trabalho, 2io PORTUGUESE trabdlbOy todlha y baddlo y (except anomalo, bufali), efcan- dalo t which are short), tanchagem, vindgte. , Words ending in dmo y dma y dnbo y anha\ ano % dna 9 have their penultimas long; as, ifcamOy courdma, cafianhoy ardnbdy engdno, pejldna ; except pampano, ty'mpano, bigamo. Words ending in dpo, dpa y &que s dro, dra y have their penultimas long; as, guardandpo y foldpa y baf- bdqne> empdro y fear a ; except cdntaro, pucaro\ Idparo, bdfaro, litparo y p'ifaro y picaro y camera, tdmara, pdjffaro, LdzarOy bdrbarOy cofdras, &c. Words ending in drro, drra, dtOy dta y dvo y dva y dxOy dxaSy make the penultima long ; as, bizarre, bizdrra] bifcdlo, patardta y efcrdvo, efcrdva y (except concava y and bzfavo), cartaxo y tarrdxa. Of Words that make their Penultima in e. AU words ending in ebo, eba, edo y eda t efa y have their penultima long ; as, mancebo> manceba y azedo, azeda y fanefa. Words ending in efe are long; as, magarefe : as well as thofe ending in eco y eca y eco, eca ; as bonecoy honecay c aire go y cab eca. Words ending in ego y e'ga, are long ; as, morcego, JaccgOy relegOy entrega, alUga } except conego y . trdfego, c6rrego y fcfrego y pecego y folego y biUega, cbcegas. Words ending in efo y efa y elo y ela y are long ; as, caranguejOy bocijOy igreja, Alentejo y enveja, mart e to, querela. Words ending in emo y ema y eno y eua y are long ; as, fupri}ih y prficma y aceno y ague en a ; except ap6z?wa. . N. B. The penultima is short in the word ingreme. Words ending in epo y epa y e r pe, eqSe 3 ero y era y are long ; as, decipo y caripa y julepe y mole que >fevero, fevera y tempero, (when a noun) : and iempero. (when a verb) except l\fpero y profpero. Words ending m~e/b y efa y ezo y eza y eto y ela y ete y evo y eva> eve, are long ;. as, acefo y ace/a y defprezOy gran* GRAMMAR. sir grandeza and defprefo, (when a verb) entremeto, gale± beta, ramatbite, bofite, atrevo, atreva, atreve. Of Words that ryiake their Penuliima in i. Words ending in ibo, iba, ibe y uho y icha, iebe y zee, tca y ico, zcciy zee, zdo, ida, ifo,ifa, zfe, have the pe- nultima long ; as, efiribo, arriba, arri.be, efguiebo, efgutcba, azeviche, panico, (a sort of stuff) botica ; except mecdnico, erumenico, critieo, politico, pdnico, (panick), and some others borrowed from the Greek and Latin. In I'go, iga, &c. as, roligj, pregu'ga, vel- bice, m art do y medi da ;. except humido, pdllido, borrido, and some others derived from the Latin. In ifo, if a, &c. as borrifo, ale at /fa, pat'/fe. Words-ending in igo and iga, are long ; as, am/go, amiga, except>prdd/go y prodiga. . Words ending in ijo, and ija, are long ; as, affiJjo, artemija. Words ending in ilbo, ilha, are long; &%,atilho, beatilha. Others ending in its, ila, as, gorgomtlo, ^perfila, desfila. Words ending in zmo, ima, have the penultima long; as opimo y cadi mo, efgrima, lafiima, (when a verb) ; except lafiima (when a noun), Jeronimo, pef- fimo y and all the superlatives, anonimo, and some others. Words ending in inho y inha, ino y ina, ipo, ipa, ipe, have the penultima long; as, conflipo, confiipa y EurJpo, acipipe. Others in /quo, /qua, ique, iro, ira, ire ; as ? iniquo, in/qua, lamhique, ret iro, ment}ra y fufpire. . Words ending in iso, if a, i%o y iza % ito, it a, ivo, iva, ixo, ixa, are long in the penultima ; as, avifo, c'amisa, juizo, ajuiza, allivo, altiva, prolixo % prolixa, ap/to, cabrito ; except pulpito, vomilo, decrepito, efpirilo, debit o, and some others. Rules for fuch zvordsas make their fenaltima ino. Words ending in 6bo, oba, obe, bar a, obro, obre, 3nave their penultima long ; as, lobo, loba, arrvba, P 2 affofc 2i2 PORTUGUESE qrrobe, gib bo, alc6va % 6bro, 6 bra, cbbre, cbbro, d6- bro. Words ending in echo, bcha, bco, oca, bco, 6ca, 6do, bda, ode, 6fo 9 cfa, 6fe 9 have the penultima long ; as, agarrbcho, garrbcha > carbcha, bioco, except alliloco) maffarbca, minhbea, ahnbco, moca, (a girl) mbca, or mbjja, (a notch), almbgo (when a verb), carrbga, lb- do, boda, bode, pbde, (the third person lingular of the present indicative of the verb pbder), pbde (the third person singular of the preterperfeel: definite of the same verb), galhbfa, bbfe. Words ending in bfro, bfra, bfre, are long; as, ale ax bfra, cbfre, enxbfre. Words ending in bgo, bga, ague, are long.; as, af- fogo, affbga y affugue, defafbgo, when a verb, and def- qfogo, when a noun. Words ending in ojo, bja, have the penultima long • as, d('jpbjo y when a verb, nojo, defpojo when a noun. Words ending in bio, bla, ble, are long; as, *u8h la\ gaVmhofa, bo/a, engble, miblo, boh, rebolo,~ tolo, cebo'a ; except perola,frivolo, benevolo, malevolo. Words ending in cmo, bma, bme, have the penul- tima long ; as, mordbmo, redbma, fbme, except Thome. Words ending in bnho, bnha, bno, bna, have the penultima long ; as, bifonho, rifonha, ddno, atafona, dona ; except alitsono, and unifono. Words ending in op la, bpo, op a, ope, bpro, bpra, cpre, bque,~have the penultima long; as, manbpla, tbpo, tbpa, galbpe, afjbpro, when a verb, ajjbpra, af- fopre, ajjbpro, when a noun:, botoqne. Words ending in ore, bra, ore, are long in the penultima ; as, perMro, penhbra, penhbre, choro when a noun ; choro when a verb ; except bacorot remora, polvora, arvore. Vwrds ending in brro, brra, are long; as foe- corro, morro, cathorra ; and some others ending in ofo, bfc, bfa, bzo, ■ bza, as, prhnorbfo, primorbfa, induf- iribfo, indufirlbfa, a'bzo, cibza, defebfe. ■ Words GRAMMAR. .213 Words ending in oto, 6ta y 0/^, have their penulti- ma long ; ' as goto, gola y bbta, devoto, frbta y capote, garrote. Words ending in 6vo, ova, 6ve, are long in the penultima ; as 6vo, corcova, aprove. Words ending in 6x0, 6xa y are long in the pe- nultima ; as, roxo, roxa, fintarroxo. Rules for fuch Words as make their Penultima in>u. Words ending in iibo, uba, ubro, ubra^ ucbo, ucha, iico, uca, uco, itca, make the penultima long; as, adubo, aduba ; except juccubo, incubo, and fome others; incubro, incubra, machucho, embucha, caduco, caduca, re- buco, embuca. Words ending in udo, uda, ude, ufo, ufa,, ufe, ugo, iiga, ujo, uja, have the penultima long; as, felpudo, felpuda, almude, pant ufo, adufa, adufe, finguefuga, caramtjO) azambuja. Words ending in ulho, ulha, Uhe, uh, ula, ule, umo, uma, ume, unho, unha, unhe ,• as, bagulho, borbulha, eniulhe, engufo, ewgula, bulebule ; except vocdbulo, vef. iibulo, dngulo, regulo, opujeulo, tremulo, patibulo, ihirt- bulo, and fome others; confumo, confuma, cardume, tefiemmhr^ teftemunha, emp'mhe. Words ending m uno y una, une, upo y upa, upe i uque^ uro y ura, ure, are long in the penultima ; as, dejuno, fori 'ma, defunc, apiipo, apupa, apupe, eliuque, ?naduro, mad'ira. apute. Words ending in ufo, if a, ufe, uzo, uza, u%e„ uto y tea, ule, uxo y uxa, uxe, have the penultima long; as, parafa/b, parafufa, par af ufe, reduzo, reduza, reduze, con- dido y tabula, enxuta, lab ule ; except computo w\\zt\ a noun ; repuxo, empuxa, ampuxe ; and forae others end- ing in uvo, uva y uve ; as, viuvo, viuva, enviuve. N. B. When the penultima is immediately foU lowed by another vowel, you niuft make the follow- ing observations ; - P3 A before jfr* PORTUGUESE A before e must be accented with the acute ac- cent, and pronounced accordingly ; as, fae y cde: but before i h has no accent. A before o must be pronounced and accented thus, bacalhao ; but when the relative o is added to the third person singular of the prefent indicative, then a has no accent ; as, ama-o. E before a is a<. cented thus, balea ; and some- times with the acute, as aj}emblea y idea, and some others; and sometimes has no accent at ail, as in gdvea, femea y and some others. E before o is exceeding sonorous and long, as in chape o y cor it eh eo ; except fateo y ferreo, plumbeo, ait- reOy argent 'eo. 1 before a y e y o, is long'J as dizta y faz'-a t almo- folia ; except such as are borrowed from the Latin .- as nifda % comhlia y jevia y ciencia, prudencia 9 and fa- Ma when an adjective, &c. / before o and e y is long ; as, defvie y defv'io ; except v/cio and some others. O before a is accented thus, covoa y toa y moa y efvioa. before e is long in the words doe y moe y roe, and in the verb Joe when it iigmfies to be wont; but when it signifies to found, it is to be accented thus, yfe. U before a is long ; as rua, charrua ; except mel- liflua, infua. U before e and o is long ; as, concluo y recuo y con- clue, recite ; except meWfiiw y and. some others derived from the Latin. GRAMMAR. 21 CHAP. IX. Etymology of the Portuguefe Tongue from the Lathi. THE Portuguefe retains fo great an affinity to the Latin, that feveral words of the latter are preferved in the former, by only allowing a fmall alteration ; as may eaiily be feen in the following obfervations. I. The of the Latin words is preferved in fome Portuguefe ones; nay, fome Latin words are entire- ly preferved in the Portuguefe; v as, bofpede, corda, porta> &c. II. The u is changed into o ; as, forca % golofo, eftbpa> mofca i amdmos, &c. from.y^raz, gulofuSyJlupa, miifcci) amamuSy &c. III. The diphthong, au, r is frequently changed into cu ; as, louvavely Suro, couve y mduro, &c. from lauda- bilis^ auruniy caulis, maurus> &c. IV. The e is preferved in feveral Portuguefe Tvords; as, cerio y Jervo, erva, terra , ferro, &c. from certuSyfervuSy berba y terra y ferruw, &c. V. The e takes the place of i; as, enfermo, feco, &c. from infirmus y ficus y &c. ; and the i is fometimes preferved, as in tnd/gno, ben/gno, Sec. from indignus, benignus^ &c. VI. The b is alfo changed into v ; as, drvore y du- vidafy dever, tftdva y amdva> &c. from arbor > aubitare t debere y flabat y amabat y &c. V VII. The c is very often changed into g ; as, digo y agudoy amigOy migdlba y &c. from dico y acutus y amicus > mica y &c. VIII. CI is changed into ch ; as, cbamdr y chave t from clamare y clavis y &c. IX. When the c in Latin is followed by /, this letter is changed into c ; as> drciio, dJccao, &c. from cflic, dicliOy &c, ; and fometimes the e before / is P 4 changed 2i6 PORTUGUESE changed into (• as, fe/to, leito, noiie, kite, peiio, &c. from faclus, leClum, nocle, lacle, peelus, &c. Finally, both the c and / are preferved in a great number of words ; as, df/o, affl/tJo, diftiv.51:, &c. from aftus, af- fiftus, diftjp&us 9 fkc. X. The d is feveral times loft ; as, roer, excluir 9 rah, &x. from rodere, excludere, radius, &c. XL The / is frequently preferved ,- as in filbo, fazer, fervor, formqfo, &c. from filius, facere, fervor % formofus, &c. XII. The g is changed into /; as, re'ino, from tegnum. Sometimes it is quite loft, as in dedo, frw, jell a, final, ba'mha, &c. from digitus, frigus, fagitta, fignum, vagina, &c. XIII The b is placed inftead of the /; as, dlbo, from allium. Sometimes it is added ; as, arttlbo, albeo, fblha, conf'lho, &c. from articulus, aliemis, fo- lium, confilium,&c. XIV. The n is fometimes added, and fometimes taken off; as, mancha, ilba, Salhre, efpofo, from macula, infula, fal nilrum, fponfus, &c XV. The mn is preferved by many Portuguefe writers in the words alumna, calumma, columna, dam- no, folemne, fomno, from alumnus, calumnm, columna y damnum, &c. XVI. The double mi of the Latin is preserved in feveral words : as in anno* innoceniia ) innocuo, inna- vegdvel, innovhr, connexo, &c from annus, innccen- *iia, innocuus, mnavigabilis, innovare, connexus, &c. XVII. The £7z and gm are preferved in feveral Portuguefe words; as in augment o, fragment 'o, en/g- pia, benigno, d'gno, indigno, igmmiwa, &c. from dug- mentum, fragmenium, ^enigma, benignus, dignus, &c. XVIII. The e and the i after n are fometimes changed into /;; as in ardnha, v/nba, Hefpdnba, ca- fianha, &c. from aranea i vinea^ Hifpama, caftanea % &c. XIX. The/) is changed into b; as in cabra, ca- $ello % cabeca, &c. from capra, c a pill us, caput, &c. Some-? GRAMMAR. 217 Sometimes pi is changed into ch\ as, chdga, chufo, chuva, &c. from plaga, ploro, pluvia, &c. XX. The q is changed into g • as, *£««/, alguem, ant'igOy agoa, aguza, &c. from equus, aliquis i antiquus, aqua, aquila, &c. XXI. The / is likewife changed into */; as, r^z- dea,fddo, lado, nadar, pieddde, &c. from catena, fatum, latus, natare, pietas, &c. The /Y of the Latin is fometimes changed into oz, and fometimes into ci ; as in grdga, dementia, paciencia, &c. from gratia, de- mentia, patient ia, &c. JV. Z?. All thefe alterations are not general in all the words, but are ufed in feveral ; and on fome oc- cafions the Latin word is preferved without any mu- tilation or variation. And as it would be endlefs to pretend to (hew all the affinity between the Portu- guefe and the Latin, I (hall only obferve, that they fometimes add, and fometimes take off letters from the Latin roots ; as in faal, deb'd, final, material \ eftrepilo, eftomago, expeciadur, efpecular, &c. fromy#— cilis, debilis > jittaliSyftrepilus % fpe5lator i ^ T Q m END OF THE SECOND PART, ANEW PORTUGUESE G R A M M A R. _ PART III. CONTAINING I. The mqji elegant Phrafes of the Portuguese Language. II. Such Words as are mojl ufed in Difcourfe. III. A Collection of the choicefl Portuguefe Proverbs. IV. Familiar Dialogues. The different Significations ofanda.Y,togo. A NDAR a pe, •*■* Andar a cavallo, Andar pella pojta, Andar em coche, Andar a vela, Andar pella bolina, Andar para diante, Andar para traz, Andar a tras de alguem, TO go on foot. To ride on horfeback. To ride, or go poft. To ride in a coach. To fail. To fail with a fide wind. To go forward. To go backward. To go behind, or after one; alfo to follow, to prefs, to fplicit a perfon. Andar GRAMMAR Anddr as apalpadellos, Andar com o tempo, Anddr pejada, Andar fahida-, Andar per dido ', Anddr de pe, Andar com honra, An da, A'nda para didnte, Anddr de ejguclha, Anddr de mal para pear, Andar de reixa com dlguem, Com o anddr do tempt Andar de galope, Anddr em corpo, A'nda o mundo as avejfas, Anddr efpalhados, Andar trabalhando nalguma obra, Andar de gatinhas, Andar de cocoras, Anddr dizendo, 219 To grope along, to grope, or feel one's way. To go according toth×. To be with child, or b'w with child. {/peaking of a bitch J To be proud. To go aflrav. To be fickifh, but not bed-rid. To act like an honeft man. Go. Go on. To go fi deling. To fall out or' the frying-pan into the fire. To bear one a grudge, to have a fpleen againft him, to owe him a fpite. At long run. To gallop. To be in cuerpo, or to be without the upper coat cr cloak, fo as to difcover the true fhape of the cuerpo or body. The world is come about. . To lie about. To be about fome piece of work. To go crawling. To go on one's breech. To pubhfh or report. The different Significations of dar an d dar-fe. Dar, Dar a en tender, Darfe, Dar or vender jia do, Dar a luz, Dar fenhoria, Dar tu, or Jdllar a alguzm poj tu, To give, to ftrike. To make one believe. To credit, to believe, alfo to perceive, to defcry, to take notice, to fmell out. To fell upon credit. To publilh. To call one a gentleman. To thee and -thou one. Dra- 22C- P O R T'-U G U E S-E Darje, a partido, or langar- fe ao partido de dlguem, Dar palavra, Dar huma Jalva, Darjiador, Dar principle, or fim, Dar conta, Darje ao ejtudo, Dar em quejallar, Dar intra da, Dar cduja, Dar tm que entendtr, Dar de beher, Dar duces, Dar hum cofcorrao, Dar pancadas, Dar murros, Dar marradas, Dar ojdro ajilguem de algu- ?na ccufa, Dar huma estocada, Dar os bons dias, Dar a guar dar y Dar a cbjta, Dar com dlguem^ Dar em alguem, Dar cartas, Dar Job re oinim'.go, Dar os parabens, Dar os ■parabens a alguem dajua c keg a da, 1&. Dar a 111^0 ajuddndo, ' Dar a eje other, Dar enjado a digue n, Dar no alvo, Dar as cojtas, To fide with one, to be for him. To promife. To give a volley of fhot, or to make a difcharge of guns in honour of fome perfons of quality. To bail. To begin, or end. To give an account. To applv. one's felf to ffudy. To make one fpeak, to give an occaf.on to be talked of. To give accefs to. To give caufe. To vex one fadly, to trouble one. To give drink. To kick. To give a box on the ear. To beat with a cudgel. To cuff. To butt, as rams do. To fmell out a matter. To give a thruff. To bid one good-morrow. To give in keeping. To run a-ground. To meet with one by chance, to light upon a perfon To flrike one, aljo to accufe one. To deal, or give the cards. To fall upon the enemy, To congratulate. To bid one welcome. To give a helping hand. To let one take his choice. To moleft one. To hit the mark. To run away, to betake one's felf to flignt. len to tiignt. Dar parte de hum negqcio, To impart a bufmefs Dar GRAMMA R. 221 Dar pello amor de Decs, Dar huma furra, Dar huma volt a em redondo, Dar huma vijta de Jjlhos, Dar alcance ao queje dezeja, Dar fufpiros, Dar oiwidos, Dar em rojlo, Da ca t Deu-me huma dor, Dar que fazer a at occupar aiguem. •uem, or Dar horas, relogio da haras, Dar a alma a Deos, Dar comsigo em algumaparte, Dar leite, Dar gar rote, Dar vozes, OJbl da nos olhos, Dar razoens, Dar comfi'go no chao, Danfruto, Dar as maos, Dar com a porta na cdra de aiguem. Dar com a porta nos olhos a alguma cou/a, (metaph.) Dar prc/Ja, Dar tregoas, (metaph.) EJla travejfa vai dar a rua largj, Dei no penfamento de, &c. Qiiem me derd ejlar em cafa ! Nao fabe aonde ha de dar com a cabega, I'Jlo vos ha de dar na cabega, Dar com h, cat rede r, >ca pellas pa- To give for God's sake. To beat one foundly. To walk a turn. To caft an eye on. To obtain, or compafs one's wifb. * To figh. To give hearing. To upbraid, to cafl in the teeth. Give hither. I was taken with a pain. To employ one, to fet him -at work, to fet him upon fome bufmefs. To ftrike. The clock ftrikes. To give up the ghoft. to die. To caft one's felt into a place, or to go to a place. To fuckle. To ftrangle. To cry out, to bawl. The fun mines in oneV eyes. To debate, or contend. To fall upon the ground. To bear fruit. To (hake hands. Tp fhut the door upon one. To flight, to defpife a thing, To press, or haften. To refpite, to give fome rofpite This lane ftrikes, or goes into the broad ftrect. It came into my head to, 0c r How fain would I be at home: He does not know which way to turn himfelf. The mifchief will light upon your own head. To beat one's head again ft the wall, Dar ■i a! ! 222 PORTUGUESE Dar em t'odos, or dizer mal de tbdos, Dar boa conta deji t Dar a conta, E'u dare i conta diffo, E'lle deu emir a que lie lugcir, Dar em droga, Dar em ridicularias, Dar humajiga a qlgue?n y Dar-Je por culpado, De nenhuma forte vos deispor entendido, or ackado, Dar-je por aggravado, Dar-Je por fatisjato, Dar-Je por vend do, Dar-Je por dejentendido, Ouandofe der a occasiao, Dar-Je prejfa, Elk dcu-fe a tcda a forte de vicios, Kao-fe me da dijfo, Oueje vos da a vos diffo ? Pouco Je me da, Nao fe Ike da morrer, E'lles daofe muito bem t Efla came nao fe da hem co- migo t To have a fatirical virulent tongue, to (pare nobody. To give a good account of himfelf, to behave cleverly. To pay an account. I'll be anfwerable for it. Ke began to ufe that place- To grow a very drug. To grow, or become ridicu- lous. To flirt at one, to fig, to give the fico. To acknowledge one's felf guilty. Take no notice of any thing. To make a {hew of anger. To reft fatisfied. To fubmit, to furrender one's felf a prifoner, or to yield a point. To feign one's felf. ignorant, to take no notice of any thing, to make as if one faw nor knew not. ~ When occafion {hall require it To be in hafte, to make haft e. He gave himfelf over to all manner of vices. I mind it not. What have you to do with it? I care but little. He does not fear death. They agree mighty well to- gether. This meat does not agree with me. Of the different Significations of the Verb eftar. We ufe the verb estar to make an action of re- pofe, by putting the verb that follows in the ge- rund ; as, efle efta efcrevtndo y he is writing,. Eftar has feveral other fignifications ; as, Eftar GRAM MA R. Efldr empe, Rftdr bem, ou mal, EJidr afsentddo, EJiar para fakir para flora, EJidr comofentidoemFranga, or ejiar com o fentido em outra parity EJid muito bem, Eft a para chover, Efldr para cahir, Ejiar para morver, Efldr em duvida, EJiaremos a ver, EJidr com huma mao fibre a outra, Efldr em cdfla, I'Jio vos ejtd bem, Aquilo ndo me ejid hem, EJiar dormindo, Eftar fazen do, EJidr de nojo, Eflar dleria, EJidr dejtntinella, Eflar alejrre, E'lle efta como quer, EJidr em perigo, Eftar encqj'iado, Eflar efperdndo, EJidr muito tempo, EJiar caludo, EJiar ow'vwer coin outros, EJidr de cima, Ejlar debdxo, Eftar bem aviddo, EJiar a efpera, Eftar enamorddo, EJiar na cdma, Efldr de cdma, EJiar no campo, EJiar com [dude, or defaude, Ejiar quiet o, EJiar neutral, EJiar ei por tudo o que vos par eta mats convemente* . 223 To ftand upright. To be well, or ill. To be fitting. To be juft going out. To have one's wits a wool- gathering. It is well, it is very well. It is going to rain. To be ready to fall. To be like to die. To be in doubt. We will expect the iftiie, To Hand idle. To flay at home. This becomes you very well. That does not become me well. To lie fleeping. To be a doing. To be in mourning. . To look heed fully about. To ftand centry. To be merry. He lives in clover. To be in danger. To lean upon. To expect. To Hay a good while. To be huftied. To dwell with others. To lie over. To lie under. To be in an ill taking. To lie in wait. To be in love. To be a-bed. To be bed-rid. To live in the country. To be in health. To ftand ftill, or to be qnieu To ftand neuter. I (ball ftand to whatever you ill ail think fitting. CI Adif* 'l PORTUGUESE 224 A difficulddde eftd e?n 9 &c. Eftar per algue?n, Eftar por, or em lugdrde, &c. E'lle eftava na altura do Cabo da Boa Esperanga, Eu nao quero eftar as razoens comvofco, Efta quanto quizcres, Aonde eftais de cafa ? Eftar ei pello que difser a pef- foa que for de vofsa mdyor agrado, Nao podemos eftar por if so, Nan quero eftar pella vofsa fentenca, C Fazer de tripas coragao, Fazer mutto cafo de alguma covfa, Naojdfo cafo delle % Fazh ' Jtjta, Fazer kuwafefa t To make a pride of a thing, to fake g'ory in it. To farisfy one's defire, er longing. ' To take pains, to endeavour, to labour to a certain pur- pofe, to work for a certain end. I endeavour after it. To come to the purpofe. To give alms. To fpend. To like, to be pleafed with. To pleafe one, to complywith one's defire. To para i lei, to compare. To drefs the meat. To f in oak.- To believe one abfent. It is cold. To raife men, foldiers. To pull into pieces. To mock, or to laugh at a perfon. Do not mind that. To take in frefh water. This makes my teeth, or mouth, water. To halt in a march. To put two men on the fame point. To get fupper ready. To make mouths. To form a fee ret defign again ft another. To pout. To make account of, or efteem. To make one's utmofl efforts. To make great account of a thing, to make much of it. I don't mind him. To endear, to fondle. To give an entertainment, to feaft. Fazer GRAMMA R Fazer as vezes de aiguem, Fazer trapa$as 9 227 a\y bufinefs for Fazer lugdr, Fazer merce, Fazer ouvidos de mercador^ Ter que fazer, Fazer exerczcio, Fazer exercicio (a military- word. Os foldddos ej exercicio, Quefazeis aqui ? Fazer hum ve/tido, Fazer huma ley, hum difcur- A > razer guerra, Fazer faber alguma coufa a alguem, Faztr enraivecer dlguem, Fazer huma conta, Fazer conta, E'lle fazia huma conta, efa- hio-lhe outra, Fazer contas com alguem, TJfo 'nab mefaz nada, Fazer paufa, Fazer de algtiem tolo, v Fazer dinheiro de alguma -coufa, Tomar a fazer, Fazer a razao, Ter que fazer com alguem, Fazer a alguem hum gUvaz na c&ra, Fazer honra t Fazer fe, Fazer f hie, To majce another. To chicane, to cavil, to ufe tricks. To make room. To grant a favour. To make as if one were deaf* To be bufy. To ufe exercife* To exercife. fazsndo The foldiers exercife. What make you here ? To make a fuit of clothes. To make a law, a fpeech. To make war. To make one acquainted with a thing. To make one mad. To caft up an account. To intend, or to propofe. He was much difappointed. To fettle the accounts with one. It makes nothing to me, that does not concern me* To make ,a ftarid. To make a fool of one. To make money of a thing, to fell it. To make again. To pledge one. To deal with one, or to have to do with one. To mark one in the face. To honour. To make known, to teftify, to witnefs. To fortify, or ftrengthen. Fazer Q a 228 PORTUGUESE Fazer mencao, Fazer mal, Fazer de alguem o que huma peffoa quer, Fazer huma apofla t Faz vento, Faz hoje outo dtas, Fazer vida com alguem, Fazer a fua vontade, Fazer o pojfivd, Nao fareis ndda com iffb, Ndo fucais nu.is aJTim, Se tornardes a fazer affim, Dezejo que fa fa a fuafortuna, Cufiou-me miuto afazello vir, Fazer a outrem o quequizerd- mos que outrem nes fizcffe a nos. Ndo ten ho que- fazer com ijfo, Fazer o que alguem iiu.nda, Faze de mim o que vos pa- recerd y Fazer hum grande ejlrondo, E'lltfoi b que fez tudo na quelle negocw, Que fareis hoje ? Fazer o feu curfo, Fazer huma boa cdfa-, Fazer a bdrba, Fazer a cam a, Nao /fa que Ihe fazer ,. Fazer grande negouo, Fazer of u officio, Fazer pro fiJJ do, Todos ofazido morta^ Fazer vir, To mention. To hurt . To, difpofe of one; To lay a wager. The wind blows. This day fe'nnight, or a week aao. To cohabit, tfrdwell together. To do as one pleafes, To do one's heft, or endea- vour, to do one's utmoft. You will do no good in it. Do fo no more. If ever you do fo again. I wifh he may do well. I had much to du to get him to come. To do by others a"s you would be done by. I have nothing to do with it. To do as one is bid. Do with me as you fhall think fit. To make a great noise., He was the do-all in that bu fmefs. What will you do to-day ? or how do you employ your- felf to-day. To finifh its course, as a ftar does. To raise,to fet up one's familjt- To (have. To make the bed. I can't help it. To drive a great trade. To exercife, or difcharge. * Toprofefs. They gave out that he was dead. To call, or fend f©r.. Fazer GRAMMAR Fazer entrar, ou fakir £1- guern, I'Jto nao faz nada, Nao fei que faze r diffo, fa nao tenhoquejazer comllle Fazer hum livro, Fazer amizude com a/guem, Fazer exemplo em atguem,or cafiigatlo para dar exem- plo, - \v Fa^cr huma coufa muito do defentcndido, Fazer dasfuas, E'lle fempre ejldfazendo das fuas, Fazer f of c as t . Fazer de pejfoa, Fazer ju ra r cdgutm^ Fazer faltdr, or voar pellos ares-, Fazer boa vezinhdn$a> Fazer Ie?ika, Fazer a rbnda t Fazer dividas, Fdz lua, Fazer violencia, Fazer fe ao trabalko, Fazer fe toio, Fa z erfe vetko, Fazerfe feo, Fazer fe job erbo^ Fazfe tarde, 229 To call in, or out, to bid one come in, or out. It is no matter, I have no need of it, I have done with him. To write a book. To make friendfhip, to get into friendfhip with one. To make one a public exam- ple. To do a thing very covertly, fo that people can't appre- hend that it is done on kt purpofe, and with a defign. To play the fool, to dodge, to play tricks. He is always playing his fool- llh tricks. To bully, to. provoke, to ex- cite by words, or a£lions of contempt; alfo to elude, or deceive by lalfe (how. To behave courageously. To tender the oaths to one, to put one to his oaths. To blow up. To keep fair with one's neighbours. To fell wood. To walk the pounds. To run into debt, to con- tract debts. The moon mines. To offer violence. To inure one's-ielf to hard^ fhips. To play the ninny. To grow old, or to grow in years. To grow ugly. To grow proud. It grows late. Q3 Faze?' n° PORTUGUESE Fazer-fe fignifies also tofeign y to pretend^ tofeem, to make as if Faz-fe mouco, He won't hear. The different Significations of ter and ter-se. Ter que faze r, Ter odw, Ter por co/iume, Ter ulguem por ignorante^ Ter cuidado de, Ter cm dados, Ter faflio % Ter dnimo, Ter bcafuma, Ter cdra d\i$o^ Ter nece/fidade, Ter prejfa, Ter muitos fumos, Ter grande prejumpcac % Ter razao, Nao tvr rdzao, Ter alguma coufa debdxo da h ngua, To be bufy. To hate. To be wont. To believe one ignorant. To be careful of. To be full of care, or thoughtful. To loath, to see food with diflike. To have courage. To be well fpoken of. To have a brazen face. To be in want. To be in hafte. To be very proud. To Drefume much on one's felf. To be in the right. To be in the wrong. To have a thing at one's tongue's end. Ter alguma coufa na ponia da Ungua y we fay, to have a thing at one's fingers ends, to have it perfect. They alfo fay , faber alguma coufa nas pontas dos dedas x which exactly anfwers to our Englifh phrafe. Ter feifoens feiiiceiras, Ter ma f onia, Ter ciumes, Ter meyos, Ter no penfamento, ler obrigagao. Ter medo, Ter razac, e mods que razac. To have a taking look. To be ill fpoken of. To be jealous of. To be able, or have means< To bear in mind. To be obliged. To be fearful. To have reafon to fpare. Que GRAMMAR Que tcndes vos com ijfo 9 Ter carrudge, e criddos, Ter a dlguem fufpenfo, Homem que tern bona feicdo, Ter me/a franc a, Ter f no, Ter as coftas quentes em dl- guem, Ter p or bem, Tenho o por doudo, Ter m.o na fua refolucao, Ter com que, Nao tenaes do que vos que- ixdr, Nao t endes que, &c. Vjlo nao tern ndda quefazer, com o que eu digo, Ter entre maos, Tenho ijfo por certo, Ir ter com dlguem, Venho ter com vm Ci parafaber como pdfja a fenhor a Julia- na, Ir ter a algu?n lugar, EJia rua vdi ter ao mtrcado, Ter alguem porji, Temos por nos a authoridade x dos mais prudentes, Ter par'aji^ Ter em muito, Ter em pouco, Ser tido em boa conta, Ter mao, Ter mao nalguma coufa, 231 What is that to you ? To keep a coach and fervants. To hold one in fufpence. A man of good addrefs, a po- lite man. To keep open table, to keep a table where a man may come without bidding. To be cold. 1*0 be backed, or fupported by one. To approve of, or oonfent. 1 take him to be mad. To be frill in one mind. To have wherewith. You have no reafon of com- plaint. It is ufelefs, or it will be to no purpofe for you to, £?c. That is nothing to the pur- pofe. To have in hand, or in one' pofleffion. I hold that for a certainty. To addrefs one's felf to one. I .addrefs, or apply my felt to you to know howmifs fuch a one does. To go to a place. This ffreet ftrikes, or goes into the market. To be fupported, or protected by one. We have the wifeft men of our fide, or of our opinion. To think, or imagine, to reckon. To fet much by. To value but little. To be efteemed, regarded, or valued, to be in great ► efteem. Tohold tfrkeep in, to reftrain. To bear up, to fupp.ort, to prop, to keep up, to hold up. Q 4 Ato- PORTUGUESE Atoms that (lick together. 233 Atomos que tern mdohuns nos outros, Tenha mao, or tern mao, Ter, Ter-fe empe, Ter-fe bem a cavallo, Ter-fe em cafa, Ter-fe com alguem, Nao me poffo ter com rizo, Naofe pode ter, que naofdlle, Hold, flop. To contain. To ftand, to ftand up. To fit fail, or well, on hoife- back. To keep at home. To hold out, to refift, to (land againil one, to cope with one, to oppofe, or refill him. I can't forbear laughing. He can't forbear fpeaking. 'The different Significations 0/querer. §>uerer fignifies to willy to be willing, and to be- lieve ; as, Querent alguns, Querer bem, Querer vial, Jtntes quercr, : Queira Deos, Mas quero que ajfimfeja, Qut quer dizer aq'uellc homem f Que quer dizer ijio ? J'flo quer dizer que, &c. ,£'u quero abfolutamente que % E'u ajfim quero, E'lle quer que vos obedecais, Nao quero, E'lle ofara quando quher, E'lle qiier partir amanhao, mat que en Ike quero me vsnha a mim, Some believe. To love. To hate. To have rather. God grant it, God fend it may be fo. I arain it, fuppofe it were fo, What does that man mean ? What means this ? what's the meaning of that ? The meaning is that, &.c. I pofitively refolve that, &c, I'll have it fo." He will have you obey. I will not, I won't. He will do it when he pleafes, ' or when he has a mind to it. He intends, tfrhas a mind, to fet out to-morrow. I with him . no more harm than I do ray fell. Haver > to have. Tu has dekir, E'lle ha da vir hoje. You mull go. He is come to dav » I GRAMMAR Se eu houver de Mr, Aindaque iffo me houveffe de cujiar a^vida, E'lle ejia todo nu, e ha de ter invito fr lo, Haveis vos de e/iar em cdfa, Eu hci de achdrme la, E'lle ha de fer enforcado, Eu hei de receber dinheiro, Vos he que haveis de jugdr, AquiUo he que vos havieis de fazer, Haver por bem, Haver p or mal, Que ha de fer, Aquillo nunca ha de fer, Eu hti defer a cdufa dafua.' matte, on ruina, Para haver de fa liar, o'uvir, &c. Que ha de fer de ?nim ? Haver filhos, • Lwros do deve, e ha de haver, Haver mifter, Ha mifier apreffdr-fe, 233 If I fhall be obliged to go. Though I were to lofe my lifefor't. He is all naked, he muft needs be very eold. Shall you be at borne ? I muff be there. He is tc be hanged. I am to receive money. You are to play. You mould do that. To take in good part. To take in ill part. That is to be hereafter. That will never be. I (hall be the death, or ruin of him. In order to fpeak, hear, &c. What is to become of me. To beget, to become the father of children. Books of debtor and creditor. To want. It is necefiary to hade, or to make hade. Haver, when imperfonal, is rendered into Englidi by the verb to be, preceded by there ; as. m Ha komems tao malvddos, Havia huma mclher, Ha alguns bons e outros maos Ha muitas cdfas, Ha alguma coufa de ncvo f Hd mais he huma hcra, Ha muito tempo, Ha perto de huma hora que, Ulejahio, Ha hum anno. There is, or there are. There are men fo wicked. There was a woman. There are fome good, and fome bad. There are feveral houfes. Is there any news ? It is above an hour firvce. Long fince. It is almoil an hour fince he wejit out. A year ago . m P O RJT UGUESE 234 Ha outo dias, Ha per to die. 20 legoas daqu-i la, Nao hd, E'lle cuida que nao ha ?ndis que purgdr, Haver Je, v. r. E'lle fa be porno fe ha de ha- ver, or tile jdbe como ha de haver Je, E'lle ho live- fe Je maneira que, Eight days ago. It is near upon 20 leagues thither. There is not. He believes that purging is all in all, or that purging is the only remedy in fuch a cafe. To carry, to behave one's felf. He knows how to behave himfelr. He behaved himfelf in fuch a manner that, &c. N. B. When this verb is ufed imperfonally, it is always followed by the particle de ; as Ha-fe de mijier dinheiro, Ha-Je de jazer, ou dizer iJlo 7 Ha-fe dejazlr que elle qui- Money is wanted. This mult be done, or faid. People muft do what he zer, pleafes. , Hir, a neuter and irregular verb, to go, to walk, to march ; alfo, to grow, to reach any estate gradually, to be going* Hir por mar e por terra, Come vao os vcjfos negocios ? Tudo vdi bem, As fuas coujas vao muitQ mat, Hi r a mao, Hir pajfando, Hir anaando, Hir andando, or pajfando^ Que vca de n:vo ? Que vdi n'JIo ? or ondt vdi ijlo a dar comfigo ? To travel by fea and land. How go voirr concerns ? All is well, all goes well. Things go very ill (or very hard) with him. To hinder, to obftrufr, to obviate. To grow out of fafhion or ufe. To go on or forward, to keep or hold on his way ; alj'o to proceed, to continue on, to profecute. To mi ft, to pafs life not quite well, to live though with difficulty. Is there any thing new ? What of all this I , Hir GRAMMAR. Hir debdxo, Hir para, Quanta mais vamos para, a primavcra,mai$ compnaos ■ fad 0} dias, Hir de mal para peer, Hir diante, Hir por diante, Hir ao encontro, Hir aojundo, Hir e vir, Nao fa go mais do que hir e voltar, I'ffo ja la vai, Eilo la vai, Eilo vai, Que vos par he daquella moU her? eilo vai, ella naokefea, Eilo vdifolgo que ajfimfeja, Como as coujas' agora vao, Por que parte ides, Deos va comvofco, Hir a roda do ?nundo, Hir com alguem, Eft a t rave/fa vai ter a rua larga, E'u irei ver de caminko, Hir continuando ofeu caminko Hirfora do feu caminko, Hir hum de huma banda, e outro da iutra, Hir para trdz, Hir detraz, Hir atraz de alguem, Hir em alcance de alguem, Hir bufcar, Hir para dentro, Jiirparafora, 235 To come by the worft. To approach, to go near. The nearer the fpring, the longer the days. To grow worfe and worfe. To go before. To go on, or forward. To go to meet. To i'mk, or fall to the bot- tom. To go to and fro, to go and come. I will nofeftay, I mail be back prefently. 5 Tis a thing paft and done. There he goes. So fo, pretty well. Kow do you like that wo- man ? She is fo fo, me may pafs. Well, weli, I am glad on't As things go now, as the world goes. Which way d'ye go? The Lord of heaven go with you. To go about the world. To go along with one. This lane goes into the broad flreet. I will call upon him as I go along. To go along. To go out of one's way. To go afunder. To go backward. To go behind. To purfue, to go after one. To go alter one, in order t» overtake him. To go far, or fetch, To go in. To go out, Hir 23 6 PORTUGUESE Hir peregrin an do, Hirjazer huma embaxada^ Hir ver, cantar^ &c. Vamos, Hir faze r hum negocio, Hir com a mare, Hir par a par com alguem, Vai para q u:\tro mefs que eu aqui cheguei, Ide em pa*, tempo vui abrandando, Hir (at cards), Hirfe, v. r. ) Hirfe a olha, ou a panclla, Hirfe o enfenno, A quarefna vaife acabjndo, Hirfe, Nada fe vai mdis deprcffa que o tempo, Aquclies monies vdo fe ojlen- dcndo, Hir-fe embora, Efperai ale qtie a cdlma fe va embora, Vdi-le embora ; que naofdbes engoddr a gente, Hir-jedehuma cdrta[u cards) Vaife Jaztndo tarde, V^.-Je c began do a noijte, Vai fe ckegdndo o tempo da Vaife acabdndo o meu confl- ict do, Hir-fe efcapulindo, Hir -ft a mas, To go a pilgrimage. To go on an embaffy. To go to fee, !o Ting, &c Come, come on. To go upon a bufiness. „To go with the tide. To go cheek by jole with one. It is now going on four months fince I came hi- ther. Depart in peace. The weather grows mild. To go, to lay, to itake, to fet. To go, to go away, to go one's way, to depart, alfo to run, or leak. Is for the pot to boil over. Is for a Tick man to die. Lent draws to an end. To flip, or pafs away (as time)7 Nothing goes fafter than time. Thofe mountains extend, or ftretch themfelves. t To go away, alfo to be over. Stay till the heat be over. Away, or go, you know not how to wheedle people. To throw away a card. It grows late. The night draws on. It grows near harveir. My confulfhip is almoft at an end. To fneak away. To refrain, to forbear, to ab- ilain. Hir-fi imperfonal ; as, vai-fe, they go ; joi-fe > they are gone ; hir- ft ha y they fhall. go. Of GRAMMAR. 237 To pray. Senkor, como atnigo, Jaqame ojavor, Eu vos pefo, or pecavos, Pegolhe em cortesia, Pecolhe encarecidamente, Peco Ike por favor que, &c. Fa fame a fineza, Pecolhe perdao, Dear fir, do me the favour. I pray you. I befeech vou. I intreat, or conjure, you to do it. I beg of you that, &c. Do me the kindnefs. I beg your pardon. Expreflions of Kindnefs. Minha vida, Minha alma, Meu amor, Meu querido, minhaquerida, Meu coracao, Filko do meu coracao, Filha da minha alma, My life. My degr foul. My love. My little darling. My dear love, my love. My dear child. 'My little honey. To fhew Civility. Agradego a vm ce , Doua vm ce os agradecimentos Beijb as maos de vm u , Falo-hei com todo gojlo, Com todo meu coracdo, De muito boa vontdde, Veja vm"fe opojjofervir nal- guma causa, Difponha vm ct como Ike pare- cer d eft e feu criado, Eficu esperando pellas or dens de vm ce , J a que vm ce afsim crdena, As or dens de vm ce , Fico muito obrigado a vm ce , Quer vm" que eufdga alguma coufa, Sem ceremonia, Nao tern c vm cs mdis quefallar, Facame a honra de vie per aes pes da for* I thank you. I give you thanks, I kifs your hand. I will do it chear fully. With all my heart. Heartily, willingly. See if it is in my power t© ferve you. Do v/hat you pleafe with your fervant. I wait for your commands'. Since you will have it fo. At your fervice. I am very much obliged to you. v Have you any thing to com- mand me. Without ceremony. You need but to fpeak. Prefent my refpects, or duty, to my lady. 2 3 8 PORTUGUESE h'ao fei c'omo aeradec'er a I know not how to make a vitT tdntosfavores, proper return tor fo many favours. Nao fiu de comprimintos, I am not for ceremonies. ' Deix-mos eftes comprimintos Away with thefe ceremonies, or compliments. IJfo he o melh'or, That is the beft way. To give tokens of Affirmation, Confent, Belief, and Refufai. He verddde, He ijfo verddde ? He muito verddde ', Para dizjrvos n verddde, Com effeito he ajfim, Quern duvida dijfo ? Nao ha duvida nijjo, Par heme que fern, que nao, Apojlo que Jim, Apojlo que nao, Creame vm"? EJIdvm" xombando? Falla vm u , de viras ? Fallo de veras, Pois, ejiafeito, Pbuco a p uco, TJfo nao he verdade, Nao ha tat cbufa, He mentira, Eftava zombdndo, Seja miato embora, Nao queio, It is true. Is it true ? It is but too true. To tell you the truth. Really it is fo. Who doubts it? There is no doubt of it. I think fo, not. I lay it is. I lay it is not. Do 'believe me? Don't you jeft ? Are you in earneft. I am in earned ? Well, let it be fo. Softly, fair and foftly. It is not true. There is no fuch thing, It is a lie, I did but jeft. Let it be fo. I won't, I will not. To confult. Quefe ha dejazer? Que far em os ? Que Ike par he a vm* que faga ? Que rsmedia tern ijfo ? Fa$6;>>os cjfim, FafSmos huma couja, Strfa elhor ;ue, Stria :\u'U que, What is to be done ? What fhall we do ? What do you advife me to do? What remedy is there for it ; Let us do fo, and fo. Let us do one thing. It will be better that. It would be better that. BJpcrti GRAMMAR. 239 Esperdi hum pouco, Deixaime com ffo, Antes quizera, Se iffofoffe comigo, Tudo he mis?no' Stay a little. Let me alone. I had rather. Were I in your place. It is all one. Of Eating and Drinking. Tenho fome, Morro defame, Coma vm" alguma c'ousa, Que quer vm Ci comer ? Quer vm" comer mais ? Tenho side, "fa mate 1 afme, Tenho muita side, Mirro de scde, Dime de bebir, Viva vm" muitos annos, Eu beberia hum copo de vinho Pois beba vm", Tihno be.bido bafldnlc, Nao poffo bebir mais, J a matii a fide, I am hungry. I am almoft ftarved. Eat fomething. What will you eat ? Will you eat any more ? I am dry, or thidty. I have no more ftomach. I am very dry. I am almoft dead with thirrr, Give me ibme drink. I thank you. I could drink a glafs of wine. Drink then. I have drank enough. I can drink no more. > I am no more thirfly, or my thirft is quenched. Of Going, Coming, Stirring, &a. Donde vem vm" ? Para onde vai vm" ? Vinho de ; v'ou para, or a, Quer vm" subir, ou descir ? E'ntre vm ce , say a vm", Nao se biila daqui, Chigue-se para mim, Va-se vm", Vem ca, Espire por mim, Nao va tao depriffa, Tire-fe de diante de mim, $Jao me toque, Deixe eftar iffo, Efl'ou bem aqui, A' bra v?n" a porta. From whence do you come r Where do.vou go ? I come from ; I am going to. Will you come up, or come down ? Come in, go out. Do not itir from hence. Come near to me. 00 your way, be gone. Come hither. Stay for me. Do not go lb Fall. Get you out. of my way, T>o not touch me. Let that alone. 1 am well here. Open the door. Fecke 240 PORTUGUESE Feche a porta, A' bra, ou feche a janella, Venha vm" par a qui, Pa/fe por la, Que procura vm c '? Queperdio v?n ce ? Shut the door. Open the window, or fhut the window. Come this way. Pafs that way. What do you look for ? What have you loft ? To wifh well to a Perfon. Ceo vos guarde, Deos vos de boa f or tuna t Dezejo-vos to do o bem, Deos vos ajude, Bios vos per doe i 1'de com Deos, Ate ver nos, Bom proveitofaga a v?n ef , Heavens preferve you. God fend you good luck. I wifh you every thing that is good. God affift you. God forgive you. God be with you. Till I fee you again. Much good may do you. To wifh ill. diabo te live, Maid it o Jejas tu, Vaipara os quintos infernos, Vaite en for car, Enforcado Jejas tu) The devil take thee. A curfe on thee. Away, go to hell. Go and be hanged. Would thou wert hanged. To fwear. AJJim Deos me Jalve, Arrebentado feja eu, Em concicncia, As God mail help me, - fhall fave me. May I burft. In my confcienee. To threaten and infult. Take care, I will beat thee. Thou wilt pay it me. O'lka que He hei de dar, Deixa te ejidr, or cala te que me has de pagar, Jura que tejarei arrepender dijo, Se me enfadares, Co it a do de ti, Poucas razo'ens, or cala efsa -Holdyourtongue,don'tfpeak boca, to me. I'Jh bafta, It is enough, it is fufficient. To I fwear thou (halt repent of it. If you put me into a paffion. Woe be to thee." GRAMMAR. 241 To mock, to blame, and to call one names, Ofyue belofocinho ! Que cdra de mono ! Trapaceiro, EmbuJieirOy MexeriqueirOy Que belojogeito ! Velhdco % MarotOy Ma cajta, Ton to, AfneirdOy O the fine fnout ! What an ape's face ! A chicaner. A cheat, an impoftor. A tale bearer, a tell-tale. O the dull thing. A knave. A rogue, a rafcal. Curfed race. Giddy-brains, blunderbufs. A great beaft, a thick-fkulL To admire. DSos ! He pojfwell Quern term imagine do , crido t dito ! Que animal! Que maravilka ! or que mi* lag re ! Nao memaravilho ! Como pode fer ijlo ! or Como he pojivel! Eis aqui como fad as coufas dejle mtindo ! OGod! Is it poffible ! Who would have thought, believed, faid ! What a beaft it is ! ftrange ! 1 don't wonder. How can that be ! So goes the world ! To (hew Joy and Difpleafure. Que goflo ! Que gloria J Que alegria ! Oque coritentamento he meu! Quefelic'idade ! Sinto ijfoy Sinto ijfo na alma t Sinto ijfo no corafaOy que defgra$a he a minha ! What pleafure \ What glory ! What joy ! How pleafed I am 1 What happinefs ! I am forry for it. That touches my very foul. It pierces me to the heart, O how uiihappy am I ! R To PORTUGUESE 242 Affrontar-me defla forte ! Affim he que ft trata ? V'lha marotol Que be I la, cortefia ! Nao deveria tratar comigo deftaforte, Parece-te ban? Aprendt, peddgo d'dfno, O'lha como me trata este ani- mal, Olhdique velhdco he este, Que diabo tern ellejeito ? P'eis, ainda teimais ? To affront me thus ! Do you deal thus ? You rogue ! O what fine manners ! Thou oughteft not to treat me thus. Doft thou think that it will ? Learn, bead as thou art. See the brute, how he ufes me. Do you behold that rafcal. What the devil has he done? What, are you obftinate ftill ? To call. O'uve ! O'nde estas ? Huma palavra, Duas palavrasjbmente, Hark! Where art thou ? A word. I'll fpeak but two words to you. To fhew Uneafiness, Trouble, and Sorrow. Sinto or pefime, Deixa?ne, Pefo te que me deixes, Nao mi qucbres a cabe$a t O'ra vamos, deixame, Deixame, voi com Deos, Vdite daqui, or vaite embora, Vai tratar da tua vida, Vaite na ma hora, or vdite co diabo, Nao mejdgas a cabeca tonta, yd me Jens dito ijjo hum cen- to de vkes, I am forry. Let me be quiet. Prithee get thee gone. Do not break my head. Away, away. Go, go, God be with you. Get thee gone from hence. Go mind your own bufinefs. Go to the devil. Do not make me giddy. You have told it me a hun- dred times already. Toafk. Que novas ha ? Que he isto? que ha? What news ? What is this, matter ? what is the O'nde GRAMMAR, M3 tide ides ? Donde vindes ? Que quer dizer ? De- que ferve ? Que vos parece ? Quern teve tal atrevimento? Que dizem ? que ft diz ? Como diz vm (e ? For que nao me refponde ? To Deixdi efldr ijfo, Nao toqueis, Nao dig ah ndda t Guarddivos, Where are you a-going ? Whence come you ? What do you mean ? To what purpofe ? What do you think ? Who is that has been fo bold? What do they fay ? How do you fay ? Why don't you anfwer ? forbid. Let that alone. Do not touch. . Say not a word. Have a care. Of fpeaking, faying, doing, &c. Fdlle vm" alto, Falle vm ce mdnfo, Com quern f alia vm ct ? Falle vm ce comigo ? Fall?- 1 he, Falla 1 vm te Portuguez ? Que diz vm" ? Nao digo nada, Ella nao quer caldr-fe, Ouvi dizer que—~ Affim mo differ ao, AJfim dizem, AJfim dizem todos, Quern Iho dijfe a vm"? Dijfemo o Sr. A. Pdis elle he que Iho dijfe ? Pois el la he que o difje ? Quando o ouvio vm. dizer ? Dijfefdo mo hoje, Nao p'ojfo cre-lo, Que diz elle ? Que vos dijfe elle ? Elle nao me dijfe nada, Nao- Iho dig a vm. Eu Iho direi, Nao dig a nada, Dijfe vm. aquillo ? Speak loud. Speak low. Who do you fpeak to ? Bo you fpeak to me ? Speak to him, or to her. Do you fpeak Portuguefe ? What do you fay ? I fay nothing. She will not hold her tongue. I was told that ■ I was told fo. They fay fo. Every one fays fo. Who told it you ? Mr. A. told it me. Did he tell you fo ? Did (he tell it? When did you hear it ? I heard it to day. I can't believe it, What does he fay ? What did he fay to you ? He faid nothing to me Do not tell him that. I'll tell him, or her of it. Say not a word. Did you fay that ? K s Mo 244 Nad o dijfe, Nao difle vm. aj/im ? Que ejtd vmfazendo? Cue tern vm.feito ? Naofd^o ndda, Nao t'enho jtito ndda, Tern vm. acabddo ? ®hie ejid elle fazendo ? QjLiejuz, ell a ? ' . Que quer, or que ordina vm Que Ihe/alta ? PORTUGUESE I did not fay it. Did you not fay fo ? What are you doing ? What have you done ! I do nothing; I have done nothing. Have you done ? W T hat is he doitig ? What- does fhe do ? What is your pleafure ? What do you want ? Of underftanding or apprehending. Entende-o, or percebe-o vm, bem ? Perce be vm. o que elle dijfe ? Percebe vm. o que elle diz ? Entcndeme,ov percibeme vm?. Entendo avm. muito bem, Nao entendo a vm. Sube vm. a lingua Portu~ guexa ? Nao afei^ Tern -me vm. percebido? Agora o percebo, Nao fe percebe o que ellediz, Par ece gdgo, Do you underfland him well ? Did you underfland what he faid? Do you underfland what he fays? Do you underfland me ? I underfland you very well. I do not underfland you. Do you underfland Fortu- guefe ? I do not underfland it. Did you underfland me ? Now 1 underfland you. One cannot underfland what he utters. He fpeaks like a flamrserer. Or knowing, or having Knowledge of. Sd be vm.ijfo ? Nao a /Si, Nao fei ndda dijfo, E'lla bem o/abia, Porventura nao fakia elleijfo? Demos que cu ou foubeffe, E'Ue nao fabtra ndda dj/o, Elle nuncajoube ndda dijlo, E'ufoube-o primeiro, or antes que vm, ojcubej/e, Do you know that ? I do not know it. I knew nothing of it ? She knew well of it. Did he not know of it ? Suppofe I knew it. He fhall know nothing of it. He never knew any thing about this. I kn«w it before you. He GRAMMAR. m He ijlo assim ou nao ? Nao que eufaiba, Is it fo, or not ? Not that I know of. Of knowing or being acquainted with, forgetting, and remembering. Conhece -o vm.? Conhece-a vm. ? Conhece-os vm. ? Conheco-o muito bem, Nao os conheco, Nos nao nos conhecemhs, Conhego-o de vijla, ' Conheco-a de name, E'lle conheceo-me muito bem, Conhece -me vm. ? Tenho-me ejquecido do feu nbme Tem-fevm. efquec ido de, m i m ? Conkece-vos ell a. ? Conhece o Sr. a vm. ? Pdrece que nao me conhece, Sr. bem me conhece, * E'lle ja me nao conhece, Tenho a honra dejajiu con- hecido, Lembra-fe vm. dijfo ? Nao me lembro dijfo, Lembro me muito bem dijfo, Do you know him ? Do you know her ? Do you know them ? I know him very well. I do not know them. We do not know one another. I know him by fight. I have heard of her. He knew me very well. Do you know me ? I have forgot your name. Did you forget me ? Does (lie know you? Does the gentleman know you ? It appears he does not know me. The gentleman knows me well. He knows me no more. I have the honour to be known to him. Do you remember that ? I do not remember it. I do remember it very well. Of Age, Life, Death, &c. Que iddde tern vm. ? Cue idade tern feu irmao ? Tenho vinte e cinco annos, Tern vinte e dous annos, Vm, tern mais annos do que eu > Que idade tera vm. ? He vm. cafddo r Qudntas ve%es tern vm. ca- Jado> Quant as molheres tern Vm. tidol How old are you ? How old is your brother. I am five and twenty. He is twenty-two years old. You are older than I. How old may you be ? Are you married ? How often have you been married ? How many wives have you had. Tern 146 PORTUGUESE Tern vm. ainda pay, c may ? Mcu p&y mgrreo % Minha may morreo, Ha iy. Ag'ojlo Auguft. Setembro, September, Outubro, Oaober. , Novembro-t November. Dezembro, December. Dias Santos. Holy -Days of the Year, Dia de Anno bom, New Year's Day. Dia de Reys, a Epipkama, Twelfth Day. A Candeldria, Candlemas Day, *Aa PORTUGUESE PurificafS, O Entrudo, Qucirtafeira de Ci?izas, A Quarefma, Annunciagad, AsQudtro Tcmporas, A Semanafanta, Domingo dt Ramos, Oudrtajhra dc Trevbas, {hiintafeira de Endoenfas, Sejla feira da Paixdo, Pafcba da Re/urreycdo, AJfumpcdo dc N. 5". As Rogacoens,, or Ladainhas, Afcenfdo, Pentecofle, Dia do Corbo de Deos, Dia de S. Jodo, Dia de S. Pedro, . Dia de tbdos os Santos, Dia dos Finddos, Dia de S. Marti?iko t Dia de Natal, Vigilia, or vejpera, The Purification. The Carnival, or Shrovetide. Afti Wednefday. The Lent. Lady Day in March. The Ember Weeks. The Holy Week. Palm Sunday. Wednefday before Eafter. Maunday Thurfday, the laft Thurfday in Lent. Good Friday. Eafter Day. Lady Day in harveft. Rogation Week. The Afcenfion. The Pentecoft, or Whitfun- tide. Corpus Chrifti Day. Midfummer Day. Lammas Day. All Saints Day. All Souls. Martinmas. Ch'riflmas Day, The eve. Da Igreja e Dignidades Ec- Of the Church and Ecclefias- clefiafticas, tical Dignities. A nave, Zimborio, Pindculo, C6ro, Capella, E/idnte t Sacrijlin, Co mpandrio,OMt$rre dosjinos Sino, Baddloi Pia, Hyfope, Qonfefliondrioi The aifle of the church. The dome. Pinnacle. The choir. The chapel. A reading defk, or chorifter's defk. The veftry. The belfry. The bell. The clapper of the bell. The font. A fprinkler. A confeflion feat. Tribuna* GRAMMAR. Wribuna, A tribune, orgallery. Cemiterio, A church-yard, a burying- place. Harneiro, A charnel. Altar, . An altar, Frontal* An antipendiurn. Pdllio, A canopy. Toalha do altar* The altar cloeh. Mifdl, A miffal, a mafs-book. Sotdna, A caffock. Siobrepelliz, A furplice. Roquete, A fhort furplice, a bifhop's furplice. pdpa t Hum car deal, The pope. A cardinal. Hum patriarch A patriarch. Hum arcebifpo., An archbifhop* Hum bifpo, A biftiop. Hum legddo, A legate. Vice Icgddo* A vice- legate. Hum nuncio, A nuncio* Hum prelddo, A prelate. Hum commendador^ A commander. Hum abbdde, An abbot. Huma abbadijfa* An abbefs. Hum prior* A prior. Hum reitor* A re&or. Beneficiddo, . Beneficed clergyman, or in- cumbent. Frdde, or religiofo^ A friar. Cor da, A (haven crown. Hum guar dido, A guard ian a Hum dejinidor, A definitor. Hum provincial, A provincial. Humgeral, A general. Hum vigdrio, A vicar. Hum vigdrio gerdl, A vicar-general, Hum dead, A dean. Hum arcedidgo, Archdeacon, Didcono, Deacon. Subdidcono, A fub-deacon. Hum conego, A canon. Arciprefie, Arch-prieft* Hum clerigo 9 Aprieft, Captlldo, A chaplain. * A 3 Hu, 6 PORTUGUESE Hum efmoler t Hum pdrroco, " Ben eficio fimples, Freira, Hum pregador, Sacrijido, or Jane r ij 'I do, Menino do coro, An almoner. A curate. Sinecure. A nun. A preacher, or lecturer. A fexton, a veftry- keeper* A finging boy, Nomes das cou fas que geral- Names of things mojiufually mente fe comem. eaten. Pad, Bread. Agoa, Water. Vinho, Wine. Came, Meat,orflefh. Pezxe, Fifh. Cdrne cozida, Boiled meat. Cdrn- a$dda, Roaft meat. Hum boeddc dt pad, A mouthful of bread. Humpa/lel, A pye. ^ Humafopa, Soup. Hum cdldo, Broth. Hum a fa la 'da , A fallad. Hum molho, .Any.-Jki«4s*f faufe to<»d*p in, Fritta, - - Fruit. Que'ijo, Cieefe. Manteiga, Butter. T)o Servico de huma Mefa, Of the Covering of the Tabic, A mefa, Huma cadeira, A todlha da ?nefa, Todlha de mads, Hum guardandpo, Humafdca, Hum gdrfo, Huma colher^ Hum prdto, Humfaleiro, Galheta do vindgrc, Galheta do azeite,' The table. A chair. The table cloth. A towel. A napkin. A knife. A fork. A fpoon, A plate. A fait feller. A vinegar a@ttle r »r cruet. A cruet, o$ vial Jm oil. Talker GRAMMA R. Talker, Bay xe I la oujervifo deprdta, Huma cuberta^ Prato, guardandpo, faca, gdrfo, colher [tudo junto) O gornil, Hdma batia^ Hum copo, Huma garrafa, Huma td$a^ I Cajiifdly VUa, Tefouras de e/pevitdr, Huma s diva. Huma escudella, Cejio par a por a pad, Donzella, Faquetro, I/ouga de Bdrro, Lou fa de ejidnho, A cruet-ftand. Sugar- box. A let of filver plate. A courfe. A cover. The ewer A bafin. A glafs. A bottle. A cup, A candleilick., A candle. Snuffers. A falver. A porringer. A bread-bafket. A dumb-waiter. A cafe for knives. Earthen ware. Pewter. Do Comer, e Beber. Vdca, Ca metro, Vitella, ■ Cordeiro, Gallinha, Gdllo, Peru, Almondegas % Ojantdr, Almogo, Cea, Merenda, Confodda, Banquete, Feme, SZde, Fa/Ho, Pad, • Of Eating and Drinking. Beef. Mutton. Veal. Lamb. Hen. Cock. A turkey. Puddings. The dinner. Breakfaft. Supper. Luncheon, or*ke=a$fe§*soon y s luncheon. A light fupper, as upon a c faft-dayl An entertainment. Hunger. Thirft. _ A loathin Bread. Pad $ PORTUGUESE Pddfrefco, or pad molle, Pad quente, Pad de todafarinha, Pad brdncd, or pad alvo, Arroz, Pad de rata, Pad de cevdda, Pad de centeo, Pad de avea, Pad de mi I ho miudo, Pad de milho grdnde, ou de maiz, Pad I eve do, Pal dfmo, Bificuto, Migdlha de pad, Falia de pad, Codea de pad, Mdffa, Tdrta, Rofca, Eft of ado, Fi-etm&nr, Came ajfdda fobre grelhas, Came jrita, Picddo, or came picdda, y avali, or pdrco montez, Pre/unto, £Cfvn\l£i'*£'. ^ Pdrco, " Cabrito, Toucinho, Hum lo??ibo, JMfdds de carneiro, Freffura, ox for cur a, Cachola de porco, Linguiga, or lingciga, Ckourico defdngue de porco, Pdyo, Fricafje, Fig a do,' Leite, Nat a, Sdro, Requeijdd, • Coalhdda, New bread. A hot loaf. Wheaten bread . White bread. Rice. Brown bread. Barley bread. Rye bread. Oaten bread. Millet bread. Indian corn bread. Leavened bread. Unleavened bread. Bifcuit. A crumb of bread. A (lice of bread. A cruft of bread. Dough. A tart. Bread made like a roll. Stewed meat. Guld-mcat. Broiled meat. Fried meat. A hafh. A wild boar. Ham, gammon of bacon. Pork. Kid. Bacon. A loin. Sheep's trotters. A pluck. , r , A faufage. Black-pudding. A thick and (hort faufage. A fricaffee. Liver. Milk. Cream. Whey. A kind of new cheefe. c^vr Curdled milk. Ovo, A GRAMMAR. O'vo, Gemma do ovo, Clara do ovo, O'vo frefco, O'vo molle, O'vo duro, O'vo ajfddo, O'vo gallddq, O'vos redes, O'vos ef calf ados, O'vos jritos, O'vos mexidos, eJr%tos y Bolinholo, O'vos de pHxe, Daces, Confeitos, Marmeldda t An egg. The yolk of an egg. The white of an egg, A new laid egg. A foft egg, A hard egg. A roafted egg. An egg with a chicken in it. Sweet eggs fpun out like hairs. % Poached eggs. Fried eggs. ... , An amlet. A fritter. The roes of fifli. Sweetmeats. Comfits. Marmalade. O que fe A'fla. Hum cap do, Hu majrdnga , Hum J rang o, fombos, Pombq trocdz, Gallinhola, Humaefpecie de gallinhola pc- quena a qual osCajllehdnos chamao gallinita ciega, Perdiz, Tordo, Faifdo, Faisdosinho, Hum leitdo, \ Veddo, Hum Coelho* Ldparo, .Lebre, A'dem, Gdnfo, or o macho da ddem, Pdta, Pdto, What is roajed, A capon, A pullet. A chicken. Pigeons. A wood culver, or wood- pigeon. A woodcock. A fnipe. A partridge. A thrum. A pheafant. A pheafant-powt. A roafling-pig. A flag. A rabbit. A young coney. A hare. A duck. A drake. Goofe. Gander, the rnaleof the goofe Calhdndra, 10 PORTUGUESE Calhdndra, A fky-lark. Codornh, A quail. Deoutros Paffaros. Aguia, Aguia nova, Abutre, Abejirics, Efmerilhdby Gav'ido^jeniea., Macho , (iiogavui») Falcdo, Falcdd que ainda nao voa, Gerifalte, Sdcre, Gkrca, Mechanic o t Gar cot a, Milhdno, or mi Co'rvo, Grrilka, Grdlho, Alveloa or rabe'ta, Canario, Fintaftfgo, Me'rlo, Ten til had, Rouxinol, Verdelhdo, Papagdyo, Ihdfre, EJtorninho, or zorzdi, Fran eel ho, Mocho, Coruja, Morcego, Ave noclurna, come melra, que mama as cdbras, Ofrancolim, Bufo, Cerceta, Corvo martnho. Of other Birds. An eagle. An eaglet. A vulture. An oftrich. A merlin. A fparrow-hawk. A taffel, the taffel of a fpar- row-hawk. A falcon. A jafs-hawk. . A ger- falcon. A faker, a faker-hawk. A heron. Tomtit. A little heron. A kite. A crow, or raven. A rook. A jack-daw. A wag-tail. - A canary-bird. A gold-finch. A black-bird. A chaffinch. A nightingale. A green-bird. A parrot. A magpie. A ftarling. A hobby, a mufket. Owl. A fcreech owl. A bat. A goat milker. A god wit, a moor- cock. A night crow, or raven. A teal. A cormorant. Gaivota,- GRAMMA R. 11 Oaivota, A moor-hen, ^rgull. s Gaivdd, A martlet, or martin, a kind offwallow. Andor4?ika, A f wallow. Mergulkdo, A dive, or didapper. Marreca, A wild-duck. » Picdnfo, A wren, a little bird. Taralkdo, A kind of ortolan. Pavdo, A peacock. Pavoa, A pea-hen. Ardra, A macaw. Parddl, A fparrow. Rola, A turtle-dove. Ale yon, A king's fifher. Cegonha, A ftork. CUCO, y A cuckow. Cifne, A fwan. Pintarrbxo^ A red robin. Grbu, A crane. Pavoncino, A lapwing. Pelicdno, A pelican. Tarambola, A plover. Pifco, A bullfinch, or red-tail. Para os Dias de Peixe, ou de For Fijh Days, or Faji Days. Jejum. Sopa de e'rvas, &c. Soup meagre, or lenten pot- tage. Peixe, Fifh. Peixe do mar, Sea-fifh. Peixe do rio, ou da agoa dace Frefh-water fHh. Sdvet, A (had. Anckova, An anchovy. Anguia, or Enguza, An eel. Bdrboy A barbel. Lucia, .. A pike, or jack. Cdrpe, A carp. Szba, A cuttle. Lula, A calamary. Cdbra, The miller's thumb. Gordz, A rochet, or roach. Congro, A conger. [the gilt head. Dourdda^ Dorado, St. Peter's fifh, or s Lin- 12 PORTUGUESE Linguddo, Lagbjta % Boradlo, Mugem, Rodovdlho, Sdrda, Cavdl 'l'a , Sardinha, Bacalhdo, Arenque, Voador, drrenque defumo t Arrtnque com 6vas y Pefcdda, . Cadoz, O'Jira, Lamprea, Lamprea pequena, Porco marinho, Polvo, Perca, Tinea, Truta, A turn, Salmdo, Camarao, Caranguejo, Ameijoa, Ervilhas, Favas, EJpinafres, AlcdchofraSi E/pdrgo, Couve, Repolho, Ndbos, Grelos de ccuve, C'ouve crefpa, Coliflor, or coulijlor i Beldroegas, CenturaSy Celgas, or AettgaSy Tomdtesy A fole. A lobfter. A fturgeon ; fome call it fhad-fifh. A mullet. A byrt or turbot. A fort of little mackarel. A mackerel. A pilchard. Dry cod. A herring. A flying-fifh. A red herring. A hard-rowed herring. A kind of cod-fifh. A gudgeon. A.n oyiier. A lamprey, A lampern. A porpoife. Pourcontrell, or many-feet. Perch. A tench. A trout. A tunny-fifh. A falmon. A ihrimp, A crab. A cockle. Peafe. Beans. Spinage. Artichokes. Afparagus. Cabbage, colewort. Cabbage. Turnips. Sprouts. Curled colewort. Cauliflower. Purflane. Carrots. Beets. Apples of love. Para GRAMMAR. 13 Park temperar o Comer. Sal, Pimtnta, Pimentao, Azeite, Vinagre, Mojldrda, Crdvos, Cane la, Loureiro, Alcapdrras, Cogumelos, Tubard da terra, Cebolas, Our egad, Funcho, Ctbolinhas, A'lho, Laranjas, Limoens, Pinhoens, Perrexil, Sdlfa, Orteldd, Aipo hortenfe, A'lho porro, Coentro, Agafrdm, Cominhos, Tofeason meat witk* Salt. Pepper. Cayan peppers- Oil. Vinegar. Muftard. Cloves. Cinnamon. Laurel. Capers. Mufh rooms. Truffles. Onions. Organy. Jennel. Young onions. Garlick. Oranges. Lemons. The kernels of a pine apple; Wild parfley. Garden parfley. Mint. Cellery. Leek. Coriander. Saffron. Cummins. Para Salada. For a Sal lad. Almeirdo, Wild fuccory. Almeird~ohortenje,QX tndivia, Endive. Alfdce, Chicoria, Agrioens, Majlrugos, or majlurqot, Ctrefolxo, Ral do. Lettuce. Succory. Water crefes, Creffes. Chervil. Raddifh root, Para 14 PORTUGUESE Para Sombre mifa. For the Dejfert. Macdds, Peras, Pera bergamota, Pecegos, Camocza, Albricoquc, Cerejas, Cerejas defdco, Ginjas, Ginja garrafal, Lardnja da China, " U'vas, Pdjfas de uva, U'va efpim, Figos, Figos Idmpos, Amcixas, Pdfsas de ameixas, Amcrasde gdr$a, ox defy Iv a, Amor as que ndcem de huma forte defylva tinra, Amor as que ndcem da amo- reira, Mar me I os, Romdds, Luna, Azeitonas, Amendhas, Nefperas, Meldo, Meldnciv, ox baldncia, Cafidnhas, Nozes, Aveldns, Mordngos s Medronho, Apples. Pears. A bergamot pear. Peaches. A pippin. Apricot. Cherries. Hard cherries. Sour cherries. A very large fort of cherry, the fruit or the dwarf cherry-tree. China-orange. GraDes. Raifins. Goofebcrries. Figs. The firft figs that come m May. Plums. Prunes. Blackberries. Rafpberries. Mulberries. Quinces. Pomegranates . A lime. Olives. Almonds. Medlars. A melon. Water-melon. Chefnuts. Walnuts. Hazelnuts. Strawberries A fort of fruit they have in Portugal like a ftrawberry, eating whereof, they fay, makes people drunk". Tamara, * GRAMMA R. lamdra, Fijtico, Alfarroba, Bolota, Sorva, Agofeifd) or magda denafega, Do ccs, A date. A piftache*nut. A carob. A fweet acorn. Service. A jubub. Sweet-meats. 15 Das A'rvores e Arbuftos. Damajqueire, Amendoeira^ Cerejeira, Cajianheiro, Cidreira, Sorvcira, 'Palmeira, Figueira, MarmeUiro, Mace Ira, Maceira da nafega, Romeira, Limoeira, Amoreira, Oliveira, Nefpereira, Laranjeira, Murta, Nogueira, Zambujeirq, Era, Pecegueiro, Rofeira, Ameixieira, Pereira, Rofmaninho, Pinheiro, Giejia, Of Trees and Shrubs, An apricot-tree. An almond-tree. A cherry-tree. A chefnut-tree, A citron -tree. A fervice-tree. A palm-tree. A fig-tree. A quince-tree. An apple-tree. A jubub-tree. A pomegranate-tree,, A lemon-tree. A mulberry-tree. An olive-tree. A medlar-tree. , An orange-tree. Myrtle. . A walnut-tree. A wild olive-tree, Ivy. A peach-tree. A rofe-bufh. A plum-tree. A pear-tree. Rofemary. x A pine-tree. Broom. Dos Reptiles, e Anim&is amphibios. Minkoca, Serpente, Of Reptiles and Amphibioi Creatures, An earth- worm, A ferpent. Serpente 16 PORTUGUESE Serpente com azas, A'fpide, Cobra, Cobra de cafcavd % fib or a, Lagdrto, 0'fg«, _ Alacrao, Crocodilo, Jacare, or crocodilo da Ame- rica, Ca/lor, Cdgado, Lontra, A flying ferpent* An afp. A fnake. A rattle- fnake. A viper. A lizard. An evet, eft, or newt. A fcorpion. A crocodile. An alligator. A beaver. A land tortoife; An otter. Dos Inferos. Ardnha, Formiga, Caracal, Rda, Sdpo, Oucdo, Efcaravelho, Caruncho, Pi6tho,oxlagdrtadakortaliga Cigdrra, Borboleta, Grillo, Piolho, Piolho lddro t Le'ndea, Pulga, Mojca, Pcrfovejo, Carrapdto, GafanhbtOj Polilha, or trdpa, Vefpa, or abefpora, Abelha, Zdngo, or ZangOQj Tavad, Boyde Deos, y Me/quite, Of the Insecls. A fpider. A pifmire or ant. A fnail. A frog. A toad. Hand-worm. A beetle. Wood-worm. Caterpillar. Grafshopper. A butterfly. A cricket. A loufe. Crab-loufe^ A nit. A flea. . A fly. A bug. A tick. A locufh Moth. A wafp. A bee. A drone. An ox fly. A lady-bird* A gnat* GRAMMAR. 17 Graos de Parentefco, Degrees of Kindred. My, Father. Mdy, Mother. AVO, Grandfather. Avd, Grandmother. Bifavb, Great grandfather.- Bifavd, Great grandmother. Fit ho, Son. Filha, Daughter. Irmdo, Brother. Irmda, Sifter. Primogenitor The eldeft Ton. Ofilko mais mcgo, The youngeft fon. Tio, Uncle. Tia, Aunt. Sobrinho, Nephew. Sobrinka, Niece. Primo, Coufin. Prima, A female coufin. Primo com irmdo, The male firfl coufin. Prima com irmao, ■ The female firft coufin. Cunhddo, Brother-in-law. Cunhdda, Sifter-in-law. Meyo irmdo, Half-brother. Sogro, , Father-in-law. Segra, Mother-in-law. Padrdjlo, A ftep-father. Madrajia, A ftep-mother. Enteddo, A ftep-fon. Entedda, A ftep-daughter. Genro, A fon -in-law. Mra, A daughter-in-law. Neta, A grand-daughter. Ntto, A grand-fon. Bifneto, A great grand-fon. Bifneta, A great grand-daughter. Con/or te, mafc. and fem. A confort. Marido, Hufband. Mother, Wife. Irmdo gemeo, A twin-brother. Coldco, or irmdo de ieite, A fofter- brother. Bafidrdo, A baftard. Compddrs, A male goflip. * B Comadre 18 Comddrr, Jfilhddoy A fit had a, P a drink o, Madrznha par cute, A parente, Pa rente por PORTUGU E-SE ; nfa ngui n i ddde afjin: or Dos differentes Gtncros de Eftado de hum Homem, on de huma M H) er, e das fiias qualidades, Homem, A ?nolher, Hum homem de idddt\ Huma molh'er de iddde, Hum velho, Huma vclha, ■ Hum ??iofo, ou mancebo, Huma rapariga\ Hum amr^e, Huma qmiga, Huma cridn$a, ou menifio, Hum rapdz, Humrapazinho,- Huma meriina., Huma donzella, Huma virgem % A'mo i A'?na, Criddo, Cridda, Cidaddo, Rujfoco, Hum efirangciro, Hum viuvo, Huma viuvdy Hum kerdeiro, Huma herdcira, Solteiro, FJiado defoltciro, A female go flip. A god-fon. A god-daughter. A god- father. A god -mother. A male relation. A female relation. A kin, a relation either of affinity or confanguinity. Of the conditions of Man and ' Woman, as well as oj their qualities-. A man. A woman. An aged man. An aged woman. An old man. An old woman. A young mam A girl. A fpark. A miflrefs. A child, a little child. A boy. A little boy. A little girl. A maiden. A virgin. A mailer. A miflrefs. A male-fervant. A feraale-fervant. A citizen. A countryman. A ftranger. A widower. A widow. An heir. An heirefs. A bachelor. Bachelorfhip. Homem. GRAMMAR. IS Homem cafado, ■Molher cafada, Mother que ejld de pdrto^ Deftro, Agudo, Recatzido, Ajluto, or velhdco, Esperto, ©r vivo, DSudo, MaliciosOy Umido, ValerosOi TontOt Embujleiro, Groffeiro, Bern criddo, Cortez, Jufto, DesavergonhddOy Impertinente, Importuno, Dtscuiddda^ Te?nerdrio i Conjtdnte, Devoto, Diligente, [sivo, Mijeric or diofo, or compos- Paciente, A?nbici6fo^ Cobigbfo, S-oberbo t Cobdrde, Lifonjeiro, Golojo, Defied^ Defagradeado, Inhumane , Infolente, Luxur'ibfo.^ Ttimofo y Pregui^'ofii Prbdigo, Molherengo^ Atrevido^ A'Ugre, A married marl. A married woman. A lying-in-woman. Dexterous. Sharp. Cautious. Cunning, fly, crafty. ■ Sprightly. Mad. Malicious. Fearful. Brave* Stupid. Deceitful. ClownifK. Well-bred. Courteous. Jult. Impudent. Impertinent. Troublefome, Carelefs. Kafh. Conflant. Devout. Diligent*, Merciful. Patient. ' Ambitious*, Covetous. Prond. Coward, v , A flatterer. Glutton. Treacherous. Ungrateful. Inhumane, Infolent. Lewd. Pofnive, Itubbora, Slothful. Prodigal. Given to women. Bold. Merry. B s dut 20 PORTUGUESE Que tern ciumes, Adultero, Salteadcr, Matador ■, Murmurador y Calumniadbr \ FeitidirOy *Trahidor t Ma had a, Rebelde, Perfido, Bo'bo, Mentirofo, Altivo> Coxo, E/tropeddo das mads, Cigo, Jhouco, ovfurdo, Canho'to, or efquerdo t Mudo, Jealous. Adulterer. A highwayman, A murderer. A cenfurer. A calumniator. A forcerer. A traitor. Wicked. A rebel. Perfidious. A buffoon. A lyar. Haughty. Lame of the legs. Lame of the hands. Blind. Deaf. Left-handed. Dumb. Dos Morad6res de Cidade. huma N'obre, Fiddlgo, Mecdmco, Tendeiro, Mercador or he ?n em de nego- ao, vulgo, or a plebe, Candlha, or a mdis vil gente da plebe, Official, Jornaleire, Prathro, rives do cure, Livreiro, hnprejfor, Barbeiro, Mercadbr defeda, Mercadir de pdnno, Of the Inhabitants of a City. A nobleman. A gentleman. A mechanic. A fhop-keeper. Merchant, or trader. The mob. The rabble. A work-man, a man that labours with his hands. A journeyman. A filver-fmith. Agold-fmith. A book-feller. A printer. A barber. A mercer. A woollen-draper. Mercadar GRAMMAR; 31 Mercador de pdnno, delinho, e roup as da India, or fan- queire, Aljayate, Aljayate r emend do, Cojlureira, Sombreireiro, Sapateiro, Remenddd, [sapateiro), Ferreiro, Alveitar, Cerralheiro, Parteira, Medico, Charlatdo, Cirurgiam, or furgiao, Sacamolas, Selleiro, Carpinteiro, Gajtador, (in an army) Padeiro, Carniceiro, Fruteiro, Mother que vende verduras ou or tali gas, Pajleleiro, Taverneiro, or v-endeiro, Cervejeir o,oxo quefaz cerveja Eftaiaja-deiro, \ Bofarinkeiro, or mercador de merceria, Relogeiro, Pregoeiro, Joyeiro, or joy a their o> Boticdrio, Vidraceiro, Carvoeiro, Jardineiro, Letrddo, Procurador, Advogddo, Juiz, Ca rcereiro, Verdugo, or algoz, Mario I . A linen-draper. A taylor. Botcher. A fempftrefs. A hatter. Shoemaker. A cobler. A blackfmith. Farrier. A lockfmith. A midwife. A phyfician. A quack. A furgeon. A tooth-drawer. A fadler. A carpenter. A pioneer. A baker. A butcher. A fruiterer. An herb woman. A paftry-cook. A vintner. A brewer. An inn-keeper. A pedlar. A watch-maker. A crier. A jeweller. An apothecary. A glazier. A collier. A gardener. A lawyer. A folicitor. An advocate, or a pleader. A judge. A goaler. A hangman. A porter. B 3 0$ PORTUGUESE Os cinco Sentidos. The five Sei A vi/la, ouvido, olfdclo, gofto, taclo, The fight. The hearing. The smell. The tafte. The feeling. As Partes do CorpoHumano. The Parts of the Human Body. Catena, Micios, or clrebro, ToutifOy Te/ta, Molkira, pontes, Orelha, Cartildgtm, T'impano, Sobiancelha, Pdlpebras, or CapelLs do.s ethos, PeJIanas, Ldgrimal, Alva do 61 ho, Meninas dos olhos, Nariz, Mac da do r'oflo, Veritas, Septo, or diaphragm a do nariz, A pint a do nariz , A bdca > Os denies, -Agenglva, A tinged, Paddr, paladar, or ccodd boca, Queixdda, A bar be , The head. The brains. The hinder part of the head. The fprehead. The mould of the head. The temples. The ear. The griftle. The drum of the ear. Eye-brow. The eye-lid. The eye-lames. The corner of the eye. The white of the eye. The eye-balls. The nofe. The ball of the cheeks. The noftrils. The griftle of the nofe. The tip of the nofe. The mouth. The teeth. The gum. Tongue. The roof, or palate of the month. The jaw. The chin. As barb as, G'RAMMA R. • 23 'As barhas, B?goder, O pescofo, A nuca, A gargdnta, Seyo, Teta, Pez'to, Bico de peito, EJiomago, Co/Mas, E'mbigo, Barriga, * Verilha, brago, cotovilo, Scbaco, or Jovaco, A mad , Munhcca, A pa I ma da mad, Os dedos, dido polegar, do do mojtrador, Dedo do miyo, Dido annular, Dido meninho, or \mi nimo, Pontas dcs dedos, Juntas, € n:s dos aides, Dido do pe, A unha, As cojias, Os ombroS) llhargas, As nddegas, Coxa, yoilko, Barriga da pirna } E/pinhafo, Tornozelo, pe, Sola do pe, c or a f rid, Os bofes, The beard. Whiikers. The neck. The nape of the neck. The throat. The bofom. The pap. fhebreaft. The nipple. The ftomach. The ribs. The navel. The belly. The groin. The arm. The elbow. The arm-pit. The hand. The wrift,. The palm of the hand. The fingers. The thumb. The fore-finger. The middle -finger. - The ring-finger. The little-finger. The tips, or tops of the fingers. The joints, and knuckles of the fingers. A toe. The nail. The back. The fhculders. The fides. The buttocks. The thigh. The knee. The calf of i.he leg. The ridge-bone of the back. The ancle. The foot. The fole of the foot. The heart. The lungs. >'B 4 Ofigadc, 24 . PORTUGUESE bdpo, Os rins, Aboca do cflomago. As tripaSy ■ Ofel, A madre, Bexiga, Sangue, Cufpo, Ourina, Exeremento, Suor, Monco or rariho, Lagrima, Carepa y or cdfpa, The liver. The fpleen. The kidneys. The pit of the ftomaeh. The guts. The gall. The womb. The bladder. The blood. Spittle. Urine. Dung. Sweat. Snot. Tear. Scurf. Dos Veftidos, Hum veflido, Cabdltira, Cravat a, Chape o, Abas do chape o t \_peo> Cor dad, owjita^pard o cha- Barrete, Cdpa y Gib do, Vejiia, Camija, Cofaca, Cafacdo, Calfoens, Ceroulas, Meas, or meyas, Meas de cabrejiilho, Ligas, Sapatos, CJunelas, Botas, Five las, Efporas, Bunkos, Talim, or taly, OfCloaths. A fuit of cloaths. A wig. A cravat or neckcloth. A hat. The brims. A hatband. A cap. A cloak. A doublet. A waiftcoat. A fhirt. A clofe coat. A great coat. Breeches. Drawers. Stockings. Stirrup {lockings. Garters. Shoes. Slippers. Boots. Buckles. Spurs. Ruffles. Aihoulder-belL. ? Baldric, GRAMMAR. Boldrie, £ spa da, Luvas, Cinta, JLenfO, Lenco para o pescogo, Samarra, oxpelLote do cdmpo, A waift-belt. A fword. Gloves. A girdle. Handkerchief. A neck handkerchief. A fhepherd's jacket. Para Molheres. Camisa dt molkeres, Toucado, Say a, Mantilha, Manto, Avental, Bracelets, Anel, : Arrecadas, Leque, Penteador, Toucador, Sindes, Espelho, Regalo, Espartilhq, Pen, Alfinetes, Tesoura, Dedal, Agulha, Fzo, Fio de perolas, Pofoilhos, Joy as, Cor, Palito, Roca, Fuso, Almofadinka para atfinctes, For Women, A (hi ft, or fmock. A head drefs. , A petticoat. A little cloak women wear on their heads. A mantle, a kind of cloak women wear in Portugal, covering their head and the upper part of their body- An apron, bracelets. Ring. Ear-rings. A fan. A combing cloth. A toilet, a drefling table. Patches to wear on one's face. A looking-glafs. A muff, S%s. A comb. Pins. A pair of fciffars. A thimble. A needle. Thread. A necklace of pearls. Powder. Jewels. Paint. A tooth-pick. A diitaff. The fpindle. Small pincufhion. Agulha 26 PORTUGUESE Agulha de toucdr, Fitas, Fichu (s'ortt de lenco para o p es xo co , Tenazinhas, Pendcntes, Pa'atina, Guar da inf ante t ot Guard in- fante, Veo, Ren da, Bilros, Bilrbs feitos de hjfo, Ag'ua da rdinha de Vngria, Agoa de cheiro, Juftlho, Bodkin. Ribbon;. ' A necklace. Nippers. Bob, or pendant.": Tippet Farthingale, or hoop. Veil. Lace. Bobbins. Bones. Hungary water. Seemed water. Bodice. Os doze Signos Celeries. The twelve Celeflial Signs. Aries, Touro, Gemini or Gemini/, Cancer, Lead, Virgem, Libra, Escorpiao, Sagitario, Capri cor mo, Aqudrio, Peixes, Aries, or the ram. The bull. The twins. The crab. The lion. The virgin. The balance. The fcorpion. The archer. The goat. The water-bearer. The fifties. De hiima Cafa e do que lhe pertence. Cdsa, Alichse, Parede, Tabique, Pdteo, or Patio., Andur, or sobrddo^ Pacha da, Jane I la, Of a House, and all that be- longs to it* A houfe. Foundation. A wall. A light brick-wall. A court, or yard. A floor. The front. A window. Abobada* GRAMMAR. 27 Abobada, As escddas, I) eg r a os, Tel ha do, Tel has, Ladrilhos, or tijoles, Aposento, Antecamara, Sdla, Ticto, Ale ova, Bale do, Gabinete, Almario, Gudrda-rcupa, Cozinha, Despensa, Chemine, Cava liar z^a, Gallinheiro, or casa das gal- linhas, Pole fro, Jar din ) Necejfarias, Casa bnde se junta, Cdmara, or casa em que se dorme, Sdla da vifitas nos baixos de huma casa, P6rta, Pofigo, Liminar, or lumidr, Vidrdcas que se poem no tecto de huma casa para a alumiar Alger oz, Beiras, oxdbas do telhddo, A couceira da porta, Fechadiira, Cadeddo, Ferrblho, Tranca da porta 9 Ccmo da chdve, Chdve mcjlra, Guar das dajechadura, A vault. The flairs. Steps. A tiled roof. Tiles. Bricks. A room. Antichamber. A hall. A roof. An alcove. A balcony. Clofet. • A cupboard. Wardrobe. A cellar. A kitchen. A pantry. A chimney. The liable: A hen-houfe, A hen-rood. A garden. The neceiTary-houfe* A dining-room. Bed-chamber, A parlour. The door. A wicket. The threshold. Sky-lights. The gutter. The caves. The hinges. A lock. A padlock. The bolt. The bar of a door.' The pipe of a key. A mafter-key. The wards of a lock. Palhefdd, Co* Palhttao da chavc, Vidraca, Escddafeita a carraccl, Escdda secreta, Viga, Parede mejlra, Paredes meyas, Area, Cdma, Sobreceo da cama\ Cortinas da cdma, Lenfoes, Cabeceira da cdma, Pes da cama, Cole ha j Colchdo, Cobertor, Cob er tor de felpa, Cdtre pes taboas, &c. de que se compem o leito, Travesseho, Tapete, Tap eg aria, Pederneira, I' sea, Mecha, Enxergao, EJleira, Cdens da che?nine, F 6 lies, TenazeSi Ferra, Abaho or abanador, P an ell a , Tefto, ji'za da panella,^ Ferro para aticar o lume, Escumadeira, Collier grdnde, Caldeira* Sertaa, or frigideira, Co ad or, Grelhas, Ralo, PORTUGUESE flair- Key bit. The glass of a window. A winding flair-case. Back-flairs, a private case. A beam. The main wall. The party walls. Cheft. Bed. The bed's teller. Bed curtains. Sheets. The bed's head. Bed's feet. Counterpane, a quilt. A matrafs. A blanket. A rug. Bedftead. A pillow. A carpet. Tapeftry. A flint. Tinder. Match. A flraw-bed. A mat. Hand-irons. Bellows. Tongs. A (hovel. Fire-fan. A pipkin. The pot-lid. The ear of a pot, er pipkin, A poker. A fkimmer. A ladle, A kettle. A frying pan. A cullender, or ftrainer. Gridiron. A grater. Espctc, GRAMMAR. 29 Espho, Almofariz, Mao do almofariz, Redoma, Balde % Sabdd, Rod ilka, Esfregdo, For no, Pa do for no y Pasculho para alimpar ojo'r- no, Farinha, Trinchante, Mordomo, Camareiro, Camareiro ?nor ) Escova, Vassoura, Despenseiro, Pagem, Lacdyo, Cocke tro, Co c heir a, Mogo dos cavallos, ou da es- trebaria> Copeiro, Escudeiro de huma Jiddlga, A'mo, ou senhor da casa, A'ma, ou senkora da casa, Grimpa, Cores. Branco, Azuly Aziil celeste, or turqui> Azulferrete, Azul claro, Cor de • camurca, Amarelo, Cor de rosa, Cor de palha, A fpit. A mortar of metal wherein things are pounded. A peftle. A vial. A bucket, Or pail. Soap. A coarfe cloth. A difh-clout. Oven. The peel of the oven. A maukin, a coal-rake to make clean an oven. Meal-flour. A carver. A fie ward. A valet-de-chambre. A chamberlain. A brufh. A broom. A butler, a yeoman of the larder, a fieward. A page. A footman. A coachman. A coach-houie. A groom. A cup-bearer. A lady's gentleman ufher. Landlord. Landlady. Weather-cock. Colours, White. Blue. Sky-colour. Dark blue. Light blue. Light yellow. Yellow. Rofy colour. Straw colour. Vi erae t 30 PORTUGUESE Verde, Cor de verde mar, or verde cldro, Cor vermclha, Cor vermclha muUo viva, or c arm in, Cor incarnada, Cor de came, Cor car me sin, Cor nfgra, o r p rcta , Cor de mel, Fiirta cores, or cambidntes, Cor viva, Cer trijle, Cor escura, Cor carregdda, Cor defogo, Par do, Cor de Beajls. Befta dow'jlica, Tame beaft. Bejla brdva, A wild beaft. Befta de rdrga, A beaft of burthen . Be ft a de sella, A beaft for the faddle. • Gado, Cattle. Gado grojfo, Great cattle. Gado miudo 9 Small cattle. Rtbdnho, A flock. Manada de gado g ro/Jo, A herd of big cattle. Tcuro, , A bull. Bezerra, Heifer. Bezerro, GRAMMAR. Si Bezerro, Boy, Burro, Burra, Per co t Porca, Fdca, Eg 6a, Cria, Potra, Cavallo, 'Cavdllo anao, Cavdllo de pojla, Garranh&o, or cavdllo de Ian g anient o, 'Cavdllo de aluguel, Cavdllo de coche, Cavallo que anda de chouto, Cavdllo* pequeno que serve para senhoras, Cavallo que to ma ofreio entre denies, Cavallo rijo da bora, Cavallo doce defreio, Cavdllo que tern bra boca, Cavdllo que trope/fa, Cavdllo espantadico, Cavdllo ardente, or fogdzo, Cavdllo quemorde e da couces, Cavallo rebelldo, Cavdllo que ndo sbjfrc dncas, Cavdllo mat mandado, Cavdllo de albdrda, Cavdllo de cdrro, Cavdllo de sella, Cavdllo de correr, Cavallo de guerra, Cavdllo ajaezada-y Cavdllo de Barb aria, Cavallo capddo., Cavallo sem ser capado, ^Cavdllo que da dos folles, A calf, a {leer, a young bul- lock. An ox. An afs. A flie-afs. A hog. A fow. A young mare, alfo a nag, A mare. A foal, a filly. A colt, or young horfe. A horfe. A nag. A poit horfe. A ftailion. A hackney -horfe. A coach-horfe. A jolting- horfe. A palfrey. A horfe that champs the bit. A hard-mouthed horfe. A tender mouthed horfe, one that eafily fubmits to the curb. A horfe that will eat any thing. A (fumbling horfe. A ftartling-horfe. A Irately horfe. A biting and kicking horfe. A untamed horfe. A horfe that will not carry double. A refKve horfe. A pack-horfe. A cart-horfe. A faddle-horfe. A race-horfe. A war-horfe. A horfe with all his frrniture. A Mooriih horfe, a barb. A gelding. A iione-horfe. A broken- winded horfe. Cavdllo, 32 POR TUGUESE Cavdllo quatrdlvo, Cavdllo alazad, Cavdllo baio, C avail o caJldnho % Cavallo bdio e cajldnho, Cavdllo rocim, Cavdllo rcmendado, Cavdllo rudo or rujfo porxeU lano, Cavallo quefcffre ancas, Cavdllo trota'o, Cavdllo que ferve para anddr a caga, Cavdllo que an da defurtapdjfo Cdo, Cao de quinta, Cad de caca, Cad de dgoa, Cao de gddo, Cdo de m6Jlra % podengo, or perdigueirOy Cdo dejila, Cdo facador, Cho de bufca t A lady GdlgOy Cad para cacdr rapozas e Ion- tras, Cachorrinho, Cachorrinko defralda, Cachorro, Mu mdcho, or mula t Mula, Cor fa, Cdrfa de tres dnnos, Corco de dous annos, Corco, Corco ou com de hum £nno, Gdmo t Veado* CaBra montez, Veado grdnde de cinco bnnos, Doninha, Teixugo t or texugo, A horfe that has four white feet. A forrel horfe. A bay horfe. A chefnut-coloured horfe. A chefnut bay. A worthlefs nag, a poor jade. A dapple horfe. A dapple-grey horfe. A double horfe. A trotting-horfe. A italking-horfe. A pad, an easy-paced horfe. A dog. A houfe dog. A hound. A water fpaniel. A (hepherd's dog. „ A fetting dog. A great cur, a maftifF dog. A dog tumbler. A finder. A bull-dog. A greyhound* A terrier. A little puppy* a whelp= A lap-dog. A little dog. A he-mule. A (he-mule. A (he-deer, a doe. A fpade. A pricket. A wild buck. A fawn. A fallow deer* A (lag. A wild (he-goat. Ahart. A weafel. A badger, Gatff, GRAMMA R. 33 "Gato de a/gdlza, Doninha de rabo muifclpudo, a mo do de rapcfa, Elephdnte, t Foinka,fuinha 9 or marta, Arminho^ Ourifo cackeiro, ArganaZ) Rdto, ' Rapbfa, Lobo, Rata da I'ndia^ For ad, Toupeira^ Lead, Leoa, Rdto cheirofo^ Leopardo, U'rfo, * Uwfa % U'rfo pequeno, Tigre, Poco montez, A civet cat, A fquirrel. An elephant. A marten, or inartern. An ermin. An hedge- hog. A .dormoufe. A rat, A fox. A wolf. A rat of India of the bignefs of a cat. A ferret. A mole. A lion. A lionefs. A mu/k cat, A leopard* A he-bear, A (he bear. A bear's cub, A tiger. A wild bear. Das coufas do Campo, Cdfa do campo, or quinta, Cdfa de lavrador^ ■Quintetra, Boyeiro, Vaqueiro, Porqueiro i Pajtor, Surrdo, Cajado, Pajiora, Herddde ) Hcrto/do, Hortalica, Cava do r, Vinhateiro, *c Of country affairs. A country houfe. A farm-houfe. A hulbandman, a farmer. A herdfman, he that ploughs with oxen, or tends them. A cow-keeper. A fwine-herd. A fhepherd. A fcrip, or fmall bag. A fheep-book. A fhepherdefs. A great or large field, a wide arable ground, A gardener. All forts of herbage. A ditcher. A vine drefler. Lavrador, PORTUGUESE 34 Lav r ad or, Pdjlos, Arddo, Ferro do arrddo, Rdbo do arrddo, Abegad, or official que fa% arados* Aguilhdda, Enfinho, Grade, Semeador, Rofador, Fouce rogadoura, Fouce, Poddo, Sega dor, Mangodl t - F ore ado, Cacad6r i Fife a dor, Rego, Terra quefica levantdda en- ire dous regos, Outeiro, Monte, or montdnha, ■ Vdlle ; ha go a, Ldgo, Ribeiro, Ribein'nho, Piano, or planecie, Penha, or rOcka, Penhdfco, Deferto, A farmer, one who cultivates ground, whether his own or another's. Feeding ground, pafture, fheep-walk. A plough. The plough-fhare. The plough-handle. A plough-wright. A goad. A rake. A harrow. A fower. _JY weeder. A weeding-hook. A fcythe, or fickle. A pruning-knife. A reaper, or mower, harveft man. A flail. A prong to call up {heaves of corn with. A huntfman. ■ A fiflierman. A furrow. . A balk, or ridge of land be- tween two furrows. A bill. A mountain. A valley. A- moor, fen, or marfh, a Handing water, but fome- times dry. A lake or itanding pool, but always full of water. A brook, a ftream of water, with a gentle or natural current. A rivulet, a flreamlet. A plain. A rock. A great rock. A defert or wildernefs. Despen- GRAMMAR, 33 Despenhadezro, A precipice. Bosque, A wood. Bosque pequeno, ' A grove, or thicket. Peddgo de chad sem drvores, A glade in a wood. dentro de ku?n bosque, Pomdr, or vergel, An orchard. Prddo, A meadow. Ramdda, A bower. Fonte, A fountain. Trigo, Wheat. Trigo can dial, The beft wheat. Trigo bretdnha, Red wheat. Cente'o, Rye. Ferdd, Meflin, mixed corn, as wheat and rye, &c. Treme'z, The corn of three months growth. Espelta, Spelt. Espiga, Ear of corn. Cabfga da espiga, The grain at the top of the ear of corn. Bainha, donde sdbe a espiga The cod, or hulk in which depots de formdda, the ear of corn is lodged. Legumes ', Pulfe. G rats, * Spamfli peafe. Lentil ha, A lentil. Tramsgo, or tremogo, A lupine. Feij:ens, French-beans. Feijd) sap at a, or bdjes, Kidney-beans. Feijdo jradinho, A fort of fmall French beans with a black fpot. Ckichdro, Chichlings. Car ret a , A waggon. Cdrro, A cart. Rod-i, A wheel. Caimbas, The felloes of the wheel. E'ixo, The axle-tree. Rdyo da roda, The fpoke of a wheel. Currdl de boys, An ox-ftall. Currdl de ovelhas, A fheep-fold. . Currdl de cdbras, A houfe for goats. Chiquciro de porcQS^ Ahog's-fty/ E'rva, Grafs. Trigo ern e'rva, Green corn. * C 2 Seara So PORTUGUESE Sear a, i Standing corn. Tdrro, A milk-pail. Cine ho, A cheefe-vat, to make cheefe E nx a da, in. A mattock, a hoe. Enxaddo, or alvido, A two pronged fork. Cdnga, A yoke for oxen. Cangalhos, The arms of the yoke ufed for oxen. Sebe, A hedge or fence. quefaz se'bes, Hedger. Fbuce rogadbura de que uzdo Hedging, bill. pardfazir sebes, Tempo de iosqina c afe'fta que nellefdzem cs rujlicos, Cantiga dos segadores despots, de a cab a do o tempo da siga, fdrca, Mat a, Mdto, Leira, or taboleiro, Chbrro de ago a, V ere da, Rd/io, Qejla, Cabdz, Cabana, or choupdna, Cabdco, The flieep -{hearing, the time of (hearing fheep. Harveft home. A bramble. A thicket, a foreft. A place where many fhrubs grow. A bed in a garden. A water-fpout. A path. The track. A bafket. A frail, a pannier. A cottage, a hut. A dry hollow ground ufed to keep feeds in. Coufas pertencentes a. Guerra. Servigo, ou vida militdr, Militdr, ou servir na guerra, Artilharia,artelharia, Ou ar- tilheria, Canhdo, oupe'g a de ar tilth aria, Canhdo defirro, Canhdo de bronze, Alma do canhdo, Fogdo do canhdo^ Culdtra^do canhdo* Things relating to War. Warfare. To go a warfaring. Artillery. A cannon. Iron cannon. Brafs cannon. - The mouth of a cannon. The touch-hole of a cannon* The breech of a cannon. Botaa, GRAM M A R. 37 Botao, ou extremidade da The pummel culdtra, Balas encadeadas, Bala de canhao, Car r eta do canhao, P 6 Ivor a, Meyho canhao, Canhao dobrddo, Canhao para hater huma prafd, Canhao de vinte e quutro, Calibre, Car re gar, Escorvar, Fazer pontaria, Petrechos, or municoens de guerra, Encravar huma pega, Descavalgdr huma ptca, Despardr, Tiro de p'ega, Trem de artilharia, Colubrina, Falconete, Petdrdo, Pedreiro, Bomb a, Bombdrda, Morteiro, Granada, Espingarda, PijUla, Carabina, Mosquete, Machadinha, . Langa, Alabdrda, Partasana, Pique, Caldr os piques para" rejijlir a cavalaria, Alfdnge, Espdda, Chain-fhots. A cannon bullet, cannon- ball., or carfnon-fhot. The carriage of a cannon. Gun-powder. A demi-cannon. A double cannon. A cannon for battery. A fwenty-four pounder. Caliber. To load. To prime. To level. Military ftores. To nail up a gun. To difmounta gun. To fire. A cannon (hot. The train of artillery. A culverin. A falconet. A petard. A fwivel gun, pederero, or paterero. A bomb. A great gun, a bombard. A mortar-piece. A granade. A firelock. A piftol. A carabine. A mufket. A battle-ax. A lance. An halbert. A partizan. A pike. To prefent the pikes againft the cavalry. Scymeter. A fword. c 3 Desembainhar 38 PORTUGUESE Desanbainhdr a espada s Punho da e spa da, Mac da da espdda, Guar 7ii$ 0.0 da espdda, Folha da espdda, Meter mad a espada, Matdr, Ferir, Desbaratdr, Saquedr, Punka I, Bayoncta, Calar a bayoncta, Capacete, Morrido, Viseira, Gorjal, or go/a, Peito dt armas, Gourde a, Espalddr, Cojfolcte, Broquel, Escudo, A dag a, Say a de mdlha, Rey de drmas, Arduto, General^ Tenente general, Sargcnto mor de batalha, Sargento, S 'argent o mor, Mariscdl, or marichal, Mejlre de cdmpo general, Cpranei, Mejlro de xdmpo, CoronU de infant aria, Official de guerra, Brigadtiro, Tenente corknel, Ajudante de s argent o mor, Ajuddnte de tenente de mejire de cdmpo, To unfheath the fword. The handle of a fword. The pommel ot a fword. The hilt of a fword. The blade of a fword. To clap one's hand on one's fword. To kill. To wound. To rout. To fack. A poniard. A bayonet. ,To fix the bayonet in the mufket. A head-piece, or helmet. A morrion. The vizor of an helmet. The gorget. A breaft- plate, A cuirafs. The back-plate. A corflet. A buckler. A flrield. Dagger, a fhort fword. A coat of mail. The king at arms, or king of heralds. A herald. A general. A lieutenant general. A major general. A ferjeant. Major. Marmal. Mafier de camp general. Colonel. Mafier de camp. Colonel of foot. An officer. Brigadier. » Lieutenant-colonel. Adjutant. Aid decamp. Capi tad GRAMMA R. 39 €apitdo, Pbjlo de capitdo, Tenente, Corneta, Alferes, Bandar as, Eft and arte, Alferes de cavalaria que traz o ejlandarte, Pag ad or, Provedbr, dos mantimentos de hu?na armada, Commijfdrio, Commijfdrio gerdl, Engenheiro, Aposentador do exercito, Cdbo dees quadra, Tambor, ou caixa, Tambor ou o que tocatambor, Baguitas, Cor deis de tambor, " Teques do tambor, Tocdr o tambor, Ahordda, ou general, Moflra, Pajfar moftra, Trombeta, Trombeteiro, ou trombeta, Pifdno, Soldo, So I dado, Soldddo que ejld de sentinella, Entrdr de guar da, Sentinella, Render a guar da, sentinellas, 8cc. Bio car, or bloquedr, Infante, or soldddo de pi, Granadeiro, Bigodes, Drag a^i, Soldddo de cavdllo, M on tar a c avail o, Captain. Captaincy or captainfhip. Lieutenant. Cornet. Enfign. Colours. Standard. Standard-bearer. Agent. Purveyor. CommiiTary. Mutter-mailer. Engineer. Ouarter-mafler* Corporal. Drum. A drummer. Drum-flicks. Drum-firings. The beats of a drum. To beat a drum. The general, one of the beats of the drum. Mufler. To mufler, to review forces. A trumpet. A trumpeter. A filer or fife. Wages, or pay for foldiers. A foldier. Soldier on duty. To mount, or go upon the guard. Duty, centinel. To relieve the guard, &c. To block up. A foot foldier. Grenadier. Whifkers. Dragoon. Trooper, or cavalier. To get on horfeback. C 4 Guar da 40 PORTUG UESE Apedr se, Guar da da pejfoa real, or archeiro, Cavalleiro armddo de couraga, Mosqueleiro, Soldddo com espingarda, Alabardeiro^ Genisero, So Ida do armddo com lanca, Soldddo que leva pique, or piqueiro, Be/ieiro, ou soldddo queptle- ja com be/la y Ga/ladsr, Mineiro, ou minador, Bambardeiro, O tiro da artdharia, ou o espdeo que a ^bala despa- rdda corre> Artilheiro, A arte da artilharia, General da artilharia, Aventureiro, Recrutas, Explorador, ou corredor de exercito, Espia, que live viveres do exercito, ou vivandeiro, Soldddo quejciz correrias, Atabdle, Jnfanterta, Cavalaria, C aval aria ligeira, Van guar da, Corpo de batalha, Retagudrda, Corpo de reserva, Corpo de gudrda, . Pique te, Ala. To alight. Life-guard-man. Cuiraflier. Mufketeer. Fufeiier. Halberdier. Janiffary. A fpearman. A pikeman. Crofs-bow-man. A pioneer. Miner. A bombardier. Gunftiot, or the fpace to which a fhot can be thrown. Batalhdd) Matrofs, alfo a gunner, or cannoneer. Gunnery. General of the artillery. A volunteer. Recruits. Scout. Spy. Sutler. A marauder, a foldier that goes a marauding. Kettle-drum. The infantry. Cavalry. Light- horfe. The vanguard. The main body of an army. The rear. The corps de referve. The corps de guard. The piquets of an army, or piquet guard. The wing of an army. Battalion. De/lacamentc, GRAMMAR. 41 Dejlacamento, RegvntntVy Companhia> Esquadrdo, Mochila, Bagdgem, ou bag age, Batedbres do cdmpo, Almdzem, ou armdzem, Mural has, Amca, ou ameya, Parapeito, Cajlello, Forte, Fdrtaliza, Fortijicagdi, Torre, Citadel la, Baluc.rte, Fileira, Cortina, Meya hi a, Troneira, Terra-plena, Rebelhn, ou Revelim, Contrascdrpa, Barreira, Falsabrdga, Guarita, Casamata, Corredor,owejlradacncoberta Cejloens, Ejlacdda, ou palijfada, Reduto, At a lay a, Mdnta, ou Mantelete, Faxina, Mina, Contramina, Fazer vodr a mind, Trincheira, Abrir as trincheiras, Real, Vivere j,ou munigoens de boca. Detachment Regiment. A company. A fquadron. Knapfack. Baggage. Difcoverers. Armory. Walls/ A battlement. The parapet. A cattle. A fort. A fortrefs. Fortification. A tower. A citadel. Bulwark. A file. A curtain. Halt moon. A loop-hole; A rampart* A ravelin. Counterfcarp. A barrier. A faufsbraye. A ditch. A centry-box. A cafemate. The covert way. Gabions. A palifade. A redoubt. A watch tower. A mantelet, or cover for men from the {hot, Fafcines. A mine. A countermine. To fpring a mine. A trench. To open the trenches. Camp. Provifions. Bisonho, 42 PORTUGUESE Bisinho, Batdlka, Dar batdlha, Escaramilca, Sitio, Ou art el, Encamisdda, Sort/da, Bater, Brecka, Pont ad, Esc aid da, Affdlto, Dar a[fdlto, Tomdr por ajfalto, Chamdda, Capitular, Capltulaqdo, Tregoas, Guamifdo, Prebcjle, PreboJU- general, Leva, Levant dr soldddos, oufazer leva de gente, Levantdr o fiiio, Levantdr o cdmpo, AJfentdr o cdmpo, Cdmpo voldnte, Camp an ka, Mete'r-se em ca?npdnha, . Guerrcdr, Pe'ca de campdnha, Forrdgem, Quartets de inverno, Dar quartel, Aquarteldr-se, Mar char, Marchdr com bandeiras des- pregddas, Tocdr a recolke'r, Entregdr kuma prdca, A new foldier. A battle. To give battle. A fkirmifh. A fiege. A quarter. A camifado. A fally. To batter. A breach. A pontoon. An efcalade. An affault. To florai. To take by ftorm. The chamade. To capitulate. Capitulation. Truce. Garrison. A provoft. A provoft- marfhal. Levy. To raife men, to levy, or raise foldier s. To raife the fiege. To decamp. To pitch one's camp. A -flying camp. A campaign. To begin the campaign, to op6n the field. To war, A field-piece. A forage. Winter quarters. To give quarters. To take quarters. To march. To march with flying colours To found a retreat. To furrender a place. Navegagdd, GRAMMA R- 43 Navegacao, Navigation. Ndvio, A fhip. Ndo, A large (hip. Ndo de gu'erra, A man of war. Nao de carga, ou mercantzl, A merchant-fhip, a mer- chantman. Ndvio veleiro, A very good Taller, or a fhip that fails well. Ndvio ronceiro, A bad failer. Gale, A galley. Galeae* a, A galleafs. Galedo, A galleon. Galeuta, ou galeoto, A- galliot, a fmall galley. Co mitre, The boatswain of a galley. Frag at a, A frigate. Carrdca, A carrack. FuJU, A foift. Pindca, A pinnace. Bdrca de paffugevii A ferry-boat. Bdrco, A boat. Bdrca, A bark, a great boat. Canoa, A canoe. Gondola, Gondola, a fmall boat, much ufed in Venice. Esquife, A fkifF. Ckalupa, ou balandra t A floop. Chalupa pequena, A fhallop. Bergantim y A brigantine, or brig. Balsa, A float. Capitdna, The admiral's fhip. Almirdnta, The vice-admiral's fhip. Armada, A fleet, a navy. Frota, A fleet of merchant mips. Es quadra , A fquadron, part of a fleet. A bordo, A-board. Popa, The poop,, ftern, or Peerage. Proa, The prow, or head. Be fas de proa para dar cdga Chafe guns. ao mi?nigo i Tartdna, A tartan. Brulote, A fire-fhip. Patdxo, A patache. Falua, A felucca. Battl, or bateira^ A fmall bark, a wherry. • Caravela^ 44 PORTUGUESE Car av ela, Sorte de patdxo para servifo de huma ndo ae guerra que he mayor delle, Ndo de linha, Gudrda-cljla, Galecta da qudlse lancam as bombas, Ndvio que serve para andar a corso, Corsdrzo, Hydcle, Ndvio de transporte, Ndo da India Oriental, Ndo da India Occidental, Sorte de embar cacao pequena Hollandka de hum so mafia, Ndvio para levdr carvdo, Embar cagoens peauenas, Embar cacao, ou bar co grdnde que serve para levdr fa- zendas a bordo, Embar ca^do grdnde, ou ca- ravela, que serve pa yd commercedr pella cofta, Embar cacao de avizo, Paquete, Bar co de pescdr^ Ldncha, Remos, Pa do re mo, Sentina, Ldftro, ou lafto, Lajldr, ou lanfdr laftro do ndvio, Ma/to, or drvore t Mdjlo grdnde, Afdfio de mezena, Mafto da traquete, Majio do guar apes 9 Gave a, Oitilha, Vcrga, ou entina, A caravel, A tender. A line of battle -fliip. A guard-fhip. Bomb-ketch. A cruifer. A privateer. Yacht. A tranfport. Eaft-India-man. Weft-India-fhip. A Dutch dogger. A collier. Small craft. A barge. A fly-boat, a large veflel ufed in the coafling trade. Advice-boat. Packet-boat. A fifhing-boat, or bufs. Cock-boat, a fcull. Oars. The blade of the oar. The well. Ballaft. To ballaft a {hip. A mail. The main-maft. The mizen-maft. The fore-maft. The bowfprit, or boltfprit. The round-top, main-top, or fcuttle of a maft. The keel. A yard. Laiz, GRAMMAR. 45 Laiz, ou extremidddes das vergas, Pranchas, que cobremos cos- todos do ndvio da parte defora, Vela, * Vela me fir a, or a veld do mcfio grande, Vela da Gavea, Vela do joanete do mdflo grdnde, Papafigos, Mezena, Gala, ou vela de cima da me- zena, Traauete, Velacho, Joanete do traauete, Cevadeira, Vela la tin a, Fazerjorca de vela, Majiareos, Maftareo da mezena, ou ma- Jlareo da gat a, Portinhola, Bandeiras, Fldmmulas ou galhardetes, Agulha de mar ear, Bit d cola, Cojiuras do ndvio, Leme, Can a do leme, Cuberta, Cuberta corrida, Escotilhas, Escotilhdo, Cajlello de popa t Cafiello de proa, Garrdr a an cor a. A'ncora, The yard-arms. Side-planks, or fide of a {hip. A fail. The main fheet. The main-top-fail. Main-top-gallant-fail. The mizen and fore- fail, Mizen fail. Mizen-top-fail. The fore-fail. The fore-top-fail. The fore-top gallant-fail. Thefprit-fail. A moulder of mutton fail. To crowd the fail. The topmafts, or top-gallant- mafts. Mizen-top-mafl. A port-hole. The colours. Streamers, pendants. The mariner's compafs* Bittacle. The seams of a fliip. Helm, or rudder. The whip, or whip-flafF. Deck. Flufti fore and aft. i The hatches ; fcuttles. A room by the hatches, ta keep the provifions. The hind cattle. The fore caflle. To drive ; or when a ihip drags on her anchor. The anchor. By vela is oftentimes meant the ship itself. Mctc, 46 PORTUGUESE Meier a dncora na lancha, ou bote depots de levant dla, A'ncora de rebbque, A'ncora de esperanca, U'nhas da ancora, A' r go la da ancora, E/tar a dncora a-piouc, Amarra, Picdr, ou coridr as amdrras, Sbnda, ou prumo, Cutelos, Mart, Bo sin a, Prepardr hum navio, de ve- to s, cor das, &c. Pllbto, Escrivdd, Pilotdgem, Carta de mar ear, Capitdo, Capitd'o tenente, Contrame/lre, Marinheiro, Camarbte, Marinheiro que he camardda ou pertence dames mo rancho Torment a , Borrasca, Bondnca, Calm aria, Vento em popa, Navio arrasado em popa, Derrbta, Alar a bo Una, Ir pel a bo Una, No da bo Una, Barlavento, Gaiihcr o barlavento, Barlaventidr, ou deitdr a barlavento, Sotavtnto, To boat the anchor. A kedger. Sheet anchor. Flooks. The ring of an anchor. Is for the anchor to be a-peak, A cable. To cut the cables. Sounding lead. Studding fails. The tide. A fpeaking trumpet. To rig a fhip. Pilot, or fteerfman, A purfer. Pilotage. Sea-chcirt. A captain. Firft lieutenant. A boatfwain. A failor. A cabin. A melTmate. A tempeft. A ftorm. Fair weather. Calm. The wind full a-flern, a fore- wind. A fhip that fails before the wind. The course, or way of a fhip. To (harp the main bowling, to haul up the bowling. To tack upon a wind, fail upon a bowline. The bowling knot. Windward. ; To get the wind. To ply to windward. Leeward. Ef covins. GRAMMAR. 47 Escovens, Escotas, Vela?ne, cordas, e o mdis que he necejfdrio para preparer humnavio, Cor da, Enxdrcias, Arribdr, Bombbrdo, E/iibbrdo, L6 y Meter de 16, Bomba y Ddr a bomba, Bdlde para deitar ago a na bomba, Escuma que sake da bomba de- pots de ter tirado a dgoa, Navio, cuja agoa se nao pode tirar com a bomba, Manga de cburopor bnde sake a ago a da bomba^ Brdfo da bomba t Far 61, Vento, Hawfers. Tacks. Tackle, or tackling, the rig- ging of a fhip. A rope. Shrouds. To put into a harbour. Larboard. Starboard. Loof. To loof, or keep the {hip nearer the wind. i A pump. To pump. Pump-can. Pump-fuck. A fhip that is floaked. Pump-dale. The pump-handle. . Li^ht, or lantern* Wind. Rosa da Agulha, ou dos Ventos- writ, Norte 4 a a nordeJie s Nor nordejie, Nordejle 4* a norte, Nordejle, Nordifte'f alejle, Les nord(fte, Lejie 4* a nordejle, Lejte, Lejie • 4 a a suejie, Les suejie, Suejie 4 a a lejie, Suejie, Suejie 4* a sul, The Fly of the Mariner': Compajs, North. N. by E. ,N. N. E. M. E. by N, N. E. N. E. by'E* E. N, E. E. by N. Eaft. E. by S. E. S. E. S. E. by E. S. E. S. E. by S. Susuejit 48 PORTUGUESE Susue'ste, Sul 4 51 a sueste, Sul, Sul 4 a a sudoeste, Susudoeste, Sudoeste 4 3 sul, Sudoeste, Sudoeste 4* a oeste, Oe's sudoeste, Oeste 4 a a sudoeste, Oeste, ' Oeste 4* a nor oeste, Oe's nor oeste, Nor oeste 4* a oeste, Nor oeste, Noroeste 4* a norte. Nor nor oe's te, Norte 4 a a noroeste, Ventv travejfdb, ou travcjfia, Dar a embarcacdo a travez, Pairar, Espordo, C other hum cdbo, Largdr mais cabo+ Abrir agoa, Fazer a go a da, Arpab, Arpdr hum ndvio, Fatexa, Pedaco de Una bredda que se poem do redox do mdjlo e das bomb as para que a agoa ndo penitre^ Pajfadbr, Cor da com que sep rinde bote, ou lane ha dpopa do ndvio, Apito, Abadernas, Abita, Emprodr, S. S. E. S. by E. South. S. by W. S. S. W. S. W. by S. S.W. S. W. by W. w. s. w. W. by S. Weft. W. by N- W. N. W. N. W. by W. N. W. N. W. by N. N. N. W. N. by W. Contrary wind. To hull. To ply to and again in one'* ftation. Beak. To coil a cable. To pay more cable. To leak, or fpring a leak. To take in frefh water. A grapple. To grapple a fhip. Grapple. Tarpaulin. A fidd, or pin of iron to open the itrands of xopes. Boat-rope, or gift-rope. A boatfwain's calk Nippers. Bits. To fleer right forward, td turn the prow ftraight for- ward. G ulnar, GRAMMAR. 49 Crinnar o navio, Parte superior, ou mats alta da popa de hum navio, Apagafanoes, Arreigddas, ~ Brioes, Barredouras, Bartidouro, Bajldrdos, Bigota, Botalos, Bracedr, Brdgos, Bragueiro, or vergueiro, Brandaes, Bit far day, Cacholas, Caddjie, Caderndl, Cavernas, Colhedores, Compajfdr hum navio, Cojfouros, , Craca, EJlar hum navio lane ado a bdnda, Cabrejiante, Dar cdga, Curvas, Me/as da guarnifad, De/a/ire, Enbornaes, Fordo, Mdca, Convez, Camarete do cirurgiuo, , FrUe, Carga, O'rdem que o capital/ recebe para dar a vela, A ace am de imbarcdr Je, Dejhnbdrque, Embargo, To yaw or make yaws; The tafferek Leech-lines. Puttocks. Bunt lines. Bow-ftudding-fails: Boat's fkit. Parrels. A dead-eye. Studding-fail-boOms» To brace; Braces. The rudder's rope. Baek-ftays. Breaft-hooks. Cheeks. Stand-pofh A large block with more than one (hive. The floor-timbers. Lines of the (hrouds. To trim a (hip. Trucks. The foulnefs of the (hip's bottom. Is for a fhip to heel. The capftan. To chafe. The knees. Chain-wales. Boat's fkit. Scupper-holes. The hold of a fhip; Hammock. Deck or quarter-deck. Cockpit. Freight. Cargo* Sailing orders. Embarkation. Difembarking. Embargo. D Ancoragzm s 50 PORTUGUESE Ancorage?n, Batalha naval, * Caravela mexeriqueira, ou de ejpia, Arriar, ou arrear, Arrear as velas, An- ear bandeira, Levantarferro, levdrancoras levar ferro, levar-Je, ou levar, Leva, Bokdr a pe'$a, Pega de leva, Rebocdr, oulevdrde reboque, Fazer cojiuras, Pajfagem, Pafageiro, Pidgem, Naviocujo capital tern cartas de repres alias, Querendr hum ndvio, Brear as cojiuras do ndvio, liar d cojla, Solucdr a ndo 9 Naufragdr, Naufrdgio, Patrao, ou meflre de not, Carpenteiro de navies, x EJialeiro, Embarcar, Embarcar, Grumeie, Rapdz que ferve como moco do navio, Rapaz quefirve do capital, Calafaie, Calafetdr hum navioi Calafeto t Anchorage. Sea-fight. A (hip fof efpiaL To veer. To ftrike fail* To ftrike the flag. To weigh anchor. The a£tion of weighing cr taking up the anchor. To move a gun towards (lar- board or larboard. The fignal gun. To tow. To fplice. Paffage. Passenger. Voyage. Letters of marque. To careen a (hip. To pay the feams of a (hip. To run a-ground or on more. Is for a fhip to roll, or to float in rough water. To fuffer a wreck, to be wrecked. Shipwreck. Shipmafter. Shipwright. Stock. To fhip. To go aboard, to take fhip- ping. The meaneft fort of failor, a** fervant to the failor^. Ship-boy. A cabin-boy. A calker. To calk a (hip, Oakham, Arfenai, G R A M U A R 51 Arfendl, ou ribtira das ndos, Emmd/iedr hum navio, Remar, Remador, For pa do, Btjpenfetro, Marinheiros, e ioda a outra gente que pertence do navio, Chitfma, Guarnicdo da ndo, fobrecarga do ndvio, Balejlilha, Quadrante, Outante, Be re, Paravante, Situacdo de humd cojla, ilka, &c. a refpeito de qualquir outro lugar, Quarentena, Baliza, Larga, Amarar, Capar a vela, Cdcear hum navio, Lancar hum ndvio go mar, Fugir, Entrdr com vento frifco e bom no po'rto, Bordo, Bordo, ou bdnda, Ndvio de alto bordo, Cdqa, Pre/a, Ou tomddia, E/tdr de vergadalto, rentos demon odd, ou gercer, Andar de conferva^ An arfenal, a fiore-houfe, or magazine. To fit a fhip, or Vessel, with mails. To row. Rower. Galley-flave. Steward. The crew of a fhip. Crew of galley flaves. Marines, foldiers who fervfc on board of fhips. Supercargo. Crofs-ftaff. Quadrant. Hadley's quadrant, Aft. Fore. The bearings Quarantine. Sea-mark. Large. To bear off. To turn the fail to the wind fide. It is faid of a {hip that is hur- ried away from her courfe by flrong winds, tides, &c r To launch a fhip. To bear away. To bear in the harbour* Tack. Broadfide. Firit rate man of war» Chace. Prize, or capture. To fland for the offing. Trade winds. To keep company together, to sail under a convoy. Bar, D 2 ¥1 PORTUGUESE Bar, oufazer hum bordo, To tack the fhip, or tack about, or to bring her head about. EJlar a capa, ou por-fe a To lie by at fea, to back the cdpa, fails. Do Commercio, e do que Ihe pertfcice. Conta, Conta de venda, Fazer huma conta, Pedir contas, Dar a conta, C'onta corrente, „ - Dinheiro de contddo, Ac$ao, que negocea em co?nprdr e vender accoens, Ballanco, Fdrdo, Banco, Banaueiro, Queora, Falido, ou quebrddo, Ajujie, ou concerto , Troca, Portador, Lancador, que lanca mdis, Letra de cdmbio, Negocidr huma letra de cam- bio, Conta, Parti da, Conhecimento, Ef oritur a de obrigacdo, Gudrdalivros, ou o que em huma edsa de negecio tern a feu cargo os livros, Occupacdo, or negocio, ' Comprador, Dinheiro, Pirte, ou carnto, Of Trade, and of Things re- lating to it. Account. Account of fales. To caft up an account. To carl to an account. To pay on account. Account current. Ready money. Stoqk. Jobber. Balance. Bale. Bank. Banker. • ; Bankruptcy. Bankrupt. Bargain. „ Barter. Bearer. Bidder. Out-bidder. Bill of exchange, a draught. To negotiate a bill of ex- change. Bill. Parcel. Bill of lading. Bond, engagement. Book-keeper. Businefs. Buyer. Cam. Carriage, Cazcire, GRAMMAR. 5$ Caxeiro, ou o que guar da a A caftiier, or cam-keeper. caixa, Cento, Cent. Certiddo, Certificate. Cdmbio, Change, exchange. Freguez, v • Gdjtos, Chap, chapman, or cuilomcr Charges. BardtGs Cheap.. Cdro, Dear. Rectbo da alfandegd, Clearance, or cocket. CommiJJdo, Commiflion. Mercdncia, Commodity. Compromijfo, Compromife. Conjignacdo, ' Confumo, Confignment. Confumption.. Conteudo, Contents, Contrdto, Contract. Correspondencia, Correspondence, Correfpondente, Correfpondent. Prefo, Price, rate. Aljandega, Cuftom-houfe. Guar das d'alfandega, Cuftom-houfe officers. Guar das que ejidd vigidndo Tidefeien, or tide waiters. ate que os ndvios ejiejdo defcarregddos, Feitoria, Factory, fettlement. Efcritbrio, Counting-houfe* Credito, Credit. AcredoTt Creditor. Cor rente, Current. Cojtume, Cuftom. Data, ' Date. Contratador, Dealer. Trdfego, ou negocio, Dealing, traffick. Divida, Debt. Devedor, Debtor. Dinheiro defembdcddo, Difburfement, Defconto, Difcount. Extrdc7o,'ou copia, Docket. Depofito, Depofite* Defconto nos pagamentos que Drawback, ft fdzem a dinheiro de con- tddo, ou por qualqwr ou- tra razdb, A c redo r imp ortuno, Dun/ * D 3 Cif S4 PORTUGUESE Copia, Corretor, Corretor de letras de cdmbio, A/fegurador, oufegurador, Endojfo, Endojfador, Abarcador, Levantaminto de prego, Affento no regijto, Equwalente, Exigencia, De/peza, Extracfdo, Extbrfdo, Feitor, Feira, Fio y ou ardme no qual fe en- Ji.oospapeis Hum efcntorio, Qidtro, a?icc, fkc.por ctnio, Fretdr, Frcte, que fr eta hum ndvio, Cabeddl, ou quantia de din* heiro dejlinddo para algu- ma coujci, Gdnho, que gdnha, Fazendas ou ejfeitas % EJired, Efcritura, Entrdda, Negocidnte qui introduz faz- endas numaprd^a ou reino Ren da, Intercjfe, Communica^dS^OMCommerciOy Inventdmo, Insufficiencia, ou jdlta de meyos para p agar , Factura, A'rras, Efcritura de arrendamento, Arrendaddr t Livro de razdo* Duplicate. A broker. Exchange-broker. Infurer or under-writer, Endorfement. Endorfer. EngrofTer. Enhancement. Entry. Equivalent. Exigency. Expence. Export, or exportation. Extortion. Fa£k>r. Fair. File for papers. Four, five, &c per cent. To freight a (hip. Freight. A freighter. Fund. Gain, or profit. Gainer. Goods, effects. Handfel. Hand-writing. A cuflom for imported com- modities. Importer, Income. Intereft. Intercourfe. Inventory. Infolvency. Invoice. Jointure. Leafe. LefTee. Ledger- book gmprejtim?s GRAMMAR. 55 Empreftimo, Dinheiro emprejlado, Carta, Sobrefcrito da carta, Feckdr huma carta, Feckarhuma carta com finite, Mala em que o correo trdz as cartas, Hyp 6 thee a, Acredbr kypothecdrw, O que hypothec a, Fiador, Pagamento, Fait a de pagamento, Efcrito de divida, D'ono, Far do pequeno t Serapilheira, Brabdnte, Mdco de c-drtas, Companheiro de dlguem no negocio, oujocio, Socieddde, ou companhia no negocio, Penhor, Contrato do feguro dos mer- cancias, Seguro, Segurdr, Protejlar huma letra, Aceitdr huma letra, Protcfto, Sacdr huma letra. Loan. Money lent. ( Letter. The direction of a letter. To make or clofe up a letter. To make and feal up a letter. Mail, Mortgage, Mortgagee. Mortgager. Bail. Payment. Non-payment. Note, or promiffory note? Owner. Pack, a trufs. Packcloth, wrapper, Packthread. Packet of letters. Partner. Partnerfhip* Pawn, or pledge. Policy of infurance. In fu ranee. To infure. To proteft a bill. To accept a bill. Proteft. To draw a bill. Correo aondefe lancao as cartas^ Poft-office. Correo que leva cdrtas, Porte de cartas, Premio ou dinheiro que Je pdga bos Jegur adores, Dinheiro que Je pdga dos marinheiros por terem carregddo o ndvio, Capital, Perdas e ddnos, Importancia, Importdncia liquida, or letter carrier. Poftman, Poftage. Premium Primage, Principal, , ■ Ufureiro, VJura, goods, goods fmuggled, or run. To run, to fmuggle prohi- bited goods. Standard meafure. Ware-houfe. Subfcriber. Subfcription. Tare and Tret. Tram of goods. Rifk. Intereft. Ufance. Ufurer. Ufurv. Irbrjfc GRAMMAR. '57 Obrjai Mercancias, Valor , Avaria, Direitos, Tributo, ou contribuifao, Tax a, Si [a, Sijeiro, Cdes, Direito que fe paga, por def- embar car faze ndqs no cdes, Collector do mefmo direito, ou tributo, Dizimos, Dizi?nador, ou dizimeiro, Zoufa vidrdda, Jem Jer da China, Mercador de Jo bra do, Ven da qu efefa zporpartidas, Wafer. Wares. Worth. Average. Duties or cuflroiru Cefs, tribute. A fet rate, affize.. Excife. Exciseman. Wharf.. Wharfage. Wharfinger. Tenths, or Tithes. Tithe-gatherer. Dutch ware. Wholefale dealer. Wholefale. Da Moeda, ou DinheiroPor- tugue'z. This mark f is prefixed *Redl, Des retSy Vintem, Tojlab, ou 5 ventems, 4 Tojioens, ou hum cnifado, Crufado novo, ou 24 vintens, # Toftoens, Hum quarto de euro, ou 12 to/Uens, * Milreis, ou 10 tojioens, 16 Tojioens ', Meya moeda de ouro, 3,000, ou 32 tojioens, Moeda de ouro de 4,800, Meya dobra, ou 6,400, Dcbra, ou I2j8oo, Of the Portuguese Coin. to the imaginary money. A ree, equal to ~^d. ip rees, ~^d, A vintin, i^d. Ateftoon, 6|//. • A crufade, 2s. 3^. A new crufade, -is, 8f<£ 8 teftoons, 4J. 6d. 12 teftoons, 6s. gd. A milree, $s. y\d. 16 teitoons, gs. Half moidore, 135. 6d. 32 teitoons, 181. A moidore, 1/. ys. Joanefe, il. 16s. 128 teftoons. 3/. 12s. 58 PO RTUGUESE COLLECCAO COLLECTION DE. Adagios Portugueses. A A' go a o da, a «/ \oa o leva, Na ago a envblta pcfca o pef- cador, Efta cbmo o peixe 7% ago a, Trazera agoapardo moinho, Levar dgoa ao mar, As agoas ejidb baixas, O que nao-pbde al fer, deves jbffrer, Come cbmo hum aldrve, Meter a path a na albarda, Alazad tojlado antes merle que canfado, Huma disgrdga alcanna a butra, EJldr na aide a, e ndo ver as cafas, Quern trabalha, tern alfaya, Fdllo-lke cm alhos, refponde- ■me em bugdlho.s, Em tempo nevado o dlho vale hum cavdllo, OF Portuguese Proverbs. \$T H A T is got over the ** devil's back will be fpent under his belly; alfo lightly come, lightly go. To fifh in troubled waters (to make a benefit of pub- lic troubles.) He lives in clover. To bring grift to the mill. To carry coals to Newcaftle. He or fhe is at a low ebb. What can't be cured mull be endured. He eats like a threfher. To cheat, to impofe upon. A dark forrel horfe will die before he'll jade. One mifchief draws on ano-» ther. We fay; you can't fee wood for trees : or to be like the butcher that looked for his knife when he had it in his mouth. He that works has furniture. I talk of chalk and you of cheefe. Garlick in the foggy weather is as good as a horfe ; it means that garlick is a good defence for travellers againft dampnefs and cold weather. Tizo GRAMMAR. 59 Tezo come hum hlhq, Sua alma, fya palma, Na almoeda tern a barb a queda, Tagdr os altos de vdfio, Quern dma a beltrdo, dma a feu cad, Cada audi dma feu femel- hatite, Tdmbem os ameagados comem pad, Qontas de perto, e amigos de longe, Nao/edeveperder a amizade por da ca a quella palha, Tarn bom he Pedro c'omo feu dmo, Furtdr o carneiro, e dar os pes pello amor de Deos, Nem hum dido fax mad, nem huma andonnha verad, Levdr palhas, e aralhos, £fa area abirta ojujto pecca, Pe hum argueiro , fazer .hum cavalleiro, €$m arte, a com engdno fe vive meyo anno; com en- gano, e com artefe vive a outra parte, Quern a boa qrvore fe chtga, boa fombra o cobre, Afno morto, cevada do rdbo, Afno que tern feme, c&rdos . ceme 9 As ftiff as garlick ; that is a. healthy, flrong, robuft per- fon. As you brew, even fo bake. At a fale keep your beard-on your chin ftill ; that is, let not your beard wag too faft in bidding, left you overbid and repent. To have but little or no fenfe at all. Love me, love my dog. Like will to like, or like loves like. Threatened folks eat bread ; we fay, threatened folks live long. JEven reckonings make long friends. An inch breaks no fquares. Like mafter, like man. We fay, to fteal a goofe and give the giblets in alms. One fwallow does not ma*ke fummer. Una hirundo non facit ver, fays Horace* To fweep flakes. That is, it is opportunity makes the thief. We fay to make mountains of mole-hills. That is, all a man's life is a cheat. That is, he that relies on good worthy people, reaps a benefit. A day after the fair, or after meat, muftard. We fay, hungry dogs will eat dirty pudding. Sop* 60 PORTUGUESE Sofa de mel nao Je fez fara a boca do asno, Mais quero afno que me leve, que cav alio que me derrube, Mais val ma avenfa que boa fentenca, Ouem nao se aventiira, nao dndaacavdllo, n em emmu la Nao deites azeite no fo'go, Boca nao admittefddor, Da ?ndo a boca Je per de a/of a, E?n boca cerrdda nao entra mo sea, Ouem tern boca vai a Rhna, Telia boca morre o feixe, Cdda bofarinheiro louvaseus alfinetes, Ouem (em qua fro, egdjlacin- co, nao ha mtjtir bolsa nem bolfinho, Cdbarvdipellavinhapor onde vai a may, vdi afilka % Matar dous coelhos de hiima cajaddda, Quern cuniaseus males, ef fan- to. Meiidr a cafa do to'uro, Viva el rey^ e da cd a cdfa % Good things are not fit for fools. Better be an old man's dar- ling, than a young man's warliitgt It is better to agree at any rate, than go to law. Nothing venture, nothing have. Do not throw oil into the fire. The belly has no ears. Much falls between the cup and the lip. A clofe mouth catches no flies. That is, a man may go any where, if he has language to fpeak for himfelt and afk his way. Much talking brings much woe. Every man thinks his own geefe fwans'. Ke that hath four and fpends five hath no need of a purfe. Like father like fon. We fay, to kill two birds with one stone. The perfon who fings makes eafy his misfortunes ; that is,, finging caufes him not to reflecl on it fo much as he otherwife would. To throw one's cloak at the bull ; that is, to venture all a man has to fave his life. Let the king live, and give me the cloak ; that is fpo- ken of perfons who, under a pretence of authority, rob and plunder other peo- ple 4 and at the fame time Audi GRAMMA R. ■61 Anddr de cap a cahida, cJ5 com raiva ds feu do no trava, Quern com caens ft lanca, cism pulgas fe levdnta % A came de lobo dente de cab*, Quern faz cdsa na praca, huns dizem que he alta, sutros que he baixa, A cavdllo dado nao allies o dente \ Quemquer cavallo sem tacha, sem elle se dcha, Ma terra dos cegos, o torto he rey 9 Cobra boa Jama, e deita-te a dormir, Fazer as contas sem a hos- peda, Do contddo come o lobo, Em chsa de ladrdl naofdlles em cor da , Do cduro Ihc sahem as cor- reas t pretend they are doing jus- tice to the power repofed in their hands. To ,be behind-hand in the world. A mad dog bites his own maf- ter ; there is no trufting to madmen, s like a dormoufe. to the wife is enough. , a burnt child dreads re. , people's. affections fcovered by their U- begins at home. ; no "better looking than an old friend ; s, fuch a one will not ; a m an, but tell him uth. con verfation of wo- is dar igerous ; it is not jeftijig with edged re's tongue run, with- jfleclcing on what one is like fhooting at m. rtle and well, and 1 bti counted fome- ; that is, you'll be ned. has loft his reputa- is as good as dead . living. keep company with./ )e fond, of one that i ill name. one that faves at the ot and lets it run out bung ; alfo, penny an cl pound foolilh. an ? t fet their horfes [uem 64 PORTUGUESE Quern ma afaz nellajaz, Agora da pao c me/, e depots dard pao efd, Lingda doce c'omo mel> e co- racdo amargbfo comofet, Bater o ferro qudndo efid quente, Quern com ferro ?ndta,aferro nurre, Carregddo de ferro, carre- gddo de medo, Quern tefdzfejja, nao focndo fazer, ou te ijuer engandr, ou te ha mi/iJr, Nad figs, nem profies, nem arrendes, vivvrds entre as gentes, Mijdr claro, dar humafiga do medico, Se nao bebe na tavernafblga nella, Achou forma pa'.rd ofeu fa- pdto, Nao fejdis forneiro fe tendes a cabeqa de manteiga, A'o homem oufado a for tuna ike da & mad, Roup a de f ranee zes, Cahir dafrigideira nas bra- fas, Dizem osfilhosaojoalheiro, o que ouvem dizer a feus together. Self do felt* harm. After fvveet meat comes four fauce. An honey tongue, an heart of gall. To beat the iron whilft it is hot, or, to make hay whilft the fun fhines. He who kiUs by the fw.ord dies by the fvvord. He who is loaded with iron is loaded with fear ; that is, he who loads himfelf with armour and weapons againfl: danger, difcovers he is much afraid. He that makes more of you than he is wont to do, either defigns to cheat you, or {land in need of you. Do not truft, nor contend no hire, and you'll live among men; that is, you'll live peaceably. Tell the truth and fhame the devil. We fay he does not fmoke but fmokes. He has found a laft to his fhoe ; that is, he has met with his match. Do not undertake to be a baker if your head is made of butter ; that is, do not take upon you any bufi~ nefs you are unfit for. Fortune favours the bold. Things left at random, or exp'ofed to be pillaged. To fall out of the frying-pan into the fire. Little pitchers have great ears. pd /5 GRAMMAR. *5 pays dofumeiro, Verto vdi ojumo dachama, Quern huma vez furta, fid nunca, Mai vai do fufo qudndo a bdrba ndo dnda em cima, Cada terra com feu ufo, cada roca com feu fufo, Ouantds cabefas, tdntas ca- rapugas, Quern (he doer a cabe$a que a aphte, St queres faber quern he in Had j metelhe a vara na mad; Nao ha r of a fern espinkos, Andar, anddr, ? Como ejld v?n,? ou como paf- How do you do, fir ? fa vm?. Be?n,na> ?nuito bem,voupaf- Well; not very well; fo, (o. fando, Muito bem para fervir a vm. Very well to ferve you. /i's or dens de vm. At your fervice. Fico-lhe muito obrigddo, I am obliged to you. Vm. rnuitos dnnos, I thank you. Como ejla, ou pdjfa a fenhor How does your brother do ? feu irmab ? Muito be??!, fiao muito bem, He is very well ; not very well. Kile terd gojlo de ver a vm. He will be glad to fee you. Ndo terei tempo para hir a I (hall have no time to fee velo hoje, him to day. fdcafavGr de affentarfe, Be plea fed to fit down. Da hitma cadeira do fenhor, Give a chair to the gentle- man. Nad he nece.Jfario, There's no occafion. Tenho que hir afdzer huma I muft go make a visit in th(j . vifita aqui nefla vifinhanca neighbourhood. Vm. te?n peffa, You are in hade. E'u logo vo/tarei, I'll be back, or return pre. fently. Adeos meufenhor, Farewel fir. Folga de ver a vm. com boa I am glad to fee you in good faude, health. Beijo as mads de vm. I kifs your band. Sou criado de vm. I am your fervant. Sou muito feu criado i Your moil humble fervant, 68 PORTUGUESE DIALOGO II. DIALOGUE II pari, fazer biirna ViTita de Manhaa. To v'ifit in the morning. flNDE ejtd ten a mo ? ^ Ainda dor me ? N6J),fenhor, elleejlaacordddo Eft a elleja levant ddo ? Nad, fenhor, elle ainda ejld na cama, Que vergcnha de ejldr ainda na cama a ejlas horas ! O'ntem a ncitefui para, a cama tad tdrde, que ndd me pude levantar cedo ejla manhaa, Quejizerao vm ce -dcpoisde cea? JJatifamos, cantdmos i ri?nos ) ejugamos, A que j ego ? A' os centos, Qudnto me peza de o new ter fabido ! Quern ganhou} quern per deo? ■Eu ganhei dez motdas, Ale que horas jugarao vm" s ? Ate duas horas dejpois da meya noite, A que horas foi v?n. para a cama? As tres, as tres horas e nicy a, Nad me admiro que vm.fe le- vant e td'o tbrde, Que horas [do? Que horas Ihe parece a vm, quejejao ? Pareceme que apenas fad oito ', 8fm ! oito! ja derao dez, Qntdihcprecifo que me lev ante * quanio mats deprejfa pu- WHERE is vour mafter? Is he afleep ftill ? No, fir, he is awake. Is he up ? No, fir, he is ftill a-bed. What a fhame 'tis to be a-bed at this time a-day ! I went to bed fo late lad night I could not rife early this morning. What did you do after fupper ? We danced, we fung, we laughed, we played. At what game? We played at piquet. How grieved am I, I did not know it ! Who won ? who loft ? I won ten moidores. Till what hour did you play? Till two in the morning. At what o'clock did you go to bed ! At three, half an hour after three. I don't wonder at your rifing fo late. What's o'clock ? What do you think it is ? Scarce eight, I believe yet. How ! eight ! it has flruck ten. Then I muft rife with all fpecd. DIA» GRAMMAR. 69 X) I A L O G O III. DIALOGUE III. Q Para veflfr-fe. UEMe/ldaM? Que quer vm?. Defpdxa-te, acende lume, e vejte-me, Ha ?ntiito bom lume, Da-me a minha camifa, Eila aqui eJta,fenhof, Naoejia quente,eJidmuitofria Eu a aquentarei,fe vm.quizer Nab, nao ; trcize-me as min- has meyas de fcda, Huma deltas ejta rota, Da-lhe hump onto, concerta-a DH-a'ao que as concerta, Fi%ejle-bem, O'ndeejlaoas minhaschinelas? O'hde efla a minha roupa de chambre ? Pentea-me, Procura outro pente, Da-me mcu lenfo; Eis aqui hum lavado, Da-me que ejla na minha algibeira, Dei-o a lavandeira, elleejla- va $ujo, Trouxe ellejaaminha roupa ? Sim,fenhcr, e nadfdlta nada, Traze-me os meus calfoens, Que vejlido quer vm. pard ^ hSje ? mefmo de intern, alfdiate ha de trazer logo ofiu vejlido, Batem a porta, ve la quern he, Quern he? He alfaidte, Deixa-o entrar, To dress one's self, Tjr7HO is there? * * What wili you pleafe to have ? Be quick, make a fire, drefs me. There is a fine fire, Give me my fhirt. Here it is, fir. 'Tis not warm, 'tis quite cold* If you pleafe I'll warm it. No, no ; bring me my filk ftockings. One of them is torn. Stitch it a little, mend it. I have given it to the flock- ing mender. You have done right. Where are my flippers ? Where is my night gown? Comb my head. Look for another comb. Give me my handkerchief. Here is a clean one. Give me that which is in my pocket. I gave it to the waftier- wo- man, it was foul. Has fhe brought my linen ? Yes, there wants nothing. Bring me my breeches. What clothes will you wear to-day. Thofe I wore yeflerday. The taylor will bring your cloth fuit prefently. Somebody knocks, fee wh£-ZE nos'alguhvas'couju ** para alnzocar,' $im^ ftnUf^ ha iuign<:gas i? ■■- ptts'UihikQX,- [skitf! £do pe do lume, n I Nad teiih'o frio, aqui- faanei ?nuito ban, Vtjamos se o vinhv he^ofkfi Da ca" a i quHlu ! g&r+hf&v&ih a que lie cop a, Fdga favor deprovar aqUeile vinho > Coma 4h>€ agrada-*; [ qiie ,, diz vm. delle ? Nad he mdo, he miiilwbem, Eis dqui< as Imgiiigaii,, lira a quelle prato, < o) Coma -v m J li ng nig as, \ { ' J a co mi at gum as \ ■ • ffids fdo muito boas, - ■ Da-me dt beber, A' [dude de vm. Bom proveito fdga a v?n. Da dt beber ao/enhor] '• E'u bebi ainda apor'a, Ospastelinhos eruobemhons t Estavao hum pouco muis co- idos que devido estar, : 3 'g^¥mma:f: 91 v,; b ka l,o g;u k-;:% To break/aft. BR>ING?>us- fomething for breakiaft. Yes , ( - fi r, There 'are fo me fau» fages and petty-patees. , Do you t crioo(e the gammon of bacon ? Yes, -hring it ; we will. eat a flice of it. Lay a napkin oh that table. Give" lis ' plates'; knives-, and forks. Rinfe cfc^ghtfles. ■: Reach the gentleman a chair, Sit downy fir ; fit by the- fire, I>am not cold, 1 mail be very well here. Let lis fee whether the wine be good. Give me that bottle and a glafs. ' ■■ Taite that wine, pray. How do you like it? what fay you to it? It is not r bad, it is very good,. Here are the faufages, take • away this plate. Eat fome faufages, fir. I have eat fome, they are very good. Give me fome drink. Your health, fir, Much good may it do you. Give the gentleman fome drink. I drank but juft now. The petty-patees were very good. They were baked a little too much. *E 4 ^ V?n. 79 PORTUGUESE Vm. nab come , Tenko comido tanto, que nao podereijantdr, Vm. estd zombandd^ vm. nab tern comido n&da, . Tenko comido : com .muito gcrsto, tanto das tinguigas cbmo do pre/unto, You do not eat. I have eat too much, I (haif not be able to eat any din- ner. You only j eft, you have eat nothing at ail. I have eat very heartily hoth of faufages and gammon of bacon. — DIALO GO VI. DUL.OGU E VI, Para fallar Portuguez. f^O'MO vdi vm.com o feu ^ Portuguez ? Estavm.ja muito adiantddo nelle ? Aindame fait a muito; nao fti qua p. ndda, Dizem porem que vm. o fall a muito be?n, Prauvera a Deos que affim JW* >*■ > Us que dizem iJ[o,estdo ?nuito enganados, Esteja vm. na certeza que assim mo differ ao, Pbsso fallar algumas palav- ras que aprendi de cor, E unlcamente o que, he necef- fd riopard comec"a r a j alia r , comegdr nab he bastante y he precifo que vm. acabe, Falle vm.fempreou bcm> ou mal\ Tenko medo de dar erros, Nao tenka vm. medo; a lingo a Portuguela hdbkedifficil, Conhego isso, e' tdmbem que ella he muito engragdda, Oiie feliciddde feria. a minha Je hi ajoubesse bem !■ To /peak Portuguese. TTOW goes on your Por- ■*■-*■ tuguefe ? Are you much improved in it now ? Far from it ; I know nothing almoft. It it faia\ however,, you fpeak it very well. Woujd to God it were true ! Thofe that fay fo are much miftaken. I allure you I was told fo. I can fay a few words which 1 have learnt by heart. And fo much as is necef- fary to begin to fpeak. The beginning is not all, you mull make an end. Be always fpeaking, whetheT well, or ill. I am afraid to commit blun- ders. Never fear ; the Portuguefe language is not hard. I know it; and that it has abundance of graces. How happy mould I be, if I were mailer of it ! A ap* GRAMMAR. n A applicagdo he o unico meyo para aprende-la, Qudnto tempo ha que vm. a- prende ? Apenas ha hum mez, C6mo fe chamafeu m'ejlre ? Chama-fe Ha muito tempo que o con- hego, E'lle tern enfinddo a muitos dos mcus amigos, Nad Ihe diz elle ferprecifo que fdllefempre Portuguez ? Sim, fenhor, affim me diz muitas vexes, PoiSi porque n&dfdlla vm.? Com quern quer vm. que eu falle, Com os quefallarem com vm. E'u quizera fallar, mas nao me atrcvo, lie precifo que vm. nao tenha me do, nem fe peje dos que o ouvirem fallar, Application is the only way of learning it. How long have you been learning ? ; Scarce a month yet. What is your mailer's name? His name is- I have known him a great while. He has taught several friends of mine. Does not he tell you that you mull conftantly talk Por- tuguese ? Yes, sir, he often tells me so. Why do not you talk then ? Who would you have me talk with ? With those who (hall talk to you. I would fain talk, but dare not. You mufl not be afraid, you muft be bold. DIALOGO VII. DIALOGUE VII. G Do Tempo. U E tempo faz f tempo ejla admiravel, tempo eft a roim, Fazfrio ? Jaz calma ? Nad fazfrio, n do faz calma, Ch .ve ? nao chove ? Nad o creyo, vento ejla mudado, Terhnos chuva, iH'oje nao ha de c hover, Chove, chove a cantaros, E/la nevdndo, Troveja, Of the Weather. TIT HAT sort of weather, ** is it ? It is fine weather. It is bad weather. Is it cold ? is it hot ? It is not cold, it is not hot. Does it rain ? does it not rain ? I do not believe it. The wind is changed. We (hall have rain. It will not rain to-day. It rains, it pours. t It snows. It thunders, Cah 74 P'OR'TUpUESE Cake pedra, Re I amp ague a, Fa z ?nuita cu im a , Ge'ou a noite pa J] add ?■• Ndl, Jenhor, mas agora ejla ;i :ando, Paiece-me que ha nevcezro, It hails. It lightens. It is very hot. Has it freezed to night ? No, 'sir. but it freezes now. Fm. nabfe en gen a, ajjlm he, Vm. tern hum grdnde cat. rro, on ejhlhcidio, Haqvinze dlas que o ttnfco, One h.) as fao, He e'edo, nab he iarde, JJc t:mpo dp a I mo car ? Poucojd'ta pardfircm h. ras de jan far, One far. m os depots de jan- ~t..r? - Daremos hum pqff.yc^uire- mes pajfe. e hu- ma pone a de tinta^ 1'de ao rneu quarto, eachareis em cima da mei a tudo o que vos for precijo, S~* IVE me a fbeet of pa- \P per, a pen, and a little ink. Step to my closet, you'll find on the table whatever you want, Ndo 7 6 PORTUGUESE Nao ha pennas, Ha gran de quantidade dellas na escrivaninha, Nad p reft do par a ndda, La ha outras, * Na o ejtdo apa rddas, Cnde ejla o vojfo catdvete ? Sabeis vos apardr pennas ? E'u aparo-as a mcu modo, E'fta nao ejla md, £m quanto acdbo ejla carta, fazclme o favor defechdr as cutras, e Jazer hum maco dellas, Quejello quer vm. que eu Ike ponlia ? Sella -o com o me a Jinete, cm com as minhas armas, Com que lucre quer v?n. que . as j edit % Fechai-as com o vermelho ou com o preto ; feja qual for, 7id5 impbrta, Tern vm. pbjlo a data ? Parcce-me que Jim, ?nas ainda nao a ajjinei, A quanto s ejiamos hbje do mez ? A outo, a dez, a quinze, a vinte, Pbnde o sobrescrito? O'nde efld a area ? Vos nunc a tendes area, A hi ha algitma. no areeiro, Ahi ejld o feu criddo; quer vm. que elle leve as cartas do corrio, Leva as minhas cartas do correo, e ndoteesquecdsde pagdr o parte, Nad tenho dinheiro, Ahi ejla huma moeda de 6uro f Vaijdepre/fa, e van logo, There are no pens. There are a great many in the ftandifh. They are good for nothing. There are some others. They are not made. Where is your penknife ? Can ycu make pens ? I make them my own way. This is not bad. While I make an end of this letter, do me the favour to make a packet of the reft. What seal will you have me put to it ? Seal it with my cypher, or coat of arms. What wax fhall I put to it ? Put either red, or black, no matter which. Have you put the date ? I believe I have, but I have not signed it. What day of the month h this ? The eighth, the tenth, fif, teenth, twentieth. Put the superscription. Where is the powder ? You never have powder or sand. There's some in the sand box. There's your servant, will you let him carry the let- ters to the poll-house ? Carry my letters to the poft- ofHce, and don't forget to- pay poftage. I have no money. There's a moidore. Go quickly, and return as soon as possibly D I A- GRAMMAR. 77 P I A L O G O X, Q Para comprar. U E quer vm. Quero hum bom panno fino para hum veftido, Tenha vm. a bondade de en- trar, e vera o mats belo panno que hd em Londres, Deixe-me ver o melhor que vm. tem> Aquitem vm. hum excellenie, que agbrafe cojluma trazer, He hum bom pernio, mas a cor ndo me agrdda, Ahi tern vm. outra pega que tern o cor mats clara, Agrddame a cor, mas o panno ndo he forte, nao tern cor- po, Yeja ejia pica ; vm. nao ac- hara em nenhuma parte outra tad boa cbmo ella, Quant o pede vm. por cada ana detle ? Ofeujujloprego he — r— Sr. nao he meu coflumepor-me a regatear ; faca-mejavor dedizerme o ultimo preco, Ja dijfe a vm. que aquelle he o seu jujlo prego, He muito caro, dar Ihe hei a vm. — Ndo pojjo dar nada de abate, on naopojfo abater hum cei- til\ Vm. ndo ha de vender por es- se preco, Vm. quiz saber o ultimo pri - co t eett dijfe-lho, DIALOGUE X. To buy, VTTHAT do you want, fir? *™ What would youpleasc to have ? I want a good fine cloth to make me a suit of clothes. Be pleased to walk in, fir, you'll see the fineft in London. Shew me the beft you have. There's a very fine one, and what's worn at present. 'Tis a good cloth, but I don't like the colour. There's another lighter piece. I like that colour well, but the cloth is not ftrong, 'tis too thin. Look upon this piece here, sir, you'll not find the like any where else. What do you afk for it an ell? Without exacting, it is worth • Sir, I am not used to ftand haggling ; pray tell me your loweft price. I have told you, sir, 'tis worth that. ? Tis too dear, I'll give you — I can't bate a farthing. You fhall not have what you afk. You afked me the loweft price, and I have told you. Hora PORTUGUESE ?s Bora vamos, ccrte vm. Id du- as anas delle, AJfeg'uro-lke.a vm. ccmo ho- mem de bem que /ou, que nab gankc nqda com vm. Ahi tern vm. cinco ?noedas de ouro, de me a dxm a si a, Tenha a bonds de 'de dar-me outra em lugdr dcjla, por- que nub he de pezo, Ahieftd outra, A Dcos, crlado de vm. Come, come, cut off two ells of it. I proteft, or the word of an honeft man, I don't get any thing by you. There's five" moidores, give me the change. Be pleased, sir, to let me have another for- this, it warns weight*. There's another. Farewell; sir, your servant. D I A L O G O XL DIALOGUE XL Para huma Jornada. SUA'NTAS leg'oas ha da- qui a N ? Ma auto legbas, Nos nab poderetnos chegdr la hoje, he muito tarde, Nab he fenab meyo dia, vm" s dinda tern bajicnte tempo, He a ajlrdda boa ? Nab he muito boa, pajfao-fe bbfques e rios, lid algum perigo nella ? Mao hd noticias dijjo ; he ejlrdda real em que Je en- contra gente a cada pojfo, Pois nab dizem que ha ladrc- ens nos bbsques ? Nab ha de que ter me do, ne?n de dia, nem de noite, Por ondefe vai ? Qudndo vm C£S ch eg a rem ao pe do outeiro, he precifo que to mem a mdo direita, Pois nao he necejfdrio fubir hum outeiro ? Fo r a "Journey. IT O W many leagues is it ■■"*• from this place to N. ? It is eight leagues. We (hall not be able to get thither to day, it is too late. It is not more than twelve o'clock, you have time enough yet. Is the road good ? So, so ; there are woods and rivers to pass. Is there any danger upon that road ? There's no talk of it, it is a highway, where you meet people every moment. Do not they say there are robbers in the woods ? There's nothing to be feared either by day or night. Which way muft one take? When you come near the bill, you rouft take to the right hand. Is it not necessary to ascend a hill then ? Nao ■ GRAMMAR. 79 Nad, Sr. ncio ha cutro oute- iro fen -I huma pequena ladeiri, (ou descula) no basque, Cujtaaatmar com o caminho pello miyo dos bosques? Vm ces . new podem errc-lo, Logo Mut v?n ces fakir em do bofquc, lembrem-fe de tomdr a mao efquerda, Vm c< muito s annos, fico-lhe muito obrigado, Vdmos, vumos, fenhores, to- membs hum cava Ho, O'nde est:t o mar que z ? E'llefoi adiante\ E'lle h a de eft:, r efpera ndo por vgs logo ali for a da ciddde, Por que estd v?n Ci agora efpe- randol hora, vamo-nos daqui, acabemos, Fiquem-fe embora, fenhores, a Deos, Fdcdo vrri" muito boa jor- nada s No, fir, ; there is no other hill hut a little declivity in the wood. Is it a difficult way through the woods ? You can't lofe your way. As foon as you are out of the wood, remember to keep to the left hand. I thank you, fir, and am very much obliged to you. Come, come, gentlemen, let's takeahorfe. Where is the marquis ? He is gone before. He'll wait for you juft out of town. What do you ilay for now ? come, come, let's be gone, let's have done. Fare wel, gentlemen, fare- w-el. I with you a very good jour- ney. D I A L O. G O XII. DIALOGUE XII. Da Cea e da Pousada. Of the Supper and Lodging. pO'MOUE affim estamos *- / chegddos a estaldgem 9 Apeemo-nos.,fnh6res, Pega nos cavdllos destes sen- hores, he trdta delles, Vejamos agira o que vm. nos hd de dar para cear, Hum capao, meya duzia de pombos, huma falada,feis codomiz.es, e huma duzia de calhundras, Querem vm ces mdis alguma coufa? I'sto he bastunte, dai nos al- um vinho quefeja bom y e \uma sobremesa. QO, we are arrived at the ^ inn. Let's alight, gentlemen. Take thefe gentlemen's horf- es, and take care of them. Now let's fee what you'll give us for ("upper. A capon, half a dozen of pi- geons, a fallad, fix quails, and a dozen of larks. Will you have nothing elfe ? That's enough, give us fome good wine, and a defTert. Deixem So PORTUGUESE Deixem vm ( " uso por minha Conta, eu Ihes prometo que fiquem bemfervidos, Alumia dos fenhores, Dai-nos de cear o m'ais de- pressa que for possivel, Antes que vm S r . Joao Ferrier, Meu Sen h or, ESTOU favorecido.com a de Vm ce de 3do Cor- rente, e acho que em Comprimento a minha Or- dem tern Vm ce . comprado os quinheirtos Barils de Arenques de fttmo a Livras onz.e por Lastre; eu nao tenho duvida que esse foi o menor preso porque Vm ce , os podia ter, e que sua boa Qualidade o Corresponda, meu Navio se esta preparando com toda a pressa para frir Buscalos : elle se pode care- GRAMMAR. €S Mr. James Jones, Sir, THESE will advise you, that by this Ship the Derby, I have made the return of your Stock in my Hands in two Bulses of Diamonds, amounting to Pagodas 4396, 25 Fan. 10 Casks, having re- gistered them according to your Order in the Com- pany's Books; inclosed is a Bill of Lading, together with invoice, and your Account current closed, which I wish may come safe to you, and turn to a good Account, as 1 am returning by this Conveyance into Europe; at my Arrival in London, I shall have the Honour to see you, and give you an exact Ac- count of the Trade in India. I am entirely, Sir, Fort St. George, Your humble Servant, Nov. 1"2, 1808. London, 4 March, 1808* To Lisbon. Mr. John Ferrier. Sir, v I AM favoured with yours of the 3d Current, and find, in Compliance to my Order, you have bought the five hundred Barrels of red Herrings, at 11/. per Last, I make no doubt, but that was the lowest Price you could get them for, and the good- ness of them does answer it : my ship is getting ready with all Speed to go down to fetch them, and she may be laden at your Key, as she draws no * F 3 more 86 PORTUGUESE gar em o seu Cays, sendo que nao tira mais de que nove Pes de Agua ; como Vm t,e . he servido de apontarme, que me apouparia de Gastos quatro pe- miques por Baril, eu julgo que elle podera levar sette centos Barils ou mais ; se assim for, quando elle che- gar, Vm ce . o podera despachar : o Capitao nao tera Ocaziap de qualquer dinheiro, assim que nao bavera mister de nernhum Suprimento. Agracleco a Vm ce . pella Informacao que me da em relacao dos Cam- bios de Lisboa a este Lugar: mas como eu olhopara Remessas do Dinheiro aqui tao ariscado em Let- tras do Exchequer. Vm ce . sera servido de s'acar sobre mim ao mais acomodado Cambio que lhe for possivel, e suas Lettras ao usual Curso, as quaes terao todo o.devido Honor, •Mui certo Servidor de Vm ce . que S. M.' B. Londres, 18 Marco, 1808. A Cadiz. Senhor Joao Fryer, Meu Senhor, DIVERSAS Cartas de Vm ce . me vierao a mao a seu Tempo, como tambem minha conta Corrente a qual tenho notado em Conformidade com Vm ce . sua ultima toy de 29 do Mez passado, na qual me dk Vm ce ; recifco das trez \Letras importantes seis Mill Pieces de Oito, £s quaes meo Irmao Joseph mandou a Vm ce . por minha Conta, e por minha Or- den:; eu farei hum triste Negocio com ellas depois do desembcjio de meu Dinheiro ha tanto Tempo, ademas que o Cambio me custou caro, eu Acho que seus Jimites a Vm ce . forao mais somenos que o Preco da Prata e Cambio, agora sendo que tenho es~ perado GRAMMA R. 87 Kiore than nine Feet of Water, as' you are pleased to mention, which will save me the Charge of four Pence per Barrel ; I judge she will carry about se- ven hundred Barrels, or more ; if so, when she ar- rives, you may fit her up, the Captain will not have Occasion for any Money, so will want no Supply. I thank you for the Information you give me in re- lation to the Exchange between Lisbon and this Place; but as I look upon the Remittance of the Money hence, as hazardous in Exchequer Bills, you will be pleased to draw on me at the most commo- dious Exchange possible, and your Bills at the usual Course, which shall meet with all due Honour from, Sir, Your humble servant, London, March 18, 1808. To Cadiz. Mr. John Fryer, Sir, YOUR several Letters came to Hand in due Time, as did my Account Current, which I have noted in Conformity with you ; your last to me was of 29 of last Month, wherein you give me Receipt of the three Bills, amounting to. six thousand Pieces of Eight, which my Brother Joseph sent to you for my Account and by my Order ; I shall make but a sorry Bargain of them, after so long a Dis- bursement ; besides they cost me a dear Exchange; I find his Limits to you were much under the Price of Plate and Exchange : Now since I have waited all this Time, and there being no Probability of their falling, be pleased to send *'F 4 my SB PORTUGUESE perado todo este Tempo e nao havendo Probabilida- de de sua baixa, seja Vm ce servido de mandarine meu Dinheiro como vem o Cambio tanto para esta pra- ca, ou Amsterdam, como Vm ce . julgar me fara me- lhor Conta, se a Prata ou Cocbonilha baixar a pre- co que a Vm ce . Ihe pareca ser melbor do que por remessa de Cambio, em tal caso investa Vm ce meu Dinheiro em qualquer delles, que deixo in- teiramente a Vm ce . estando persuadido que Vm<*. actuara em meus Negocios como se forao seus pro- prios, eu me alegraria ouvir da cbegada da Frota que podera ser que desse algum alento ao Negocio para que huma pessoa podesse fazer algum emprego que ao presente nao Convida a nada sendo quanto se offrece. Servidor de Vm ce . que S. M. B. Londres, Mar90 21, 1808. A Cadiz, Senbor Joao Fryer. Senhor, DO outro-lado, esta a Copia da minha ultima de 18 do Corrente, eu snponho que meu Irmao Jo- seph tern feito algumas Remessas a Vm ce . por min- ha Conta, do que saberei a quantia pello primeiro Correio de Olanda ] com esta mando a Vm ce : tres Letras, importances quatrd Mil pesos de Outo, sobre a boa pessoa de Vm ce . a quern as endousei, valor em minha Conta, cujo Dinheiro, Vm ce . sera servido empregar, junto com aquelle que meu Ir- mao Joseph Ihe tiver remetido, em dous, ou tres JNavios de Guerra, e me akgrarei que isto chegue a Tempo bastante para alcancar ao Senhor John True- man, e os outros Navios de Guerra, em tal Caso, e nao de outro modo a podera Vm ee , sacar mais do que GRAMMAR. 89 my Money, as the Exchange comes either for this Place or Amsterdam, which you judge will turn most to Account. If the Plate or Cochineal should fall to a Price, which you may conceive will answer better than by Remittance at a due Exchange, in such case invest my Money in either of them, which I do entirely leave to you, being persuaded, you will act in my Affairs equal to your own. I snould be glad to hear of the Fleet's Arrival ; for, perhaps, it might give some favourable turn to business, so that one could make some use of one's Money,, for at present, it does not invite one to any thing; which is all from, Sir, Your humble Servant. Londres, March 21, 1808, To Cadiz, Mr. John Fryer, Sir, , ON the other Side is a Copy of my last to you of the 18th instant 5 I suppose my Brother Joseph has made you some Remittances for my Account, of which I shall know the Sum by the first Dutch Post. I herewith send you three Bills, amounting to four thousand Pieces of Eight on your good Self, to whom I have indorsed them Value in my Ac- count y which Money please to employ, together with that my Brother Joseph has remitted you in two or three Men of War, and should be glad this should get time enough to reach Sir John True- man's, and the other Men of War : in such Case, and no other, you may draw over and above what is remitted you for my Account, ten thousand Du- c'ats, 90 PORTUGUESE que se ihe tem remetido por minha Conta, Dez Mil Ducados, e ponhaos Vm ee . com o meu outro Inte- rese, em ties ou- quatro Navios de Guerra, e seja ser'.' do de observar que sem embargo que eu orde- nei a Vm ce . na Copia da minha antecedente, para carregar em buma Galcra ou Navio ?vlarcante, tres Mil Ducados, e para sacar ; eu revoco a Ditta Or- dem, e peco*a Vm ce . que nao carregue em Galera, ou 'Navio Marcante, mais de dous Mil Ducados, e que nao saque ao presente, mas somente que em- pregue o que tenbo remetido a Vm ce . e seja servi- do mandarme buma distincta Conta, com inteira in- formacao do Negocio para meu Governo, e fico com lodo o devido respeito. Mui certo Servidor de Vm ce . Q. S. M. B. Hum escritinbo que vai aherto a hum vezinho, ou Amigo, emqualquer ocasiao. AO Senbor G. S. que T. M. ou seu servo cri- ado beja a S. ]VL rail vezes, e que ]he faca a merce de lhe mar.dar pelio portador desta sendolhe precisamente ne- cessario nesta ocasiao, e sempre ficara mui promto as suas Ordens. ' A. Q. D. G. A Carta ou Instrument/} de Procuracao. SAIBAM todos quantos este instrumento ou Carta de procuracao virem, que eu A. B. de Londres, homem : ] q negocio, tenbo nomeado e constituido q por GRAM. MA R. . 9 ! cats, and put it, with my other Interest on three or four Men of War ; and please to observe, that not- withstanding I ordered you in the foregoing Copy, to load in any- Galley or Merchantman, three thousand Ducats-, and to draw, I do revoke the said Order, and desire :you not to load in any Galley or Merchant-man, more than two thousand Ducats, and for the present not to draw, but only employ what I have remitted you, and please to send me a distinct Account of the Cost, with full Information of the Business for my Government, and I do re- main with due respect, Sir, Your humble Servant., A short open Escrito, or Message, to a Friend or Neighbour, for any Thing upon Occasion. TO Mr. G. S. that T. M. his most humble Servant, desires the favour of him to send by the Bearer haying at present immediate occasion for it, and he shall always remain obliged to him as his Humble Servant. A Letter of Attorney., KNOW all Men by these Presents, That I A. B. of London, Merchant, have named and con- stituted, and by these presents do name, ordain, appoint, 92 PORTUGUESE por estes presentes, nomeo, ordeno, constituio *e faco o Senbor B. C. de o meo verdadeiro e Jegitimo prqcurador, por mim e em meu Nome e ao meu uso pode demandar, arecadarereceber deT.B. Mercador, a soma de a mim devida.por ditto T. B. dando e por esta concedendo ao meu ditto Procurador o meu poder plenario e autoridade de exercitar, 'de usar de todas taes accoes e outras cousas em dereito necessarias para a cobranca da ditta divida e em meu norae, de dar, e fazer quita^oes ou outras descargas,e geralmente de fazer e executar lia materia sobreditta tao plenariamente como se eu mesmo flzesse ou pudesse fazer, estando pessoal- roente presente ; ratificando, confirmando, e outor- gando tudo e qualquer cousa que o ditto meu procu- rador legitimamente fizer ou causar de se fazer ne]la popestes presentes. Em testemunha do que Assinei e sellei esta em aos 20 dias do mez de Marco de 1808. por A. B. Assinado e Sellado adiante de T. A.)-p i ^r t> { lestemunhas. A Carta ou o Instrumento de Fretamento. ESTA carta ou Instrumento de Fretamento contratado feito aos dias do mez de do Anno de do nacimento de nos- so Senbor Jesus Christo, &x. Entre T. B. Mestre debaixo de Deos do bom navio nomeado, de dozentas e cincoenta toneladas de carga P. M. que ao presente esta Surto e ancorado no Rio de de huma parte e E. T. M. B. L. &c.' ho- mens de negocio da outra parte : Certificao que o ditto Mestre tern dado em aluguel e fretado o Ditto Navio aos dittos homens de negocio e que elles OS GRAMMAR. 93 appoint, and make my trusty friend, B. C. of Merchant, my true and lawful Attorney, for me, and in my Name, and to my Use, to Demand, sue for, recover, and receive of T. B. of Merchant, the Sum of to me due and ow- ing by and from the said T. B. giving, and hereby granting unto my said Attorney, my full Power and Authority to use and exercise all such Acts, Things, and Devices in the Law, as shall be ne- cessary for the recovering of the said Debt, and give Acquittance, or other Discharges, in my Name ; to make and give, and generally to do and execute on the Premises, as fully as myself might or could do, were I personally present ; ratifying, confirming and allowing all and whatsoever my said Attorney shall lawfully do, or cause to be done therein, by these Presents. In witness whereof I have hereunto set my Hand and Seal, in the 20th of March, 1807. Sealed and delivered In the Presence of A. B, T. A. M. B. The Copy of a Charter- Party of Affreightment. THIS Charter Party of Affreightment, in- dented, made the of the Month of Anno Domini, between T. A. Master, under God, of the good Ship or Vessel, called" the of the Burthen of Tuns, or thereabouts, now riding at An- chor, in the River of of the one Part, and E, T, M, B, L, &c. Merchants, of the other Part, witnesseth, that the said Master has granted and let the said Ship to freight unto the said Mer- chants, and that they the said Merchants have ac- cordingly 94 PORTUGUESE os dittos Homens de negocio tern tornado em alu« guel pella viagem aos concertos e as condicoes, a- saber o ditto Mestre faz concerto, promete e otorga, por elle mesmo, os seus Testamenteiros, e Administradores, e com os , dittos homens de ne- gocio, e qualquer delles, ou seus, e a qualquer dos seusTestamenteiroSj Administradores, e Constituin- tes, por estes presentes ; que o ditto Navio forte e sao de quilha, e bem bastantemente provido* de mantimentos, enxarcias e gente, e aparelhado de todas as cousas convenientes enecessarias para fazer a viagem por diante declarada ; com o primeiro vento favoravel e bom tempo que Deos premittira despois da data destes presentes, partira do porto de com todas as taes fazendas e Merca- dorias que os dittos homens de negocio ou os Seus Constituintes, entrementes carregarao ou meterao abordo delle, e com elle em direitura dara a vela e aplicara ao como o vento e o tempo mais favorecerem ao ditto Navio na sua viagem; e em chegando tao perto do ditto lugar de elle o ditto Mestre ou os Seus Constituintes dentro de Dias de trabalho para se contarem logo despois de tal sua chegada, nao somente descarega- rao, entergarao as dittas fazendas e mercadorias rneridas abordo do dito Navio ao sobre ditto, aos dittos homens de negocio, aos seus Feitores ou Constituintes, ou a alguns ou algum delles em Sal- vamento ebem acondicionadas, salvante o risco.dos mares, e o tolhimento de principes e Governadores^ mas tarnbem receberao, tornarao a caregar, e toma- rao abordo do ditto Navio de e dos ditto homens de negocio, dos seus Feitores ou Constituintes ou de alguns ou algum delles, todas as taes tazendas e mercadorias que elles ou qualquer delles alicarega- rio ou njeterao abordo delle ate o comprimento inteiro da carga do ditto Navio; asaber : tanto quanto bem se podra arrumar debaixo da cuberta no graXjma r, n cordingly hired her for the Voyage, and upon the Terms and Conditions following : That is to say, the said Master does covenant, promise, and grant for himself, his Executors, and Administrators, to and with the said Merchants, and either of them, their and either of their Executors, Administrators, and Assigns, by these Presents ; That the said Ship, strong and sound, and well and sufficiently victu- alled, tackled, manned, and apparelled, with all Things fit, needful, and necessary for' the Per- formance of the Voyage hereafter mentioned, shall, with the first fair Wind and Weather, which God shall send, after the Date of these Presents, depart from the Port of with all such Goods and Merchandize as the said Merchants, or their Assigns, shall in the mean Time lade and put on board of her, and therewith directly sail, and apply unto as Wind and Weather shall best serve for the said Ship to sail, and being arrived as near to the said Place of he the said Mas- ter, or Assigns, shall and will, within working Days next, from and after such her Arri- val to be accounted, not only unlade and deliver the said Goods and Merchandize put on board the said Ship at aforesaid, unto the said Mer- chants, their Factors, or Assigns, or some or one of them, in Safety, and well conditioned, the Dan- gers of the Seas, and Restraint of Princes and Ru- lers excepted, but alsoshall and will receive, relade, and take on board the said Ship, of and from the said Merchants, their Factors, or Assigns, or some or one of them, all such Goods and Merchandize, as they or any of them shall there please to lade and put on board her, to the said Ship's full and corapleat Lading; that is to say, as much as can conveniently be stowed in the whole Hold, and between Decks, afore the main mast, Room only reserved for the said Ship's Provisions, Tackle, and Apparel, 96 PORTUGUESE no conves, e adiante do masto grande, Salvante os lugar pellos mantimentos, enxarcias e aparelhos do ditto Navio, e os dittos dias de trabalho sendo acabados ou o ditto navio sendo ali mais de- pressa despachado, o que primeiro succeder elle o ditto Mestre ou os seus constituintes com a primeira boa occasiao de tempo e vento favoravel em derei- tura navigarao e tornarao a vir com o ditto Navio e a Sua Carga do ditto porto de descaregar, e reca- regar de aqui dentro de dias de trabalho logo despois da entrada do ditto Navio dada na alfandega desta ditto elle o ditto Mestre ou os seus Constituintes descaregarao e eutregarao as dittas fazendas e mer- cadorias carregadas abordo do ditto Navio ao seu descarregar e recarregar sobre ditto aos dittos homens de negocio, e os seus Testamenteiros, Administradores, ou Constituintes em salvamento, salvante o risco dos mares e o tolhimentp de Princi- pes e Governadores, e asim se acabara a ditta desti- nada Viagem E os dittos homens de nego- cio concertam, prometem, e otorgam por elles mes- mos e q'ualquer delles, ou seus, e qualquer de seus Testamenteiros, Administradores, e Constituintes por estes presentes :^qu'e os seus Testamentei- ros, Administradores, Feitores ou Constituintes nao somente descaregarao e recaregarao o ditto navio ao seu porto de descaregar, e recaregar de sobre ditto, e despacharao e descaregarao o mesmo neste na maneira e forma acima decla- rada : e dentro dos certos dias e tempos sobre no- meados ; Mas tambem por inteiro de todo o frete que se, veneer, para se pagare pedir por e durante esta presente destinada viagem; bem e verdadeira- mente pagarao ou Causarao que se pague ao ditto Mestre, aos seus Testamenteiros, Administradores ou Constituintes a summa cje de dinheiro corrente da na maneira e forma GRAMMAR. 97 Apparel, and the faid working Days being expired, or the faid Ship there fooner dif- patched, which firft (hall happen, he the faid Mat- ter, pr his Affigns, fhairand will, with the then next Opportunity of Wind and Weather from her faid unlading and relading Port of aforefaid, dire£tly fail, return, and come back with the faid Ship and Lading unto the Port of and here within working Days next after the faid Ship fliall be entered in the Cuftom-Houfe of this faid he the faid Mailer, or his Affigns* fhall and will unlade, and deliver the faid Goods and Merchandizes, laden on board the faid Ship at her lading and relading aforefaid, unto the faid Merchants, their Executors, Adminiftrators, or Affigns, in fafety, and well conditioned, the Dan- gers of the Seas, and Reftraint of Princes and Ru- lers, excepted, and fo end the faid intended Voyage; and the faid Merchants do covenant, promife, and grant, for themfelves, and either of Jhem, their, and either of their Executors and Adminiftrators, to and with the faid Matter, his Executors and Ad- miniftrators, and Affigns, by thefe Prefents, that their Executors, Adminiftrators, Factors, or Affigns, fhall and will not only unlade and re- lade the faid £hip, at her unlading and relading Port of aforefaid, and difpatch and difcharge the fame at this in the Manner and Form as above expreffed, and within the refpective Days and Times above mentioned, but alfo mall and will, in full of all Freight to be due, payable, or demandable, for or during this prefent intended Voyage, well and duly pay, or caufe to be paid, unto the faid Mailer, his Executors, Adminiftrators, or Affigns, the Sum of of lawful Money of in the Manner and' Form following : That is to fay, Part thereof within * G Days 98 PORTUGUESE forma feguinte ; Afaber parte delle dentro em dias defpois da entrada do ditto navio dado na alfandega de Item mais delle dentro em dias proxi- mo feguintes, e o reftante do ditto frete inteiro dentro em dias logo ; defpois da defcarga do ditto Navio aqni em fobre ditto, E acordafe reciprocamente por e entre ambas as par- tes por elles mefmos, os feus particulars Teftamen- teiros, e Adminiftradores que todos os gaftos dos portos que fe vencerem para pagarfe ou pedirfe, du- rante efta prefente deftinada viagem -, ferao pagados e fatisfeitos na maneira e forma feguente ; Afaber delles pellos dittos homens de negocio ou feus Teftamenteiros ou Conftituintes : Alem dilTo, por efte fe concerta que podra fer e feja licito aos e pellos dittos homens de negocio, os feus feitores ou Conftituintes de reter o ditto navio em detenca ao feu porto defcarga e recarga fobre ditto, e tam- bem a fobre ditto tanto tempo e tantos dias que fe requeirao, alem dos dias certos acima apontados falvo que nao paflem dias por inteiro ; Elles os dittos homens de negocio, os feus Feitores, Conftituintes por cada-hum e cada tal dia pagando ao ditto Meftre ou aos feus Conftituintes de dia em dia como mefmo fe veneer para fe pagar, qualquer coufa fobreditta em contrario nao obftante; e pello comprimento de todas, e de cada huma das coufas acima declaradas, as quaes par parte e pello que to- ca ao ditto Meftre, aos feus Teftamenteiros, Ad- miniftradores ou Conftituintes e cada hum delles sao e devem de fer avidas, tidas, obfervadas e compridas, O ditto Meftre fe obriga a ft mefmo, os feus Teftamenteiros, e Adminiftradores, juntamente com o ditto Navio, o feu frete, enxarcias e aparelhos aos dittos homens de negocio, aos feus Teftamen- teiros, Adminiftradores e Conftituentes, e cada hum delleS na foma ou pena de dinheiro corrente de para GRAMMAR. 99 Days after the faid Ship (hall . be entered into the Cuftom Houfe of Item, more thereof within Days then next fol- lowing, and the remaining part of the faid whole Freight within Days next after the faid Ship fhall be delivered after lading here at aforefaid ; and it is mutually agreed by and between the faid Parties to thefe Prefents, for them- felves, their feveral Executors and Adminiftrators, That all Port Charges which fhall grow due, pay- able, or demandable, during this prefent intended Voyage, fhall be paid and fatisfied in the Manner and Form following; That is to fay, thereof by the faid Merchants, their Executors, Factors, or Affigns, and the other thereof by the faid Matter, his Executors or Affigns : Further, it is hereby agreed, that it fhall and maybe lawful unto and for the faid Merchants, their Fa£k>rs, or Af- figns, to keep the faid Ship in Demurrage at her unlading and relading Port above mentioned, and alfo at aforefaid, oyer and above the re- fpecied Days aforementioned, fuch other Time and Number of Days as will be requifite, fo as the fame exceed not Days in the whole, they the laid Merchants, their Factors, for each and every fuch Day, paying unto the faid Mailer, or his Affigns Day by Day, where the fame fhall ^grow due and payable, any thing aforefaid to the contrary notwithftanding ; and for the Perform- ance of all and lingular the Premifes, which on the Part and Behalf of the faid Mailer, his Execu- tors, Adminiilrators, and Affigns, and every of them, are and ought to be well and truly holden, obferved,and performed, the faid Mailer doth bind and oblige himfelf, his Executors and Adminiflra- tors, together with the faid Ship and her Freight, Tackle and Apparel unto the faid Merchants, their "Executors, Adminiftrators, and Affigns, and every * G 2 of - 100 PORTUGUESE para fe pagar bem e verdareiramente por eftes pre- fentes e tambem pello comprimento de todas e de eada huma das coufas fobre dittas, os quaes por parte e pello que toea aos dittos bomens de negocio, aos feus Teftamenteiros, Adminiftradores, Conftituin- tes ou qualquer delles, Sao e devem de fer guar- dadas, pagadas e Compridas; os dittos bomens de inegocio fe obrigao a fi mefmos, os feus Teftamen- teiros, e Adminiftradores, junta e feparadamente com a fuas fazendas que fe caregarao abordo do dit- to Navio nefta prefente deftinada viagem, ao ditto Meftre aos feus Teftamenteiros, Adminiftradores e Conftituintes, e a cada bum delles, na femelhante Soma da pena de de Semelbante dinbeiro corrente de para fer pagado bem e verdadei- mente por eftas prefentes ; Em Teftimunba no que as partes Sobredittas aftinarao e Selarao reciproca- mente eftas prefentes Cartas de fretamento contra- tadasj ao dia e anno primeiro acima declarado. T. B. Sellado entregue adiante de A. B. C. D. A Police de Seguro. Em o Nome de Deos, Amen. Tanto no feu proprio nome, como por ou em o nome ou nomes- de todos e cada peiloa ou peffoas a quern o mefmo pertence, pofta ou po-* dra pertencer, em parte ou em todo faz o Seguro, caufa all mefmo e a elles, e a cada bum delles de affegurarfe, perdidos ou nao perdidos fobre qualquer genero de fazendas e Mer- cadorias qualquer carregadas ou para fe carregarem abordo do bom Navio por nome da Carga do GRAMMA R, 101 'df them, in the Sum or Penalty of Pounds of lawful Money of well and truly to be paid by these trefents, and likewife for the Per- formance of all and (ingular the Premifes, which on the Part and Behalf of the faid Merchants their Executors, Adminiftrators, and Ailigns, or any of them, are and ought to be kept, paid, and per- formed, the faid Merchants do bind and oblige themfelves, their Executors, and Administrators, jointly and feverally, together with their Goods, to be laden on board the said Ship, this prefent intend- ed Voyage, uwto the faid Mafter, his Executors, Administrators, and Affigns, and every of them, in the like Sum and Penalty of of like lawful Money of alfo well and truly to be paid by these Prefents. In Witnefs whereof, the Parties aforefaid to thefe prefent Charter-Parties in- dented, have interchangeably put their Hands and Seals the Day and Year firft above written. T.EL Sealed and delivered in the Prefence of A.B. C. D. A Policy of Ajfurance* \ IN the Name of God, Amen, ■as well in his own Name, as for and in the Name and Names of all and every other Perfon and Perfons to whom the fame doth, may or fhall ap- pertain, in Part, or in all, does make Afturance, and caufes himfelf and them., and -every of them, to be.infured, loft, or not loft upon any kind of Goods and Merchandize whatfoever, laden or to be laden aboard the good Ship called the Burthen Tons, .* G 3 or 102 PORTUGUESE de toneladas, P. M. do que he Meftrfc debaixo de Deos C. T. M. ou quern quer que for por Meftpe do -ditto Navio ou o Meftre delle fe nomea ou nomeara ; principiando a aventura fobre as dittas fazendas e Mercadorias de, e logo defoois de carregallas abordo do ditto Navio e affim fe continuara e ficara ate que o ditto Navio com as dittas fazendas e Mercadorias quaesquer chegar e as mefmas ahi defcarregadas em Salva- mento ; e fera licito pello ditto navio, nefta via- gem, de parar e deterfe em quaefquer portos ou lu- gares fern prejuizo a efte Seguro. As dittas fazendas e Mercadorias por concerto, sao e ferao avaliadas em Sem que fe de outra contra dellas mefmas, Tocante as Venturas e rifcos com que nos os afleguradores contentamonos e que tomaincs fobre nos nefta viagem, Ellas sao dos Mares, das naos de guerra, de fogo, inimigos, Coffairos, ladroes, Roubadores, Jettezonas ou ia- zendas perdidas e deitadas no mar, lettres de Marte, e contra Marte, fobrefaltos tomadias no Mar, cita- c,6es, tolhimentos e detencas de todos os Reys, Principes e povos de nacao condicao ou qualidade qualquer, barratria e contraries enganofas do meftre e dos Marinheiros, e de todos os ourrcs perigos ; per- das e defaftres que ja vierao ou que virao ou pre- juizo, defaproveitamento ou dano das dittas fazen- das e mercadorias, ou de algua parte dellas. E fe acafo fucceder a-Iguma perda ou defventura, fera li- cito aos AiTeguradores, Feitores, Servos e Conftitu- intes de mandar fazer diiigencias e trabalhar por, em, e acerca da defeza, Salvamento, e recobramento das dittas fazendas e mercadorias, ou dealguma parte dellas fern prejuizo ao defte Seguro, aos gaftos do que nos os Afleguradores contribuiremoscada hum conforme a Sua contia nelle aftegurada ; e nos os Afleguradores eftamos de acordo e concerto que efta efcritura e feguro tera tanta forca e valor como a mais GRAMMA R. 103 or thereabouts ; wherefore P. M. is Mailer, under God, for this prefers t Voyage or who- foever elk fhall go for Mailer in the faid Ship, or by whatfoever Name or Names the faid Ship, or the Mailer thereof, is or fhall be named or called ; beginning the Adventure upon the faid Goods and Merchandife from and immediately following the Lading thereof aboard the faid Ship and fo fhall continue and endure until the faid Ship, with the faid Goods and Merchandife whatfoever fhall be arrived and the fame there fafely landed ; and it mail be lawful for the faid Ship in this Voyage to flop and flay at any Port or Places without prejudice to this AiTurance. The faid Goods and Merchandife by Agreement, are and fhall be valued at without fur- ther Account to be given for the fame, touching the Adventures and Perils which we the AfTurers are contented to bear, and do tabe upon us in this Voyage, they are of the Seas, Men of War, Fire, Enemies, Pirates, Rovers, Thieves, Jetfons, Let- ters of Marque and Counter-marque, Surprifals, Takings of Sea, Arrells, Reilraints, and Detain- ments of all Kings, Princes, and People of what Nation, Conditions, or Quality foever, Raratry of the Mafler and Mariners, and of all other Perils, LofTes and Misfortunes, that have or fhall come to the Hurt, Detriment, or Damage of the faid Goods and Merchandife, or any part thereof ; and in Cafe of any Lofs' or Misfortune, it fhall be law- ful to the allured Faclors, Servants, and Affigns, to fue, labour, and travel, for, in, and about the Defence, Safeguard, and Recovery of the faid Goods and Merchandife or any part thereof, with- out Prejudice to this AiTurance, to the Charges whereof, we the AfTurers will contribute each one according to the Rate and Quantity of his Sum herein affured : And it is agreed bv us the Infurers, * Q% that 104 . PORTUGUESE a maisauthentica Police ou efcritura deSegurodantes feita em qualquer parte de E affim nos os AfTegu- radores fomos contentes e por efle prometemos e obrigamonos cada hum por fua propria parte, os noffos Eredeiros, Teftamenteiros, Adminiftradores e Conftituintes pello. verdadeiro comprimento das coufas acima declaradas, confeffando que efta* rnos pagos e fatisfeitos do que fe nos deve aconta defte Seguro. Em teflimunha do que nos os Afleguradores, affi- namos ao pe defte com as contias afseguradas, Si?. Eu A. B. Sou Contente com efle Seguro \ por cem livras Efterl. L. em de k O Conbecimento, DIGO eu T. B. de Meflre ou Capitao que fou do Navio que Deos falve por Nome que ao prefente efta furto e ancorado no porte de para com o favor de Deos feguir a fua viagem ao pcrto de aonde he minha direita defcarga, que he verdade, que recebi, e tenho carregado dentro do ditto Navio debaixo de cuberta enxuto e bem acondicio- nado de Marcado da marca de fora o qual me obrigo e prometo, ievandome Deos a bom falvamento o ditto Navio ao ditto Porto de entre* gar em nome do -fobreditto a T. M. auzente a quern feus poder tiver pagando- me de frete para aflSm comprir e guardar, obrigo minha peflba e bems e ditto Navio em cer- tefa do qual dei tres conhecimentos de hum theor afiinados por mim qu por meu Efcrivao, hum com- prido GRAMMAR. los that this Writing and AfTurance fhall be of as much Force and Effe6t, as the fureft Policy or Writing of Assurance heretofore made in < or elfewhere in and fo we the Aflurers are contented, and do hereby promife and bind ourfelves, each one for his own Part, our Heirs., Executors, and Affigns, to the Affured, their Exe- cutors, Adminiftrators, and Affigns, for the true Performance of the Premifes, confeffing ourfelves paid the Confideration due unto us for this AfTu- rance, by In Witnefs whereof, we the Affurers have fubfcribed our Names and Sums affured in I A. R. am contented with this AfTurance for One hundred Pounds. Witnefs my Hand? „ r The 15th of March, 1808. \*» Am A Bill of Lading. SHIPPED, by the Grace of God, in good Or- der, and well-conditioned, by in and upon the good Ship called the where- of is Matter under God, for this pre- fent Voyage and now riding at Anchor in and, by God's Grace, bound for to fay being marked and numbered as in the Margin and are to be delivered in like good Order, and well-conditioned, at the afore- faid Port of the Danger of the Seas only excepted, unto Mr. or his Affigns, he or they paying for the faid Goods with Primage and Average, as is accuitomed. In Witnefs whereof, the Mailer and Purfer of the faid Ship has affirmed to three Bills of Lading, all of this Tenor and Date ; the one of which three Bills being accomplished, the other two to r ftand log PORT U G UESE prido os outros nao valham ; feito em 14 de Marco de 1808 Anno.. Do que contem nao'fei. O Instrumento on Efcriiura de Compromiflo. A TODOS quantos efle prefente Inftrumento ou Efcrjtura de Compromiflo virem, de nos Acre- dores de G. M. Mercador de Saude ; Em como ditto G. M. ao prefente fka devendo e em dereito deve a nos os Acredores delle ditto G. M. varias e diverfas fummas e Dinheiro, &c. As quas em rasao de muitas dividas e algumas dellas mui grandes, que tambem em dereito fe Ihe devem a elle, nem fe podem arrecadar fern alguma dilacao de tempo, e por ferem algumas dellas irrecuperaveis fern demanda, elle eila por ora muito defabilitado de fazer pagamento a nos os seus Acredores da noiTa inteira e julla divida conforme a fua vontade e defejo 5 ao refpeito de que, elle nos pede com todo o encarecimento que nos os dittos Acredores, ecada hum de nos foifemos fervidos de dar e conceder a elle o Ditto G. M. aos feus Teilamenteiros, Admi- nirtradores,ou Conftituintes, tanta larguefao dilacao de tempo pello pagamento e fatisfacao de noilas dividas particulares que Ihe parecer jufto e rasao pello alcance e cobranca das diUas dividas - y Afaber, que nos e cada hum de nos fkafTemos contentes a to mar e receber de.noffas dividas inteira fern para fe repartirem em partes, para fe pa- garem em pagamentos diverfos na maneira e forma Seguinte : Afaber, o prhneiro pagamento della ha de fer e o redo pagar-fe-ha em proximo pelia inteira paga e Satisfacao das dittas dividas efpeceficadas ; E pello mais pie- nario comprimento dos varies pagamentos fobre^ dittos GRAMMAR. 107 fhnd void. And fo God fend the good Ship to her defired Port in Safety. Amen. Dated in on 14th of March 1808. Infide and Contents unknown. A Letter of Licence. TO all People, to whom this prefent Writing fhall come, We the Creditors of G. M. of Merchant, fend greeting. Whereas the faid G. M. at this prefent Time, does ftand in- debted, and doesjuftly owe unto us the faid Credi- tors of him the faid G. M. divers and fundry Sums of Money, &c. which, by reafon of many Debts, and fome of them very great, that are Jikewife juftly owing unto him, and cannot be had or re- covered without fome Refpite of Time, and fome of them not without Suit, he is very much di fa- bled at prefent to make Payment unto us the faid Creditors, our whole and jult Debt, as he feems willing and defirous ; in confideration whereof, he inftantly defires us, That we the faid Creditors, and every one of us, would be pleafed to give and grant unto the faid G. M. his Executors, Adminiftrators, or Affigns, fuch Liberty or Refpite of Time, for the Payment and Satisfaction of our feveral Debts, as he thinks reafonable for the obtaining, getting, and recovering of the faid Debts : vizf. That we and every one of us would be content to take, and ac- cept of our whole Debts in to be divided in Parts, to be paid at feveral Payments, in Manner and Form following : viz. The lirft Payment thereof to be and the Refidue to be paid at next . in full Payment and Satisfaction of the faid feveral Debts : And for the more full Performance of the faid feveral Payments aforefaid, in fuch Manner and Form iOs PORTUGUESE dittos em tal maneira e forma corao acima fe limita e declara, ao verdadeiro intento deftas prefentes elle o ditto G. M. ao ou antes do fera obrigado a nos os dittos acredores na mefma conformidade, por huma obrigacao que fe fara na melhor forma de dereito com todos e cada hum dos pagamentos na maneira em cima limitada, hum certo lugar ou lugares convenientes de nos os dittos Acredores nc- meados, e a pena deeada huma das obrigacoesha de ier dobrada da Summa inteira inclufa nella mefma para fer a nos entregue e a cada hum de nos, os no- ilbs Teftamenteiros, ou Conftituintes. ao ou antes do proximo Seguinte data della ; por efta caufa Saiba-fe; que nos os dittos Acredores aqui cm baixo affinados, e cada hum de nos para fi em particular, e por feus Teftamenteiros, Adminiftra- dores e Conftituintes ao refpeito do emcima efpeci- iicado e declarado, por eftes prefentes de vontade propria confentimos, contratamos, prometemos e concordamos ao e com o ditto G. M. ou feus Tefta- inenteiros, Adminiftradores e Conftituintes* por ef- tes prefentes que nos os dittos Acredores, e cada hum de nos, os noflos Teftamenteiros, Adminiftradores e Conftituintes, aceitaremos do ditto G. M. dos feus Teftamenteiros, Adminiftradores e Conftituintes, to- das e cada huma de taes dividas e contias ciinheiro do ditto G. M, a nos e cada hum de'nos, de vidas e vencidas na virtude detaes^obrigac > oens,Seguranca «u Segurancas fobredittas para fe pagarem em tal niodo e maneira, e aos taes dias e tempos que aci- ma fe limitao e requerem. E alem diflfo, que nos os dittos Acredores e cada hum de nos, ou ncflbs e cada hum de noflos Teftamenteiros, Adminiftrado- res e Conftituintes, em conformidade ao entregue da ditta Obrigacao a nos e a cada hum de noflos Tef- tamenteiros, Adminiftradores, e Conftituintes ao cufto do ditto G. M. os feus Teftamenteiros, Admi- niftradores, e Conftituintes, SeJlaremos aflinaremos e na GRAMMA R. 10.9 Form as is above limited and declared, according to the true meaning of tbefe Prefents, he the faid G. M. fiiall and will, at, or before the ' be- come bound unto us the faid Creditors refpeciively.,. by one Obligation in due Form of Law to be made, including all and every one of the Payments in fuch: Sort as is above limited, at fbme convenient Place or Places by each of us the faid Creditors to be nominated and appointed, and the Penalty of every Obligation to be doubled the whole Sum in- cluded in the Condition of the fame to be delivered unto us,and every one of us,our Executors or Affigns.,. at or before the , next enfuing the Date- hereof: Know ye therefore, that we the faid Cre- ditors, whofe Names are here under-written, and every one of us for his own Part, and for his Execu- tors, Adminiftrators and Affigns, for the Conside- ration above fpecified and exprefted, do by thefe Prefents willingly confent, covenant, promife and agree to and with the faid G. M. his Execu- tors, Adminiftrators, and Affigns, to accept of the faid G. M. his Executors and Affigns, all and every of the faid Debts and Sums of Money by the faid G. M. unto us, and every one of us, owing,, and paying upon fuch Obligations, ArTu ranee and Affurances, as aforefaid, to be paid in fuch Man- ner and Sort, and at fuch Days and Times, as is above limited and required. And further, that , we the £aid Creditors, and every of us, our y and every of our Executors, Adminiftrators, and Affigns refpec&vely, upon the Delivery of the faid Obligation to us, and to every of us, and every of our Executors, Adminiftrators, and Affigns, (hall and will, at the Charge of the faid G. M. his Execu- tors,, Adminiftrators, and Affigns, feal, fubferibe^ and, in due Form of Law, deliver to the faid G. M. our fufficient general Rejeafe, for him, his Executors, Adminiftrators^ or A Signs, to bear Date and ■BB^—--^ ?M 110 PORTUGUESE na melhor forma e dereito entregaremos ao ditto G. M. a noifa geral e fufficiente defcarga, para fer rendida por elie o ditto G. M. ou feus Teftamentei- roSjAdminiftradores, e Conftituintes a data e a limita- ^ao antes do dia e data delta obrigacao nova ; em teftimunha do que a efla temos affinado e fellado ao dia e no anno, &c. A Letra de Cambio. Londres, por 300 Milreia. A VISTA defta minha primeira Letra de Cam- bio, pagara Vm. ao Senhor T. M. ou Ordem a Contia de trefentos Milreis em dinheiro corrente de Portugal, o Valor recebido do Senhor T. D. a tempo fara bom pagamento, lancando-a na conta como por avifo de Ao Senhor T. M. Mercador S. D. V. M. em Lifbba. T. M. Lisboa em do 1807, por 250/. Starl. A QUARENTA Dias Vifta defta minha Se- gunda Letra de Cambio, (a primeira nao fendo paga- da)pagara Vm. ao Senhor F.G.&Companhia,ou Or- dem a Summa de dozentas e Cinquenta libras Efter- linas em moeda corrente de Ingalaterra, o valor re- cebido do Senhor J. D. a tempo fara bom pagamento acentando-a na conta com por avifo de Ao Senhor T. B. Mercador. H. 5, em Londres. O GRAMMAR. Ill and Limitation, before the Day of the Date of this new Obligation to be made for the Debt. In Witnefs whereof, we have hereunto fet our Hands and Seals. Dated the 15th of May, 1808. Bills of Exchange. London, 5th of June 1808, for 300 Milreas. AT Sight of this my fir ft Bill of Exchange, pleafe to pay to Mr. T. M. or Order, the Sum of Three. Hundred Milreas in current Money of Portuga!, Value received of Mr. T. D. at Time, make good Payment, placing it to Account, as per Advice, from, SIR, To Mr. T. M. Merchant Yours, H S. in Lifhon. T. M. Lisbon, 7th of June 1S08, for 250/. Sterling. AT Forty days Sight, of this my fecond Bill of Exchange, my fir ft and third not being paid, pleafe to pay to Mr. F. G. and Company, or Order, the Sum of two Hundred and fifty Pounds Sterling, in current Money of England, Value re- ceived of Mr. J. D. at Time, make good Pay- ment, and place it to Account, as per Advice, from SIR, To Mr. T. B. Merchant Yours, H. S. in London, F. P, A 112 PORTUGUESE Oprote/io de buma Letra de Cambio. SAIBAM todas a quem efta prefente efcritu- ra tocar que aos do mez de, do an- no de ao requerimento de P./C. Mer- cador de eu M. N. Tabiliao de notas jurado e admitido pella autoridade del Pvei, &x. fui a caia da morada do Senhor T. B. fobre quem a Letra de Cambio emcima referida he faca- da, e moftrei a original ao ditto T. B. requerendo a fua accitacao della: o que me refpondeo que nao aceitaria a ditta L^tra por humas raioens que efcre- veile ao Senhor T. P. o facador ; pella qual rasao eu o ditto Tabiliao proteftei, por eftes prefentes protefto, tanto contra o ditto F. P. o facador como tambem contra o ditto T. B. fobre. quem e facada, demais contra todas as outras pefToas, Endorfadores, ou outras nella intereffados, por todos os Cambios, Recambios, danos e interefles quaefquer: Em pre- fen$a de H. J. S. T. chamados .por Teftemunhas a efte prefente a&o feito no meu Efcritorio em o dia e anno acima declarado. M. N. Notario Publico. Farias Formas de Recibos* Dinheiro recibido por inteiro. RECEB1 i Janeiro, do Senhor Thomas Crew, Seis Livras Sete Chilins Seis peniques por inteiro ■comprimento de todas as contas, por Dinhei7*o recibido por Conta de men Amo, RECEBI a 22 de Fevreiro, do Sr. Jonas Lee, quatro Livras e Cinco Chilins por Conta de meu dmo Moifcs Trull, por*. GRAMMAR. 113 A Protest of a Bill of Exchange. KNOW all Persons whom this present Writ- ing may concern, that the of in the Year at the Request of Mr. P. C. of Merchant, T. M. N. Public Notary, fworn and ad- mitted by Authority of his most sacred Majefly, did go to the Dwelling-houfe or Habitation of Mr. T. B. upon whom the above named Bill of Ex- change is drawn, and mewed the Original unto the faid Mr. T. B. demanding his Acceptance of the fame, who anfwered me' he fhould not accept the fame Bill, for fome Reasons he fhould write Mr. F.P. the Drawer , Wherefore Ithe faid Notary did pro- ted, and by these Prefents protefl, as well againft the faid F. P, the Drawer, as likewife againft the faid T. B. upon whom it is drawn ; 'as alfo againft all other Perfons, Inddrfers, or others therein con- cerned, for all Changes, Rechanges, Damages and Intereft whatsoever, in Prefence of H. J. and S. T. called for Witnesses to this present Acl, done in my Office in the Day and Year above men- tioned. M. N. Notary Public. Various Forms of Receipts. Money received in Full. RECEIVED lft January 1808, of Mr. Thomas Crew, Six Pounds Seven Shillings and Sixpence, in full of all Demands per For another s Use. RECEIVED 22d February, 1808, of Mr. Jonas Lee, Four Pounds Five Shillings, for the Use of my Matter Moses Trust, per * H Money ii| PORTUGUESE D Metro recebido em parte. RECEBI a 30 de Marco, 1808, do Sr. Jacinto Cook, Cinco Livras Cinco Chilins, em parte de doze Livras e dez Chilins, por Contade meu pai Antonio Truelove, por Dinheiro recebido em parte de Contas que rido ejiao ajujadas. RECEBI a 24 de Abril 1808, da Senhora Mar- tha Rich, por maos de Pedro Cornet, onze Livras a Conta, por Quando hum Rol ou Conta fe paga por inteiro. RECEBI a 15 de Mayo, 1808, acontia de efta Conta, por Quando fe paga dinheiro a Conta de hum rol. RECEBI a 6 de Junho, 1808, Sete livras em parte defta Conta, por Notas ou Obrigafoens quefaz hum Homem quando toma dinheiro emprestado. Londres, 4 de Junho, 1808. EU abaixo firmado prometo pagar ao Sr. E. D. Banqueiro do Thesouro de sua Majeftade do Excife, ou a iua ordem quarenta dias defpois da data defta obrigacao quatro centas e trinta Jivras por valor re- cebido £.430 p Chriftovio Wade. EU abaixo firmado prometo pagar ao Sr. Paulo Barker cavalheiro ou a fua ordem em fendo reque- rido trezentas, e noventa, e quatro livras dous Chi- lins GRAMMAR, lis Money received in Part. RECEIVED 30th of March, 1808, of Mr. James Cook, Five Pounds Ten Shillings, in Fart of Twelve Pounds Ten Shillings, for my Father Antho- ny Truelove, per Money received on Accounts unfetlled. RECEIVED 24th April 1808, of Mrs. Mar- tha Rich, by the Hands of Peter Cornet, Eleven Pounds on Account, per When a Bill is paid in Full. RECEIVED 15th May, 1808, the full Contents hereof, per When a Bill is paid in Pari, RECEIVED 26th June, 1808, Seven Pounds in Part hereof, per Promijfoiy Notes for a Mans Self. London, June 4th 1808. I PROMISE to pay to Mr. Edward Draper* Calhiet of his Majefty's Revenue of Excife, or Order> forty Days after Date, Four Hundred and Thirty Pounds. Value received £. 430 per Chriftopher Wade. I PROMISE to pay to Paul Barker, Efq. or Order, on demand, Three hundred and ninety- four Pounds, Two Shillings, and Six-pence, *H2 116 * PORTUGUESE lins e Seis peniques por valor recebido hoje 17 dc Julho, 1808. £. 394 2 6 per Philip Venham. EU abaixo firmado prometo pagar ao Sr. J. T. ou a fua ordem, quarenta e nove livras, e tres Chilins 6 mezes defpois da data defta obrigagao por valor recebido em verdade do que afignei hoje 24 de Agofto 1808. £. 49 3 N. B. Obfervefe que em notas ou obriga^oens fempre fe declara a foma recebida fern a qual nao §ao de nenhama for$a nem tern Authoridade. GRAMMAR. 117 Value received this 17th of July, 1808. £. 394 2 6 per Philip Venham. I PROMISE to pay to Mr. J. T. or Order, Forty nine Pounds Three Shillings, fix Months after Date Value received. Witnefs ray Hand this 24th of Auguft, 1808. per William Jones. £ 49 S N. B. Obferve in Promiflbry Notes that the words Value received are mentioned, or they are of no Force. H3 118 PORTUGUESE A NEW PORTUGUESE GRAMMAR. PART IV. CONTAINING Several ufeful and entertaining Pajfages, where- of the greatejl Part is collected from the bejl Portuguefe Writers, fuch as Andrade, Bar- ros, Camoens, Lobo, &c. ENTRE os bons ditos de Souzeni, poeta Perfi^ ano, se conta, que bebendo com outro poeta, seu amigo, certo ]icor,fe queixava, de que era mu- ito quente & dizendolhe, amigo, pobre de ti que daqui a poucos dias te farad beber no inferno agoas fulfureas, & ardentes, que te abrazarao as entran- has ; nao importa, replicou Souzeni ; baftara que me lembre algum dos teus verfos, que ellas fe farao mais frias, que neve. Catharine* GRAMMAR. 119 Catkarina Parthenay fobrinha da celebre Anna Parthenay, deu efta bella refpofta a Henrique IV. fa'iba vojfa mag (Ie que eu fiu muito pobre para fer fua conforte ; e que no mefmo tempo defcendo de humafamilia muito iliustre, para fer fua dam a, Huma Princeza Cathoiica, e de rara virtude vendo reduzido o Marichal de Saxonia as agonias da morte, diffe, que era para fentir o nao fe poder re- zar hum De prqfundis pella alma de hum que tinha feito cantar tantos Te Deum. A Dom Chrlftovao de Moura, Marquez de Caf- tello Rodrigo, e Vice Rev de Portugal por Dom Philipe Terceiro, hindo por huma fala do Paco de Lifboa, hum foldado honrado, que tinha bem fer- vido na India, lhedavahum memorial, e pedia, que fe lembraffe dos feus papeis, porque havia largo tempo, que andava pretendendo. Refpondeo-lhe o Marquez, que havia muita Gente para defpachar, e nao fe podiao defpachar todos com brevidade ; o foldado adiantando o pafso fe atravefsou diante fern defcompoficao, e fazendo parar o ViceRey Jhe difse com grande confianca;/f«&?r Dom Chriflovao defpdche Vs. os homensy e deixe a Gente. O Marquez aceitou o memorial, e o defpachou no mefmo dia. Mandandohum Fidalgo em Lifboa abrir em hu- ma ruaos Alicerces para fe fazerem humas cafas, fern licenca da camera, pafsando por alii o procuracior da cidade, poz pena aos officiaes, que nao trabal- hafsem na obra fern licenca dos Vereadores; e os officiaes dizendo-o ao Fidalgo mandou-lhes eile que nao deixaffem de trabalhar, e que nao fizeffem ca- fo do que dizia aquelle villao ruim ; tornando-o procurator da cidade por alii e achando os officiaes trabalhando, mandou que deflem com elles no tron- co -, e nao faltando quern lhe contaffe o que o Fi- dalgo differa, teve-o em olho 3 e no tempo que el- *H4 le 120 PORTUGUESE Je hia atraveflando pello Rocio para fua cafa, fahio- Ihe ao caminho a cavallo, e com huma lanca que levava* dando na fua fombra, Ihe dilfe : porque o que difsefies, foi em minha aufencia, dou em vof- fa fombra, fe mo tiveffeis dito no rofto, dera na voifa peffoa. Abou Han'tfah, o mais celebre doutor dos Muf- fulmanes, tendo recebido huma bofetada, diflfe ao que o iinha infultado : eu poderia vingarme, pa- gandovos na mefma moeda $ mas nao o quero fazer. Poderia accufarvos ao caiife : mas nao quero fer ao cufador. Poderia nas minbas orac.oens queixarme a Deos defla affront a ; mas nem i(fo quero fazer. Por fim poderia pedir a Deos, que fe quer no dja do juizo vos caftigaffe ; porem o mefmo fenhor me livre de femelbante penfamento ; mas antes, fe fuccedeffe que nefte inflante chegafle aquelle formidavei dia ; e fe a minha interceffao tiveffe alguma efficacia para com Deos, nao quizera por companheiro fe nao a vos para entrar no Paraifo. Que admiravel exem- plo para os Chriftaos aprenderem a perdoar as injii- rias ! De Peregrinacam. Paffadas quefe dao peregrinando, fao degraos para a cafa do defengano. Das fuasfontes sahem os rios muito pequenos, e crefcem correndo, e Jevao mares ao mar. Homens, que da fua terra nao sahem, sao navios, que acabao no eftaleiro. A fabedoda como vinda do ceo, anda nefle globo terreftre perigrina, nao he facil achala fenao peregrinando ; errando por efte mundo, fe apprende a nao cometter erros. Va- pores, que na terra eram lodo, apartados della fe fazam elirellas. Aos homens que querem luzir, deve a patria iervir, como aos planeras o horizonte, de berco, para enfayo do feu luzimento, longe do ponto ortivo, e remontados a mais alta regiao, apurao as influencias, e duplicaq as luzes. Que nome teriao hoje GRA M M A R. 121 hoje no mundo Socrates, Pithagoras, e Platao, e 011- tros r,abios da antiguidade, fe a modo de cepos, ou troncos, que aonde nafcerao fazem rais, e no feu primeirochaoapodrecem,naobufcaraoforadaPatria as noticias, que lhes faltavao. Nao fe ornara Her- cules com os defpojos dos Monftros, que domou, fe os nao fora bufcar pelo mundo ; a fua dilatada viagem devem os Argon an tas a conquifla do vello de ouroi Se nao correra Ulyjfes remotos climas, fora a Aioea de Ithaca de tpda a fua gloria o theatro. Homens perpetuamente caseiros, sao gallos, que fo fabem do feu poleiro. Sabios peregrinos, imitao no feu curso as fontes, que pafsando por veasde prata, ouro, efmeraldas, e faffiras, tomao, e comfigo levao a flor de fuas preciofas qualidades. Zombe embora Pin- tarco dos que louviio a peregrinacao, e diga, que fe parjacem com os que julgao as ellrellas erranres mais nobres, e felices, que as fixas. Nao a efcola mais util para a vida, que as muitas vidas ou modos de viver, que na variedade das Nacoens fe obferva. Vem fe muitas coufasnunca villas; aprendemfe mui- tas, que fe nao fabiao, faz fe o honsem capaz de toda a cafta de negocios, e folga de ver efte mundo, antes de fahir delle. Ate para os principes, que das fuas cortes fazem na terra o feu paraifo, born he que pe- regrinem, para conhecerem o mundo, que elles gqvernao. Os cqmmodos, as delicias, os obfequi- ps dos fubditos, podem dar a conhecer a bum homem, que nafceo foberano, mas com efte conhecimento, nao o fazem digno da foberaqia : fe nao fahira Al- exandre da fua Macedonia, nao paffara dos liniites de regulo e nao chegara a avaffailar o mundo. Do Tempo fniuro. Trate o homem do prefente, e nao quoira pene- trar no futuro ; quern de tao longe poem a mira, m\o pode dar no alvo. Muitas vezes bom he igno- rar o que ha de fucceder; porque fe for bem, a di- lacaq 122 PORTUGUESE lacao ha tormento ; e fe for mao, o trabalho he fem proveito. Para futuros, nao bafeguranca. AoEm- baixador, que na guerra movida por Link XL Rey de France, a Carlos Duque de Borgonba, procurava attrabir ao Emperador Frederico, com promerla de que fe repartjrem com elle os defpqjos, e os eftados, refpondeo o dito Emperador com efle apologo : tres cacadoies com a efperanca de apanbarembum urfo, fe comprometterao na reparticao delle. Chegados a boca da caverna, fabio a fera com tao grande impe- to, que bum dos cacadores botou a fugir, outro fubio a buma arvore, e o outro fe eftendeo no cbao fingindo-fe morto ; chegoufe o urfo a elle, poz lbe o focinbo no nariz, e nos ouvidos, e nao lbe conce- cendo folego, nem final de vida, o deixou por mor- to. O que eftava na arvore, difle ao companheiro ; homem, que te diffe o urfo, quando te fallou a puri- dade, com o focinbo nos ouvidos? Difleme que era mal feito, difpor da pelle, e carne do urfo, an- tes de o verem morto. Com iflo o Emperador deu a entender ao Embaixador, que era precifo apanhar primeiro ao Duque de Borgonha, que depois fe trataria de reparticao dos feus eflados. Dos fuccef- fos do tempo futuro, fo Deos tern certeza. Dos Ricos. Os Antigos Patriarcbas era5 ricos fo em gado. Os Banqueiros fao ricos emdinheiro. OsPrincipes sao ricos em terras, & Senhorios. Em lugares efte- reis, fem hervas, nem plantas produz a narureza o ouro, para mostrar que os amadores das riquezasnao tern fe, nem bonra. Os ricos facinorofos, que ain- da que celebrados nas biftorias, sao o opprobrio da fua pofteridade, poderiao ter boa fama, fe Jhes nao facilitara'efle metal a execucao de feus danados intentos. Em todas as idades forao as riquezas an- tagoniftas da vir'tude ; ellas inventarao os mais en- ormes delitos s ellas enfmarao os filhos a tirar a feus pais GRAM M A R. 123 pais a vida ; enfinarao os poderofos a opprimir os innocentes, arruinar as familias, faquear os templos, & defpir os altares; ellas induzirao os amigos a que faltaffem a fe, incitarao os vaffallos a negar aos prin- cipes a obediencia, a os libidinofos derao meyos para violar a pudicicia das donzellas, e eftragar a honra dos maridos : finalmente ellas ainda que boas para a vida civil, sao caufa de todos os males ; e potto que os sabios fe fouberao aproveitar dellas, o cobica, e o mao ufo das mefmas, encherao o mundo todo de criminofos. Homens ricos ordinariamente fe perdem, por terem muito, e faberem pouco ; def- prezao o faber, porque Ihes parece, que para todo o genero de vida, Ihes bafla o ter. A Ariftiv lpa perguntou Dionyfio, porque razao os filofofos Itq- quentavao as cazas dos ricos, e nao os ricos as dos filofofos. Refponaeo Ariftippo, que os filofofos conhecem o que Ihes falta, e os ricos ignorao o de que necefsitao. Senhores ricos, e filofofos pobres, nao podem fazer coufas grandes, porque a eftes Ihes falta dinheiro, e aquelles efpirito. Dizia Diogenes, que muitos ricos sao como as plantas, que nafcem em defertos, e defpenhadeiros, porque dos frutos, que ellas dao, nao comem os homens, mas corvos, bilhafres, e feras ; tambem as riquezas de muitos nao fao para fugeitos benemeritos, mas para cho- carreiros, efpadachins, rufioes, e meretrizes. De Liber alidade, A liberalidade he huma virtude moral que fabe difpender as riquezas em bom ufo. Ariftotles diz, que he virtude, que com o dinheiro, e fazenda fe mo- flra benefica aos homens. Segundo a defini^ao dos filofofos modernos, he virtude moderada do affecto humano no dar, e no receber riquezas humanas, uni- camente pelo motivo do honefto. Na liberalidade nao fao a£tos incompativeis o dar e o receber, nem liberal fe ha de envergonhar de receber ; por- que 124 PORTUGUESE que dar fempre, e nunca receber, be caminbo cer- to para em breves espacos nao ter mais que dar. Brevemente fe fecaiiao os.rios, feo mar dando fem- pre do feu, nao recebefle do alheio, mas dando, e recebendo, fe faz o circulo de perpetuo movi- mento, com que fe fuftenta o mar e fe fertiliza a terra. O liberal nao da para receber, mas recebendo para dar, da no mefmo tempo que recebe, receben- do de huns com a mao, e dando aos outros com at- tencao. Pintarao os antigos a liberalidade em flgura de molher, com a cornucopia em buma mao, e bum compaflb na outra. Na cornucopia llgnificavao a inclinacao em dar ; e no compaflb denotavao asme- didas, que a prudencia ba de guardar nas dadivas. Dar com exceffo, be extinguir a liberalidade ; o rnuito oleo apaga a luz; conferva fe efta virtude com efFufao moderada ; dar pouco a pouco, e em diverfos tempos, be faborear o gofto de dar ; quern da com attencao, efta com animo de dar mais. Nao he bem fecbar a area de forte que fe nao poffa abrir ; nem convem abriila de maceira, que fe nao torne a fecbar. Chuvas de ouro sao farguezas de Deofes ; ainda afimi andou Jupiter moderado nefta preciofa profuzao ; porque nao cabe de pancada a agua da cbuvamas a gota, e gota fe diftribue. Porem ao rigor delta ley nao eftao obrigados os Principes, que tern muito que dar ; porque o feu melhor the- fouro he o coracao dos fubditos ; tanto mais fe aug- roenta efre erario, quanto mais o da fazenda real fe defpeja. Repartindo Alexandre com os Macedo- nios os feus dominios, fe abrio caminho para con- quirlar o mundo. Principalmente com litteratos, e homens doutos foi liberalifiimo. A Ariftoteles em remuneracao do trabalbo que tomou em indagar a natureza ; e propriedades dos animaes, deo de hum jacto o valor de quatrocentos e oitentamil escudos. De Cyro, cognominado o Grande, efcreve Atbeneo, que a Pytbareo, feu domeftico, flzera bum donati- ve de fete cidades. De Julio Cezar efcreve Seneca, que GH A M M A R. 125 que dasfuas victorias nao queria outro proveito, que o poder, e o gofto de difiribuir com os feus folda- dos os defpojos. Em nenhuma coufa mais fe pare- cem os monarcas com Deos, que em dar ; celebra Cafliodoro o liberalidade de hum Principe, que pa- ra alegrar o povo, nao reparava em fazer gaftos ex- orbitant^. Efte genero de larguezas nao arruina o eftado, porque alivia o povo. Nem eftas devem fer eftrago : fo Deos, cujos thefouros fao inexhauf- tos, pode dar fempre, e a todos. Entre os antigos Ro- manos era inviolavel a ley, que mandava que nin- guem gaftaffe em fefta publica, fern prover do ne- ceffario os pobres do feu bairro : tomavao por a- fronta, que andaffem hu»s homens por portas, quan- do eftavao outros brindando nas mefas. A efte propofito dizia Platao, que na cidade em que muito pobre mendiga, ha muito ladrao que furta. Mas para que he dar regras, e ajuntar documentos, para huma virtude, que a mofina, ou a cobica defterrou do mundo. Hoje a liberalidade he como aquelles rios que fumidos na terra, nunca mais sao vistos. Da Liberdade. A liberdade he hum eftado natural, no qual tern o homen todos os movimentos da fua vontade inde- pendentes, elivres. Efta he a liberdade da alma, a que nem as influencias dos aftros, nem a prefciencia divina, nem os divinos decretos, nem os amea^os dos tirannos neceffitao a querer, ou nao querer ; porque Deos a deo ao homem, com livre alvedrio, e poder abfoluto, para obfervar, ou quebrantar fua divina lei. Ocorpo pelo contrario he fugeito a todo o ge- nero de cativeiros. Forma fe na prifao do ventre materno, apenas nafcido, flea en^ollo, e prefo nas faxas; livre defta efcravidao cahe na da puericia fugeito aos acoutes; nos conflns da adolefcencia, efp^rao por elletirannicas paixoes,e crueis appetites pari 126 PORTUGUESE para o defpojar do refto da liberdade ; cada arte, ou cada fciencia a que fe applica, he hutna carga de re- gras, huma oppressao de preceitos. Em idade mayor ; achaques, e doengas o encravao na cama, donde cahe para a cova, em hum cativeiro que nao tern refgate. Ainda affim, no meyo de todas as penfoes, e prisoes da fua trifle vida, logra o homen no feu trato huma certa liberdade, daqual ninguem fe quer privar, por nao viv6r violentado. Ate os animaes, as feras, e os mais vis infectos, procurao defender, e confervar a liberdade, que lhes deo a natureza. Finalmente os elementes, ainda que infen- siveis, fe esforeao para veneer os obftaculos, que os cativao : voara o fogo hum monte, por nao flcar conftipado namina; indignada do freyo de hum dique trefbordara a agua, e alagarahumaprovincia : impaciente de claufura de lugares fubterraneos, aba- lara o ar hum reino, e com horriveis tremores abi ira a cidades inteiras profundas fepulturas. Nao he logo maravilha, que facao os homens tantos ex- tremos para confervarem a liberdade propria do feu eftado. Diogenes aquelle famofo defprezador de quanto cubi^a a ambi^ao dos homens, para fe ver livre das fugei^oes defte mundo, fe revolvia no feu dolio, como planeta de dirTerente esfera, e tendo valor para recufar a gra9a de Alexandre, nao teve animo para fe fugeitar ao jugo da Corte. Nao quere- mos lenhor, por brando que elle feja, (dizia Demof- thenes) receoso da domini^ao da Antipater. A liberdade he hum bem que fe nao deve perder fe nao com o fangue. Nao he fenhor de fi, quern a outrem fugeitou a lingua. Hum fo homem, que queira, e faiba fallar a tempo, faz callar, e tremer a muitos ^ pode fer caufa da confervac^ao de hum reino, que o iilencio- perderia. Nefte perigo eileve o imperio Romano, reinando Tiberio, tempo em que (fegundo efcreve TacitoJ o fallar era delito. Nao tern outro agoute as culpas dos grandes, que o de huma lingua, generofamente folta, Abftenhafe de obrar mal, quem GRAMMA R. 127 quern quizer que fe falle bem. A verdade muda introduz a tirannia. Teve graca huma 11109a, filha de certo bomem rico de Lifbba, a qual perguntada, porque nao queria c afar com hum fugeito, que a pedia a feu pay fern dote ; difie que por nao perder a liberdade, que as outras mulheres tern, quando tendo dirTerengas com feus maridos, podem com razao dizer, que os comprarao com o que ellas lhes derao em cafamento. Das Dem&ndas* Litigios fao chagas do eftado, e minas das familias.. Qualquer demanda he huma furia infernal, qua tudo defcompoem, e tira a todos do feu lugar cultura da terra tira ao lavrador, do commercio ao mercador, do altar ao facerdote. Litigios sao os filhos do Chaos e da noite, tudo nelles sao con- fusoes, e trevas. Sao hum funefto compofto de todos os males , tern na ira inceudios, no rancor veneno, no dolo ciladas, na vinganga rayos. Diante das demandas anda o dezejo da fazenda alheya ; aos lados a falfldade, o engano, a mentira, a perfidia: vem atraz o arrependiaiento, e a pobreza, com pes de chumbo fe ha de entrarem litigios, e fugir delles com azas de aguia, fempre procurao os bons politi- cos atalhar os litigios, e abafallos no feu nafcimento. Com efte intento fizerao os Cyrenios huma ley, pela qual os homens litigiofos e demandiftas erao cha- mados para diante dos Juizes, chamados Ephoros, e efte depois de os multar, os declaravao infames. Dizia Catao, que para, bem fe haviao encher as au- diencias, de eitrepes, e abrolhos, para as partes nao irern pleitear fern perigo.de quebrar as pernas. Os antigos Romanos lavantarao na fua mayor audiencia a eftatua de Marfyas, com huma corda na mao dan- do a entender,que quern fern razao movefle demanda a alguem, encorreria na mefma pena que o dito Marfyas, 2 quern por contender com Apollo teme- rariamente 128 PORTUGUESE rariamente fobre as ventagens da mufica, os juizes mandarao dar garrote. Antigamente os juizes dei- xavao pendurados ern hum prego todos os- pleitos problematicos, ou feitos, em que havia razoes para julgar pro e contra. For iflb Claudio Henrique, julgador Parifienfe, em huma das fuasoracoes foren- fez traz o cazo da mulher de Smyrna, que por haver dado peconha a feu marido, os Areopagitas, feus juizes, a abfolverao para cem annos, por quanto clle mefmo feu marido havia morto hum filho do primeiro cafamento da dita mulher, e na caufa intentada havia compenfacao de delito. Toda a pefioa, que fe poem a litigar, fe engolfa em hum mar de provas, futilezas, e trapacas, que tern por praya, e porto, a pobreza, e a morte. O peyor he,, que nefte conflicte, o gatlo he das partes ; e o pro- veito dos advogados. Em quanto com asraas pelejao os ratos, vem o minhoto, e papa tudo. A rapoza que vio o leao, e o urfo canfados de pelejar fobre o logro de humapreza,ainda quenaturalmentemuito timida, fe foi chegando, e levou comsigo a materia da con- tenda. As ruinas de dous enriquecem o terceiro* Da Lifonja. A lifonja he huma nimia complacencia, eafTectada flneza em louvar as prendas, obras, ou palavras alheyas. Mai fuave, doce veneno, Yicio cortesao, brando verdugo da verdade, efcandalo dos ammos generofos, e fo de efpiritos humildesindigna eftima- <^ao. O boy, ruftico quadrupede, permitte que o ecfeitem ; o leao, generofa fera facode de fi os enfei- tes da cama. Compoz Ariftobulo hum livro, cheyo de lifcnjas, fobre a Victoria que Alexandre alcancara del rey Poro ; tomou o magnanimo principe o livro, e larcando o ao mar, diffe; merece" o author feme- Ihante Caftigo. Tambem da fua corte lancou Alex- andre ao fan.ofo efcuhor Staficrates, que fe orTere- cera a fazeiihe de todo o monte Athos huma eftatua. Notavel artifice he o liioi jeiro, para todas as caras tem GRAMMAR. 129 tern cartas, e calcados para todos os pes ; mas todas as fuas obras fao pofticas, e todo o feu artificio fingimento. A fua mayor deftreza efta em confor- mar o som da fua lyra com a picada da Tarantula. Com efta aflbnancia, ou confonancia fe fez Sejand tao absoluto fenhor da vontade de Tiberio, que fendo efte Principe para todos diffimulado, fo era facil, e fincero para Sejano. O Lifonjeiro, para viver a fombra do feu Principe, fe faz do feu Principe fom- bra, que affim como a fombra he bugio dp corpo, anda com elle, e com elle para ; com elle fe deita, e fe Ievanta ; fe tern corcova, fe encurva ; e fe coxea, claudica; affim para o lifonjeiro he perfei^ao arreme- dar ate os defeitos do principe. Na corte de Anti- gono, que tinha o collo torto, os cortesaos fe flzerao torcicollos. Efta depravada imitacao do Principe he ruina da monarchia, porque he veneno da verdade. Nao tern efta mayor inimigo, que o falfete do inte- reffe, que ordinariamente faz o compaffo na mufica dos palacianos. Pinta-fe a lisonja em figura de mu- Iher tocando huma frauta, com hum veado aos pes, adormecido ao fom defte instrument©; no veado fe reprefenta o Principe, que vencido da fuavidade da lifonja, fecha os olhos a verdade. Com cem olhos guardava Argos a lo, convertidaem vacca, comecou 'Mercurio a tocar tarn fuavemente, que os cem olhos de Argos fe fecharao, e teve Mercurio poder para lhe tirar com a vacca a vida. A's falfas adulac.oes dos Aulicos de Vitellio attributa a hiftoria a cegueira do orgulho, e crueldade ciefte Principe. E'ra VefpafU ano de natural brando, e benigno, com lifonjeiras falfidades o induzirao feus cortesaos a carregar de tributos o povo. Finalmente muitas vezes mayores danos faz a lingua do lisonjeiro, que a espada do inimigo. JDa Vinganga. Toda a vingar^a particular* e privada,he ufurpa- cao do poder, e da juftica publica, e divina. Des- * I prez.ao ^^^^■^ m POllTUGUES E prezaonobres animos as injurias de fogeitos vulgares. Nao fez Achilles caso das calumnias de Therfites ; Filippe de Macedonia, e Cefar forao infensiveis aos tiros da maledicencia. Zombou a Agui de Efopo da peca, que lhe fez o rato ; pareceolhe-indigno da fua ira, bicho ncjento. O vingarse nao he reftaurar o creditOjhe confirmarfe defacreditado. Com feri- das alhevas nao fe curao as proprias, com fangue nao fe efmaltao injurias. Enfurecerfe aos defacatos de hum furiofo, he fazerfe efpelho da fua braveza ; rebater calumnias, he fazerfe ecco de aggravos. Se a cada bataria de ondas respondera o penhafco com huma pedra, brevemente fe deftruiria o penhafco. Anelarvingancas,he teraberta, efrescahuma ferida, a qual efquecida, eftaria encourada. Injurias lem- bradas fe perpetuao, porque fe fazem hereditarias, ellas sao a unica coufa, que nefle mundo o tempo nao gafta ; enterrados renafcem, semelhantes aos rios, que depois de correr debaixo da terra, tornao a inundar os campos. Os que com moftras de ami- fade disfarcao o dez6jo de fe vingar, sao como a nuvem, que vio o profeta Ezequiel ; era cercada de hum circulo de ouro, mas trazia dentro em fi rayos, e tormenras. A mais nobre vinganea he moftrar o offendido, que fe pode vingar do ofFensor ; o nao vingarfe, he moftrar, que nao fentio a offenfa ; e nao fentilla,' he prova de animo invulneravel. A im- paffibilidade he attributo divino. As mulheres sao vingativas, porque sao frageisj a fua fenfibilrdade he demoftracao da fua fraqueza. Da Loquacid&de. Ha hornens, que nao viv£ndo de ar, como oca. malconte, continuamente tem a boca aberta, edella cahe hum diluvio de palavras, que inunda os ouvi- dos, e afloga a genre. Quando ha trovoadas, em- mud^cem as raas ; efies sao raas, que em charcos de pantanofas parlendas atroao o mundo. Huns meti- dos a politicos, tudo reduzem a razoens de eftado ; chovem GRAMMAR. 131 cbovem da sua boca Democracias, Aristocracias, Oligarchias, Ochlocracias, Capitolios, e Areopagos, Triumviratos, e Dictaturas, Plebiscites, e Senatus- consultos, Leys Municipaes, e Castrenses ; compa- raoo governo. dos Cesares com o dos nossos Princi- pes, as modernas com as antigas republicas, os cos- tumes de hoje com os dos antepassados, e com in- fructuosa navegacao correndo mares de sabedoria, ventilao quest5es, sem dar fundo as materias. Ou- tros presumidos de geographos, sem tropecar cor- xem (co mo diz o vulgo) as sete partidas do mundo ; puxao por zonas, e remotos climas, acarretao isth- mos, e peninsulas, terras arcticas, antarcticas, e au- straes incognitas, e quando parece que poem fim, pegao em longitudes, e com latitudes se estendem. Que diremos do poeta loquaz, mimoso das Musa?, e fanfarrao do Parnasso ? A qualquer phrase poe- tica, sente cocegas. nos ouvidos, e nao ouve fallar em verfos, que logo os nao traga todos a balla. Hex- ametros, e Pentametros, lam bos, Saphicos, Ado- nicos, Chcriambicos ; da regras, e preceitos para Coplas Reaes, e Redondilhas, para Sonetos, enca- deados,e retrogados ; allega com poetas nacionaes e eftranhos ; amontoa todos os termos da E'pica, Lyrica, Dramatica, Dithyrambica ; a ouvillo bebe de hum gole toda a Hipocrene, e procura efgotar de hum jacto a Caballina fonte. Compara Plutar~ cos aos loquazes com vafos vafios, que foao mais que os cheyos. A hum grande fallador, que depois de huma larga pratica pedio a Ariftoteles, que Ihe perdoafle a moleftia ; refpondeo o filofofo : nao tenho que perdoar, que eu nao tomei fentido no que di- feftes. Careon, homem loquaz, pedindo a Isocra- tes, que lhe enfinafle Rhetorica, pedio Ifocrates dobrado falario : e perguntando Careon a razao das duas pagas, refpondeo Ifocrates : quero huma para enfinarte a fallar, e quero outra, para enfinarte a callar. Grandes falladores fao bespas, que todo o dia eftao zunindo, e nao fazern mel nem cera. Ho- * I 2 mem 132 PORTUGUESE mem lequaz (dizia Solon) he cidade sem muros 7 casa fem porta, navio fern piloto, e cavallo femfre- yo. Em cavallo defbocado ninguem fe poem fem medo, fem pre fe deve temer boca defenfreada. Foi tomada a cidade de Athenas, e deftruida por Silla, porque na loja de hum barbeiro os efpias defte general ouvirao particar na parte mais fraca da dita cidade. Da Malediccncia. O dizer mal, he propio dos que nao podem fazer mal. De todos diz mal Pasquinho, que nao tern p6s nem maos, e ainda que eftivera inteirico, por fer eftatua, e flgura immovel, nao pode fazer mal. Dizem que o Papa Adriano VI. Ihe mandara di- zer, que o faria lanc,ar no rio Tybre ; refpondeo Pafquinho : Tambem debaixo da agua canta a laa. Nem esta fora de razao, chamarse raa o mal- dizente, porque sempre a sua voz he o rouco som de hum charco ; e assim como as raas, que infestarao a corte de Pharao, sujarao a prata, o ouro, e as mais ricas alfayas de palacio, assim se pagao os maldi- zentes a coroa, e tiaras. No proximo nao enxergao os olhos do maldizente se nao defeitos. O alvo das seus intentos he denigrir, procurar ter fama, infa- mando, funda em detracc.ao o seu augmento, c de vituperios espera louvor. O maldizente he o tigre da republica : nao sofre armonias deencomios alheyos ; a sua Jingua he cauda de cscorpiao, sem- pre em acto de picar ; sabe achar cicatriz, aonde nao houve chaga ; nao poupa vivos, nem mortos, •nem a amigos, muito menos a inimigos ; he ver- dugo da reputacao, e homicida do credito ; semea confusoens, e colhe discofdias. Notavel defeito he este da lingua humana, para os applausos muda, para vituperios eloquente. Tcda a antiguidade nos deo so treV, ou quatro bons panegy'ricos, todas as satiras parecerao excellentes. Aos seus piques deve GRAMMAR. 133 deve Tacito a fua eftima^o ; muito mais agrada, quando moteja de Tiberio, do que quando celebra a German ico ; final mente todos o gabao, porque nunca gabou a ninguem. Mas a virtude, ainda que perfeguida de maledicos, nao defconfia. Nenhum homem grande, quando calumniado, fe reputa pequeno. Tres grandes Emperadores, Theodofio, Arcadio, e Honorio, pai, filho, e neto, fizerao hurna lei, aqual manda, que os que cegos da paixao dizem mal, fejao perdoados, porque a fua maledicencia, fe procedeo de poucojuizo, merece defculpa ; fe de furor, piedade : fe de malinidade, efquecimento e defprezo, * Proiogo de Jacinto Freyre de Andrade. Sao os prologos hum anticipado remedio aos a- chaques dos Jivros, porque andao fempre de com- panhia os erros, e as defculpas. Eu por hora me defvio do caminbo trilhado, nam quero pedir per- dao de nada: quern achar que dizer, nao me perdoe, (nem fera neceffario encomendalo.) Se me notarem o livro de roim, nao negarao que he breve, e efcreto em lingoa Fortuguefa, que tantos engenhos modemos, ou temem ou defprezao, como filhos ingratos ao primeiro leite, fervindo fe de vozes eftrangeiras, por onde paflarao como hofpedes, fern refpeito aquellas veneraveis Cans, e ancianida- de madura de noffa linguagem autiga. Efcrevi efta hiftoria com verdade de memorias fieis, fern que a penna, ou o affeclo alteraffe o menor accidente. Antes que efte papel fabiffe dos borroens, fei que muitos o taxarao de efcaffo, dizendo, que houvera de dilatar a hiftoria com allufoens, e paflbs da efcri- iura, que o fizefTem mais crecido ; efles compram os livros pello pezo, nam pello feitio : da mais que nam permittem, tarn licencioza penna as leys da hi- Itoria. Outros queriam que me valeffe do eftrepito de vozes novas, a que chamam cultura, deixando * 13 a es- 134 P OR TUG UESE e eftrada limpa por caminhos fragozos, e trocando com eftimacao pueril, o que he melhor, pello que mais se ufa. Mas como nam determine! lifongear a goftos eftragados, quiz antes com a fmgeleza da verdade fervir ao aplaufo dos melhores, que a fama popular, e errada. Prologo do Conde da Ericeira aofeu Portugal Rejlaurado. Efta ceremonia, leitor, de efcrever Prologo, mais por efcufar a cenfura de que falto a ley de dar principio com elle a huma hiftoria tao grave, que por me parecer a ley precifa, me refolvo a obfer- vala: porque difcurfado o frm com que fe eftabe- leceo, avalio por inutil elle trabalho, entendendo que na efcolha da hiftoria, e no acerto do efcrevella consifte toda a fortuna dos authores. Porque nem a arnizade dos leitores pode encobrir os defeitos do eferitor, nem efcurecerlhe os acertos o odio ; e entre eftes dous extremos, (ordinariamente viciofos) fe le- vanta o tribunal da juftica dos deilntereflados, por independentes, ou por nao conhecidos, que coftu- mao dar ou louvor por premio aos benemeritos, e a cenfura por caftigo aos culpados. Huma das may ores emprezas do mundo he a re- folucao de efcrever huma hiftoria : porque alem de innumeravel multidao de inconvenientes, que he neceffario que fe vencjio, e de hum trabalho ex- ceffivo, que he precifo, que fe fuppere ; no mefmo tempo em que fe pretende lograr o fru£to de tantas diligencias, tendo fe vencido formar o intento, ven- eer a licao, aflentar o eftilo, colher as noticias, lan- car os borradores, tiralos em limpo, conferilos, e apuralos,quando quern efcreve fe anima na emprenfa do livro que efcreveo ao porapofo titulo de author, entao comeca fer reo, e reo julgado com tao ex- cefsiva tirannia, que tendo lingua para fallar de tan- tas pefsoas, como sao as que comprehende qualquer volume GRAMMAR. 135 volume, a nao pode ter para deixar de fer condem- nado fern fer ouvido. Julgo por muito errada a opiniao commua, que affenta, que a hiftoria be pa- ralelo da pintura : porque he tanto mais privilegiado o pintorqueo eferitor,que teve lugar Ape]les,pon- do em publico huma figura que havia pintado, de 3he emendar a roupa, que hum artifice dellas lhe condemnou por imperfeita, e de caftigaf o ouzadia de outro, que nao fendo pintor fe attreveo a ar- guirlhe o periil da figura. Nao he concedida aos efcritores tanta liberdade : porque no mefmo ponto que os fineres do prelo acabarao de fellar a hiftoria que efcreverao, logo perderao toda a ac^ao de emen- dala, e na difficuldade de fatisfazer a hum mundo de juizos diverfos, fica provado o defangano, de que nao pode haver hiftoria bem avaiiada de todos. O fol por que cofldma tao repetidamente offerecerfe do berco do oriente ao tumulo do occafo aos olhos do univerfo, fe ex poem a cenfura dos que fern penetrar a majeftade do feu refplandor, e a utilida.de dos feus rayos, fugeitando a razao ao appetite, huns o con- demnao de claro quando e calma os aperta, outros de efcuro quando o frio os afflige, fern reparar que os latidos do cao celefte, que amedrentao na cani- cula os vapores, de que as nuvens no inverno fe for- mao, fao, e nao o fol,culpados no rigor da calma, como as nuvens na afpereza do frio. Que importa, que a verdade da hiftoria, epureza do eftilo aformemcomo o fol perfeita, fe os leytores pretendem avaliala como querem, e nao como merece. A eftas, e outras muitas difficuldades fe fujeita quern fe refolve a efcrever huma hiftoria que pela opiniao commua dos hiftoriadores coftuma fer fe feculos paffados, em que mais defarTogados os ani- mos entrao adefcubrir a verdade dos fucceflbs. Po- rem quaes ferao os inconvenientes, quaes perigos quafi invenciveis, a que fe arrqja quern tomou a te meraria refolucao de imprimir em fua vida a hiftoria do feu tempo. Em verdade que ate imagi- * 1 4 nadc 136 PORTUGUESE nado faz horror efte intento: porque oppoftas, e incompativeis as obrigacoens forcofas aos rifcos ma* rjifeftos, nao parece polTivel, apurados, deftilarem hum compofto profeito ; pois faltar a verdade flea fendo infamia do author, defcobrilla nas accoens defacertadas, cahe em defcredito dos comprehendi- dos. Encarecer os benemeritos, fera inveia dos in- dignos : louvar os viciofos, opprobrio dos beneme- ritos : contar todosos fueceffos, he empenho inven- eivel : callar alguns pode fer queixa dos intereffados. Nos cafos grandes, e ainda nos inferiores ajuftaremfe todos em que fao verdadeiramente contados, difficul- tofamente fe podera confeguir: porque eu experi- mented achando-me em quatro batalhas, e em outros encontros, com muitos rail homens, nao se defcobrirem dous que concord affem no mefmo faclo ; e tenho alcancado que a razao defta variedade vem a fer, que como hum fo homem nao he poflivel afli- flir a todos os fuecetfbs de hum confliclo, entenden- do erradamente que cahe no defcredito de nao ter parte em tantas accoens diverfas, todas as que nao pode alcan^ar com a vifta defacreditapor fabulofas. Se pois me nao foi poffivel contar fern contradicao em varias converfacoens hum fo fuccefTo na prefenca dos que fe acharao nelle ; como poderei confeguir facilmente efcrevendo tantas batalhas, fitios, intre- prezas, e encontros fuccedidos a valerofa nacao Portugueza per efpaco de vinte e oito annos nas quatro partes do mundo, julgarem todos a narracao das viclorias por verdadeiras, e por certos os motivos das emprezas militares, e politicas, feguindofe ordi- nariamente defte erro de difcurfos, e falta de noticias huma queixa perpetua contra quern efcreve, e em alguns hum odio eterno, que muitas vezes fe def- affoga pelos caminhos de 'delirio. A q^Qj pois, la- biryntho de efiradas confufas, a elie encanto de fan- tasmasdisformes me perfuadio a arrojarme o entran- havel amor- da minha patria, dequefe compoz com p fangue a natureza, fundado no jufto temor de que nao G RAM- MAR. 137 nao occultMem mortaes, as urnas do efquecimento, asac^oens gloriofas de tantos heroes excel lentes: ao crescentandofe e estas razoens outro mayor eftimulo, que foi avaliar como obrigacao precifa defcobrir os motivos do principio, e remate defta hiftoria de Portugal reftaurado, que me animei a efcrever, pois como Alpha, e Omega, divino fymbolo dos Gregos, forao verdadeiramente os dous polos (fe unidos pela natureza, pelos accidentes diverfos) que me perfua- diraq a abracar efte grande empenho, pretendendo moftrar claramente ao mundo, affim a jufti'ca com que o Sereniffimo Rey D. Joao IV. de immortal memoria fe reftituio a Coroa de Portugal, como a jufta razao com que o excellente Principe D, Pedro, fegundo Tito, delicia dos homens, fern mais caufa, que a defenfa, confervacao, efeguranca defte reyno, tomou fobre feus generofos hombres o governo del- le, julgando o por menos pezado que a coroa, que com tanta admiracao dos meftres da politica, des- preza. Nao me obrigando, fo o zelo da honra de patria a defcobrir os fundamentos de tao grandes fucceflbs, fe nao tambem a feguranca da minha opi- riiao que amei fempre mais que a propria vida; por- que como logrei a fortuna de ter na guerra parte nas mayores vi£torias, que fe confeguirao nefte reyno, jera neceftario moftrar que a guerra foi jufta, para que as accoensfejulgaiTem porvirtuofas. E como da mefmaforte me fuccedeo ferhum dos que aiiiftirao as heroicas refolucoens do Principe D. Pedro, era pre- cifo manifeftar, que forao juftificadas, para me livrar de calurnnia dos que fern noticias verdadeiras difcur- iaflem afataiidade del Rey D. Afibnfo VI. fern enten- derem que foi depbfto pelos tres eftados do reyno por incapaz do governo delle, e por inutil para a fuccefiao da coroa. Alem deltas tao urgentescaufas, nao forao menos poderofas para me levar a efte intenro, aiTim a magoa (como j a' re fieri) de ver que infenfivelmente hia o tempo confumindo a noticia de tantas accoens heroicas 138 PORTUGUESE heroicas, por fa] tar quern fe refolvefle a efcrevelJas, porq.ue fo ate o anno de 16.6$. que efcreveo com erraclasnoticias Joao Bautifta Viraugua Venezianoos fucceifos delte reyno, e o conde Mayolino nas fuas guerras civis, fe acha memoria delles. Como a pe- na da pouca verdade com que todos os authores Caftelhanos, que fe animarao a fallar na guerra fuccedida entre as duas coroas a referirao : porque nao fo tratarao de encobrir com ficcoens a grandeza das noffas victorias, fenao que cahirao na ignoran- cia do errar os tempos das campanhas, preferindo as fucceffivas as antecedentes, os nomes aos fitios das provincias onde acontecerao, e aos cabos, e officiaes que fe acharao nellas, feguindo o mefmo delicto que condenarao a bum author Francez, que imprimindo bum livro, em que afHrmava, que Fran- cifco I. Rey de Franca nao fora prezo na batalha de Pavia. E perguntandolhe a razao porque calumni- ava a fua verdade, lancando ao mundo aquella men- tira, refpondeo, que nos feculos futuros quern leiTe a fua biftoria, e a dos Caftelhanos, daria credito a opiniao a que fe affeic^arTe. Eftes forao os motivos que me perfuadirao tao difficultofo empenho, ani- mandome juntamente a tomaUo por minba conta as muitas circunftancias, que me babilitarao ; porque alem de herdar de antigos, e valerofos avos fer a verdade alma da vida, como he da hiftoria, tive a fortuna de me criar no paco com o foberano, e eiclarecido Principe D. Tbeocloiio, affiftindolhe continuamente aprendendo com elle a primeira gra- matica e a licao das hiftorias. Nefle. tempo fiz me- moria das primeiras politicas com que el Rey D. Joao deo principio ao governo defte reyno. De quinze annos comecei a fervir na guerra, em que pailei por todos os poftos tao vagarofamente como qualquer foldado da fortuna, e cbeguei ao mayor emprego de governador das armas. Acheime em todas as occafioens grandesdaprovincia de Alen- teja GRAMMAR. 139 tejo do anno de 1650 ate a batalha de Montes Claros, e fiii voto em todos os negocios de mayor confideracao. A guerra das provincias aonde nao affifii, e a das conquiftas confer* com os cabos e officiaes qi e fe acharao em todas as emprezas, de- pois de exanvnar os papeis mais intimos em que a curiofidade de varias peiloas fe havia exercitado. As negocea^oens fora do reyno, que tocarao a dif- ferentes iugeiios, efcrevo por informacio de cada hum delles, e pelos Hvros em que os embaixadores lanc^rao as embaixadas. Os mais negocios pelos documentos das fecretarias de eftado, e guerra, buf- cando em todos, alem deftas noticias, a feguranc.a de teliimimhas defmtereffadas, que tiverao fem de- pendencia parte em todos os fucceffos politico?, e militares. Dez annos de trabalho me levou efte primeiro volume; no difcurfo defle tempo nao houve peffoa douta ou intelligente que fe animafle a examinal- lo, a quern o nao entregaffe, fugeitando me a qual- quer cenfura que fe me apontava, e emendando o que fe me advertia, ainda que foffe contra o pro- prio entendimento, entendendo, que como efta hi- lioria nao ha de fer fo fatisfaejio do meu juizo, fe nao dos alheyos, iico melhor livrado em ter por de- fenfores os -que a emendarem. He documento, que felicemente devo ao fobre todos prudentiilimo dif- curfo do Principe noffo fenhor. Antes que come- e.affe a escrevella, paffei por efpac,o de dous annos a$ hiftorias mais feletas antigas, e modernas, conhe- cendo, que era neceffario affentar o eftylo : porque nao coftumao deizar a \\qjk> dos Hvros muitas horas de exereicio, haviao levado a inclinacao a equivocos, e termos poeticos, frafe de que os primeiros annos mais continuamente fe alimentarao, e de que me fez apartar o mais que me foi poflivel a doutrina dos meftres da historia, e a dos preceitos historicos de IMafcarde Italiano, e de padre Mene Francez, que nefta 140 PORTUGUESE nefta idade com grande elegancia fe empregarao nefte afTumpto. Nos ultimos dous annos padeci mayor trabalho : porque tocandome nelles a occupa- cao de Vedor da Fazenda da Reparticao da India, que coftuma deixar poucas boras livres, as que me fkavao de defcanco, empregava nefte exercicio, con- hecendo, que paiTar d.ia fern lancar linba, he perder do tempo a melhor ioya, que ategora nao tern ha- vido milagreque foffe poderofo para reftauralla. Humo das mayores fatisfacoens que tenho alean- cado nefte meu emprego, be imprimirfe quafi jun- tamente com efle livro, os que com tanto Jouvor proprio, acorn tanta honra da nacao Portugueza ef- creveo o moderno Livio Manoel de Faria e Souza ; e como en todos chegao os fucceflbs, que refere nas quatro partes do mundo, da fundacao de Por- tugal ate o anno de 1640, flea com a minha hifto- ria enflada a de Portugal ate a paz celebrada entre efta coroa, e de Caftella, que be o affumpto que comprehendem eftes dous volumes. Agora, leytor, ou pio, ou malevolo, ou definter- eflado, he necefiario affiar o difcurfo, e eu feguro que muito menos ha de cuftar aos leytores arguir, do que a mim me tern cuftado o efcrever. E fe al- guma fatisfacao fe entender que mereco pelo meu trabalho, nao quero mayor recompenfa que o re- conhecimento, de que ategora nao fahio ao mundo hiftoria mais verdadeira: pois fern effeicao, odio, efpeianca, ou temor, nao perdoei a requifito algum neceflario para a biitoria, que me -ficafie por efcre- ver, parecendome fo efcuzado relatar defeitos par- ticulares, tendo por opiniao, que os que fe arroja<- rao adefcobrillosmerecemmais o titulode faty'ricos que de hilloriadores, exceptuando aquelles que re- ierirao vicios, de que depende a narracao da fua hi- ftoria, como be neceffario que me aconteca quando chegar a referir os fuccefibs da vida del Rey D. Affonfo VI. Nao GRAMM A R. Hi 'Nao podia Tito Livio eximirfe de contar os ex- cefifos de Tarquino, originando fe da fua laciva a mudanca de Reys a Republica no Imperio Romano ; mas pudera Quinto Curcio encobrir os vicios de Alexandre Magno, que nao Ihe embaracaraoas vic- torias da Alia. Precifo foi a Joao de Mariana relatar a cegueira de Henrique ViII.de Inglaterra na in- digna affeicao de Anna Bolena. Mas pudera Hen- rique Caterino de Avila diffimular os diverti- mentos de Henrique III. de Franca, que nao per- tencerao ao governo da fua monarquia. Faminiano Eftrada os defconcertos de Chapirn Vitello, e o Cardeal Bentivoglio nas fuas memorias hiftoricas os vicios de alguns Cardeaes do facro collegio, eoutros muitos que ufarao defta indigna liberdade. Deico- briremfe os defeitos que nao prejudicarao a inter- efles publicos, muitas vezes fervem aos leytores mais de eftimulo, que de emenda, ufando dos exempla- res para defculpa dos vicios que pretendem feguir, e he Deos verdadeira teftimunha de que o meu prin- cipal intento, he atalhar todos os que podem offen- der a fua divina mageiiade, e fer prejudiciaes a glo- ria defta monatquia. Ao muito poderofo e Chriftianiflimo Principe el Rey Dom Joao 110JJ0 fenhor, dejie no me o terceiro de Portugal, Pro logo de Joao de Barros, em as primeiras quatro Decadas da fua Afia. TOD AS las coufas, muito poderofo Rey e fenhor noflb, tern tanto amor a confervacao de feu proprio fer, que quanto lhe he pofsivel, trabalhao em feu mod'o por fe fazerem perpetuas. As naturaes em que fomente obra a natureza, e nao a induftria hu- mana, cadahuma delias em ti mefma tem huma virtu- de generaliva, que quando devinamente fao defpof- tas, ainda que periguem em sua corrupcao : e(Ta mefma 142 PORTUGUESE mefma natureza as torna renovar em novo Fer, com que ficao vivas e confervadas em fua propria ef- pecie. E as outras coufas que nao fao obras da na- tureza, mas feitos e a£tos humanos, eftas porque nao tinhao virtude animada de gerar outras femel- hantes a fi, e por a brevidade da vida do homem, acabavao com feu autor: os mefmos homens por confervar feu nome em a memoria dellas, buscarao •hum divino artificio, que reprefentade em futuro, o que elles obravao em prefente. O qual artificio, pero que a inven^ao delle fe de a diverfos autores : mais parece por Deos rnfpirado, que inventado por algum humano entendimento. E que bem como lhe aprouve que mediante o padar, lingua, dentes, e beicos, hum refpiro de ar movida dos bofes cau- fado de huma potencia, a que os Latinos chamao affatus, fe formaffe em palavras fignificativas, para que os ouvidos feu natural objecto, reprefentaffem ao intendimento diverfos fignificados e conceptos, fegundo a difpoficao dellas: affi quiz que mediante os chara£teres das letras, de que ufainos, difpoftas na ordem fignificaiiva da valia que cada nacao deu ao feu alfabeto, a vifta obje£to receptivo deftes cha- ra£teres, mediante elles, formaffe a effencia das cou- fas, e os racionaes conceptos, ao modo de como a fala em feu officio os denuncia. E ainda quiz que efto modo de elocucao artificial de letras, por bene- fkio de perpetuidade precedeffe ao natural da fala. Porquo efta, fendo animada, nao tern mais vida que o inftante de fua pronunciacao, e paffa a femelhanca do tempo, que nao tern regreffo : e as letras fendo buns chara£teres mortos, e nao animados, conthem em fi efpirito devida, pois a dao acerca de nos a todas las coufas. Ca ellas sao buns elementos, que lhe dao affiftencia : a as fazem paflar em futuro com fua mul- tiplicacao de annos em annos, por modo mais excel- 1'ente, do que faz a natureza. Pois vemos que efta natureza para gerar alguma coufa, corrompe e altera os elementos, de que he compofta, e as letras fendo elementos/ GRAMMAR. MS tlementos, de que fe compoem e forma a fignifica" cao das coufas, nem o entendimento (pofto que feja pafsivo na intelligencia dellas pelo modo de como vem a elle :) mas vaofe multiplicando na parte me- morativa por ufo de frequentacao, tao efpiritual em habit o de perpetuidade, que por meyo dellas no fim do mundo, tao prefentes ferao aquelles que entao forem, noffas pefsoas, feitos, e dittos ; como hoje por efta cuflodia literal, be vivo o quefezerao e dif- feramos primeiros, que forao no principio delle. E porque o fru&o defies a£tos humanos, he mui dif- ferente do fru£to natural, que fe produze da femente das coufas, por eile natural fe nacer no mefmo ho- mem, para cujo ufo todas forao criadas, e o fruclo das obras delles he eterno, poisprocede do entendi- mento e vontade, onde fe fabricao e aceptao todas, que por ferem partes efpirituaes, as fazem eternas : ficadaqui a cadahum de noshuma natural e juflaobri- gacao, que affi devemos fer diiigentes e folicitos em guard ar em futuro noifas obras, para com ellas apro- veitarmos em bom exemplo, como protos e con- flantes na operacao prefente dellas, pera cornmum e temporal proveito de nolfos naturaes. E vendo eu que nefla diligencia de encomendar as coufas a cuflodia das letras (confervadoras de todalas obras) a nacao Portugueza he tao defcuidada de fi, quao pronta e diligente em os feitos que Ihe competent por milicia, e que mais fe preza de fazer, que dizer ; quiz nefta parte, ufar ante do officio de eftrangeiro, que da condicao de natural ; defpoendome a efere- ver o que elles fezerlo do defcobrimento e conquifia do Oriente, por fe nao perderem da memoria dos ho- mens, que vierem defpois de nos, tao gloriofos feitos, como vemos ferem perdidos de voffos progenitores, mayoresem louvor do que lemos em suas chronica;* (fegundo moiixao alguns fragmentos de particulars efcripturas). E na acepta^o defte trabalbo e perigo a que me defpues, antes querc fer tido por tao ousado como foi o derradeiro dos trinta e tantos efcriptores que efcreverao a paffagem e expedicao que Alexan- dre 144 PORTUGUESE dre fez em Aila, o qual temeo pouco o que delle podiao dizer, tendo tantos ante si : que imitar o defcuido de muitos, a quern efte meu trabalho por officio e profissao competia. Fois havendo cento e vinte annos (porque de tantos trafta efta ef- criptura) que voffas armas e padroes de vi£t6riaS tern tornado pofle, nao fomente de toda a terra maritima de A'frica e Afia, mas ainda de outros mayores mundos, do que Alexandre lamentava, por nao ter noticia delles : nao houve alguem que fe an* tremeterTe a fer primeiro nefte meu trabalho, fo- mente Gomez Eanes de Zurara Chronifta mor defies reynos em as coulas do tempo do Infante Dom Hen- rique (do qual nos confefsamos tomar a mayor parte dos feus fundamentos, por nao roubar o feu a cuio he.) No cometer do qual trabalho, vendo eu a mageftade e grandeza da obra, nao fui tao atrevido que logo como ifto defejei, pufeffe maos a ella ; antes tomci por cautella defte cometimento, uzar do modo que tern os architectures. Os quaes primeiro que ponhao mao na obra a tracao e debuxao, e de fi aprefentao eftes deliniamentos de fua imaginacao, ao fenhor de cujo ha de fer o edificio. Porque ella materia, de que eu queria tractar, era dos trium- phos defte reyno, dos quaes nao fe podia falar fern licenca do autor delles, que, naquelle tempo defte meu propofito era el Rey voffo padre de gloriofa memoria : eftando fua Alteza em Evora o anno de quinhentos e vinte, Ihe aprofentei hum debuxo feito em nome de voffa Alteza, porque com efte titulo ante ella fofie acepto. O qual debuxo nao era al- guma vatrachomiomachia, guerra de raas e ratos, como fez Homero por exercitar feu engenho, ante que efcrevefle a guerra dos Gregos e Troyanos : mas foi huma pintura metaphorica de exercitos, e vitorias humanas, nefta figura racional do Empera- dor Clarimundo, titulo da traca (conforme a idadc que eu entao tinha) a fimde aparar o eftilo de min- ha poilibilidade pera efta voffa Afia. A qual pin- tura, GRAMMAR. lis tura, por fer em nome de voffa Alteza, affi conten- tou a el rey voflb padre, defpois que foube fer ima- gem defta que ora tracto, que logo me pagou meu trabalho : dizendo aver dias que defejava eftas cousas das partes do oriente ferem pofias em efcriptura, mas que nunca achara peffoa de que o confiaffe, que fe me eu atrevia a efta obra, (como o debuxo mof- trava) o meu trabalho nao seria ante elle perdido. Por a qual confiar^a Ihe beijei a mao pefante pef- foas que hoje fao vivas : por a pratica fer hum pou- co alta lendolhe e hum ou dous capitulos da mof- tra e debuxo. E e fraud o pero abrir os aiiceces defle grande edificio, com o fervor da idade e favor das palavras de confian^a que fe de mi tinha : aprouve a Deos levar a el Rey voffo padre aquelle celeflial affento, que fe da aos Catholicos e Chriftianiffirnos Principes, com que flquei fufpenfo deila empreza. Socedendotambem logo proverme voffa Alteza dos officios de thefoureiro da cafa de India e Mina, e defpois de feitor das mefmas cafas, carregos que com. seu pezo fazem acuruaravida, poislevaotodolosdias deila, e com a occupacao e negocio de suas armadas e commercios,afogao e cattivao todo liberal engenho. Mas parece que affi eilava ordenado de cima, que nao fomente me.coub.effe por forte da vida, os tra~ balhos de feitorizar os commercios de Africa e Afia : mas ainda efcrevor os feitos, que voffos vaffalos na milicia e conquifta dellas fezerao. Porque correndo o tempo, e achando eu entre algumas cartas que el Rey voffo padre antes daminha offerta, tinha escripto a Dom Fracifco d'Almeida, e a Affonfo d'Albo- querque, que conquiftarao e governarao a India, encomendandolhe que miudamente Ihe efcreveffem as coufas e feitos daquellas partes, com tencao de as mandar por em efcripto, e que voffa Alteza com a mefma tencao no anno de quinhentos e trinta e hum, tambem o efcreveo aNuno d'Acunha, que naquelle tempo a governava, mandandolhe fobre- fto regimentos feitos por Lourenco de Caceres, a * K quem 146 PORTUGUESE quern tinha encomendado a efcriptura deftas partes, o que nao houve effeito, e feria por ventura por elle falecer : determine!, por fe nao dilatar efte dezejo que voffa Alteza tinha, e eu pagar a confianca que el Rey voffo padre de mim teve, repartir o tempo da vida, dando os dias ao officio, e parte das noites a efta efcritura da voffa Afia : e affi compri com o regi- mento do officio, e com o dezejo que fempre tive defta empreza. E como os homens pela mayor parte sao mais prontos em dar de fi fruclos volun- taries, que os encomendados, imitando nifto a terra sua madre, a qual he mais viva em dar as fementes que nella jazem por natureza, que as que lhe en- comendamos por agricultura: parece que me obri- gou ella a que patrizaffe, e que por diligencia pre- valeceffe mais em mim a natureza que della tenho, que quanto outros tern reeebido por obriga^o de officio, profiflao de vida, e agricultura de benefi- ces. Pois nao tendo eu outra coufa mais viva para tomar efta empreza, que hum zelo da gloria que fe deve a voffas armas, e fama a meus naturaes, que militando nellas, verterao feu fangue e vida : fui o primeiro que brotei efte fruclo de efcriptura defta voffa Afia, fe he licito, por fer de arvore agrefte, ruftica, e nao agricultada, poder merecer efte nome de fruclo ante voffa real mageftade. Pro/ogo na Chronica del Ret Dom Emanuel, dirigidapor Damiao de Goes ao feremjjimo Principe Dom Hen- rique, Infante de Portugal. Muitos, e graves authores nos principios de fuas chronicas trabalaram em louvar na hiftoria, da qual rudo o que dixeram foi fempre muito menos do que fe devia dizer, porque affi como ella he infi- nita, affi feus louvores nao tern flm, nem termo a que se poffam reduzir, e pois tudo o trattado nefta parte, he quaii nada em compar^am do que deve fer, voitarei daqui a vela, para por a proa nefta : na GRAMMAR. 147 ha qual por 9erto nao ousara, nem devera de tocar, fe me nao fora man dado por V. A. por fer de quali- dade, que depois dalgumas pessoas a terem come^a- da el Rei dom Joam vosso irmao que fancta gloria haja, lhes mandou tomar o que ja tinhao efcrito* para se acabar por outros, de cujas habilidades tinha maior opiniao, em maos dos quaes flcou atte feu fa- le9imento. E considerando V. A. que pois estas pessoas, de que fe tanto sperava^ nam tinham feito em tempo de trinta e sette annos, que ha que el Rei Dom Emanuel vofTo pay fale^eo, coufa que re- fpondeffe ao merecimento de tal neg^io, fern fe lembrar de quao fraco eu devo fer para hum taman- ho pefo, me mandou nefte anno do Senhor de M.D.LVIII. que daquillo em que muitos, como em coufa defefperada, fe nam atreverao por a mao* tomafle eu o cuidado^ o que fiz com maior oufa- dia do que a meu fraco juizo convinha, movido com tudo por fos dous refpeitos, o hum por eu fer fectura do dito fenhor Rei vofTo pai, criado em fua cafa, e em feu fervico, desde idade de nove annos, o outro por me parecer que fe nam movera V. A. a me mandar coufa em que confiftiam todolos feitos> e louvores, defte feliciffimo rei, e daquelles que o ferviram na guerra, e na paz, fenam por confiar de mi o mais fubftancial que no efcrever das chronicas fe requere, que he com verdade dar a cadahum o louvor ou reprehenfam que mere9e. Pelas quaes razoes matrevi a tomar efle trabalho, o qual tal qual he, me pare9eo que nao devia, nem era bem que dedicafle fe nam a V. A. como a pr^ipal author de la fama, e gloria del Rei feu pai fairem em luz, e nam perecer a lembran9a das coufas notaveis que aconte9eram aos Portugueses por todo o difcurfo de feu regnado. * K 2 Di 148 . PORT U'G UESE De Francifco Rodriguez Lobo no feu Pajior Peregrine. Chegarao as ferranas ao pe da fonte com efra alegria, e faudarao ao peregrino, que com inveja da, quella liberdade as eftava olhando, e em quanto (lavando os cantaros) com graciofas perguntas im- portunarao a fonte, o velho pegureiro fe veyo afien- tar junto deile, e perguntandolhe donde era, e o que alii bufcava, vierao a travar pratica, da qual Lereno entendeo que o ferrano era homem fingelo, e tao de vidro, que fe lhe via pello rofto o cora^o, e pellor amor com que eUe tratava a gente daquella condicao, lhe foi de hum lanco em outro, pergun- tando da vida, e do cuidado que tinha na ferra, pois naquella companhia o via tarn contente, ao que o velho refpondeo defla maneira : ha mais de feflenta annos que naci detraz daquelle penedo que daqut apparece no alta da ferra, e de entao ate agora, nem vi mais terra que a que delle fe defcobre, nem defe- jei outra, de quantas ouvi gabar a meus naturaes, nunca tive de meu outro bem mayor, que nao de- feiar os alheos, nem outro mal que me defle mais cuidad, que as occafioens que o tempo me offere- ceo de poder pofluir o que os homens eflimao, e fentem tanto perder, como sao enganos ; fou tao pobre do que a fortuna reparte, que cada hora que me quifer tomar conta de tantos annos, lhe nao fi- carei devendo, nem hum defejo ; vivo de guardar gado doutros donos, fou fiel em o tratar, diligente no paflo, e remedio delle, rico com a parte que me cabe da fua laa, e do feu leite, porque della me vifto, e delle me fuftento, nem quando os frutos sao poucos me laftimo, nem quando as novidades sao mayores me alvoroco : contentame o bem, nao me c.ocobra o mal ; tenho huma cabana em que vivo, feita por minha propria mao das arvores deftas bren- has, nao acharas dentro coufa que deva direitos a vaidade, todos sao inftrumentos neceffarios ao meu officio GRA MM A R. 149 officio de guardador, e fe alguma eoufa fobeja, fera das que ainda sao mais importantes para a vida, da qui me alevanto contente, e aqui me recolho de- fcancado, porque nem aeordo com os penfa- mentos na ventura, nem adormeco com elles re- parados em bens que en ; ganao, e em males que os homens efcolhem de feu grado : de noite qualquer eftreila que vejo, be a minha, porque todas favo- recem o meu eilado, de dia fern pre o fol me ap- parece de hua cor, porque o vejo com os oinos livres. Teuho efle inftrumento, a cujo fom canto, quando he bem me alegro, porque canto para me alegrar, e quando pello contrario me nao peza muito, porque o nao fa 90 por alegrar outrem, quando ha frio, e neve na ferra, tambem ba Jenha neftes montes, e fogo nelias pedras com que me deffendo, quando a calma he grande, com o abrigo defcas arvores, e a vefinbanga das fontes me recreo, affim sao os meus manjares, como be a minha vida, nem ella me pede os que Ihe facio clano, nem eu os tenbo, o men veflido be sempre defta cor, porque em qualquer coufa (ainda de menos conta) he a xnudanca perigofa. O mayor trabalho que- tenbo, he os pailores com que trato,, porque cada bum tern huma vontade, e bum entendimento, e eu me bei de fervir fo do meu para com todos ; porem de tal maneira ufo delle, que me nao da. do fuceffo que pode acontecer ; ao avarento nao Ihe p.e9o nada nem Ihe aconfelho que de a outrem, nem Ihe louvo o nao dar nada a ninguem, e affim nem Ihe rain to, nem o molefto. Ao foberbo, nem me fa90 grande por nao ficar com elle era contenda, nem aos outros pequenos, porque com elles fe nao alevante mais. - Ao ingrato, ou o nao firvo, porque me nao magoe, pu quando o sirva, lembrome que a fua ma natureza nao pode tirar o pre90 da obra, que de fi he boa. Ao fallador, calome : ao calado, defcubrome com tento. Ao doudo, nao lbe atalho a furia : ao nefcio, na5 trabalho por lbe dar razao ; ao pobre nao lbe devo; *K3 ao 150 PORTUGUESE ao rico nao lhe pe90 ; ao vao nao o gabo, nem *, reprendo ; ao lifonjeiro nao o creo e defte modo com todos eftou bem, e nenhum me faz mal. Nao digo verdades que amarguem, nam tenho amizades que me profanem : nao adquiro Fazendas que outros me invejem, porque nefte tempo, das melhores tres coufas delle, nacem as mais danofas que ha no mun- do : da verdade odio, da converfacao defprefo : da prcfperidade inveja ; fou qual me ves, e qual te eu digo, nao quero parecer outroV nem fer mais do que pareco : venho muitas vezes a efta fonte, que me pegou a fua condicao, falla verdade a todos, e com nenhum tern differen9a ; cuftumeime a eftas fuas agaos, que ainda que sao amargofas, sao sau- daveis, apagao pecouha, desfazem feiti90s, e valem contra mordiduras de bicha. Senifto que me ouvifte achas alguma coufa que te contente, e queres hir comi^o, pois ja he tarde, te hofpedarei da minha cabana, na qua] podes entrar sem temor, dormir fern perigo, e fahir fern faudade ; comeras de ieite, ouviras dos contos, e partiras quando quizeres. Em quanto o velho pegureiro Jfto dizia, eilava o paftor lancando contas a fua vida, com grande inveja do que aquelle lhe contava da fua, e no ca- bo lhe refpondeo com hum fufpiro. Ah ditofo fer- rano, as eftrellas te confervem nefte eflado, para que nunca conhecas a differenca delle : tu fo vives, tu so deves ao ceo eftar izento das leis da ventura, mais he para invejar tua pobreza, que a mayor vai- dade do mundo, mais para eilimar a tua cabana, que os mais luflrofos edificios delle, mais para fe dezejar a tua liberdade, que os mandos e fenhorios, com que os homens fe cativao, e engrandecem, e mais para fe bufcar a tua companhia, que o mayor thefouro, eu nao quero mais della por agora, que partirme chorando pello que te ouvi. A efte tem- po fe partiao ja as ferranas, que o chamarao, elle fe defpedio do peregrino, dandolhe hum pequeno vafo de cortica que ievafie daquella agoa, e tocando a fua rabeca GRAMMAR. * 151 rabeca fe apartou, e o paftor ficou em batalha com males proprios, que a vifta dos bens alheos tomarao for9a contra hum fujeito, que elles ja tinhao de todo defbaratado. Nao pareceo a Lereno o Lugar acommodado para paffar nelle a noite, e quafi arrependido de nao aceitar o ofJerecimento do ferrano, tomou outro caminho que hia mais pella fralda da ferra, imaginan- do que perto averia alguma aldea, em que fe reco- Ihefe, e andahdo por elle o que ficava do dia, Jhe veyo a faltar na entrada de hum valle, que, por hu- ma parte eftava cheo de arvores altas, e efpeffas, que apertadas de dous outeiros que as aftbmbravao, e com a claridade das eftrellas que por entre os ra- mos as feria, fe moviao vagarofamente fobre huma lagoa, feita de hum ribeiro que decia do monte, na qual a fombra e .movimento dos ramos, a luz que por entre elleslhe vinha mprTraiido o efcuro das a- goas, e alguns arrebatados faltos das roucas fans, fa- zendo hum temerofo ecco nos ouvidos, e na vifta, hum medroib payor, com trifteza, e receo conftran- giao o coracao do defterrado paftor. E vendo que dalli para diante Ihe ficava outra vez o caminho da ferra, fe abrigou a hum tronco que tinha as coftas no ribeiro, que com o murmuro da agoa Ihe podia ajudar a grangear o fono,e.aI!i lancado entre as her- vas, e os ramos nao podendo adormec.er, cantava defta maneira. Entre eftes arvores trifles Que a fombra da noite cobre E com manfo movimento Trifles penfamentos movera, Ao longo defte ribeiro Que por entre as pedras corre Fazendo hum doce rugido Que o mudo filencio rompe, * K 4 Da~ 152 PORTUGUESE Debaixo defte arvoredo Que dos carregados montes Tomando a cor, vai perdendo Vifta, graga, fornbra, e cores. Perguntar quero a meus males Pols fei que os males refpondem Se exprimentei quanto cuftao Que me digao quanto podem. Se podem matar, que efperao ? Se dar vida, qual efcolhem ? Pois a que entre elles padego He vida que fempre morre. Mil annos ha que a fuftento E inda que mil annos conte He porque em pezares crecem Como para os goflos fogem. Conjurarao fe contra ell a Dous cegos que eftao conformes Contra a razao, e o dezejo, Que he hum amor, outro a forte. Mandarao me defterrado, E eu vou fern faber aonde, Se fei que ambos vao comigo E que fe eu ando elles correm> Males, fe aveis de acabarme, Para que fao tantos golpes ? Que o menor deiles pedia Hum fofrimento de bronze ? Contra mi vos, e a ventura E eu fern outros valedores, Mais que fo meus penfamentos Para que me fago forte ? Se GRAMMAR. 153 Se quereis viver comigo, Porque temeis voffa morte? Que os males nao durao mais, Que em quanto hum triste os efconde. Defcubrime algum reme'dio De efperancas, que eflas podem Suitentarme, e fuftentarvos Nefte valle, e noutros montes. Porque inda que fam veneno Que vai matando de lonje, Crioufe com elle a vida Que Ihe tern pofto outro nome. Que he iflo ! nao refpondeis ? Mas outrem por vos refponde, Que aos males pedir razao He pedir firmeza a forte. Do Camoens, EMvas linda Inez porta em forTego, De teus annos colhendo o doce fruto, Naquelle engano da alma, ledo, e cego, Que a fortuna nao deixa durar muito : Nos faudofos campos do mondego, De teus formofos olhos nunca enxuto, Aos montes enfinando, e as ervinhas. O nome, que no peito efcrito tinhas. Do teu principe alii te refpondiao As lembrancas, que no alma lhe moravao, Que fempre ante feus olhos te traziao : Quando dos teus fermofos fe apartavao : De noite em doces fonhos, que mentiao, De dia em penfamentos, que voavao : E quanto em fim cuidava, e quanto via, Erao tudo memorias da alegria. D*outras 154 PORTUGUESE D'outras bellas fenhoras, princezas, Os dezejados talamos engeita, Que tudo em fira, tu puro amor defprezas, Quando hum gefto, fuave te fugeita : Vendo eftas namoradas eftranhezas, O velho pay fefudo, que refpeita, O murmurar do povo e fantasia. Do filhoj que cafarfe na queria. Tirar Inez ao mundo determina, Por lhe tirar o filho, que tern prefo, Crendo co fangue fo da morte indina, Matar do firme amor o fogo acefo : Que furor confentio, que a efpada fina, Que pode fuftentar o graride pefo Do furor Mauro, foffe I e van tad a, Contra huma fraca dama delicada ? Traziao a os borriferos algozes Ante o Rey, ja movido a piedade, Mas o povo com falfas, e ferozes Razoens, a morte crua o perfuade. Ella com triftes e piedofas voz zs 9 Sahidas fo de magoa e faudade Do feu Principe e filhos que deixava, Que mais que a propria morte a magoava. Para o ceo criftalino levantando Com lagrimas os olhos piedofos, Os olhos, porque as maos lhe eflava atando Hum dos duros miniftros rigurofos : E depois nos meninos atentando, Que tao queridos tinha, e tao mimofos^ Cuja orfandade como mai temia, Para o avo cruel afri dizia. Se ja nas brutas feras, cuja mente Natura fez cruel de nafcimento ; E nas aves agreftes, que fomente Nas rapinas aerias tem o intento, Com pequenas crian9as vio a gente* Terem piedofo fentimento, Como GRAMMAR. 155 Como eoa may de Nino ja moftrarao, E cos Irmaos, que Roma edificarao. O tu que tens de humano o gefto, e peito, Se de humano he matar huma donzella Fraca, e fern forca fo por ter fugeito O coracao, a quern foube vencella A eftas criancinhas tern refpeito Pois o nao tens a morte efcura della, Movate a piedade fua, e minha, Pois te nao move a culpa, que nao titiha. E fe vencendo a Maura refiftencia 3 A morte fabes dar com fogo, e ferro, Sabe tambem dar vida com clemencia, A quern para perdeIJa nao fez erro : Mas fe te afli merece efta innocencia, Poemme em perpetuo e mifero defterro, Na Scythia fria, ou la na Libia ardente, Onde em ]agrimas viva eternamente. Poemme onde fe ufe toda a feridade, Entre leoens, tigres, e verei Se nelles achar poffo a piedade, Que entre peitos riumanos nao'achei; Alii co amor intrinfeco, e vontade, NaqueJle por quern morro, criarei Eftas reliquias fuas, que a qui vifte, Que refrigerio fejao da mai trifle. Queria perdoar Ihe o rey benino, Movido das palavras, que o magoao, Mas o pertinaz povo, e feu defino, (Que defta forte o quiz) lhe nao perdoao : Arrancao das efpadas de 390 fino, Os que por bom tal feko alii pregoao, Contra huma dama, os peitos carniceiros, Ferozes vos mostraes, e cavalleiros. Qual contra a linda moca Policena, Confola§ao extrema da may velha, Porque 156 PORTUGUESE Porque a fombra de Achiles a condena, Co ferro o duro Pirro fe aparelha : Mas ella os olhos, com que o ar ferena (Bern como paciente, e manfa ovelha) Na mifera may polios, que endoudece, Ao duro facrifi'cio fe orTerece. Taes contra Inez os brutos matadores, No collo de alabaftro, que foflinha As obras, co que amor matou de amores A 'quelle, que depois a fez rainba : As efpadas banbando, e as brancas Mores, Que ella dos olbos seus regadas tinha, Se incarnicavao fervidos, e irofos, No futu.ro caftigo nao cuidofos. Bern puderas, o fol, da vifta defies, Teus rayos apartar aquelle dia, Como da feva mefa de Thyeftes Quando os filhos por mao de Atreu comia: Vos o concavos valles que pudeftes, A voz extrema ouvir da boca fria, O nome do feu Pedro, que Ihe ouvilles, Por muito grande espaco repetiftes, Am* como e bonina, que cortada Antes de tempo foi, Candida, e bella, Sendo das maos lafcivas mal tratada, Da menina, que a trouxe na capella, O cbeiro traz perdido, e a cor murchada, Tal efta morta a pallida donzella, Secas do rofto as rofas, e perdida A branca, e viva cor, co a doce vida. As filhas do Mondego a morte efcura, Longo tempo cborando memorarao, E por memoria eterna em fonte pura, As lagrimas cboradas transform?rao : O nome lhe puzerao, que inda dura, Dos amores de Inez, que alii paffarao ; Vede, que frefca fonte rega as flores, Que lagrimas Jfao a egoa, e o nome amores. Da GRAMMAR. 157 Do Mefmo. Porem ja cincos foes erao paffados, Que dalli nos partiramos, coriando Os mares nunca de outrem navegados, Profperamente os ventos affoprando : Quando huma noite aftando defcuidados, Na cortadora proa vigiando, Huma nuve que os ares efcurece, Sobre noffas cabec,as apparece. Tarn temorafa vinha, e carregada, Que poz nos cora^oens hum grande medo, Bramindo o negro mar de longe brada, Como fe deffe"em vao nalgum rochedo : O poteftade, di'fle, fublimada, Que amea.90 divino, ou que fegredo, Efte clima, e efte mar nos aprefenta, Que mor coufa parece, que tormenta? Nao acabava, quando huma figura Se nos mostra no ar, robufta, e valida, De disforme, e grandiffima eftatura, O rofto carregado, a barba efquallida : Os olhos encovados, e a poftura Medonha, e ma, e a cor terrena, e pallida^ A boca negra, os dentes amarellos. Tarn grande era de membros, que bem poffo Certificarte, que efte era o fegundo, De Rhodes eftranhiflimo Coloftb, Que hum dos fete milagres foi do mundo: Cu to de voz nos falla horrendp, e grotto* Que pareceo fahir do mar profundo, Arrepiaofe as carnes, e o cabello, A mi, e a todos, fo de ouviloj e velo. Do 158 PORTUGUESE Do Costa. Logo o poldro de generofa cafta, Nos Campos anda mais alto, e foberbo, E poem a tempo as dobradieas pernas. E primeiro fe atreve ir o caminho, ' E ten tar os arrebatados rios, E arrerr^arfe ao mar nao conhecido ; Nem dos eflrondos vaos fe teme, e efpanta y O pefco90 tern alto e tern pequena A cab^a, e a barriga breve, e curta ; As codas tern muy gordas, e carnudas, E com as polpas o animofo peito Se moftra proporcionadamente gordo. Os mais fermofos sao caftanhos claros, E os que tern de cor verde-mar os olhos; A mais ma cor tern alvos, e meladosj O generofo nao fabe eftar quedo ; Se algumas armas derao fom de longe, As orelhas levanta, e abayxa, e treme Cos membros todos, e nas ventas volve Hum recolhido fogo, reprimindo-o : A coma tern efpelTa, a qual defcanca Sendo lan^ada no direito quarto; * Mas pellos lombos pafla a larga efpinha,, Rapando cava a terra, e grandemente A unha, que he de corno duro, foa. Da Sauddde. Quinta effencia da dor, noite temida, Em cuja fombra he monftro a claridade, Mortes, inftantes iiglos, que a vontade Com a pena do temor mede atrevida, De GRAMMAR. Dc bens perdidos Argos homicida, Felice pompa da infelicidade, Alma da pena, Trifle Saudade, Vivo morrer de huma defunta vida. Abrac,os cos tormentos/ que padec/) Por quern a mefma pena a gloria tenho Com vofco animo trifles penfamentos. A voffos males devo o que merec^ Que a pezar da ventura a tirar venho Da auzencia fe 3 da dor merecimentos. 159 FINIS T. C. Hansard, PRIXTER, Peterbarough-aurt , Fltet-street. 631 N -V Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 * x- O-. ^A v o - PreservationTechnologies A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive Cranberry Township, PA 16066 (724)779-2111 ,v -O v X * o. -/- s°'